HomeMy WebLinkAboutBID - 5929 CSU TRANSIT CENTER (2)Coover-Clark & Associates, P.C.
Architects -4 Planners 4 Landscape,4 Interiors
455 Sherman, Suite 205
Denver, Colorado 80203
Phone:(303) 783-0040
Fax:(303) 783-0060
E-Mail: webmail@coover-clark.com
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 1 S
SECTION 16
APPENDIX
CITY OF FORT COLLINS AND
COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
TRANSIT CENTER
City of Fort Collins
JUKE 2005
SET NO.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. The manufacturer's material or equipment listed in the schedule or identified by name on the
drawings are the types to be provided for the establishment of size, capacity, grade and
quality. If alternates are used in lieu of the scheduled names, the cost of any changes in
construction required by their use shall be bome by Contractor.
C. All equipment shall conform to the State and/or Local Energy Conservation Standards.
D. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when submitted
by and stamped by the Contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers
directly to the Architect will not be processed unless prior written approval is obtained by the
Contractor.
E. Before starting Work, prepare and submit to the Architect all shop drawings and descriptive
equipment data required for the project. Unless each item is identified with specification
section and sufficient data to identify its compliance with the specifications and drawings, the
item will be returned without action or "Revise and Resubmit". Continue to submit shop
drawings after each Engineer's action, until a "Reviewed" action is received. The Contractor
shall submit the total number of sets as called for in Division 1 to the Architect for final
distribution. Submittals shall include the following specified materials and, in addition, any
materials not listed below but which are specified in the individual sections of Division 15
which follow.
Pipe Markers
Sanitary and storm drainage piping, fittings and joining materials
Water treatment equipment, including water softeners
Plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings and rough -in dimensions, cleanouts and drains
Domestic water piping, fittings and joining materials
Domestic water heaters and domestic hot water generators
Water hammer arresters
Medical gas equipment, piping, fittings and joining materials
Process piping
Valves, including pressure relief and pressure regulating
Pumps
Tanks, including expansion and fuel storage
Sprinkler equipment
Standpipe and fire hose equipment
Thermometers and pressure gauges
Boilers, burners, trim and feed equipment
Piping specialties, including hot water and steam
Supports, anchors and seals
Expansion compensators
Flexible pipe connectors
Water flow meters
Vibration isolators
Insulation, including plastic pipe fitting insulation covers and manufacturer's installation
instructions
Heat exchangers
Terminal heat transfer units
Air conditioning equipment and specialties
Fans, ductwork, dampers, louvers, grilles, registers and diffusers
Automatic control systems
15010-7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
4. Concrete inserts, top -beam C-clamps, side beam or channel clamps or center beam
clamps for building attachments.
5. Concrete inserts and other type hangers penetrating into or through structural
members shall be submitted (by the Fire Protection Contractor) to, and have the
approval of, the Structural Engineer contracted for this project.
6. Powder driven studs shall not be allowed.
7. Hangers (which are acceptable for Project) and hanger spacing shall be in accordance
with NFPA-13.
2.6 PIPE AND FITTINGS (UNDERGROUND)
A. Underground pipe shall be ductile iron, thickness Class 52 unless specified otherwise by local
authorities or ANSUAW WA C 150/A21.50-81; 350 PSI pressure rating; tar coated outside,
cement mortar lined inside in accordance with ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4-80. Full lengths
of pipe shall be utilized to the greatest extent possible.
B. Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be 250 PSI pressure rating in accordance with
ANSUAWWA C110-77, tar coated outside and cement lined inside in accordance with
ANSUAWWA C I 04/A21.4-80.
C. Joints shall be push -on or mechanical type as per ANSUAWWA CI I I/A21.11-80.
2.7 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS (INSIDE BUILDING)
A. General: Refer to Part 3 Article "Pipe Applications" for identification of systems where the
below specified pipe and fitting materials are used.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A795 or A135, Schedule 40 or Schedule 10, U.S. manufacture,
Black steel pipe, plain ends.
C. American Tube Company "Dyna-Thread40" and "Dyna-Flow" and Allied Tube and Conduit
Corporation "Super Flo' are acceptable to Schedule 40 pipe. Installation shall be per
manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Schedule 5 pipe shall not be allowed.
E. The Corrosion Resistance Ratio of the pipe shall be 1.00 or greater. Documentation shall be
presented with product submittal.
F. Schedule 10 pipe shall only be allowed for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger.
G. Provide galvanized, Schedule 40, piping system for preaction system.
H. Flexible Stainless Steel Hose Branch Line: Use only for connection to individual sprinkler
head, shall be all welded construction, Factory Mutual Approved, U.L. Listed, 300 psig rated.
Each hose shall be factory leak tested. Device shall comply with 2002 NFPA 13 Guidelines.
2.8 FITTINGS (INSIDE BUILDING)
A. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125 standard pattern, for threaded joints.
Threads shall conform to ANSI B 1.20.1.
15300 - 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 300, standard pattern, for threaded
joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B 1.20.1. Install steel pipe with threaded joints and
fittings for 2-inch and smaller and where shown on drawings.
C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.
D. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47
Grade 32510 malleable iron; or ASTM A53, Type F or Types E or S.
E. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic
rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure -responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin,
locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll -grooved pipe and fittings. Grooved mechanical
couplings including gaskets used on dry -pipe systems shall be listed for dry -pipe service.
F. Grooved Mechanical Fittings and Couplings for the entire fire protection system shall be of
the same manufacturer as submitted in shop drawing equipment review.
G. Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 250; raised ground face, bolt spot faced.
H. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 300; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
I. Plain end, hooker type, or push -on fittings or couplings shall not be allowed.
Bushings and reducing couplings shall not be allowed.
K. UL listed and Factory Mutual approved segmentally welded fittings are acceptable. Friction
loss and flow data shall accompany hydraulic calculations.
2.9 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section 11, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe
being welded.
B. Gasket Materials: Thickness, materials and type suitable for fluid or gas to be handled, and
design temperatures and pressures.
2.10 GENERAL DUTY VALVES
A. Gate Valves - 2-Inch and Smaller: Body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water
working pressure — non -shock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising
stem, screw -in bonnet, and malleable iron handwheel. Valves shall be capable of being
repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.
B. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 hich and Larger: Iron body; bronze mounted, 175 pound cold water
working pressure — non -shock. Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw and yoke,
rising stem; flanged bonnet, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B;
replaceable bronze wedge facing rings; flanged ends; and a packing assembly consisting of a
cast iron gland flange, brass gland, packing, bonnet, and bronze bonnet bushing. Valves shall
be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.
15300 - 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Butterfly Valves: 2-1/2 Inch to 8-inch shall be listed to 175 PSI with optional internal tamper
switch. Body shall be ductile iron with a corrosion resistant coating. Seat shall be field
replaceable without the use of special tools. The valve shall be provided with stem bushings
to isolate the stem from the stem journal. The valve body shall be machined with a retaining
lip for positive retention of the seat to provide drip tight shutoff at full rated differential
pressure with the downstream piping removed.
D. Ball Valves: 1-1/2 Inch and smaller shall be threaded, forged brass construction, with teflon
seats and blow out proof stem.
E. Ball Valves: 2-Inch to 3-inch shall be listed to 300 PSI with optional internal tamper switch.
Body shall be ductile iron with corrosion resistant coating. Ball shall be 316 stainless steel.
Swing Check Valves: MSS SP-71; Class 175, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to
ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze
disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains
in the line.
2.11 DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY (DUCTILE IRON)
A. All ductile iron body with two (2) independently operated spring loaded check valves. Each
check valve shall provide a positive drip tight closure against the reverse flow of water caused
by backsiphonage or backpressure. Check valve assembly shall be of 300 series stainless steel
or ductile iron construction with EPDM or silicone rubber elastomer discs. Assembly shall be
furnished with nickel -plated bronze or stainless steel test cocks and two (2), drip tight shut off
valves. Shut off valves shall be UL/FM Outside Stem and Yoke (OS&Y) gate valves or
UL/FM gear operated butterfly valves with tamper switches and positive indication of closure.
Assembly to have approval of National Sanitary Foundation, U.S.C. Foundation for Cross
Connection Control, Underwriter's Laboratories, State and or Local Authorities.
2.12 DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY (STAINLESS STEEL)
A. All 300 series stainless steel body with two (2) independently operated spring loaded check
valves. Each check valve shall provide a positive drip tight closure against the reverse flow of
water caused by backsiphonage or backpressure. Check valve assembly shall be of stainless
steel construction with EPDM elastomer discs. Assembly shall be famished with nickel -
plated bronze or stainless steel test cocks and two (2), drip tight shut off valves. Shut off
valves shall be UL/FM Outside Stem and Yoke (OS&Y) gate valves [or UL/FM gear operated
butterfly valves with tamper switches and positive indication of closure]. Assembly to have
approval ofNational Sanitary Foundation, U.S.C. Foundation for Cross Connection Control,
Underwriter's Laboratories, State and or Local Authorities.
2.13 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Emergency Pull Box: Metal enclosure, labeled with "Manual Emergency Station" and
operating instructions, complete with union, 1/2-inch pipe nipple and bronze ball valve. The
enclosure cover shall be held closed by a breakable strut, which prevents accidental opening
and must be replaced after each opening.
15300 -10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.14 BASIC METERS AND GAUGES
A. General: Provide meters and gauges complying with Division 15 Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods section "Meters and Gauges", in accordance with the following listing:
1. Pressure gauges, 0-250 PSI range.
2.15 ALARM DEVICE AND FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
A. General: Types and sizes shall mate and match piping and equipment connections. Provide
fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes
and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water Flow Indicators: Vane type waterflow detector, rated to 250 PSIG; designed for
horizontal or vertical installation; have two (2) SPDT circuit switches to provide isolated
alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere 125 volts AC and 0.25 ampere 24 volts DC; complete
with factory -set field -adjustable retard element to prevent false signals, tamper -proof cover
which sends a signal when cover is removed, and with activation time retarding capability set
at 30 seconds. The setting shall be verified through the Inspectors Test prior to Final
Inspection.
C. Supervisory Switches: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for use in service
indicated. SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in other than full open
position.
2.16 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinkler Heads: Fusible link type, and style as indicated or required by the application.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide heads with nominal 1/2-inch discharge orifice, for
"ordinary" temperature range with a minimum temperature of 155 degree F. Provide
"intermediate" temperature heads in Electrical Rooms and where required as noted in
NFPA-13.
All sprinkler heads shall be quick -response type.
B. Sprinkler Head Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes:
1. Upright, Pendent and Sidewall Styles: Chrome plated, factory brass, in finish spaces,
exposed to view; rough bronze finish for heads in unfinished spaces and not exposed
to view. Heads shall be stainless steel where installed exposed to acids, chemicals, or
other corrosive fumes.
2. Concealed Style: Rough brass, adjustable, with painted White cover plate. GEM
Models FR946 and F946 Clean Line Sprinklers are not acceptable.
3. Recessed Style: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon plate. GEM Models
FR948 and F948 recessed sprinklers are not acceptable.
4. See drawings for additional sprinkler type requirements.
C. Sprinkler Head Cabinet and Wrench: Finished steel cabinet, suitable for wall mounting, with
hinged cover and space for spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrench. Provide
amounts of each style per NFPA-13. Locate head cabinet on shop drawing submittal.
15300 - 11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Plastic fire sprinkler escutcheons are not acceptable.
2.17 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Wall Type Siamese Connections: Polished chrome cast brass, 2-way flush wall type, with
wall escutcheon and having National Standard threads, for the connections size indicated, as
specified in NFPA 1963. Each inlet shall have a clapper valve, and cap and chain. Unit shall
have wall escutcheon of cast -brass, finish to match connections, with words "STANDPIPE -
FIRE DEPT. CONNECTION" or "AUTO SPKR. - FIRE DEPT. CONNECTION" or "AUTO
SPKR. AND STANDPIPE - FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION" in raised letters.
Contractor shall verify threads with Local Fire Department.
B. Sidewalk Siamese Connection: Polished chrome -plated cast brass, angle body, two-way,
Siamese connection. Connection sizes shall be 4-inch outlet and two (2) 2-1l2 inch inlets,
having NH Standard threads, for the connection size indicated, as specified in NFPA 1963.
Each inlet shall have a clapper valve, and cap and chain. Provide 18-inch high chrome -plated
brass sleeve and chrome -plated brass sidewalk plate, with words "STANDPIPE - FIRE
DEPT. CONNECTION" or "AUTO SPKR. - FIRE DEPT. CONNECTION" or "AUTO
SPKR. AND STANDPIPE - FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION" in raised letters.
C. Fire Department connections including location shall meet the approval of the Fire
Department Having Jurisdiction.
2.18 INSPECTOR'S TEST AND DRAIN ASSEMBLY
A. Provide an alarm test module of a manufacturer listed in Paragraph 2.2.
B. Comply with NFPA-14, Section 5-11, for draining and testing of wet standpipe system.
C. Test and drain piping shall be routed to exterior. Location shall meet Owner's approval.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine rough -in for fire hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping
connections prior to installing cabinets.
B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where cabinets are to be installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2-inch and smaller.
B. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with roll -grooved ends and grooved mechanical coupling or
with threaded joints and fittings.
C. Acceptable alternates to Schedule 40 pipe shall be installed per manufacturer's
recommendations.
15300 - 12
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Provide a minimum 5'-0" cover for all underground pipe installations. Install in accordance
with AWWA C600.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the
general location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as
indicated. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every
required offset, valve, fitting, etc.
Deviations from approved "Working Plans" for sprinkler piping require written
approval of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with
the Engineer prior to deviating from the approved "Working Plans".
C. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA-13.
D. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes. Welded outlet branch pipe fittings are acceptable.
E. Install unions in pipe 2-inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.
Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and
larger connections.
G. For welded pipe, all cutouts (coupons) shall be removed prior to installation.
H. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA-13. Hanger and support
spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in
accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for
rigid systems. Provide protection from damage where subject to earthquake in accordance
withNFPA-13.
Make connections between underground and aboveground piping using an approved
transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation.
Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods".
K. All piping penetrating walls to structure shall be sleeved and sealed per Specification Section
15055.
L. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA-13 complete with shutoff
valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.
M. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge
with a connection not less than 1/4-inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged
for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal, and where they
will not be subject to freezing.
15300 - 13
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
N. The fire line entry valves shall have monitoring electrical switches, the wiring from which
shall be carried to the Fire Annunciating Panel.
O. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of his installation
with all other contractors. See Section 15010 for prioritized components.
P. Protect adjacent area where pipe cutting and threading takes place (e.g. floors, ceilings, walls,
etc.).
Q. There shall be no fire sprinkler piping in Electrical Rooms other than piping serving
sprinklers directly in that room or installed over any electrical panels.
R. Provide spring -loaded check valve at top of drain risers.
Install pressure gauges on city and system sides of fire entry valve assembly.
T. Install hangers straight and true and piping parallel to building lines.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Welded Joints: AWS D10.9, Level AR-3.
B. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B 1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join
pipe, fittings, and valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal
seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
2. Align threads at point of assembly.
3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads.
4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves, place
the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.
5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If
a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be
used.
C. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening
to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque
specified by the bolt manufacturer.
D. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the
couplings.
E. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings and specialties in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA-13 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
15300 - 14
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Gate Valves: Install electronically supervised -open indicating valves so located to control all
sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one (1)
control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the
system controlled by each valve. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for
valve tags and signs.
C. Valve at water main tap shall be underground gate valve with roadway box.
D. Install approved double check valve assembly in each water supply connection.
E. Self -Contained Deluge Valves: Install the self-contained deluge system in proper direction of
flow, in the main supply to the deluge system. Install the system in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Connect system controls and test valve for proper
operation.
3.6 SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATIONS
A. Any sprinklers with any paint on them, as a result of the painting of the sprinkler piping, shall
be replaced. The sprinkler system shall then be hydrostatically tested again at the Contractor's
expense.
B. Sprinkler heads shall be positioned so as to comply with NFPA-13 for any obstructions.
C. Run piping concealed above heated furred ceilings and in joists to minimize obstructions.
Expose only heads.
D. Protect sprinkler heads against mechanical injury with standard guards.
E. Provide 1-inch diameter nipple and I -inch x 1/2-inch reducing fitting for each upright head.
(Excluding Mechanical Equipment Rooms.)
F. Provide heads in "pocketed" areas caused by exposed duct, piping or beams.
G. Sprinkler head deflector distance from face of finished ceiling shall not exceed 4-inch.
H. Sprinkler heads shall be located in the center of all 2-foot x 2-foot ceiling tiles, quarter points,
and along the centerline lengthwise of 2-foot x 4-foot ceiling tiles.
I. Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations.
J. Install sprinkler piping in a manner such that mechanical equipment, ceiling files or lights can
be accessed and easily removed.
K. Minimum fire sprinkler head temperature rating for sprinklers in electrical rooms shall be
212 degree F. Keep sprinklers as far from transformers and/or panels as spacing allows.
3.7 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATIONS
A. Install automatic drip valves at the check valve on the fire department connection to the
mains. Route drain to exterior.
15300 - 15
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetration in outside walls.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install mechanical identification in accordance with Division 15 Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods section "Mechanical Identification".
B. Install fire protection signs on piping in accordance with NFPA-13 and NFPA-14
requirements.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF METERS AND GAUGES
A. Install meters and gauges in accordance with Division 15 Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods section "Meters and Gauges".
3.10 FLEXIBLE STAINLESS STEEL HOSE BRANCH LINE
A. Install per requirements associated with the listing of U.L. and Factory Mutual for installation
in suspended or sheet rock ceilings. Provide factory brackets to maintain listing of installation
for applicable sprinkler head type connection.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Flush, test and inspect Sprinkler Piping Systems in accordance with NFPA-13, Standard for
Installation of Sprinkler systems, Edition 1991 - Chapter 8.
B. The Fire Sprinkler System shall not be connected to underground piping until the fire service
main is tested and approved.
C. The Fire Protection Contractor shall conduct and bear the costs of all necessary tests of the
Fire Protection Work, furnish all labor, power and equipment. All piping shall be tested with
water as required, the tests witnessed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
D. Dry and PreAction Systems shall be both hydrostatically and pneumatically tested. Pneumatic
test shall be in accordance with NFPA-13.
E. The Fire Protection Piping shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 200
PSIG, for a duration of not less than two (2) hours.
F. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures specified, and retest
repaired portion of the system at Fire Protection Contractor's expense.
G. All piping tests (pneumatic and hydrostatic) shall be conducted prior to the application of any
painting materials. This will prevent hidden leaks and/or repainting of repaired/altered
piping.
3.12 SYSTEM CERTIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with written certification prior to final inspection,
that all new equipment:
15300 - 16
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1. Has been visually inspected and functionally tested as required by the specifications.
2. Is installed entirely in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations within
the limitations of the system's UL listings and NFPA criteria.
3. Is in proper working order.
3.13 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Owner for final inspection and witnessing
of the final acceptance tests. The Fire Protection Contractor, the Alarm System Contractor
and the Owner will conduct the final inspection and witness the final acceptance test.
B. All tests and inspections required by the referenced Codes and Standards, and the Owner shall
be performed by the Contractor.
C. The inspecting committee as referenced above will visit the job site to inspect the work and
witness the final acceptance tests when they have been advised by the Contractor that the
work is completed and ready for test. If the Work is not complete or the test is unsatisfactory,
the Contractor shall be responsible for the Consultants extra time and expenses for re -
inspection and witnessing the re -testing of the work. Such extra fees shall be deducted from
payments by the Owner to the Contractor.
D. After the system has been inspected and tested, a certificate, "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate Sprinkler System - Water Spray System", shall be provided by the Contractor and
shall be signed by him or his representative, the Owner's representative and by a
representative of the Fire Department if appropriate. Sufficient copies shall be prepared to
ensure the Engineer, Owner, all Inspecting Authorities and the Contractor have a copy for
their files. The Contractor shall prepare one (1) test report for each inspection performed
whether successful or not.
E. The signing of the Certificate by the Owner's representative shall in no way prejudice any
claim against the Contractor for faulty material, poor workmanship, or failure to comply with
Inspecting Authority's requirements or Local Ordinances.
Contractor shall provide at least five (5) working days notice for all tests.
G. All sprinkler supervisory initiating devices shall be functionally tested to verify proper
operation.
H. All supervisory functions of each initiating device shall be functionally tested.
Receipt of all alarm and trouble signals, initiated during the course of the testing, shall be
verified at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
3.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a loose-leaf manual containing:
1. A detailed description of the systems.
2. A detailed description of routine maintenance required or recommended or which
would be provided under a maintenance contract including a maintenance schedule
and detailed maintenance instructions for each type of device installed.
15300 - 17
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Wiring diagrams, control panelboards, motor test data, motors, starters and controls for
electrically operated equipment furnished by mechanical trades.
Identify each item with specification section and sufficient data to certify its compliance with
the specifications.
1.15 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit a complete set of Coordination Drawings as necessary or required by the
Engineer showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and
materials in relationship with other trades, sub -trades and building components. Prepare
drawings to an accurate scale of 1/4"=Y-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment
and materials, including clearances for installing and maintaining insulation, servicing and
maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, and similar requirements. Indicate movement
and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.
B. Review in detail all floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to
conclusively coordinate with all trades and integrate all installations. Indicate locations where
space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to
the efficient flow of the work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:
1. Mechanical equipment room layouts;
2. Specific equipment installations, including:
a. Pumps;
b. Tanks and Heat Exchangers;
C. Air Handling Units;
3. Work in pipe spaces, chases, trenches, and tunnels;
4. Exterior wall penetrations;
5. Ceiling plenums which contain piping, ductwork, or equipment in congested
arrangement;
6. Installations in mechanical riser shafts, at typical sections and crucial offsets and
junctures;
7. Pipe expansion loops;
8. Numbered valve location diagrams;
9. Exterior underground lines in common excavation;
10. Manifold piping for multiple equipment units.
1.16 PRODUCT LISTING
A. Prepare listing of major mechanical equipment and materials for the project, within two (2)
weeks of signing the Contract Documents and transmit to the Mechanical Engineer.
B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA)
manufacture and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice.
C. Provide all information requested.
D. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in Division 1,
"PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION".
15010-s
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 — FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3. Manufacturer's Data Sheets and Installation Manuals/Instructions for all equipment
installed.
4. A list of recommended spare parts.
5. Service Directory.
6. Full size mylar reproducibles of the Record Drawings (stamped and signed per
Section 1.6), and AutoCad version 2000 "CD's" which are electronically
stamped/signed.
7. Hydraulic Calculations (stamped and signed per Section 1.6).
B. Refer to Section 01730 "Operating and Maintenance" for additional requirements.
C. Within fifteen (15) days of the completion of the work, six (6) copies of the manual shall be
submitted for approval.
3.15 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of approved
shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the
sprinkler system from the original approved Shop Drawings. This shall not be construed as
authorization to deviate from or make changes to the shop drawings approved by the Owner
without written instruction from the Owner in each case. This set of drawings shall be used
only as a record set.
B. Upon completion of the Work, the record set of prints shall be used to prepare complete,
accurate final record drawings reflecting any and all changes and deviations made to the
sprinkler system.
C. The Owner, at his option and at the Contractor's expense, may require revised hydraulic
calculations depending on the extent and nature of field changes.
D. The Record Drawings and Hydraulic Calculations shall have the signed stamp of a
Professional Engineer registered in the State of Colorado or the signature with certification
number of a Level 4 Senior Engineering Technician of the National Institute for Certification
of Engineering Technology certifying the Record Drawings and the Hydraulic Calculations
accurately represent the completed Fire Protection System.
E. Upon completion of the Work, two (2) sets of Blue -line Record Drawings shall be submitted
to the Owner for review.
F. Upon review of the Blue -Line Record Drawings, before final approval, one (1) set of
reproducible mylar record drawings and four (4) additional sets of Blue -Line Record
Drawings shall be delivered to the Owner.
3.16 GUARANTEE PERIOD
A. Guarantee: The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of one
(1) year beginning with the date of final acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor shall be
responsible during the design, installation, testing and guarantee periods for any damage
caused by him (or his subcontractors) or by defects in his (or his subcontractor's) work,
materials, or equipment.
15300 -1s
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
B. Emergency Service: During the installation and warranty period, the Contractor shall provide
emergency repair service for the sprinkler system within four (4) hours of a request by the
Owner for such service. This service shall be provided on a twenty-four (24) hour per day,
seven (7) days per week basis.
3.17 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall conduct two (2) training sessions of four (4) hours each to familiarize the
building personnel with the features, operation and maintenance of the sprinkler systems.
Training sessions shall be scheduled by the Owner at a time mutually agreeable to the
Contractor and the Owner.
3.18 WATER DAMAGE
A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the work of others, to
building and property/materials of others caused by leaks in automatic sprinkler equipment,
unplugged or disconnected pipes or fittings, and shall pay for necessary replacement or repair
of work or items so damaged during the installation and testing periods of the automatic
sprinkler work.
3.19 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Electrical Contractor shall wire all water flow switches and tamper switches on valves to
central alarm panel, and shall also wire alarm bells or light/horn.
END OF SECTION 15300
15300 - 19
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15410 — DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes potable cold, hot, and recirculated hot water piping, fittings, and
specialties within the building to a point 5-feet outside the building. This section includes the
following:
Pipe and Tube Materials:
a. Above Grade, inside buildings.
2. Valves
3. Piping Specialties:
a.
Water hammer arrestors
b.
Strainers
C.
Hose Bibbs
d.
Wall and yard hydrants
e.
Backflow preventers
f.
Thermostatic mixing valves
g.
Trap -seal primer valves
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Water Distribution Piping: A pipe within the building or on the premises, which conveys
water from the water service pipe or meter to the points of usage.
B. Water Service Piping: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply
to the water distributing system of the building served.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following:
1. ASME B 31.9 'Building Services Piping" for materials, products and installation.
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
2. ASME 'Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualification" for Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators.
3. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
4. Local Plumbing Code and Utility Department requirements.
5. Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual.
6. City of Fort Collins Cross Control Manual and Guidelines.
15410-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. All piping systems shall be installed to manufacturers standards and in accordance with the
pipe manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall demonstrate prior to installation of any
piping that joining methods and procedures are acceptable to the Engineer and/or Owner with
the Factory Representative present. During the installation of the piping system, the
Contractor shall be required to provide joint coupons as requested by the Owner or Engineer
and repair and/or replace system if joints are deemed unsatisfactory.
1.4 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. All Plumbing Work shall be performed by a Colorado Licensed Master or Journeyman
Plumber. Contractors shall verify that plumbers are currently licensed by the State of
Colorado and shall supply the Engineer and/or Owner with names and license numbers.
Contractors shall have a minimum of three (3) years of satisfactory performance in conducting
the type of work specified.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
B. Test Reports.
C. Valve schedule listing valve designation number, valve type, size, location, and function of
all valves.
D. Backflow Preventer State Certification Test.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS
A. Above Grade Inside Buildings:
1. Pipe 4-Inch and Smaller: ASTM B 88; Type L hard drawn copper tube.
a. Fittings:
1) Wrought Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASMEB 16.22.
2) Cast Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B 16.18.
3) Cast Copper Alloy Flanges Class 150 and 300, Flat -Face Type:
ASME B 16.24.
b. Joining Material:
1) Lead -Free Solder: ASTM B32-Sb5, Sn 95; Tin (Sn) approximately
95 percent and Antimony approximately 5 percent; minimum
tensile strength of 5,900 psi.
C. Fluxes:
1) ASTM B813, Water Soluble, Liquid or Paste Type. Fluxes having
greater than 0.20 percent lead content shall not be used.
15410 - z
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.2 VALVES
A. General:
1. Comply with MSS-921980 "Valve Users Manual".
2. Sizes: Provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
3. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems
to allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation.
4. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45.
B. Gate Valves:
1. 3-Inch and Larger: MSS-SP 70, 200 PSI CWP, non -rising stem, bolted bonnet,
resilient wedge, epoxy coated ASTM A126 Class B cast iron body, handwheel
operator, meets AWWA-0509.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Watts 405-NRS-RW
2) Febco
C. Ball Valves:
3-Inch and Smaller: MSS-SP-110, 150 PSI SWP, 600 PSI WOG, two-piece ASTM
B-584 cast bronze body, full port, chrome plated brass/bronze ball, TFE seats, anti -
blowout stem, separate packnut with adjustable stem packing, extended stem, and
vinyl covered steel handle. Threaded or soldered end connections.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Nibco T/S 585-70
2) Milwaukee
3) Apollo (Conbraco)
4) Watts
5) Grinnell
D. Check Valves:
Swing Check Valve:
a. 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller. MSS SP-80; Class 150 SWP, ASTM B-62 bronze
body and bonnet, horizontal swing design, Y-pattern, with TFE seat disc.
Threaded or soldered end connections.
1) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Nibco T/S433-Y
b) Milwaukee
c) Grinnell
E. Drain Valve: Ball valve with threaded hose end and cap with chain. Valve upstream of
backflow preventer shall have vacuum breaker and cap.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Apollo 78-100/78-200
b. Nibco
C. Milwaukee
d. Watts
15410 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Balancing Valves:
1. 200 PSI, bronze body, brass ball construction, with handle and memory stop.
Differential pressure read-out ports across valve seat.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Bell & Gossett ITT Circuit Setter
2) Gerand 'Balvalve Indicator"
3) Flowset
2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters:
Piston type, with copper/brass casing and piston, pressure rated for 250 PSI, tested
and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. Size according to the
following schedule.
Drawing Designation
Fixture Unit
Rating
P.D.I. Size
Arrestor Throat
Size
SA-1
1-11
A
1/2"
SA-2
12-32
B
3/4"
SA-3
33-60
C
V
SA4
61-113
D
1-1/4"
SA-5
114-154
E
1-1/2"
SA-6
155-330
F
2"
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Precision Plumbing Products
b. Sioux Chief
C. Watts Regulator Co.
B. Strainers:
1. Wye Pattern Strainers: 125 PSIG working pressure, cast iron or bronze construction,
complete with bottom drain connection and removable Type 304 stainless steel
screens with 3/64-inch perforations at 233 per square inch. Cast iron to be epoxy
coated for domestic water service.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Febco 650n58
2) Watts
3) Nibco
15410 - 4
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Hose Bibbs:
1. HB-1 Unfinished and Equipment Rooms: Rough chrome plated bronze body,
renewable composition disc, tee handle, 3/4-inch NPT inlet, vacuum breaker,
3/4-inch hose outlet.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Chicago Faucet No. 998
2) Woodford
3) T&S Brass
2. HB-2 Finished Rooms with Floor Drains: Polished chrome plated bronze body, with
renewable composition disc, tee handle, 3/4-inch NPT inlet, vacuum breaker, 3/4-
inch hose outlet.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Chicago Faucet No. 952-293-6
2) Woodford
3) T&S Brass
D. Wall Hydrants:
WH-1 Flush with wall, non -freeze, box type, wall hydrant; all brass with chrome
plated box cover and frame, "T" handle loose key, key lock cover, two (2) check
valves, self draining body and shank, 3/4-inch male hose thread outlet, 3/4-inch male
or female I.P.S. thread inlet, renewable seat; shank length to extend through primary
exterior wall surface sufficient distance to prevent freezing.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Woodford Model B67
2) Josam
3) Wade
E. Backflow Preventers:
1. BFP-1 (Reduced Pressure Type): All bronze (3/4-inch - 2-inch)/ductile iron (2-1/2
inch - 10-inch) body with two (2) independently operating, spring loaded check
valves and one (1) differential relief valve with automatic intermediate atmospheric
vent. Pressure in intermediate zone to activate relief valve when there is a 2 PSIG.
differential between the zone and the upstream side of the first check valve. The
relief valve shall remain open until a positive pressure differential is re-established.
Assembly to be furnished with full port, positive shutoff isolation valves, in -line
strainer, union connections, funnel, and all test cocks. Assembly to have approval of
National Sanitary Foundation, U.S.C. Foundation for Cross Connection Control,
A.S.S.E. State and or Local Authorities.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Febco No. 825Y or 860 thm 2-inch size; No. 825YD/860/880 2-1/2
inch thru 10-inch
2) Watts No. 909
3) Conbraco 40-200, 1-1/4 inch thru 10-inch
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
TMV-1: Exposed type, all bronze thermostatically controlled mixing valve with
stainless steel piston, fail safe automatic shut -down if either hot or cold water
pressure fails; union connection, polished chrome finish. Valve to deliver 20 GPM
at a pressure differential of 10 PSI; 314 in. hot and cold water inlet pipe sizes, 1 in.
tempered water outlet pipe size.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Powers Series 430
2) Leonard
3) Symmons
G. Trap -Seal Primer Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. PPP Inc.
C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jar R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1018.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint.
6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint.
7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices to achieve
permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing service without piping failure.
Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions
for disassembly and maintenance/ replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes by use
of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16-inch misalignment
tolerance.
B. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other
electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Only piping serving this type of
equipment space shall be allowed.
C. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
D. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,
unless expressly indicated.
E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
15410 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of
the building. Install piping free of sags or bends and allow sufficient space above removable
ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit application of insulation and
servicing of valves.
H. Install drains at all low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting,
3/4-inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple and cap.
I. Fire and Smoke Wall Penetrations: Maintain the fire and smoke rated integrity where pipes
pass through fine and smoke rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
J. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Use steel pipe for sleeves 6-inch and smaller. Use sheet metal for
pipe sleeves 6-inch and larger.
K. Coordinate foundation and all other structural penetrations with Structural Engineer.
3.2 VALVES
A. Installation:
1. Use ball valves for isolation valves unless noted otherwise.
2. Use calibrated balancing valves for balancing valves.
3. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main,
where branch or riser serves two (2) or more plumbing fixtures or equipment
connections, and elsewhere as indicated.
4. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and
on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated.
5. Drain Valves: Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of
horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to completely drain distribution piping
system.
6. Check Valves: Install swing check valves on discharge side of each pump, and
elsewhere as indicated.
7. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot water recirculating loop, discharge side of each
pump, and elsewhere as indicated.
8. Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below
840 degree F for gate, globe, and check valves and below 421 degree F for ball
valves.
9. Provide unions with valves having threaded ends.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Backflow Preventers:
1. Install in compliance with the Plumbing Code, Colorado Cross Connection Control
Department and Authority Having Jurisdiction. Locate in same room as equipment
being connected. Pipe relief outlet through air gap and without valves, to nearest
floor drain.
15410 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT. CENTER
SECTION 15410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES P.C.
2. Provide testing and report on all backflow prevention devises in accordance with City
of Fort Collins Utility Department and the Colorado Cross Connection Control
Manual (Latest Edition) requirements. Attach testing approval tag to all back flow
preventers.
B. Water Hammer Arresters:
1. Install water hammer arresters with isolation valve in accessible location.
2. Provide access doors located in accordance with architectural recommendations.
C. Trap -Seal Primer Valves:
1. Install supply -type, trap -seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward
drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet
fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping run outs to fixtures of sizes
indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Plumbing Code.
B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection,
provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2-1/2 inch and larger, use flanges
instead of unions.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it
has been inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Plumbing Official Having
Jurisdiction, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time such inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Official.
a. Rough -In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before
concealed or closed -in after system is roughed -in, and prior to setting
fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the Plumbing Official to
observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the
requirements of the Plumbing Code.
3. Reinspections: Whenever the Plumbing Official finds that the piping system will not
pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection
by the Plumbing Official.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Plumbing Official.
B. Piping Tests:
l . General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test
piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible. Test each natural
section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to
15410 - 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
E. When two (2) or more items of same material or equipment are required (plumbing fixtures,
pumps, valves, air conditioning units, etc.) they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product
manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, pipe, tube, fittings
(except flanged and grooved types), sheet metal, wire, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder,
fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in work, except as
otherwise indicated.
F. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items.
1.17 NAMEPLATE DATA
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of mechanical equipment,
indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and
power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data Locate
nameplates in an accessible location.
1.18 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,
compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately
packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.
C. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off -site storage is authorized in writing.
Protect stored equipment and materials from damage, dirt, dust and moisture.
D. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site
congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities
needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
E. Provide factory -applied plastic end -caps on each length of pipe and tube, except for concrete,
corrugated metal, hub -and -spigot, clay pipe. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage and
handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
F. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof
wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
G. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and
enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
1.19 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Keep a complete set of record document prints in custody during entire period of construction
at the construction site.
C. Mark drawing prints to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both
exterior and interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters,
boxes, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations,
15010-9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section
with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time.
2. Test piping that is to be concealed before being permanently enclosed.
3. As soon as work has been completed, conduct preliminary tests to ascertain
compliance with specified requirements. Make repairs or replacements as required.
4. Give a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours notice to Engineer of dates when
acceptance test will be conducted. Conduct tests as specified for each system in
presence of representative of Agency Having Jurisdiction or his representative.
Submit three (3) copies of successful tests to the Engineer for his review. Report
shall state system tested and date of successful test.
5. Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with regulations of
Agencies Having Jurisdiction. Work shall not be considered complete until such
certificates have been delivered.
6. All costs involved in these tests shall be borne by Contractor.
7. System Tests:
a. Hydrostatic Test: Pressurize the system to 100psig or 150 percent of system
pressure, whichever is greater. Maintain pressure until the entire system has
been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than four (4)
hours.
b. Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted
for hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions or existing building
conditions prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by
the Engineer prior to any testing. For tests of this type, subject the piping
system to the gas pressure indicated for that specific system. Maintain the
test pressure for the duration of a soapy water test of each joint.
C. Repair failed piping sections by disassembly and re -installation, using new
materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals,
stop -leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
d. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been
completed.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems, which
have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. Clean and replace strainers.
2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction, or in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure
described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as described below:
a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at the points of outlet.
b. Fill the system or part thereof, with a water/chlorine solution containing at
least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system, or part
thereof, and allow to stand for twenty-four (24) hours.
C. Drain the system, or part thereof, of the previous solution, and refill with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine
and isolate and allow to stand for three (3) hours.
d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean potable
water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
15410 - 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 1S410 - DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority
shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.
END OF SECTION 15410
15410 -10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the following:
Pipe and Tube Materials:
a. Sanitary Drainage, Vents
b. Roof Drainage
C. Equipment Drains and Overflows
2. Drainage Piping Specialties:
a.
Trap Primers
b.
Flashing Flanges
C.
Vent Flashing Sleeves
d.
Cleanouts
e.
Floor Drains
f.
Area Drains
g.
Roof Drains
h.
Trench Drains
i.
Heat Trace
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the
discharge from soil, waste, and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and
conveys it to the building sewer to a point 5'-0" outside the building wall.
B. Building Sewer: That part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system which extends from
the end of the building drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private sewer,
individual sewage disposal system, or other point of disposal.
C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys
sewage, rain water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains
of public sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
D. Vent System: Pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or
to provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and
back pressure.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
15420-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following:
1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of 2003 International
Plumbing Code.
2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials,
products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
3. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE standards pertaining to materials,
products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
4. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable ASTM Standards pertaining to
materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
5. CISPI Compliance: Comply with applicable CISPI Standards pertaining to materials,
products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
6. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products and
installation of soil and waste systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENTS
A. Above Grade:
1. Pipe 1-1/2 Inch to 10-Inch: Service class hubless cast iron soil pipe: CISPI 301,
ASTM A888.
a. Fittings: CISPI 301, ASTM C1277, hubless cast iron, long sweep bends.
b. Joining Material: ASTM A888, assembly of stainless steel shield and
clamp, and CISPI 310, ASTM C564 elastomeric sealing sleeve.
2. Pipe 1-1/4 Inch to 4-Inch: DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306.
a. Fittings:
1) Cast Copper Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23.
2) Wrought Copper Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B 16.29.
b. Joining Material:
1) Solder: ASTM B32, Sn 95 or Sn 94; Tin (Sn) approximately 95
percent and silver (Ag) approximately 5 percent having 0.10 percent
maximum lead (Pb) content.
C. Fluxes:
1) ASTM B813 liquid or paste type. Fluxes having grater than 0.20
percent lead content shall not be used.
3. Manufacturers (Cast Iron Pipe):
a. Tyler Pipe
b. AB&I
C. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry
15420 - 2
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Below Grade:
Pipe 2-Inch to 15-Inch: Service class cast iron hub -and -spigot soil pipe, ASTM A74.
a. Fittings: ASTM A74 cast iron service class, hub and spigot compression
joint, long sweep bends.
b. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.
2. Manufacturers (Cast Iron Pipe):
a. Tyler Pipe
b. AB&I
C. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry
2.2 ROOF DRAINAGE
A. Above Grade — 30 Feet of Head or Less:
1. Pipe 1-1/2 Inch to 10-Inch: Service class hubless cast iron soil pipe: CISPI 301,
ASTM A888.
a. Fittings: CISPI 301, hubless cast iron, long sweep bends.
b. Joining Material: Wide Body Couplings
1) ASTM A888, Assembly of Type 304 stainless steel clamp and
shield with a minimum thickness of 0.015-inch or greater, ASTM
C564 elastomeric sealing sleeve. Sealing bands shall require
80-inch pounds of torque per band.
2) Wide body couplings as follows:
a) Pipe 1-1/2 Inch to 4-Inch: 3-Inch sleeve with four (4)
clamps.
b) Pipe 5-Inch to 10-Inch: 5-Inch sleeve with six (6) clamps
with dual sealing rings under every band.
2. Manufacturers (Cast Iron Pipe):
a. Tyler Pipe
b. AB&I
C. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry
B. Above Grade — 30 Feet of Head or Greater:
1. Pipe 3-Inch to 10-Inch: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with galvanized cast iron
drainage fittings and threaded joints; or Schedule 40 grooved galvanized steel pipe
joined with rigid couplings and gaskets designed for water service, molded of
materials conforming to ASTM D-2000. Full lengths of pipe shall be utilized to
greatest extent possible. Prior to transitioning to Hub and Spigot Piping at floor
level, install a tee fitting for cleanout purposes. Material to be galvanized steel tee
and removable cap rated for pressure piping, rated at 250 PSI minimum. Pipe and
fittings shall be of domestic manufacture, or receive prior approval of the Engineer.
C. Below Grade:
Pipe 2-Inch to 15-Inch: Service class cast iron hub -and -spigot soil pipe, ASTM A74.
a. Fittings: ASTM A74 service class cast iron, hub and spigot compression
joint, long sweep bends.
15420 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVLSION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
b. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.
2. Manufacturers (Cast Iron Pipe):
a. Tyler Pipe
b. AB&I
C. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry
2.3 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
A. Copper Pipe and Fittings:
1. DW V Copper Tube: ASTM B 306.
2. Fittings:
a. Cast Copper Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B 16.23.
b. Wrought Copper Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings: ASMEB16.29.
3. Joining Material:
a. Solder: ASTM B32, Sn 95 or Sn 94; Tin (Sn) approximately 95 percent
and silver (Ag) approximately 5 percent having 0.10 percent maximum lead
(Pb) content.
4. Fluxes:
a. ASTM B813 liquid or paste type. Fluxes having grater than 0.20 percent
lead content shall not be used.
2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Josam Mfg. Co.
2. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.
3. Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp.
4. Zurn Industries Inc; Hydromechanics Division
5. Wade
6. Woodford
7. Precision Plumbing Products
B. Trap Primers:
1. Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2-inch connections
matching piping system. Complying with ASSE 1018.
2. Adjustable to high or low pressure and automatically activated whenever any faucet
is opened in the building, causing a pressure drop.
3. Connections: Inlet 1/2-inch male NPT; Outlet 1/2-inch female NPT.
4. "Prime -Rite" Trap Primer Valve by Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal.
5. When more than one (1) trap is to be primed, provide multiple distribution units, as
required for application, by the manufacturer.
C. Flashing Flanges: Cast iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring.
Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required.
15420 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast iron caulking type roof coupling for cast iron stacks, cast iron
threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper
tubing.
E. Cleanouts:
1, Cleanout Plugs: Cast brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, and Local Plumbing
Code.
2. Floor Cleanout: Round, cast iron body with recessed bronze closure plug; scoriated
polished bronze frame and cover plate.
3. Wall Cleanout: Cleanout tee with raised head brass plug tapped for 1/4-20 thread;
flat style chrome plated wall cover plate with holes for 1/4-inch bolt; 1/4-20 threaded
bolt with chrome plated flat head.
4. Surface Cleanout: Cast iron body ferrule with raised head brass plug. Medium duty
cast iron manhole cover and ring 12-inch diameter to be set in concrete pad, Neenah
No. R-1791-A.
5. Line Cleanout: Cast iron tapped cleanout ferrule with raised head brass plug.
F. Floor Drains:
FD-1 Toilet Rooms and Finished Areas: Round cast iron body with flashing collar
and cast iron ring, 6-inch round nickel bronze adjustable strainer head with secured
square hole grate, bottom waste outlet.
Jay R. Smith Fig. 2005-A
2. FD-2 Boiler and Mechanical Rooms: Round cast iron, medium duty, shallow body
drain with flashing collar and cast iron ring, 8-inch round tractor type non -tilt slotted
grate, sediment bucket, bottom waste outlet.
Jay R. Smith Fig. 2210-B
3. FD-3 Ice Maker Drain, Recessed Top Grate: Round cast iron body with flashing
collar and cast iron ring, 7-inch round nickel bronze adjustable strainer head with
loose set recessed square hole grate, bottom waste outlet. Top outside edge of drain
to be set flush with finished floor.
Jay R. Smith Fig. 2005-A-F37
G. Roof Drains:
1. RD-1: Cast iron body with sump, removable cast iron vandal -proof dome strainer,
cast iron flashing flange and cast iron ring with integral gravel stop, underdeck
clamp.
Jay R. Smith Fig. 1010
2. OFD-1 Overflow Drain: Cast iron body with sump, removable cast iron vandal -
proof dome strainer, cast iron flashing flange and cast iron clamp with integral gravel
stop, cast iron underdeck clamp, 2-inch high water dam standpipe under dome
strainer.
15420 - 5
TECE41CAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Jay R. Smith Fig. 1070
DSN-1 Down Spout Nozzle: Cast bronze body and flange.
Jay R. Smith Fig. 1770
2.5 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Non -Metallic Trench Drains:
a. Strongwell POLYCAST
b. Approved Equal
B. Non -Metallic Trench Drains: Polyester resin and quartz aggregate, pre -cast, interlocking
design, with bottom radius and 0.6 percent slope.
1. Pre -Cast Material: Compressive strength of 12,000 psi, flexural strength of 3,000
psi, frost -proof, salt -proof, inert under dilute acid and alkali conditions and less than
2.0 percent water absorption rate.
POLYCAST 500 Series Deck Drain System
2. Grates: Stainless steel as indicated, pedestrian load class with designed distributed
load of 23 psi., DAD compliant for accessible routes.
POLYCAST Model # DG0657
2.6 HEAT TRACE
A. Fumish and install a complete UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved system of heating
cables, components, and controls to prevent water from freezing in the following piping
systems:
1. Storm Drain Piping System — above ground only.
2. Overflow Drain Piping System — above ground only.
B. The self-regulating heating cable shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG nickel -copper bus wires
embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond
to temperature all along its length, allowing the heating cable to be cut in the field.
C. The heating cable shall operate on line voltage of 120 volts without the use of transformers.
Component enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X to prevent water ingress and corrosion.
15420 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. The heating cable for metal -pipe freeze protection shall be sized according to the table below.
The required heating cable output rating is in watts per foot at 50 degrees F.
Minimum
Ambient Temperature
Pipe Size (inches)
0°F
-20OF
3 or less
5 watts
5 watts
4
5 watts
8 watts
5 & 6
8 watts
8 watts
8
8 watts
2 strips — 5 watts
10
2 strips — 5 watts
2 strips — 8 watts
E. System Control: Thermostatic Control — Line Sensing, the system shall be controlled by a
line sensing thermostat set at 40 degrees F either directly or through an appropriate contactor.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Raychem Corporation
2. Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Install piping in accordance with Authorities Having Jurisdiction, except where
more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials with
white paint and promptly remove from site.
C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage and vent piping and
specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original
design, and the referenced standards.
D. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to
installations.
E. Examine rough -in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain
connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
F. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and
specialties are to be installed.
G. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing drainage piping with 1/4-inch per foot (2 percent) downward slope in
direction of drain for piping 3-inch and smaller, and 1/8-inch per foot (1 percent) for piping
4-inch and larger.
15420 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Install 1-inch thick extruded polystyrene over underground drainage piping above frost line
and not under building. Provide width to extend minimum of 12-inch beyond each side of
pipe. Install directly over pipe, centered on pipe centerline.
C. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes,
half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends.
D. SANITARY TEES OR SHORT QUARTER BENDS SHALL NOT BE USED IN DRAIN
PIPING. Use long -turn tees where two (2) fixtures are installed back to back and have a
common drain.
E. Provide thrust restraints consisting of bracing to structure and rodded joints at branches and
changes in direction for cast iron pipe 5-inches and larger suspended within the building.
F. Provide sway bracing to prevent shear at joints on cast iron piping suspended in excess of
18-inches on single rod hangers.
G. Install underground drain piping to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with
the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual.
H. Lay piping beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with
unbroken continuity of invert.
Place bell ends or groove ends of piping facing upstream.
Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturers recommendations for use of lubricants,
cements, and other special installation requirements.
K. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock,
throughout the length of the pipe.
L. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes shall be laid,
and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
M. Shape bottom of trench to fit the bottom 1/4 of the circumference of pipe. Fill unevenness
with tamped sand. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads,
and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
N. Minimum size of waste piping installed under floor slab on grade shall be 2-inches.
3.3 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
A. Install condensate drain piping from air conditioning unit coil condensate drain pan using
copper pipe.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Provide flashing for all floor drains, floor cleanouts and shower drains above grade. Make
watertight with Chloraloy 240 underslab moisture vapor barrier as manufactured by the Nobel
Co. of Grand Haven, Michigan. Extend flashing at least 24-inch from drain rim into floor
membrane or on structural floor. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device and make watertight,
15420 - s
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSITCENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping;
concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems,
with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with
items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks,
etc.); RFI's; change orders; concealed control system devices. Changes to be noted on the
drawings shall include final location of any piping or ductwork relocated more than 1'-0" from
where shown on the drawings.
D. Mark Equipment Schedules on the drawings with changes to Manufacturer, Model Number,
and data based on reviewed shop drawings.
E. At the completion of the project, mark all valve tag numbers on the drawings and turn these
drawings over to the General Contractor for his submission to the Architect. This Contract
will not be considered completed until these record drawings have been received and
reviewed by the Architect.
1.20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. The Testing and Balancing Report shall be submitted and received by the Engineer at least
five (5) calendar days prior to the Contractor's request for final observation time frame
requirements. Final Observation(s) will not proceed without T&B Report. Include in the
O&M Manual after review with "Review" or "Make Corrections Noted" has been
accomplished.
C. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for maintenance data, include the
following information:
1. Description of mechanical equipment, function, normal operating characteristics and
limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and
normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and
emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
5. Manufacturer's service manuals for all mechanical equipment provided under this
Contract.
6. Include the valve tag list.
7. Name, Address and Telephone Number of party to be contacted for twenty-four (24)
hour service for each item of equipment.
8. Starting, stopping, lubrication, equipment identification numbers and adjustment
clearly indicated for each piece of equipment.
9. Complete parts list.
10. Mechanical warranties.
D. This Contract will not be considered completed, nor will final payment be made, until all
specified material, including Testing and Balancing Report, is received in this Operating and
Maintenance Report and the manual is reviewed by the Architect.
15010-10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
durable joint. Provide flashing collar extension with all drains and cleanouts installed above
grade.
B. Cleanouts: Lubricate plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Prior to building
turnover remove cleanout plugs, re -lubricate and reinstall using only enough force to ensure
permanent leakproof joint.
1. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping
as indicated, and:
a. As required by Plumbing Code;
b. At each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees below slab;
C. At minimum intervals of 50-feet;
d. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack;
e. At sinks and urinals on grade;
f. At each upper terminal;
g. At egress of building (surface cleanout).
h. At each water closet or toilet group.
2. Cleanout Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types
as indicated, and in accessible locations.
C. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout
passing through waterproof membranes.
D. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Floor Drains:
1. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set
tops of drains flush with finished floor.
2. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer with minimum trap size that of drain
connected.
3. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
4. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
5. Provide with P-trap the same size as the floor drain unless otherwise noted on
Mechanical Drawings.
6. Provide flashing membrane for all floor drains in structure above slab on grade level.
F. Trap Primers: Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of
1/8-inch per foot (1 percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow.
G. Roof Drains:
1. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof membrane
manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain
and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where
penetrated.
3. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
15420 - 9
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
4. Install overflow roof drains with the inlet flow line located a maximum 2-inch above
the lowest point of roof.
H. Trench Drains:
1. Install trench drain to elevation specified by Architect, supporting from decking in
accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Cut opening in decking to allow penetration of drain.
3. Coordinate installation with General Contractor.
I. Heat Trace:
1. Install per manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Apply the heating cable linearly on the pipe after piping has been successfully
pressure -tested. Secure the heating cable to piping with cable ties or fiberglass tape.
3. Apply "Electric Traced" labels to the outside of the thermal insulation.
4. Coordinate installation with Electrical Contractor.
5. Tests: After installation and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject
heating cable to testing using a 2500-Vdc Megger. Minimum insulation resistance
shall be 20 megohms or greater.
3.5 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Before commencing work, check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm
inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to
avoid freezing.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures
and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the
Plumbing Code.
B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or
drains.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it
has been inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Plumbing Official Having
Jurisdiction, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time such inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Official.
a. Rough -In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before
concealed or closed -in after system is roughed -in, and prior to setting
fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection to observe the tests specified
and to insure compliance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code.
15420 -10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3. Re -Inspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make
the required corrections, and arrange for re -inspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Plumbing Official.
B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the
Authority Having Jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows.
1. Subject all waste and vent piping, including building drain, roof drain and building
sewer to a water test.
2. Tightly close all openings in the piping system except the highest opening, and fill
the system with water to the point of overflow.
3. Maintain water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least fifteen (15)
minutes before inspection starts; the system shall then be tight to all points. No
section shall be tested with less than a 10-foot head of water.
4. Close roof drains at the lowest point and fill with water to the point of overflow.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris,
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Piping
shall not be left open ended during construction.
END OF SECTION 15420
15420 - 11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Plumbing Fixtures Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules and by requirements of this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. ASHRAE Standard 18: "Method of Testing for Rating Drinking Water Coolers with
Self -Contained Mechanical Refrigeration Systems".
2. ARI Standard 1010: "Drinking -Fountains and Self -Contained Mechanically -
Refrigerated Drinking -Water Coolers".
3. ANSI Standard A117.1: "Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities
Accessible To and Usable By Physically Handicapped People".
4. Public Law 90-480: "Architectural Barriers Act of 1968".
5. UL Standard 399: "Drinking -Water Coolers".
6. Public Law 101-336: "Americans With Disabilities Act".
7. NSF Standard 61: "Drinking Water Components".
8. Energy Conservation Act - 1992: "Energy Conservation Standards".
B. Where fixtures are specified as ADA Accessible, it shall be the sole responsibility for all
manufacturers and/or suppliers to provide plumbing fixtures and related trim which meet or
exceed the ADA Requirements.
0�3 005511WNFA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
B. Color Charts: Submit manufacturer's standard color charts for cabinet finishes and fixture
colors.
C. Submit certification of compliance with specified ANSI, UL, and ASHRAE Standards.
D. Submit certification of compliance with performance verification requirements specified in
this Section.
1.4 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
A. Refer to Section 15010.
15"0 -1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.5 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
B. Extra Stock:
1. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures
and trim to Owner with receipt in a quantity of one (1) device for each ten (10)
fixtures.
2. Furnish faucet repair kits complete with all necessary washers, springs, pins,
retainers, packings, O-rings, sleeves, ceramic discs and/or seats in a quantity of one
(1) kit for each forty (40) faucets.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit Maintenance Data and Spare Parts Lists for each type of
manufactured plumbing fixtures, valves and trim. Include this data, product data, and shop
drawings in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Lavatories, Sinks, Service Sinks, Water Closets, Urinals, Bath Tubs, Surgeon Scrub
Sinks, Clinical Service Sinks:
a. American Standard U.S. Plumbing Products
b. Crane Co.
C. Kohler Co.
d. Eljer
e. Sloan
2. Stainless Steel Sinks:
a. Elkay Mfg. Co.
b. Just Mfg. Co.
3. Molded Tubs and Shower Units:
a.
Fiat Products
b.
Kohler Co.
C.
Universal -Rundle Corp.
d.
Lasco
4. Faucets:
a.
American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products
b.
Chicago Faucet Co.
C.
Delta Faucet Co./Cambridge Brass
d.
Elkay Mfg. Co.
C.
Kohler Co.
f.
T & S Brass
g.
Sloan Valve Co.
15440 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
5. Flush Valves:
a. Sloan Valve Co.
6. Water Closet Seats:
a. Bemis Mfg. Co.
b. Beneke Corp.
C. Forbes -Wright Industries, Inc.; Church Products
d. Olsonite Corp.; Olsonite Seats
7. Water Coolers:
a. Elkay Mfg. Co.
b. Halsey Taylor Division; Household International Co.
C. Haws Drinking Faucet Co.
d. Sunroc Corp.
e. Oasis
8. Service Sinks:
a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products
b. Crane Co.
C. Kohler Co.
9. Fixture Supports:
a. Josam Mfg. Co.
b. Wade
C. Jay R. Smith
d. Zurn Industries, Inc.
10. Mop Service Basins and Shower Receptors:
a. Florestone
b. Fiat
C. Stem -Williams
11. Shower and Tub Trim (Thermostatic):
a. Powers
b. Leonard
C. Symmons
d. T & S Brass
e. Bradley
12. Shower and Tub Trim (Pressure Balance):
a.
American Standard
b.
Kohler
C.
Powers
d.
Symmons
e.
Chicago Faucets
f.
T & S Brass
g.
Delta Faucet Co./Cambridge Brass
h.
Bradley
15440 - 3
TECENICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
13. Food Waste Disposers:
a. In-Sink-Erator
b. Waste King
C. Whirlaway
14. ADA Sink/Lavatory Pipe Insulation:
a. Truebro
b. Brocar
15. Stops, Supplies, Drains and P-Traps:
a.
McGuire
b.
Dearborn
C.
Brass Craft
d.
American Standard
e.
Kohler
16. Stainless Steel Security Fixtures:
a. Acorn
b. Bradley
2.2 WATER CLOSETS
A. WC-1 Water Closet —Wall Mounted —Flush Valve
Vitreous china, wall mounted, siphon jet action, elongated bowl, 1-1/2 inch top inlet
spud, 2-inch ballpass trapway, 1.6 gpf.
Crane No. 3446
2. Flush Valve:
a. Lever Type: Exposed type, quiet action, flush valve, all brass, chrome
plated, ADA compliant, oscillating non hold open handle, 1-inch
screwdriver angle stop with vandal resistant cap, vacuum breaker, 1-1/2 inch
flushing connection with tailpiece, spud coupling for 1-1/2 inch top spud,
wall and spud flanges, sweat solder adapter kit, 1.6 gpf.
Sloan Royal I I I
3. Seat: Elongated open front, less cover. Solid plastic, high impact, commercial weight
stainless steel hinge posts self-sustaining check hinge. Color shall match fixture.
Beneke No. 523-SS
4. Carrier. Commercial grade adjustable, factory painted, cast iron face plate, support
base, and appropriate type waste fitting having face plate gasket; zinc plated steel
fixture studs and fasteners, coated and threaded adjustable wall coupling with
neoprene closet outlet gasket, and chrome plated fixture cap nuts and fiber fixture
washers.
15440 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
D"ION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. WC-2 Water Closet — Wall Mounted — Flush Valve — ADA Accessible
1. Vitreous china, wall mounted, 17-inch to 19-inch from finished floor to top of seat,
siphon jet action, elongated bowl, 1-1/2 inch top inlet spud, 2-inch ballpass trapway,
1.6 gpf, locate flush valve handle on wide side of stall.
Crane No. 3446
2. Flush Valve:
a. Lever Type: Exposed type, quiet action, flush valve, all brass, chrome
plated, ADA compliant, oscillating non hold open handle, 1-inch
screwdriver angle stop with vandal resistant cap, vacuum breaker, l-1/2 inch
flushing connection with tailpiece, spud coupling for 1-1/2 inch top spud,
wall and spud flanges, sweat solder adapter kit, 1.6 gpf.
Sloan Royal 111
3. Seat: Elongated open front, less cover. Solid plastic, high impact, commercial
weight stainless steel hinge posts self-sustaining check hinge. Color shall match
fixture.
Beneke No. 523-SS
4. Carrier: Commercial grade adjustable, factory painted, cast iron face plate, support
base, and appropriate type waste fitting having face plate gasket; zinc plated steel
fixture studs and fasteners; coated and threaded adjustable wall coupling with
neoprene closet outlet gasket; and chrome plated fixture cap nuts and fiber fixture
washers.
C. WC-3 Water Closet — Wall Mounted — Flush Valve
1. Vitreous china, floor mounted, siphon jet action, elongated bowl, 1-1/2 inch top inlet
spud, 2-inch ballpass trapway, 1.6 gpf.
Crane No. 3446
2. Flush Valve:
a. Sensor Type: Hard Wired: Exposed type, quiet action, flush valve, all
brass, chrome plated, infrared sensor operated, I -inch screwdriver angle stop
with vandal resistant cap, vacuum breaker, 1-1/2 inch flushing connection
with tailpiece, spud coupling for 1-1/2 inch top spud, wall and spud flanges,
sweat solder adapter, 1.6 gpf, conforms to ADA requirements, flush override
button, solid state electronic circuitry, two (2) chrome plated wall covers
with vandal resistant screws, solenoid operator, and transformer, 120
VAC/24 VAC 50 VA.
Sloan Royal Optima No. 111 ES-S with Transformer EL-154
3. Seat: Elongated open front, less cover. Solid plastic, high impact, commercial
weight stainless steel hinge posts self-sustaining check hinge. Color shall match
fixture.
15440 - s
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Beneke No. 523-SS
4. Carrier. Commercial grade adjustable, factory painted, cast iron face plate, support
base, and appropriate type waste fitting having face plate gasket; zinc plated steel
fixture studs and fasteners; coated and threaded adjustable wall coupling with
neoprene closet outlet gasket; and chrome plated fixture cap nuts and fiber fixture
washers.
D. WC-4 Water Closet — Wall Mounted — Flush Valve — ADA Accessible
1. Vitreous china, floor mounted, 17-inch to 19-inch from finished floor to top of seat,
siphon jet action, elongated bowl, 1-1/2 inch top inlet spud, 2-inch ballpass trapway,
1.6 gpf, locate trip lever on wide side of stall.
Crane No. 3446
2. Flush Valve:
a. Sensor Type: Hard Wired: Exposed type, quiet action, flush valve, all
brass, chrome plated, infrared sensor operated, 1-inch screwdriver angle stop
with vandal resistant cap, vacuum breaker, 1-1/2 inch flushing connection
with tailpiece, spud coupling for 1-1/2 inch top spud, wall and spud flanges,
sweat solder adapter, 1.6 gpf, conforms to ADA requirements, flush override
button, solid state electronic circuitry, two (2) chrome plated wall covers
with vandal resistant screws, solenoid operator, and transformer, 120
VAC/24 VAC 50 VA.
Sloan Royal Optima No. 111 ES-S with Transformer EL-154
3. Seat: Elongated open front, less cover. Solid plastic, high impact, commercial
weight stainless steel hinge posts self-sustaining check hinge. Color shall match
fixture.
Beneke No. 523-S
4. Carrier: Commercial grade adjustable, factory painted, cast iron face plate, support
base, and appropriate type waste fitting having face plate gasket; zinc plated steel
fixture studs and fasteners; coated and threaded adjustable wall coupling with
neoprene closet outlet gasket; and chrome plated fixture cap nuts and fiber fixture
washers.
2.3 URINALS (Waterless)
A. UR-1
Vitreous china, wall mounted, no -flush, elongated rim. Mount at ADA height.
Provide 2-inch drain outlet and rough -in according to manufacturer's instructions.
2-Inch brass flange to be included. Provide support as specified in the following
articles.
15440 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Sloan WES 1000 or Falcon
2. Urinal Support: Commercial grade supports for urinals shall have steel top and
bottom plates with bolts to support fixture independently from the wall; adjustable
sleeves, steel tubular uprights bolted to floor and alignment trusses, steel plates with
adjustable holes, bolts, nuts, and chrome plated cap nuts and washers. Top
supporting plates shall have cutouts when used with back inlet urinals.
3. Provide additional cartridge kit WES-150.
2.4 LAVATORIES
A. L-1 Oval, Counter Mounted - ADA Accessible
Vitreous china, 19-inch x 16-1/4 inch self -rimming oval countertop lavatory with
front overflow, fitting ledge, template and sealant. Faucet holes on 4-inch centers.
Mount in compliance with ADA Accessibility requirements.
Crane No. 1283V
2. Faucet:
a. Center Set Faucet, Open Grid Drain, Sensored
4-Inch electronic lavatory fitting with infrared sensor, cast brass spout and
forged brass cover plate, provide transformer to convert line voltage to 6 volt
DV, 0.5 GPM vandal resistant spray outlet, chrome plate finish.
Open grid drain assembly, chrome plated brass with 1-1/4 inch offset type
tailpiece.
Chicago Faucet Model #650-4
3. Insulation Kit: Install on tailpiece, P-trap, trap arm, supplies and stops. As
manufactured by Truebro.
B. L-2 Wall Mounted, ADA Accessible
Vitreous china, 20-1/2 inch x 18-1/4 inch, wall mounted lavatory with front
overflow, integral back and made for concealed arm supports. Faucet holes on 4-inch
centers. Mounted in compliance with ADA requirements.
Crane No. 1165 V
2. Faucet:
a. Center Set Faucet, Open Grid Drain, Sensored
4-Inch electronic lavatory fitting with infrared sensor, cast brass spout and
forged brass cover plate, provide transformer to convert line voltage to 6 volt
DV, 0.5 GPM vandal resistant spray outlet, chrome plate finish.
15440 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUHIEMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.21 LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Contractor shall properly lubricate all mechanical pieces of equipment which he provided
before turning the building over to the Owner. He shall attach a linen tag or heavy duty
shipping tag on the piece of equipment showing the date of lubrication and the type and brand
of lubricant used.
C. Furnish the Engineer with a typewritten list in quadruplicate, of each item lubricated and type
of lubricant used, no later than two (2) weeks before completion of the project, or at time of
acceptance by the Owner of a portion of the building and the mechanical systems involved.
1.22 DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. During the demolition phase of this Contract, it is the responsibility of this Contractor to
carefully remove existing equipment, piping or ductwork and related items either as shown on
the demolition drawings as being removed, or as required for the work. These items shall be
tagged, protected from damage, and stored as directed by the Architect. A list of all items
stored shall be turned over to the Architect. At the completion of the remodeling work or
when directed by the Architect, all stored items not reused or wanted by the Owner shall be
removed from the premises. Disposition of items not reused is by the direction of the
Architect.
1. Relocate existing thermostats and humidistats wherever possible.
2. Return all demolished control valves and devices to the Owner.
3. Return existing control valves to the Owner (do not damage fins).
4. Return existing plumbing fixtures to the Owner.
5. Return existing medical gas outlets to the Owner.
6. Return existing unused/not relocated slot ceiling diffusers to the Owner.
C. The location of existing equipment, pipes, ductwork, etc., shown on the drawings has been
taken from existing drawings and is, therefore, only as accurate as that information. All
existing conditions shall be verified from field measurements with necessary adjustment being
made to the drawing information.
D. If asbestos material, in any form, is discovered by this Contractor in the process of his work,
he shall report such occurrence to the Architect immediately. The Architect will determine
the action to be taken for the asbestos removal, which is not a part of the work to be done
under this Division.
1.23 WARRANTIES
A. Refer to Division 1 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to
individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. In any case, the entire
mechanical system shall be warranted no less than one (1) year from the time of acceptance by
the Owner.
15010-11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Open grid drain assembly, chrome plated brass with 1-1/4 inch offset type
tailpiece.
Chicago Faucet Model #6504
3. Support: Commercial grade cast iron supports, having tubular steel uprights with
concealed arms and sleeves, mounted on adjustable headers and complete with heavy
cast iron short feet bolted to floor, alignment trusses, and mounting fasteners.
4. Insulation Kit: Install on tailpiece, P-trap, trap arm, supplies and stops. As
manufactured by Truebro.
2.5 SHOWERS
A. SH-1
1. Valve: Pressure -balancing, single -control, brass body. Valve shall mix water from
OFF -COLD -HOT and include a high -temperature limit stop set at 110 degree F.
Pressure -balancing mechanism shall be one-piece diaphragm cartridge. Provide
screwdriver stops.
Kohler No. K-304-KS
2. Valve Trim: Polished chrome, all metal lever handle and matching escutcheon.
Kohler No. K-T158734K
Kohler No. K-158554M
3. Shower Head: Polished chrome, all brass with chrome plated wall escutcheon.
Discharge shall be 1.5 gpm.
4. Drain: Round cast iron body with flashing collar and cast iron ring, 6-inch round
nickel bronze adjustable strainer head with secured square hole grate, bottom waste
outlet.
Jay R. Smith Fig. 2005-A
B. SH-2
1. Valve: Pressure -balancing, single -control, brass body. Valve shall mix water from
OFF -COLD -HOT and include a high -temperature limit stop set at 110 degree F.
Pressure -balancing mechanism shall be one-piece diaphragm cartridge. Provide
screwdriver stops.
Kohler No. K-304-KS
2. Valve Trim: Polished chrome, all metal lever handle and matching escutcheon.
Kohler No. K-T15873-4K
Kohler No. K-15855-4M
15440 - 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3. Hand -Shower Kit: Two (2) wall brackets, slide bar and 69-inch metal shower hose
with in -line vacuum breaker. Discharge shall be 1.5 gpm.
4. Drain: Round cast iron body with flashing collar and cast iron ring, 6-inch round
nickel bronze adjustable strainer head with secured square hole grate, bottom waste
outlet.
Jay R. Smith Fig. 2005-A
2.6 SINKS
A. S-1 Single Compartment
1. 18 Gauge, Type 304 stainless steel 15-inch x 15-inch O.D., compartment size 9-inch
x 12-inch x 6-inch; self -rimming ledge back, thoroughly sound deadened, with 3-hole
punching for faucet on 4-inch center.
Just No. SL-1515-A-GR
2. Faucet:
a. Single Compartment Sink Fitting, Gooseneck Spout, Wrist Blade Handles
All brass concealed type supply faucet with ceramic disc valving, three-piece
cover escutcheons, 5-3/8 inch x 9-3/4 inch high gooseneck swing spout with
1/2 gpm aerator outlet, 4-inch wrist blade handles, 1/2-inch male thread
inlets 4-inch on center with coupling nuts, chrome plated and exterior finish,
vandal proof.
Chicago Faucet No. 895-317
3-1/2 Inch diameter drain fitting basket type stainless steel with 1-1/2 inch
stainless steel tailpiece.
B. S-2 Double Compartment
18 Gauge, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel 19-inch x 33-inch O.D. with two (2)
compartments at 14-inch x 14-inch x 7-1/2 inch each; self -rimming ledge -back,
thoroughly sound deadened, with 3-hole punching for faucet.
Just No. DL-1933-A-GR
2. Faucets:
a. Double Compartment Sink Fitting, Low Profile Swing Spout, Single Lever
Handle
All brass concealed type supply faucet with ceramic disc valving, one-piece
top cover escutcheons, 8-1/8 inch low profile cast brass swing spout with 0.5
aerator outlet, single metal lever handle, 1/2-inch male thread inlet with
coupling nuts, chrome plated exterior finish.
15440 - 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
Chicago Faucet No. 2300-8CP
3-1/2 Inch diameter drain fitting basket type stainless steel with 1-1/2 inch
stainless steel tailpiece.
3. Disposer. 3/4 HP, food waste disposer with auto -reversing motor, stainless steel
grinding chamber, stainless steel shredder, stainless steel stopper with anti -splash
baffle, dishwasher drain connection, sound absorbing outer shell, overload protection
and electrical cord with grounded plug; unit to have five (5) year warranty.
In Sink-Erator Model PRO SS
C. MSB-1 Mop Service Basin
1. Precast terrazzo 24-inch x 24-inch x 12-inch deep, O.D., service basin with 3-inch
integrally cast brass or stainless steel drain with removable stainless steel or nickel
bronze strainer. Provide stainless steel guards on all sides.
Provide and install 12-inch high, stainless steel splash panels to protect walls above
rim.
Florestone Model 30-LHIRH
2. Faucet: Wall mounted, all brass supply faucet, 10-inch spout with wall brace,
3/4-inch male hose thread outlet and vacuum breaker, lever handles, loose key stops
in shanks, wall flanges and 1/2-inch female thread inlets, chrome plated finish.
Chicago Faucet No. 897-R
2.7 WATER COOLERS
A. EWC-1 Wall Mounted Electric Water Coolers — High/Low Barrier Free
Units shall be factory assembled and tested, listed and labeled in compliance with UL
Standard 399, and have capacities rated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 18,
and ARI Standard 1010.
2. Cabinet: Surface mounted, heavy gauge, welded steel cabinet, with removable front
panel and hangar bracket for wall mounting. Cabinet finish and color as selected by
the Architect.
3. Tops: Deep basin, anti -splash, smoothly contoured stainless steel with raised bubbler
mount, chrome plated brass strainer, and 1-1/4 inch tailpiece.
4. Bubblers and Valves: Chrome plated brass, automatic stream control, pushbutton
valve with bubbler designed to provide uniform stream without spurting. Push bars
shall not be plastic.
5. Refrigeration System: Refrigerant R-134A, hermetically sealed, capillary tube. All
joints lead free silver soldered.
15440 -10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
6. Compressor: Hermetically sealed, with automatic reset overload protection.
7. Condenser: Air-cooled.
8. Cooling Unit: Tube type, self-cleaning, continuous coil of seamless copper.
9. Temperature Control: Thermostat with adjustable range of 45 degree F to 55 degree
F.
10. Electrical Characteristics: 115 Volts, 60 Hz, 1/6 HP, 3.0 amperes, provide 3-prong
power lead-in cord.
11. Capacity: 8.0 gph of 50 degree F water, with ambient temperature of 90 degree F,
and 80 degree F entering water temperature.
12. Connections: Provide trap, and supply and stop as specified in the Articles below.
13. Provide 4-inch air space on both sides of unit for cooling air flow.
14. Mounting: Commercial grade cast iron supports, having tubular steel uprights,
mounted on adjustable headers and complete with heavy cast iron short feet bolted to
floor, alignment trusses, and mounting fasteners.
Haws Model No. HWUAC8LSS
2.8 FITTINGS, TRIM, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Supplies and Stops for Lavatories and Sinks: Polished chrome -plated, loose keyed angle stop
having 1/2-inch inlet and 3/8-inch O.D. x 12-inch long flexible tubing outlet, and wall flange
and chrome plated cast brass escutcheon with set screw. Quantity to match trim specified.
B. Traps for Drinking Fountains and Lavatories: Chrome plated cast brass, 1-1/4 inch adjustable
"P" trap with cleanout, waste to wall and chrome plated cast brass escutcheon with set screw.
C. Traps for Sinks: Chrome plated cast brass, 1-1/2 inch adjustable "P" trap with cleanout, waste
to wall and chrome plated cast brass escutcheon with set screw.
D. Escutcheons: Chrome -plated cast brass with set screw.
E. All handicapped lavatories, supplies and waste shall be insulated with molded vinyl covers,
Truebro Inc. Lav-Guard Insulation Kit or equivalent by approved manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be
installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the
referenced standards.
15440 -11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CrrY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERsrrY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Examine rough -in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of
piping connections prior to installing fixtures.
C. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written
instructions, rough -in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and
the referenced standards.
B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI Al17.1 and Public Law 90-480 with
respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. Arrange flush valve handles
with proper orientation to meet ADA requirements.
C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind or
within wall construction to provide rigid installation.
D. Set shower receptor and mop basins in a leveling bed of cement grout.
E. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture.
F. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations
and within cabinets and millwork
G. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant as specified in Section 07900. Match
sealant color to fixture color.
H. Visible parts of fixture brass and accessories shall be chrome plated.
External finishes on all trim shall not be chrome plated plastic.
Where possible, fixtures shall be the product of one manufacturer. Where possible, fittings of
same type shall be the product of one manufacturer.
K. Install hose end faucets and hose connection with vacuum breakers.
L. Solidly attach floor -mounted water closets to floor with hex expansion shield of cast iron
closet flanges.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units
are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.
B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.
15440 -12
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to
provide proper flow and stream.
B. Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.
C. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, water coolers, and trim.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless expressly approved in writing by
the Owner.
3.7 MOUNTING HEIGHTS SCHEDULE
A. Fixture mounting height and rough -in dimensions shall be as indicated on the Architectural
Drawings and Specifications.
END OF SECTION 15440
15440 -13
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section consists of furnishing and installing piping systems associated with heating,
chilled, and condenser water systems.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASME B31.9 (Building Service Piping Code) for materials, products,
installation, and testing.
B. Pipe and Fitting Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture
of pipes and pipe fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
C. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
D. Before any welding is performed, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer,
a copy of the Manufacturer's Record of Welder or Welding Operator Qualification Tests
and his Welding Procedure Specification together with the Procedure Qualification
Record as required by Section IX of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
E. The types and extent of non-destructive examinations required for pipe welds are as
shown in Table 136.4 of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 —
Power Piping. If requirements for non-destructive examination are to be other than that
stated above, the degree of examination, and basis for rejection shall be a matter of prior
written agreement between the fabricator, or contractor and the purchaser.
F. Each manufacturer or contractor shall be responsible for the quality of welding done by
his organization and shall repair or replace any work not in accordance with these
specifications.
G. Soldering and Brazing Procedures shall conform to ANSI B9.1 Standard Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
B. Welding Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.
C. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.
15510-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 -HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. Additionally, submit the following
information:
1. Valve Schedule for all Valves. For each valve, list valve designation number,
valve type, size, location, and function.
2. Written report certifying leak testing.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. General: Working pressure and temperature maximums, 125 psi and 250 degrees F;
water service.
B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B88, hard -drawn copper tube, Type K for below ground lines and
Type L for above ground lines.
1. Fittings:
a. Wrought copper solder joint fittings, ASME B 16.22
b. Bronze pipe flanges/fittings, ANSI B 16.24 (Class 150 and 300)
2. Joining Material:
a. Solder:
1) ASTM B32, 95-5 tin -antimony, Grade 95TA
2) ASTM B32 (NSF), Silver -Tin -Copper Alloy
b. Brazing: AWS A5.8, for underground lines and where copper pipe is
connected to brass.
1) Copper phosphorus-Bcup
2) Silver-BAg
3. Unions: ASME B 16.22-95. Wrought copper solder joint, ground seat.
4. Dielectric Connections: Fittings having insulating material isolating joined
dissimilar metals.
a. Unions: 175 psi minimum working pressure, ends to match connections.
b. Waterway Fittings:
1) ASTM-A53 Xinc electroplated steel pipe casing with inert, non-
corrosive thermoplastic lining (NSF/FDA listed).
2) Thread x thread ends 1/2-inch x 3-inch through 4-inch x 6-inch.
3) Groove x thread ends 1/2-inch x 4-inch through 4-inch x 6-inch.
4) Listed by IAPMO/UPC and SBCC PST and ESI.
5) Dielectric unions are not an acceptable substitute for dielectric
waterway fittings.
C. Steel Pipe:
1. ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black steel pipe. (Grade B, Type E, electric resistance
welded) (Grade B, Type S or A106 high temperature; seamless)
2. Fittings:
15510-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
a. Threaded: ASME B 16.4, Class 125, cast iron, or ASME B 16.3, Class
150, malleable -iron. Standard pattern for threaded joints. Threads shall
conform to ASME B 1.20.1-83.
b. Flanged: ASME B 16.1, Class 125, cast iron, raised ground face, bolt
holes spot faced.
1) Gaskets: ANSI B16.21, full-faced for cast iron flanges, raised
face for steel flanges.
C. Welded: All Piping 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: ASTM A234, standard
weight, seamless black steel, butt weld.
3. Unions: ASME B 16.39-86, malleable -iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with
ball-and-socket joints, metal -to -metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded
ends.
4. Dielectric Connections: Construct to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic
action, and prevent corrosion.
a. Unions: Threaded or soldered end connections for the pipe materials in
which installed.
b. Waterway Fittings:
1) ASTM-A53 Xinc electroplated steel pipe casing with inert, non-
corrosive thermoplastic lining (NSF/FDA listed).
2) Thread x thread ends 1/2-inch x 3-inch through 4-inch x 6-inch.
3) Groove x thread ends 1/2-inch x 4-inch through 4-inch x 6-inch.
4) Listed by lAPMO/UPC and SBCC PST and ESI.
5) Dielectric unions are not an acceptable substitute for dielectric
waterway fittings.
C. Flanged Connection: Dielectric gasket and bolt kit.
D. Flexible Pipe Connectors: As specified in Section 15241.
E. Grooved Piping Products:
1. Coupling Housings: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or
shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to
create seal. Cast in two (2) or more parts, secure together during assembly with
nuts and bolts.
a. Malleable iron: ASTM A47.
b. Ductile iron: ASTM A536.
2. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that
internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers
having properties as designated by ASTM D2000.
a. Water Services: EDPM Grade E, with Green color code identification.
b. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer.
3. Bolts and Nuts: Heat -treated carbon steel, ASTM A183, minimum tensile
110,000 psi.
4. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical
couplings.
a. Malleable Iron: ASTM A47
b. Ductile Iron: ASTM A536
C. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A53, carbon steel, Schedule 40, Type F, for
3/4-inch to 4-inch; Type E or S, Grade B for 5-inch to 20-inch.
d. Steel: ASTM A234
15510-3
4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PH'ING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
5. Grooves: Conform to the following:
a. Standard Steel: Square cut
b. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved
C. Cast Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C606
6. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a. Victaulic
b. Gruvlok
2.2 VALVES
A. General:
1. Comply with MSS-92 1980 "Valve Users Manual".
2. Sizes: Provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. Size control valves for
required flow.
B. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to
allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation.
C. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45.
D. End Connections: As specified in the individual valves specifications.
1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B2.1.
2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and
ANSI B 16.24 for bronze.
3. Solder -Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18. Where soldered end connections are
used, use solder having a melting point below 840 degree F for gate, globe, and
check valves and below 421 degree F for ball valves.
E. Ball Valves:
1. 3-Inch and Smaller: MSS-SP-110, 150 psi SWP, 600 psi BOG, two-piece
ASTM B584 cast bronze body, full port, chrome plated brass/bronze ball, TFE
seats, anti -blowout stem separate packnut with adjustable stem packing,
extended stem, and vinyl covered steel handle. Threaded or soldered end
connections.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Nibco T/S 585-70
b. Crane
C. Apollo (Conbraco)
d. Stockham
e. Walworth
F. Eccentric Plug Valves:
1. 2-Inch and Smaller: 150 psi, bronze body; resilient plug, stainless steel bearings,
cast iron end, Vitron packing, PTFE U-ring seal, resilient plug facing, square
head, level actuator, threaded ends. Provide memory stop feature. Do not use
for natural gas services.
15510-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 15, into the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to
include date or beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names,
addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty
services.
1.24 CLEANING
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Refer to Division 15, "TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING" for requirements for
cleaning filters, strainers, and mechanical systems prior to final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 15010
15010-12
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) DeZurik Fig. 120
2. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger Sizes: 125 psi, cast iron body, resilient plug, stainless
steel bearings, Buna packing, PTFE U-ring seal, resilient plug facings, lever
actuators, except hand wheels where indicated, and flanged ends. Provide
memory stop feature. Do not use for natural gas services.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) DeZurik Fig. 11
2) Milliken
3) Homestead
G. Globe Valves:
1. 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150, ASTM B62 bronze body and
bonnet, TFE seat disc and malleable iron or ductile iron hand wheel, union
bonnet, non -asbestos packing, silicon bronze ASTM B371 or low -zinc alloy
B-99 stem. Threaded or soldered end connections.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Nibco T/S 235-4
2) Milwaukee
3) Jenkins
4) Stockham
5) Lunkenheimer
6) Crane
7) Walworth
2. 3-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, ASTM A126, Class B cast iron body
and bolted bonnet, cast bronze or cast iron disc and cast iron or malleable iron
hand wheel, non -asbestos packing, bronze trimmed, OS&Y. Flanged end
connection
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Nibco F718-B
2) Milwaukee
3) Jenkins
4) Stockham
5) Lunkenheimer
6) Crane
7) Walworth
H. Butterfly Valves:
1. 4-Inch and Larger: MSS-SP-67, ASTM A126, Class B fully lugged cast iron
body, ASTM B 148 aluminum bronze disc, ASTM A582 416 stainless steel stem,
EPDM liner, bronze bearings, non-metallic bushing and NBR stem seals. Rated
for 250 psi bi-directional shutoff and 250 psi dead-end service with downstream
piping removed. Provide extended neck for insulation. Sizes 4" — 6" shall be
lever operated with 10-position throttling plate; sizes 8-inch and larger shall
have weatherproof gear operators.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers
15510-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1)
Keystone Figure 222
2)
Jamesberry
3)
Milwaukee
4)
DeZurik
I. Check Valves:
Swing Check Valve:
a. 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 150 SWP, ASTM B62
bronze body and bonnet, horizontal swing design, Y-pattern, with TFE
seat disc. Threaded or soldered end connections.
1) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Nibco T/S 433-Y
b) Milwaukee
c) Grinnell
d) Stockham
b. 3-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125, ASTM A126 Class B cast
iron body with bronze trim, non -asbestos gasket, horizontal swing, and
flanged ends.
1) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Nibco F918-B
b) Milwaukee
c) Stockham
d) Hammond
e) Grinnell
J. Drain Valve: Ball valve with threaded hose end and cap with chain. Apollo Fig.
78-100/78-200 Series
K. Balancing Valves: 400 psig, bronze body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats, blowout
proof stem, and venturi section. Provide with integral valved readout ports and memory
stop. Size valve to provide a 7-inch to 25-inch W.G. meter reading at full scheduled
flow.
1. Flow Set AccuSetter Model AP or AS. Provide with the following Options:
a. Ball Blowdown/Drain
b. Stem Extender
C. Extended Pressure/Temperature Ports
L. Safety Relief Valves:
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the manufacturers listed:
a. Amtrol
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
C. Kunkle Valve Co., Inc.
d. Lonergan
e. Lunkenheimer Co.
15510-6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
f. Watts
2. Diaphragm operated, cast iron or brass body valve, with low inlet pressure check
valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown and non -corrosive valve
seat and stem; 125 psig working pressure and 250 degree maximum operating
temperature. Valve designed, built, rated, and stamped in accordance with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Select valve to suit actual system
pressure and BTU capacity. Factory set valve to relieve at 10 psi above
operating pressure with field adjustment capabilities.
M. Automatic Fill Valve:
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the manufacturers listed:
a. Amtrol
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
C. Kunkle Valve Co., Inc.
d. Lonergan
e. Lunkenheimer Co.
f. Watts
N. Diaphragm operated, cast iron or brass body, fill valve designed to maintain water
pressure in a closed water system. Valve includes cleanable strainer, removable seat
assembly, purge lever for quick filling, and built-in check valve. Adjustment range of 10
to 25 psig. Maximum operating temperature shall be 225 degrees F, maximum working
pressure of 125 psig.
O. Backflow Preventer: As specified in Section 15411.
2.3 PIPING ACCESSORIES
A. Test Taps:
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Fairfax Company
b. Peterson Engineering Company
C. Universal Lancaster
d. Sisco
e. MG Piping Products Company
2. Combination pressure and temperature test taps consisting of 1/4-inch or
1/2-inch nickel plated brass body, MPT fitting designed to receive either
temperature or pressure probe, and gasketed and threaded cap with retention
chain.
B. Drain Pans: Minimum 18 gauge stainless steel, reinforced to support weight of drain pan
and water. Provide not less than 2-inch deep, with a 3/4-inch drain connection.
15510-7
W
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.4 EXPANSION TANKS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers listed:
1. Amtrol, Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
4. Taco, Inc.
B. Diaphragm Type: Welded steel tank suitable for 125 prig working pressure, 350 degrees
maximum operating temperature; constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with
ASME Pressure Vessel Code. Flexible diaphragm separates air charge from system
water. Include taps for pressure gauge, air charge fitting, and drain.
2.5 STRAINERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers listed:
1. R-P&C Valve; Division White Consolidated Industries, Inc.
2. Armstrong Machine Works
3. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Division
4. Keckley
5. Spirax Sarco
B. Wye Pattern Strainers: 125 prig working pressure, cast iron or bronze construction,
complete with bottom drain connection and removable Type 304 stainless steel screens
with 3/64-inch perforations at 233 per square inch.
C. Basket Strainers:
For 125 psig or less working pressure and pipe sizes 16-inches and less: High
tensile ASTM A126B Class B cast iron, angle design, flanged end connections,
ductile iron clamped cover, perforated Type 304 stainless steel basket, with
3/64-inch perforations at 233 per square inch, and bottom drain connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. 2-Inches and Smaller:
1. Black Steel: Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings.
2. Copper Pipe:
a. Install Type L copper pipe with wrought copper fittings and solder
joints, above ground, within building.
b. Install Type K copper pipe with wrought copper fittings and brazed alloy
joints below ground.
15510-8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Install black steel pipe.
1. Welded and Flanged Joints: Install welded fittings on pipe 2-1/2 inches and
larger.
2. Grooved Couplings and Mechanical Fittings: Install mechanical grooved end
pipe on condenser water piping.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Arrange piping in horizontal groups, each group to be in one plane. Maintain indicated
slope.
B. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below
grade or floors.
C. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements
of the building. Install piping parallel to permanent elements of building. Provide space
to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance outside insulation. Provide
2-inch space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
D. Fire and Smoke Wall Penetrations: Maintain the fire and smoke rated integrity where
pipes pass through fire and smoke rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors. Refer to
Section 15120.
E. Sloping, Air Venting, and Draining:
1. Install piping true to line and grade, and free of traps and air pockets. Install
piping level except for gravity flow systems such as condenser water and
condensate drain piping.
2. Connect branch piping to bottom of mains, except for up -feed risers, which shall
have take -off out top of main.
3. Install manual air vents at high points in hydronic piping systems and at all coils.
Provide 1/4-inch copper, 180 degree bend pipe to discharge vented water into
can.
4. Install automatic air vent on air separator and where shown. Provide valved inlet
and route discharge pipe to floor drain.
5. Install drain valves with hose adapters at low points in mains, risers, and branch
lines. Drain consists of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch
threaded nipple and cap.
F. Fittings: Standard manufactured fittings. Field fabricated fittings and bushings are
prohibited on all piping.
G. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side
up.
H. Unions: Install unions in pipes 2-inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final
connections of each piece of equipment and elsewhere to permit alterations and repairs.
Install dielectric unions to join dissimilar metals. Unions are not required on flanged
devices. DO NOT USE DIELECTRIC UNIONS ON HEATING WATER SYSTEMS.
15510-9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
I. Flanges: Install flanges on valves and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger
connections.
J. Joints:
1. Threaded Joints: Apply Teflon tape to male equipment threads. Do not use pipe
with threads that are corroded or damaged.
2. Soldered Joints: Comply with AWS Soldering Manual-98.
K. Keep openings in piping closed during construction to prevent entrance of foreign
matter.
L. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to base -mounted pumps and
other vibration producing equipment.
M. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other
electrical spaces.
3.3 VALVES
A. Field check valves for packing and lubricant. Replace leaking packing. Service valves
with lubricant for smooth and proper operation before placing in service.
B. Install valves accessible from floor level, located for easy access.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Install valves in
position to allow full stem movement. Provide operating handles for valves and cocks
without integral operators.
D. Provide extended valve stems where insulation is specified.
E. Provide separate support where necessary.
F. Do not use valves with soldered ends for heating water piping applications.
G. Where soldered end connections are used for valves, use solder having a melting point
below 840 degrees F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 degrees F for ball
valves.
H. Provide valves same size as line size.
I. Provide drain valves and hose adapters at strainers for blowoff; same size as strainer
blowoff connection.
7. Provide mechanical actuators with chain operators where valves 2-1/2 inches and larger
are mounted more than 6-feet above the floor. Extend chains to elevation of 5-feet above
floor.
15510-10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.4
3.5
K. Check Valves:
Install check valves for proper direction of flow as follows:
a. Swing Check Valve: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
b. Wafer Check Valve: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
L. Valve End Selection: Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube
connections:
1. Copper Tube Size 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except in heating hot water
provide threaded ends.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes 2-Inch and Smaller: Threaded or grooved -end.
3. Steel Pipe.Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Flanged or grooved end.
4. At all piping hot taps provide a gate valve with the hot tap and a butterfly valve
for shutoff service. Hot taps shall be provided only where approved by the
Engineer.
M. Valve Application: Install valves in accordance with the following table.
SERVICE
VALVE TYPE
Hydronic Isolation; 3" and Smaller
Ball Valve
Hydronic Isolation; 4" and Larger
Butterfly Valve
Hydronic Throttling or Bypass Valve; All Sizes
Globe Valve
H dronic Balancing Valve; 2" and Smaller
Balancing Valve
Hydronic Balancing Valve; 2-1/2" and Larger
Eccentric Plug Valve or Butterfly
Valve.
Hydronic Pump Discharge Check Valves; 2" and
Smaller
Swing Check
Hydronic Pump Discharge Check Valve; 2-1/2"
and Laz er
Wafer Check Valve
EQUIPMENT PIPING
A. Provide combination balancing and shutoff valves to regulate water flow through piping,
coils, and at other equipment and piping where shown or required for proportioning flow.
B. Install automatic fill valve in cold water make-up to boilers and chillers. Install three -
valve bypass with globe valve around automatic fill valve for quick filling system.
Install backflow preventer upstream of fill valve and bypass.
DRAIN PANS
A. Install drain pan under the entire length of any piping, including valves, joints, and
fittings installed over motor, motor starter, switch gear, transformer, or other electrical
equipment and under all piping located anywhere in any transformer vault, electrical
15510-11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrI'Y
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
switchboard room, and telephone equipment room. Pipe drain connection to discharge
where shown or at nearest floor drain.
3.6 TESTING
A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing including pump and gauges. Test
before insulation is installed. Test piping to be concealed prior to permanent enclosure.
B. Provide the Engineer a minimum of twenty-four hours notice of dates when acceptance
test will be conducted. Conduct tests in presence of representative of agency having
jurisdiction.
C. Test piping systems using ambient temperature water, except where there is risk of
damage due to freezing. Engineer approval is required prior to testing if other than
hydostatic tests are used.
D. Use vents installed at high points in the direction of flow, in the system to release
trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete
removal of the liquid.
E. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are
properly isolated.
F. System Tests:
1. Hydrostatic Test: Pressurize the system to 100 psig or 1.5 times the design
pressure, whichever is greater. Maintain pressure until the entire system has
been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than four (4)
hours.
2. Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted for
hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions or existing building conditions
prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by the Engineer
prior to any testing. For tests of this type, subject the piping system to the gas
pressure indicated for that specific system. Maintain the test pressure for the
duration of a soapy water test of each joint.
3. Maintain test pressure until the entire system has been inspected for leaks, but in
no case less than four hours. Examine all piping, joints, and connections for
leakage.
G. Repair failed piping sections by disassembly and re -installation, using new materials to
extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop -leak compounds,
mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
H. Drain test water after testing and repair work has been completed.
I. Prepare written report of testing, indicating locations of leaks corrected, method used to
correct leaks, number of tests required, and certification that system is leak free. Provide
three (3) copies of test results.
15510-12
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Flush system with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.
B. After cleaning and flushing but before balancing, remove disposable fine mesh strainers
in pump suction diffusers.
3.8 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CHARACTERIZED FLOW CONTROL VALVES
A. Pressure Independent Characterized Flow Control Valves shall be factory set for flow
required and failure mode of operation. Field verification and documentation of flow by
local field representative shall be provided.
3.9 TRAINING
A. Provide two (2) hours of instruction on hydronic systems. Include following items as a
minimum:
1. Location of automatic and manual air vents.
2. Location of strainers and blow down valves.
3. Location of safety and relief valves.
4. System drain valves.
5. System fill and associated devices.
6. Expansion tank and air separator.
END OF SECTION 15510
15510-13
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15517 - GLYCOL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15517 - GLYCOL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Automatic glycol feed systems and inhibited propylene glycol solutions.
B. Coordinate exact requirements with CSU Facilities Management prior to bidding.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of glycol systems of
types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: Provide glycol system components and materials to meet all Local and
National Codes and Standards.
C. Provide one (1) year manufacturer's warranty.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions and dimensioned drawings.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists. Include this data, product
data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division
15.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit glycol solution strength test results.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 AUTOMATIC GLYCOL MAKE-UP SYSTEM
A. General: Provide factory assembled and leak tested glycol feed system with the following
components.
B. Tank: 50 Gallon polyethylene, removable cover, and required system connections. Support
with four -leg steel stand with four (4) bolt pads painted with oxide primer and enamel finish.
C. Pump: Bronze positive displacement rotary gear or turbine type, 1.5 GPM minimum flow rate
at 100 psi TDH, 1/3 HP ODP motor, 120/1/60.
D. Control: System automatically injects a glycol/water solution into hydronic loop based on a
drop in pressure in the loop. System shall be either pressure switch and pump, or pressure
regulating valve in combination with diaphragm tank pressure switch and pump. Low level
cut-off interlocked with pump.
15517-1
A
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15040 - MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECH EQUIPMENT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15040 - MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for Electrical Components for Mechanical
Equipment. These components include, but are not limited to, motors, starters, and
disconnect switches for mechanical equipment.
B. Wiring of field -mounted switches and similar mechanical -electrical devices provided for
mechanical systems, to equipment control panels.
C. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical
equipment are scheduled on the Electrical Drawings. In case of conflict, Electrical Drawings
shall take precedence. Do not purchase motors or electrical equipment until power
characteristics available at building site location have been confirmed by Contractor.
D. Refer to Table in Division 16 for Mechanical/Electrical Coordination.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motors, motor starters and drives
of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation
experience on projects utilizing electric motors, motor starters, capacitors and drives similar to
that required for this project.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 70E, "Standard for
Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces."
D. UL Compliance: Provide equipment and/or components which are UL-listed and labeled.
E. Standards:
l . NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators.
2. NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
3. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
4. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches.
5. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
F. Coordination with Electrical Work: Wherever possible, match elements of electrical
provisions of Mechanical Work with similar elements of Electrical Work specified in Division
15040-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSr1'Y
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15517 - GLYCOL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES P.C.
E. Pressure Switch: Field adjustable, 10-20 psi pressure range, factory set at 12 psi.
F. Pressure Relief Valve: Prevents over -pressure and relieves back to tank.
G. Pressure Gauge with isolation valve on discharge piping.
H. Low Level Switch: Mounted on solution tank.
I. Suction Piping: 1/2-Inch rubber hose or PVC piping with ball valve and Y strainer.
J. Discharge Piping: 1/2-Inch steel piping with MI fittings or rigid copper piping with brass
fittings. Provide pressure switch, ball valve, check valve, and relief valve on the pump
discharge.
K. Control Panel: Minimum NEMA 12 enclosure, HOA with running light and magnetic starter
for feed pump, alarm light and audible alarm and dry contacts for BAS connection for low
level, 8-foot power cord with grounded plug, all wiring routed in conduit.
L. Provide an extra 50 gallon drum of propylene glycol with transfer pump. Hand -operated
rotary type, 8'-0" long, 3/4-inch hose with 3/4-inch non -sparking nozzle, 1-inch telescoping
suction pipe, adaptor with 2-inch thread.
M. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. John Woods Company
2. Calcium Control
3. Sage Industries, Inc.
2.2 GLYCOL SOLUTION
A. Provide glycol solutions for the systems specified in the following table.
System
Percent Volume of
_Propylene GI col
Burst Protection
(de gree F)
Freeze Protection
(degree F)
Heating Water
AHU (Preheat Coils)
40%
-35
-7
Chilled Water
0%
N/A
N/A
Heat Recovery Water
40%
-35
-7
B. Glycol Fluid: 95.5 Percent propylene glycol and 4.5 percent inhibitors and water, water
yellow in color, operating temperature range —50 degree F to 325 degree F.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. DOW DOWFROST HD
15517 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15517 - GLYCOL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide necessary piping for a complete installation of glycol make-up system.
B. Thoroughly clean and flush hydronic system before adding propylene glycol solution.
C. Field adjust pressure switch to match system fill pressure.
D. Once the hydronic system has been filled, refill the storage tank on the automatic glycol
make-up system with the appropriate concentration of glycol and water.
E. Perform glycol solution test and provide report to Owner.
F. Provide one (1) year service agreement to refill the storage tank on the automatic glycol make-
up system during the first year and perform glycol concentration test at the end of the first
year of operation.
END OF SECTION 15517
15517-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15520 - STEAM PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15520 - STEAM PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section includes Low and High Pressure Steam and Condensate Piping for. system.
Materials and equipment specified in this Section include:
1. Pipes, Valves, and Fittings
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
B. Welder's certificates certifying that welders comply meet the quality requirements specified in
Quality Assurance below.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
B. Test reports specified in PART 3 of this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following:
ASME B 31.9 'Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation.
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
2. ASME 'Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualification" for qualifications for welding processes and operators.
3. Local Mechanical Code.
4. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install steam and condensate piping in accordance
with IAPMO "Uniform Mechanical Code."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS
A. Steam and Condensate Piping:
1. Low (15 psig and Under) and Medium (15 psi to 100 psig) Pressure Steam Supply:
a. Piping, 2-Inch and Under:
1) Pipe: Schedule 40, Black steel, threaded and coupled.
2) Joint: Screwed, above ground; welded, below ground.
15520.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15520 - STEAM PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3) Fittings: Screwed, Black cast iron, 125 pound; welded, forged steel
socket weld type, 300 pound (WOG).
b. Piping, 2-1/2 Inch and Over:
1) Pipe: Schedule 40, Black steel, beveled ends.
2) Fittings: Schedule 40 steel, butt weld type.
3) Flanges: 150 pound forged steel, welding neck type.
2. Low (15 psig and Under) and Medium (15 psi to 100 psig) Pressure Steam
Condensate:
a. Piping, 2-Inch and Under:
1) Pipe: Schedule 80, Black steel threaded and coupled.
2) Joints: Screwed above ground, welded below ground.
3) Fittings: Black cast iron, 125 pound.
b. Piping, 2-1/2 Inch and Over:
1) Pipe: Schedule 80, Black steel, beveled ends.
2) Fittings: Schedule 80, steel, butt weld type.
3) Flanges: 150 pound forged steel, welding neck type with bore to
match pipe.
2.2 VALVES
A. General: Comply with MSS-92 1980 "Valve Users Manual".
B. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
(Control valves shall be sized for required flow.)
C. Operators: Provide the following special operator features:
1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem for valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever Handle on quarter turn valves 6-inch and smaller, except plug valves. Provide
a wrench for every plug valve.
3. Chainwheel operators for valves 2-1/2 inch and larger that are installed 96 inches or
higher above finished floor elevation. Provide chains to an elevation of 6-0" above
finished floor elevation.
D. Extended Stems: Provide extended stems to allow full operation of the valve without
interference by the insulation.
E. End Connections: As specified in the individual valves specifications.
1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B2.1.
2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B 16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B 16.5 for steel, and ANSI
B 16.24 for bronze.
15520.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15520 - STEAM PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves - 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150, body and bonnet of cast bronze
ASTM B62 for 150#, threaded ends, solid wedge disc, union bonnet, rising stem, bronze
gland, TFE impregnated packing, malleable iron handwheel.
Stockham Fig. B-120B-124
B. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body conforming to ASTM
A126 Cl B, Bronze trim, OS&Y Design, flanged ends, TFE impregnated packing.
Stockham Fig. G-623
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves —1-Inch and Smaller: ANSI B 16.34, Brass 150 WSP, 600 WOG, rated for 150
PSI at 350 degree F, two-piece end entry body style, bronze body conforming to ASTM
B584, single full port chrome plated brass ball, 15 percent glass reinforced PTFE seats, PTFE
packing and blow-out proof stem, vinyl covered steel handle. Apollo 77-100/200
B. Ball Valves - 1-1/4 Inch thru 2-Inch: ANSI B16.34, Class 150 WSP, 600 WOG, rated for
150 PSI at 350 degree F. Three-piece body style, bronze body conforming to ASTM B584,
single full -port, stainless steel ball and stem of ASTM A276 Type 316, 15 percent glass
reinforced PTFE seats, PTFE packing and blow-out proof stem, vinyl coated steel handle.
Provide solder ends or threaded ends to match piping material system. Apollo 82-100/200.
2.5 GLOBE VALVES
A. 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150 body, bonnet, bonnet ring cast bronze ASTM B-
62, stainless steel 500 BHN disc, union bonnet, non -asbestos teflon impregnated stem
packing, copper -silicon bronze stem, brass packing gland and malleable iron handle.
Stockham Fig. B-29
B. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, cast iron body ASTM A-126, Class B, bolted
bonnet bronze mounted, rising stem bronze disc, OS&Y, non -asbestos teflon impregnated
stem packing and cast iron or malleable iron hand wheel.
Stockham Fig. F-532
2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-67, cast iron body conforming to ASTM A126 Class B,
aluminum bronze ASTM B 148 316 stainless steel disc, 416 stainless steel stem, EPDM Viton
seat, bronze bearings, non-metallic bushing and stem seal, ANSI Class 125 flange standard,
rated for 150 psi pressure differential, 75 psi drop -tight shut-off dead-end service, with
downstream flange removed. Provide extended neck for 2-inch thick insulation. All valves
shall be factory tested to 110 percent of pressure rating. All butterfly valves shall be full
lugged body, drilled and tapped.
Keystone Fig. Z-12
15520 - 3
I hUn NIUAL SMUIF1CATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15520 - STEAM PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.7 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller. MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast bronze body and
cap conforming to ASTM B 62, bronze, horizontal swing design, Y-pattern, with a bronze
disc, stainless steel pin and having threaded or solder ends. Class 150 valves meeting the
above specifications may be used where pressure requires or Class 125 are not available.
B. Swing Check Valves — 2-1/2 to 3-Inch: MSS SP-71; Class 125 (Class 175 FM approved for
fire protection piping systems), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126,
Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and
flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
B. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
C. Install piping at right angles and parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,
unless expressly indicated.
D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper
insulation applications.
E. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of
the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance outside
the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel
removal.
F. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of
a tee fitting, 3/4-inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple and cap.
G. Wall Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors,
maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 15 for sealers and materials.
H. Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 1-inch in 40-feet downward in the direction
of flow.
I. Install branch connections to supply mains using 45 degree fittings in main with take -off out
the top of the main. Use of 90 degree "tee" fittings is permissible, where use of 45 degree
fittings are not practical. Where the length of a branch takeoff is less than 10-feet, pitch
branch line down toward mains, 1-inch per 20-feet.
Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side
down.
15520 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15520 - STEAM PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
K. Install unions in pipes 2-inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each
piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
L. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps and other vibration
producing equipment.
M. Pitch steam condensate return lines towards flash tank. If more than one (1) condensate line
discharges into flash tank, install a swing check valve in each line. Install a thermostatic air
vent at the top of the tank. Install an inverted bucket or float and thermostatic trap at the low
pressure condensate outlet, sized for triple the condensate load. Install a safety relief valve at
the tank top. Install a pressure gauge, gate valve, and swing check valve on the low pressure
(flash) steam outlet.
N. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Install expansion
loops and joints as indicated on the Drawings and specified in Division 15 Section "Anchors
and Supports".
O. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points in the system, such as at the ends on
mains, bottom of risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, control valves, isolation valves, pipe
bends, and expansion joints.
1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not
exceeding 200-feet where pipe is pitched down in the direction of the steam flow and
a maximum of 150-feet where the pipe is pitched up so that condensate flow is
opposite of steam flow.
2. Size drip legs at vertical risers full size and extend beyond the rise. Size drip legs at
other locations same diameter as the main. Provide an 18-inch drip leg for steam
mains smaller than 6-inches. In steam mains 6-inch and larger, provide drip legs
sized two (2) pipe sizes smaller than the main, but not less than 4-inches.
3. Strainer blow -downs shall be equipped with ball valves with hose end and cap to
allow removal of dirt and scale.
4. Install steam traps close to drip legs.
3.2 VALVES
A. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select valves
with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except in heating hot water and
low pressure steam service which shall have threaded ends.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes 2-Inch and Smaller: Threaded or grooved -end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Flanged or grooved end.
4. At all piping hot taps, provide a gate valve with the hot tap and a butterfly valve for
shutoff service. Hot taps shall be provided only where approved by the Engineer.
15520 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15520 - STEAM PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Valve Application: Install valves in accordance with the following table:
Valve Application Table
SERVICE
VALVE TYPE
Steam and Condensate Piping Shut-off; 2" and Smaller
Gate Valves
Steam and Condensate Piping Shut-off; 2-1/2" and Larger
Gate Valves
Steam and Condensate Piping Pressure Reducing Service; All Sizes
Globe Valve
Steam and Condensate Piping Check Valves; All Sizes
Swing Check
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves and unions to allow equipment removal without system shutdown. Unions are
not required on flanged devices.
E. Install ball and gate valves with the stem in the upright position. The handle of quarter turn
valves shall open in the direction of flow. Install butterfly valves with the stem in the
horizontal position.
F. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section
"Supports and Anchors".
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20-feet in
length.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20-feet or
longer.
3. Pipe roller complete - MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20-feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
3.4 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as the equipment connections.
B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations as close as possible to the equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one (1) bypass is required.
15520 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIvERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15520 - STEAM PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Install vacuum breaker downstream from the control valve and bypass, and as close as
possible to the coil inlet connection.
E. Provide an appropriate trap, sized at three (3) times the condensate load of the equipment, at
1/2 psig differential at outlet of coils and at drip leg.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare steam and condensate piping in accordance with ASME B 31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the
test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions
due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints
from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If a
valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against
the test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are
inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure not more than 1/3 higher than the test pressure, to
protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during
the test.
B. Testing: Test steam and condensate piping as follows:
1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk of
damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen and
compatible with the piping system components.
2. Use traps installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling the
system. Use drip legs installed at low points for complete removal of the liquid.
3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures
are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low
pressure filling lines are disconnected.
4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system
is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the
maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system
under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of
vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength,
or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME 1331.9.
5. Hydrostatic Test: The test shall be accomplished by hand pumping the system to the
specified water pressure, and maintaining that pressure until the entire system has
been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than four (4) hours.
a. Steam and Condensate Systems: 100 psig or 150 percent of system pressure,
whichever is greater.
6. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least four (4) hours,
examine piping joints and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening,
repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until
there are no leaks.
15520 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15520 - STEAM PIPING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After testing the system for proper operation of all automatic devices and controls, operate the
entire system for one (1) week, then drain and wash out with caustic soda. Immediately rinse
system with water. Clean the strainer baskets and pressurize the system and leave in proper
working order. After the system has been in operation for one (1) month, thoroughly check
all automatic control valves and pressure reducing stations for steam leakage; where
necessary, clean and repair same.
END OF SECTION 15520
15520-8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15040 - MECH(ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECH EQUIPMENT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
16 sections. Comply with applicable requirements of Division 16 sections for Electrical Work
of this section which are not otherwise specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Listing, Motors of Mechanical Work: Concurrently, with submittal of mechanical products
listing, submit separate listing showing rating, power characteristics, efficiencies, power
factors, application and general location of every motor to be provided with mechanical
work. Submit updated information promptly when and if initial data is revised.
1. Include in listing of motors, notations of whether motor starter is furnished or
installed integrally with motor or equipment containing motor.
2. Use Mechanical/Electrical Coordination Schedule on Drawings as format for
submittal.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
manufacturers for each type of product:
Motors:
a.
Century/MagneTek
b.
Baldor
C.
U.S. Motor
d.
Reliance
e.
Siemens -Allis
f.
General Electric
g.
Louis Allis
2.2 MOTORS
A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more
detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications.
1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads
with a time limit acceptable to the motor manufacturer. Motors shall be capable of
starting the driven equipment while operating at 90 percent rated terminal voltage.
2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to
operate in the service factor range.
3. All 2-speed motors with a 2:1 speed ratio shall have one (1) single winding on poly-
phase motors. Two -speed motors for all other speed ratios shall have two (2)
windings.
4. Explosion proof motors shall meet Underwriters Laboratories Standards for use in
hazardous locations and National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 500, Class and
Group.
5. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degree C environment with maximum 80 degree
C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation). Provide
Class F insulation for variable frequency drive motors.
15040-z
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSr Y
DP4SION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15525 - STEAM SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15525 - STEAM SPECIALTIES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Steam and Condensate Specialties required by this section is indicated on drawings
and/or specified in other Division 15 sections.
B. Types of Steam and Condensate Specialties specified in this section include the following:
1.
Float and Thermostatic Traps
2.
Inverted Bucket Traps
3.
Steam Vents
4.
Pressure Reducing Valves
5.
Steam Safety Valves
C. Steam and Condensate Specialties furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment shall
meet or exceed requirements of this section.
D. Refer to other Division 15 sections for insulation of steam and condensate specialties.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of steam and
condensate specialties of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than ten (10) years.
B. Steam and Condensate Specialty Types: Provide steam and condensate specialties of same
type by same manufacturer.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. ASME Compliance: Manufacture and install steam and condensate specialties in
accordance with ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping'.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
each type of steam and condensate specialty. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer's
figure number, size, location, rated capacities, and features for each required steam and
condensate specialty.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturers' assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products
in accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 15.
15525.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15525 - STEAM SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Maintenance Data- Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of steam and
condensate specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance
manual; in accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 15.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Float and Thermostatic Traps:
a. Hoffman Specialty ITT
b. No Substitutions
2. Inverted Bucket Traps:
a Armstrong Machine Works
b. Hoffman Specialty ITT
3. Steam Vents:
a. Armstrong Machine Works
b. Eaton Corp.; Controls Division
C. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Division
4. Pressure Reducing Valves:
a Fisher Controls International, Inc.
b. No Substitutions
5. Steam Safety Valves:
a Kunkle Valve Co., Inc.
b. Consolidated
2.2 STEAM AND CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
A. General: Provide factory -fabricated steam and condensate specialties recommended by
manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide steam and condensate specialties of types,
capacities, and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper
selection as determined by the manufacturer to make the system complete and operating
properly. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube,
and equipment connections. All traps on the project shall be supplied by one (1)
manufacturer, multiple manufacturers of different trap types will not be accepted.
2.3 TRAP SIZING
A. For constant steam pressure applications using either inverted buckets or float and
thermostatic traps as indicated on the drawings, use a 2:1 safety factor at the operating
pressure differential between the supply pressure at the return line pressure the trap discharges
into.
B. For modulating steam pressure using either inverted buckets or float and thermostatic traps as
indicated on the drawings use the following sizing criteria:
15525 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15525-STEAM SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1. For 0-15 psig supply steam service, size traps at .5 psi pressure differential using a
2:1 safety factor.
2. For 16-30 psig supply steam service, size traps at 2 psi pressure differential using a
2:1 safety factor.
3. For 31 psig at greater supply steam service, size traps at 1/2 of the maximum pressure
differential across the trap using a 3:1 safety factor.
C. NOTE: When determining maximum pressure differential, the outlet pressure after the
control valve should be used.
D. Sizing of steam traps is to be based on condensate discharge at saturated steam temperatures.
Water discharge capacities are not acceptable.
2.4 FLOAT AND THERMOSTATIC TRAPS
A. General: Provide float and thermostatic traps as indicated, with body and cover constructed
or cast iron or semi -steel, pressure rated to 175 psig, designed so all internal parts are
accessible without disturbing piping. Thermostatic air vent with stainless steel cage and
phosphor -bronze bellows. Stainless steel float with positive snap -action valve mechanism,
stainless steel valve and renewable seat. Design trap for discharging condensate, air, and
other non -condensable gases without loss of steam at system operating pressures.
B. F and T Traps shall have the following features:
1. Integral Vacuum Breaker
2. Gauge Glass
3. Floor Mounting Bracket
2.5 INVERTED BUCKET TRAPS
A. General: Provide inverted bucket traps with body and cover constructed of cast iron pressure
rated for 250 psi, designed so internal parts are accessible without disturbing piping.
Construct internal components from stainless steel. Trap shall continuously vent non -
condensable gases.
B. Inverted Bucket Traps shall have the following features:
Integral stainless steel check valve.
2.6 STEAM VENTS
A. General: Provide steam vents for venting of air and non -condensable gases from steam piping
system.
1. Quick Vents: Cast brass body and bottom, with thermostatic bellows, and removable
vent port with vacuum check.
2. Float Vents: Cast iron body, cast brass bottom, seamless -brass float, thermostatic
bellows, removable stainless steel seat, Monel metal plunger, and vacuum check
disks.
15525 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15525 - STEAM SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.7 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. General: Provide pressure reducing valves where indicated, of size, capacity and pressure
rating as scheduled. Provide pilot -actuated, diaphragm type. Construct valve body of cast
iron with hardened stainless steel trim. Provide replaceable valve head and seat. Provide
cover over pilot diaphragm for protection against dirt accumulation.
B. The pressure reducing valve(s) shall function quietly and provide shut -tight on a dead end
shutoff. There shall be no springs in the path of the steam and no stuffing boxes. All parts
must be easily accessible without removal of the valve from the line. The pilot valve shall be
separate from the main valve and connected to it by unions. A pilot strainer shall be built in
the pilot inlet.
2.8 STEAM SAFETY VALVES
A. General: Provide steam safety valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selected by Installer
for proper relieving capacity, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1. Bronze Safety Valves: Construct housing of cast bronze, disc and nozzle of forged
copper alloy, lap seats to optical flatness. Set valve to relieve at 10 psi above
operating pressure.
2. Cast Iron Safety Valves: Construct of cast iron, with all stainless steel trim, fully
enclosed spring. Set valve to relieve at 10 psi above operating pressure.
3. Drip Pan Elbows: Provide drip pan elbows on steam safety valves required to
discharge to outdoors. Construct of cast iron, with bottom drain and pan drain
connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which steam and condensate specialties are to
be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEAM AND CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
A. General: Install steam and condensate specialties as indicated, and in accessible locations to
permit service. When located behind heating enclosures, center steam and condensate
specialties on access door. Install in neat and workmanlike manner. Use only wrenches
having square flat jaws, or non-metallic strap wrenches on brass specialties; wrench marks
will not be permitted.
B. Each trap shall have a check valve on its downstream side or exiting pipe.
C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Install where indicated. Install strainer ahead of trap, union
and shutoff valve on inlet and outlet.
D. Steam Vents: Install where indicated. Install shutoff valve between float vents and steam
piping, pipe outlet to suitable plumbing drain, or as indicated.
15525 - a
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15525 - STEAM SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
E. Pressure Reducing Valves: Install as indicated, in accessible location to permit service.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Install 3-valve bypass with
globe valve in bypass line, full size of inlet. Provide steam pressure gauge at inlet and outlet,
and steam safety valve at outlet.
F. Steam Safety Valve: Install on steam generators, downstream of each steam pressure
reducing valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Pipe discharge to floor for low pressure service,
and to outdoors, with drip pan elbow for high pressure service, both in accordance with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Code.
END OF SECTION 15525
15525.5
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of HVAC Pumps Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 0 18 10.
C. Types of Pumps specified in this section include the following:
1. In -Line Circulator
2. Frame -Mounted End Suction
D. Pumps furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment are specified as part of equipment
assembly in other Division 15 sections.
E. Refer to other Division 15 sections for other work; not work of this section.
F. Refer to Division 16 sections for the following work; not work of this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. This
Contractor shall include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except
where specified as furnished, or factory -installed, by manufacturer.
2. Interlock wiring between pumps; and between pumps and field -installed control
devices.
a. Interlock wiring specified as factory -installed is work of this section.
G. Provide the following Electrical Work as work of this section, complying with requirements
of Division 16 sections:
Control Wiring between field -installed controls, indicating devices, and pump control
panels.
& Control Wiring specified as work of Division 15 for Automatic Temperature
Controls is work of that section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of general -use
centrifugal pumps with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. HI Compliance: Design, manufacture, and install HVAC pumps in accordance with
HI "Hydraulic Institute Standards".
15540-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. UL Compliance: Design, manufacture, and install HVAC pumps in accordance with
UL 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps".
3. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components which are
listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA Standards.
C. Certification, Pump Performance: Provide pumps whose performances, under specified
operating conditions, are certified by manufacturer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up
instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection
points clearly indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
HVAC pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control
wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and portions
to be field -installed.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products
in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of pump, control,
and accessory; including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product
data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with
requirements of Division 15.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle HVAC pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and
scoring. Do not install damaged HVAC pumps or components; replace with new.
B. Store HVAC pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes,
water, construction debris, and physical damage.
C. Comply with Manufacturers rigging and installation instructions for unloading HVAC
pumps, and moving them to final location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
In -Line Circulator Pumps:
15540 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
a. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division; Series. 80 or 90,
No Exceptions
2. Frame -Mounted End Suction Pumps:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.; Series 4030
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division; Series 1510
C. Taco
2.2 PUMPS
A. General: Provide factory -tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one (1) coat of
machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size, and capacity of each pump is listed in pump
schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer.
B. Pump motor shall be sized so as not to be overloaded at any point along impeller curve for
specified performance.
C. All pump couplers shall be suitable for both constant speed and variable speed operation.
2.3 IN -LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS
A. General: Provide bronze fitted in -line circulator pumps where indicated, and of capacities as
scheduled.
B. Type: Horizontal mount, vertical split case, oil -lubricated, designed for 125 psi working
pressure, and 225 degree F (107 degree C) continuous water temperature.
C. Body: Cast iron, with flanged suction and discharge and gauge tappings.
D. Shaft: Hardened alloy steel.
E. Bearings: Oil -lubricated bronze journal bearings.
F. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat.
G. Motor: Pump motor shall be non -overloading at any point on pump curve and meet
requirements of Section 15040.
H. Coupling: Self -aligning, flexible coupling.
I. Impeller: Brass or Bronze enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, and keyed
to shaft.
2.4 FRAME -MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMPS
A. General: Provide frame -mounted bronze fitted end suction pumps where indicated, and of
capacities and having characteristics as scheduled.
B. Type: Horizontal mount, single stage, vertical split case, flexible coupling, base mounted,
designed for 175 psi working pressure.
15540 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Casing: Cast iron, 125 psi ANSI flanges, tappings for gauge and drain connections.
D. Shaft: Steel with replaceable shaft sleeve.
E. Bearings: Regreaseable sleeve bearings.
F. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat.
G. Motor: Pump motor shall be non -overloading at any point on pump curve and meet
requirements of Section 15040.
H. Impeller: Bronze enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft and
secured with locking screw. Assembly components shall be 304 stainless steel.
I. Baseplate: Structural steel with welded cross members, and open grouting area.
J. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, equipped with coupling guard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which HVAC pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS
A. General: Install HVAC pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published
installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that HVAC
pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B. Access: Provide access space around HVAC pumps for service as indicated, but in no case
less than that recommended by manufacturer.
C. Support: Install base -mounted pumps on minimum of 4-inch high concrete base equal or
greater than three (3) times total weight of pump and motor, with anchor bolts poured in
place. Set and level pump, grout under pump base with non -shrink grout.
1. Install in -line pumps, supported from piping system.
D. Support: Refer to Division 15 section "Vibration Control" for support and mounting
requirements of HVAC pumps.
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory -mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturers wiring diagram submittal to Electrical
Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's
submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with
equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
15540 - 4
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Piping Connections: Provide system return connection to inlet strainer with valved bypass to
drain. Provide pump discharge connections with check valve, shutoff valve, and balancing
valve for each pump.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Alignment: Adjust shafts of all motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by
manufacturer, and in presence of manufacturer's service representative.
B. Start -Up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
C. Refer to Division 15, Section 15990, for pump system balancing; not work of this section.
D. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION 15540
15540-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15040 - MEQUELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECH EQUIPMENT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
6. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system,
and not less than five (5) evenly time spaced starts per hour for manually controlled
motors.
7. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly -phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
8. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty,
Design 'B", except "C" where required for high starting torque. Design "E" shall not
be used.
a. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; Use driven equipment
manufacturer's standards to suit specific application.
b. Bearings:
1) Ball bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
2) Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally
inaccessible for regular maintenance.
3) Bearings shall be rated for minimum L-10 life of 40,000 hours.
4) Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives
produce lateral or axial thrust in motor.
5) For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings
are permitted.
C. Enclosure Type:
1) Open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed
or remotely located during operation.
2) Guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees
or building occupants.
3) Weather protected Type I for outdoor use; Type H where not
housed.
d. Noise Rating: "Quiet".
e. Efficiency: 'Energy Efficient' motors shall have a minimum efficiency as
scheduled in Table 1 in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method
B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than
"average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112,
Test Method B.
TABLE 1*
HP
3600 RPM
EFFICIENCY
1800 RPM
EFFICIENCY
1200 RPM*
EFFICIENCY
MINIMUM
POWER
FACTOR
1-1/2
82.5
84.0
84.0
85.0
2
82.5
84.0
86.5
85.0
3
84.0
86.5
87.5
85.0
5
85.5
89.5
87.5
85.0
7-1/2
86.5
91.0
89.5
85.0
10
87.5
91.0
90.2
85.0
15
89.5
91.7
91.0
85.0
20
90.2 1
92.0
91.7
85.0
25
90.2
92.5
92.4
85.0
15040-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15755 - HEAT EXCHANGERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15755 - HEAT EXCHANGERS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Heat Exchangers Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of Heat Exchangers specified in this section include the following:
1. Steam -to -Water U-Tube Heat Exchangers.
2. Water -to -Water Plate and Frame Heat Exchanger.
C. Refer to other Division 15 sections for insulation of heat exchangers; piping, valves,
specialties, and controls required in conjunction with heat exchangers; not work of this
section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of heat exchangers, of
types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. ASME Compliance: Construct heat exchangers in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII "Pressure Vessels", Division 1.
2. TEMA Compliance: Construct and install heat exchangers in accordance with
"Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for heat exchangers including
performance data, materials, dimensions, weights, and installation data. Submit
Manufacturer's Data Report for Pressure Vessels, Form U-1, as required by provisions of
ASME Code Rules.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit Record Drawings of installed systems products
in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each heat exchanger including
"trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data and product data in maintenance
manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
15755.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15755 - HEAT EXCHANGERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle heat exchangers carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do not
install damaged units or components; replace with new.
B. Store heat exchangers in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,
construction debris, and physical damage.
C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading heat
exchangers, and moving them to final location.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Steam -to -Water U-Tube Heat Exchangers:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
C. Dunham -Bush Inc.
d. Taco, Inc.
2. Water -to -Water Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers:
a. Paul Mueller Co.
b. Tranter, Inc.
2.2 STEAM -TO -WATER U-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. General: Provide steam -to -water U-tube heat exchangers as indicated, of capacity as
scheduled, and as specified herein.
B. Type: Shell and tube, U-bend removable tube bundle, steam in shell, water in tubes,
equipped with mounting legs.
C. Materials:
1. Shell: Steel
2. Tubes: 3/4-Inch O.D. copper
3. Heads: Cast iron or steel
4. Tube Sheets: Steel
5. Tube Supports: Steel
D. Construction: ASME construction for 125 psi design pressure at 375 degree F (190 degree
C).
15755 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15755 - HEAT EXCHANGERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.3 WATER -TO -WATER PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER
A. This Contractor shall provide plate and frame heat exchanger of capacity as scheduled and
where shown on the drawings with embossed heat transfer plates, perimeter gaskets, guide
rails, and frames and compression bolts.
B. Units shall be ASME rated for 125 psig operating pressure, 300 degree F (149 degree C)
maximum temperature, have a heat transfer area as scheduled on the drawing.
C. Frame shall be carbon steel with baked epoxy enamel paint, side bolts and shroud. Plates
shall be Type 304 stainless steel.
D. Gaskets shall be nitrile rubber.
E. Nozzles shall be 150 lb. ASA rated loose flange type, of the size called for on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which heat exchangers are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Installer.
3.2 STEAM -TO -WATER U-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. General: Install steam -to -water U-tube heat exchangers as indicated, and as specified herein.
B. Mounting: Mount heat exchangers on steel floor stands as indicated, located for required
clearance for tube bundle removal.
C. Mounting: Mount heat exchangers on trapeze hangers as indicated, located for required
clearance for tube bundle removal.
D. Steam Piping: Provide piping as indicated, including control valve with 3-valve bypass,
strainer, and pressure gauge on inlet; condensate dirt leg, steam trap with 3-valve bypass,
strainer and check valve on outlet; air vent or vacuum breaker on shell.
E. Water Piping: Provide piping as indicated, including union, shutoff valve, and thermometer
on inlet; union, shutoff valve, relief valve, and thermometer on outlet. Pipe relief valve outlet
to floor drain.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF WATER -TO -WATER PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. General: Comply with water -to -water plate and frame heat exchanger manufacturer's
instructions for installation.
B. Install water -to -water plate and frame heat exchangers, piping and accessories in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
15755 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15755 - HEAT EXCHANGERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.5 SPARE PARTS
A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one (1) spare gasket for each flanged connection for
each heat exchanger.
END OF SECTION 15755
15755-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15830 - TERMINAL UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15830 - TERMINAL UNITS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Terminal Unit Work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of
this section.
B. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 01810.
C. Types of Terminal Units required for project include the following:
1. Unit Heaters
2. Cabinet Unit Heaters
3. Coils
4. Electric Cabinet Heaters
5. Radiant Acoustical Ceiling Panels (Hot and Chilled Water)
D. Refer to other Division 15 sections for piping; ductwork; testing, adjusting and balancing of
terminal units; not work of this section.
E. Refer to Division 16 section for the following work; not work of this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on terminal units.
2. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with
requirements of Division 16 sections:
a. Control wiring between field -installed controls, indicating devices, and
terminal unit control panels.
1) Control wiring specified as work of Division 15 for Automatic
Temperature Controls is work of that section.
F. Refer to other Division 15 sections for automatic temperature controls not factory installed,
required in conjunction with terminal units; not work of this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal units, of
types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
I=B=R Compliance: Test and rate baseboard and finned tube radiation in accordance
with I=B=R, provide published ratings bearing emblem of I=B=R.
2. ARI Compliance: Provide coil ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 410
"Forced -Circulation Air -Cooling and Air -Heating Coils".
15830-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15830 - TERM UAL UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33
"Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils".
4. ARI Compliance: Test and rate fan -coil units in accordance with ARI Standard 440
"Room Fan -Coil Air Conditioners".
5. UL Compliance: Construct and install fan -coil units in compliance with UL 883
"Safety Standards for Fan Coil Units and Room Fan Heater Units".
6. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components for terminal units which have been
listed and labeled by UL.
ARI Compliance: Test and rate ventilators in accordance with ARI Standard 330
"Unit Ventilators".
8. Electric Heating Equipment: All equipment with a heating coil capacity exceeding a
48 amp rating shall have the heating elements subdivided and protected by an
overcurrent protection device rated at not more than 60 amps. Equipment not
exceeding 48 amps shall also have overcurrent protection. Overcurrent protection
devices shall be factory wired and installed in accordance with the National Electric
Code. All equipment shall be factory assembled and wired in accordance with the
National Fire Protection Association and shall be listed by Underwriters'
Laboratories.
1.3 SUBMfITALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, for terminal units showing
dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gauges and finishes of materials,
and installation -startup instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating terminal unit
dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection details
and methods of assembly of components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
terminal units. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control
wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and portions
to be field -installed.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products
in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
E. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of each type of cabinet and radiant panel finish furnished.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions, filter
replacement, motor and drive replacement, control, accessories, "trouble -shooting"
maintenance guide, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings
in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
15830 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15830 - TERMINAL UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and
scoring. Do not install damaged terminal units or components; replace with new.
B. Store terminal units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes,
water, construction debris, and physical damage.
C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal units,
and moving them to final location.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Unit Heaters:
a. Airtherm Mfg. Co.
b. Buffalo Forge Co.
C. Dunham -Bush, Inc.
d. McQuay Inc.
e. Modine Mfg. Co.
f. Trane (The) Co.
g. Wing (The) Co.; Division Wing Industries, Inc.
h. Young Radiator Co.
i. Vulcan Radiator Corp.
2. Coils:
a.
Aerofin Corp.
b.
Carrier Corp.
C.
Dunham -Bush, Inc.
d.
Heatcraft Inc.
e.
McQuay Inc.
f.
Trane (The) Co.
g.
York; Division of York International
3. Electric Cabinet Heaters:
a.
Airtherm Mfg. Co.
b.
Q Mark
C.
Trane (The) Co.
d.
Berko
e.
Markel
f.
Singer
4. Radiant Ceiling Panels:
a. INVENSYS
b. Sterling
C. TWA
15830 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15830 - TERMINAL UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.2 UNITHEATERS
A. General: Provide unit heaters in locations as indicated, and of capacities, style, and having
accessories as scheduled.
B. Horizontal Unit Heaters:
1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with standard
color baked enamel finish. Provide motor -mounted panel, minimum of 18 gauge
steel. Fabricate casing to enclose coil, louvers, and fan blades. Provide louvers for
4-way air diffusion.
2. Fans: Construct of aluminum, and factory -balance. Provide fan inlet orifice, smooth,
and drawn into casing back panel.
C. Coils: Construct of plate -type aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Design
coil for use in hot water applications.
D. Motors: Provide totally enclosed motors, with built-in overload protection, having electrical
characteristics as scheduled.
2.3 COILS
A. General: Provide coils of size and in location indicated,and of capacities and having
performance data as scheduled. Certify coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection
procedures in accordance with ARI410.
B. Heating Coils:
1. Fins: Construct of continuous aluminum or copper configurated plate -fin type with
full fin collars for accurate spacing and maximum fin -tube contact.
2. Tubes: Construct of copper tubing, expanded into fin collars for permanent fin -tube
bond and expanded into header for permanent leaktight joint.
3. Headers: Construct of Gray cast iron for coils 33-inch high and smaller.
Hydrostatically test to 400 psi before assembly. Construct of round seamless copper
tube for coils over 33-inch high.
4. Casings: Construct of 16 gauge continuous coated galvanized steel with fins
recessed into channels to minimize air bypass.
5. Testing: Proof test coils at 300 psi, leak test at 200 psi under water.
6. Coil Types: Provide the following coil types as indicated, and as scheduled.
a. Hot Water to 200 psi, 220 degree F (104 degree Q: Provide 2-row, 5/8-inch
tubes, same -end connection coil. Provide rolled tube -to -header joints for
coil heights 33-inch and smaller. Provide brazed tube -to -header joints for
coil heights over 33-inch.
15830 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15930 - TERMINAL UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.4 ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS
A. General: Provide electric cabinet heaters having cabinet sizes and in locations as indicated,
and of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic unit chassis,
coil, fanboard, fan wheels, housings, motor, and insulation.
B. Chassis: Galvanized steel wrap -around structural frame with edges flanged.
C. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber.
D. Cabinet: 16 Gauge removable front panel, 8 gauge top and side panels. Insulate front panel
over entire coil section. Provide access door on coil connection side. Clean cabinet parts,
bonderize, phosphatize, and flow -coat with standard factory color selected baked enamel
finish.
E. Electric Element: Electric resistance element with manual -reset thermal overload protection,
unit mounted thermostat.
F. Fans: Provide centrifugal, forward curved double width fan wheels constructed of non-
corrosive, molded, fiberglass -reinforced thermoplastic material. Construct fan scrolls of
galvanized steel.
G. Motors: Provide shaded pole motors with integral thermal over -load protection, and motor
cords for plug-in to junction box in unit.
H. Filters: Provide 1-inch thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames.
I. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled.
1. Wall Boxes: Provide aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect
screen.
2. Recessing Flanges: Provide 18 gauge steel flanges for recessing cabinet heaters into
wall or ceiling.
3. Sub -Bases: Provide 18 gauge steel sub -base for vertical units, height as indicated.
2.5 RADIANT ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS (Hot and Chilled Water)
A. The radiant acoustical panels shall be placed into a Heavy Duty grid system to be provided by
the General Contractor in accordance with the Architects reflected ceiling plans.
B. Manufacturer shall be able to provide custom shaped ceiling panels to accommodate diffusers,
light fixtures, and fire sprinklers. The heat conducting rails closest to the center of the panel
shall be notched or spread apart to accommodate a 4-1/2 inch round opening in the center of
the panel. See Radiant Panel Detail..
C. The panel assembly shall consist of aluminum heat conducting rails and copper tube assembly
(heat exchanger) that is bonded to the steel ceiling panel. No "field installation" of tubing
allowed.
D. The aluminum heat -conducting rail shall be anodized to prevent galvanic corrosion between
the dissimilar metals. The rail shall be shaped so as to provide a "C" channel profile.
15830 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15830 - TERMINAL UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
E. Provide 5/8-inch O.D., seamless copper loops for the heat exchanger assembly. The center -
to -center distance between parallel passes of the heat exchanger tubing shall be 7-inches
between the two (2) center rails (4-1/2 inches clear between rails).
F. The copper tube shall be factory press bonded or clipped into the anodized aluminum profile
to obtain 99% metal -to -metal contact over 52% of the parallel aluminum and copper surfaces
in contact.
G. The heat exchanger assembly shall be adhered to the metal ceiling panel surface and press
bonded to the metal ceiling panel. The heat exchanger shall be in contact with over 99% of
the contact area. The ends of the heat exchanger assembly shall end within 0.2 inches of the
end of the panel.
H. Metal Panels shall be 0.02-inches thick sheet steel with 0.027-inch diameter perforations.
Color to be Off -White (RAL 9010) with powder coated finish.
I. Acoustical inlay insulation shall be provided for each panel in 2' x 4' lengths. The insulation
shall be 1-inch thick with a density of 3 lbs/ft3 and have a minimum R-Value of 4.2. The
inlay shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25 and smoke developed rating not
exceeding 50. All surfaces of the acoustical inlay insulation shall be protected with a fire
rated acrylic coating. All penetrations through the inlay shall be sealed with a fire rated
mastic.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville, Permacote Linacoustic R-300
b. Knauf
C. Certainteed
J. A flexible stainless steel hose shall be used to make connections to and from the panels. The
hoses shall provide an oxygen tight loop that does not require automatic venting. The hoses
shall attach to the panel with a brass nipple and push -on coupling. The hose shall be rated for
145 psi operating pressure.
K. The Heating/Cooling capacity of the panels shall be certified according to the internationally
recognized DIN Standard 475I.
L. Provide supervision by distributor of panels. Supervision to include field inspection with
thermal image camera to verify all panels are operating properly in both heating and cooling
mode.
M. Three (3) Sample Radiant Panels to be provided to Engineer for acceptance prior to order and
fabrication.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
15830 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15040 - MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECH EQUIPMENT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
TABLE 1*
14P
3600 RPM
EFFICIENCY
1800 RPM
EFFICIENCY
1200 RPM*
EFFICIENCY
MINIMUM
POWER
FACTOR
30
91.7
92.6
92.4
85.0
40
92.4
93.1
93.0
85.0
50
93.0
93.4
93.6
85.0
60
93.0
94.0
93.6
85.0
75
93.0
94.1
93.6
85.0
100
93.0
94.7
94.1
85.0
125
93.0
94.7
94.1
85.0
150
-
95.0
95.8
85.0
200
-
95.4
95.4
85.0
* Efficiency and power factors may vary from above values for multi -speed
motors and/or special hermetic motors packaged with equipment. For these
special applications, motors shall be high -efficiency type and are subject to review
by the Engineer.
f. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings,
characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.
9. Phases and Current Characteristics: Unless indicated otherwise, provide squirrel -
cage induction polyphase motors for 3/4 HP and larger, and provide capacitor -start
single-phase motors for 1/2 HP and smaller, except 1/6 HP and smaller may, at
equipment manufacturer's option, be split -phase type. Coordinate current
characteristics with power specified in Division 16 sections. Do not purchase motors
until power characteristics available at building site have been confirmed by
Contractor.
10. The Contractor shall be responsible for all additional electrical and other costs
involved to accommodate any motors which differ from the scheduled horsepower
sizes or correct any motor which does not meet the listed duty or efficiency as called
for in Mechanical or Electrical Plans and Specifications.
11. Motors shall be of the same manufacturer, except those that are an integral part of a
factory assembled packaged unit. These motors shall likewise meet the conditions of
the specification in this section except motors which are part of a motor/compressor
assembly are exempted from this requirement.
12. All motors 75 HP and larger shall be factory test certified for power factor,
efficiency, and shall have a three (3) year warranty. Factory certification of motor
tests shall be provided to the Owner.
13. All equipment specified to operate with Variable Frequency Drives shall be provided
with invertor-duty motors specifically designed for variable speed operation with
high efficiency at part load conditions and constructed with Class F insulation.
14. All motors which will be operated by a Variable Frequency Drive shall be warranted
against any damage or defects as a result of being used with a variable frequency
drive. VFD driven motors shall have three (3) year warranties.
15040-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15830 — TERMINAL UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF UNIT HEATERS
A. General: Install unit heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
B. Uncrate units and inspect for damage. Verify that nameplate data corresponds with unit
designation.
C. Hang units from building substrate, not from piping. Mount as high as possible to maintain
greatest headroom possible unless otherwise indicated.
D. Support units with rod -type hangers anchored to building substrate.
E. Install piping as indicated.
F. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS
A. General: Install cabinet heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
B. Locate cabinet heaters as indicated, coordinate with other trades to assure correct recess size
for recessed units.
C. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF COILS
A. General: Install coils as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
B. Mount coils on steel supports to form banks or stacks as indicated, brace, secure to air intake
chamber. Place in location to permit installation of bypass damper if required, provide steel
baffles where required to prevent bypassing of air.
C. Pitch coil casings for drainage, not less than 1/8-inch toward return connections, except where
drainage feature is included in coil design.
D. Provide for each bank of cooling coils, stainless steel drain pan under each coil supported off
of floor of sufficient height to allow installation of condensate drain pipe trap to allow
drainage of condensate from pan when installed on suction side of fan. Provide condensate
drain piping from drain pan connection to nearest adequate floor drain. Plug any unused
drain connection.
E. Provide for each steam coil unit, steam supply connection with strainer, gate valve, automatic
temperature regulating valve, condensate return connection with vacuum breaker, F and T
trap, and gate valve, as indicated.
15s30 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15830 - TERMINAL UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Provide for each hot or chilled water coil unit, water supply and return connections, strainer,
isolation valves, control valve, and balancing valves.
G. Provide electric wiring for each electric duct heater in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions and Division 16.
3.5 INSTALLATION. OF RADIANT CEILING PANELS
A. General: Install radiant ceiling panels as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions. All panels (active and non -active) to be provided and installed by
Division 15. Ceiling grid to be provided and installed by General Contractor.
B. Inspect for damage and verify that nameplate data correspondence with panel designation.
3.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory -
mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's
submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with
equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces,
vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.
B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory -finished cabinets, using finish materials
furnished by manufacturer.
C. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same.
3.8 START-UP
A. Start-up, test, and adjust terminal units in accordance with manufacturers published start-up
instructions. Adjust for proper air flow where applicable.
END OF SECTION 15830
15830 - 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE LINIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15851 - AIR HANDLING FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Air Handling Equipment Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 0 18 10.
C. This Section includes the following types of Air -Handling Equipment:
1. Utility Set Fans
2. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators
3. Pre -Fabricated Roof Curbs
D. Refer to other Division 15 sections for vibration control; control system; sequence of
operation; testing, adjusting and balancing.
E. Refer to Division 16 section for the following work; not work of this section.
Power supply wiring from power source to power connections at air handling units.
F. Refer to Section 15040 Paragraph 2.6 for requirements of sheaves and belts for critical areas.
G. Refer to Fan System Requirements, Attachments "1 ", "2" & "3" at the end of this section for
fan vibration requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air handling
equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than three (3) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
Fans Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA
Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Rating.
2. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are listed by UL and have
UL label affixed.
3. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are designed, manufactured,
and tested in accordance with UL 805 "Power Ventilators".
15851-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15551- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
4. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with
NEMA Standards.
5. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data". Test fans in accordance
with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating". Fans shall be licensed to
bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.
6. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans
and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be
defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
7. Electrical Component Standards: Components and installation shall comply with
NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for air handling equipment including
specifications, capacity ratings, sound data, dimensions, weights, materials, operating and
servicelaccess clearance accessories furnished, and installation instructions. Refer to Fan
System Requirements, Attachments "1 ", "2" & "3" at the end of this section for fan submittal
requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly -type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction
details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
air -handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer -
installed and portions to be field -installed.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products;
in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and gravity
ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring
diagrams in maintenance manuals in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following
manufacturers written instructions.
C. Deliver fan units as a factory -assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.
15951- 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into
pad-
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
C. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one (1) additional complete set of belts for each belt -driven fan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Utility Sets:
a. Peerless
b. New York Blower Co.
C. Twin City Fan & Blower Co.
d. Greenheck
2. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators:
a. Peerless
b. Greenheck
C. New York Blower Co.
d. Twin City Fan & Blower Co.
3. Prefabricated Roof Curbs:
a. Louvers & Dampers
b. Custom Curb, Inc.
C. Pate Co.
d. S & L Manufacturing Co.
e. Thycurb Division; Thybar Corp.
2.2 FANS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory
finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.
B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation
at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than
70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.
Refer to attachments for fan requirements at the end of this section.
15851- 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor: 1.4.
D. Belts: Oil -resistant, non -sparking, and non -static.
E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Fixed pitch only. Provide energy efficient motor.
1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan
cabinet.
F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" ABMA L10 of
100,000 to 200,000 calculated in accordance with ABMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and
AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.
G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked -enamel finish coat after assembly.
H. Vibration Isolation: Provide vibration isolators as specified in Section 15241 and as
indicated.
I. Motors with operation by Variable Frequency Drives shall be as specified in Section 15040.
2.3 UTILITY SET FANS
A. General Description: Belt -driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housings: Fabricated from heavy -gauge steel with side sheets fastened to scroll sheets by
means of welding or deep lock seam.
1. Inlet: Round duct collar.
2. Discharge: Slip joint duct connection.
3. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight (8) standard positions.
C. Fan Wheels: Single -width, single -inlet, welded to cast iron or cast steel hub and spun steel
inlet cone, with hub keyed to the shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Steel.
2. Blade Type: Backward -curved, die -formed.
3. Blade Type: Forward -curved, die -formed.
D. Shaft Bearings: Pre -lubricated and sealed, self -aligning, pillow -block -type ball bearings.
E. Accessories: The following accessories are required where indicated:
Backdraft Dampers: Gravity -actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum
blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
15851- 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARB & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch -type handles.
3. Drain Connections: 3/4-Inch, threaded coupling drain connection installed at lowest
point of housing.
4. Weather Hoods: Weather -resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive
compartment.
2.4 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. General Description: Belt -driven or direct -drive as indicated, centrifugal consisting of
housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base,
and accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy -gauge, removable, spun -aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-
piece, hinged, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun -aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air
upward, with rain and snow drains.
C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades.
D. Belt -Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following
features:
1. Pulleys: Cast iron, adjustable -pitch.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self -aligning ball
bearings.
3. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Disconnect Switch: Non -fusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted
inside fan housing, factory -wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable 1/2-inch mesh, 16 gauge, aluminum or brass wire.
3. Dampers: Motor -operated, parallel -blade, volume control dampers mounted in curb
base.
a. Blades: Die -formed sheet aluminum.
b. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with waterproof, felt blade seals.
C. Linkage: Nonferrous metals, connecting blades to counter weight or
operator.
d. Operators: Manufacturers standard electric motor.
4. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, heavy -gauge, galvanized steel; mitered and welded
comers; 2-inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in
cant and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2-inch wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Overall Height: 12-Inches above roofing.
2.5 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS
A. Furnish and install roof curbs as scheduled for duct openings through the roof and for exhaust
fan support. The curbs shall be galvanized steel with integral cant, for flashing in the field. If
15851- 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
the curbs are to have sound attenuation qualities, they shall be not less than those catalogued
for the equipment specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of
fans.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. Support
units using vibration control devices as required. Vibration control devices are specified in
Division 15 Section "Vibration Controls".
1. Support floor -mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring
isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.
2. Secure roof -mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium -plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7.
3. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded
steel rods and vibration isolation springs.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air -handling units for service and
maintenance.
3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base
4-inches larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36, size and location
as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to
floor slab.
3. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top
edge and corners of pad.
4. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
5. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight
aggregate.
6. Clean exposed steel form in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation
Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply two (2) coats of rust -preventive metal primer.
15851- 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15 sections. Make final
duct connections on inlet and outlet duct connections with flexible connections.
B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory -mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical
Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturers
submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Ensure that rotation
is in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with
centrifugal fan start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to Centrifugal Fan
Installer.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Division 15.
3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National
Electrical Code.
3.5 FAN SYSTEM VIBRATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The following attachments are for fan system vibration requirements that apply to this section.
1. Attachment "1": Fan System Requirements Directives
2. Attachment "2": Figure A, "Fan Wheel Between Bearings" sample form
3. Attachment "3": Figure B. "Fan Wheel Not Between Bearings" sample form
15851- 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15951- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS. FOR ALL FAN SYSTEW AND AN HANDLER SUP"T
STRUCTURES (II` APPLICABLE), WILL BE REQLMED. THESE MUST IN(LIJUE, FOR EXAMPLE,
ROTOR SHAFT DWENSKON4 WHEEL WMIT AND INERTIA, BEARING CENTER -TO -CENTER
DISTANCES; SEARM -% ►LFe1 W Siff _oFr EW t MM IMPORT Err (SEE FIGURES
A & B). RELEVANT SKETCHES GNING PERTINENT DETAI..S ARE ACCEPTABLE
THE DESIGN RESONANT SPEED•' * OF A FAN SYSTEM (NOT CRITICAL SPEED***)
MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 25% ABOVE ITS MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED; NOTE THE
DIFFERENCE IN THE AMCA (Air Movement & Control Association) DEFINITIONS GIVEN
BELOW AND IN REF. 1. IT SHOULD BE NOTED THAT SPRING SUPPORTS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE
WXE T1 E DESIGIII REMNANT SPEED REQUp BaNT CANNOT BE MET FOR SUCIL
FACTORY SALANCM SHALL BE ACCOMPLMED SUCH THAT DIRECT DRIVE FAN BEARING
MOTIONS (HOARD AND OUTBOARD) SHALL NOT EXC® 0.80 MILS, PEAK -TO -PEAK, IN ANY
DIRECTION WHEN MEASURED IN THE 'FILTER INN MODE, AT ANY OPERATING SPEED; AND 1.00
MILS, PEAK -TO -PEAK, FOR ALL OTHER FANS (BELT -DRIVEN, FRP, ETC.). OWSITE FAN
BALANOW WILL HE REQUIRED IF THE OPERATIONAL DIRECT DRIVE FAN BEARING MOTIONS
(INBOARD AND OUTBOARD) O GEED 1.20 MILS, PEAK -TO -PEAK. IN ANY DIRECTION WHEN
MEASURED IN THE "FILTER OUT" MODE, AT ANY OPERATING 5PEED; AND 1.5 MILS, PEAK -TO -
PEAK, FOR ALL OTHER FANS. THE VIBRATION MEASUREMENT SYSTEM UTILIZED. FOR EITHER
CASE, MUST HAVE A FLAT RESPONSE DOWN TO 120 RPM,
VELOCITY OR A(,1t aMTiQNPOE4SURDiaff$ARENOTAO", EPrABLE
THE FAN AND AIR HANDLER SUPPORT STRUCTURES ARE AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE
VIBRATORY SYSTEM AND SHOP DRAWINGS WILL BE REQUIRED. IT IS ES,SENT4 L FOR 7TME
STRICTURES TO BE CAPABLE OF F ROVIIMIR; A DIRECT AVEIM FOR THE TRANSFER OF FORCES
GENERATED BY THE FAN(S) AND MOTOR(S) TO TIE .9UPPIORTIMG SI RI cnAZAL FLOOR SYSTEM
W THAT REGARD, CONNECTION BOLTS WRIST BE GYM M CARML CONSI'D ERAT1OIM, ESPEC IAK.L.Y
MI REGARD TO THEIR LOC4TIOW
l., .i . KL ...�:ra• 1 �. I R1, ;. Falb ` i•• • •
FOUNDATION, ETC., BEING CONSIDERED TO BE INFINITELY RIGID (REFERENCE- - AMCA )
* * * CRITICAL SPEED -THAT SPED WHICH CORRESPONDS TO THE NATURAL FREQUENCY OF
THE ROTATING SYSTEM, LE., WELLER AND SHAFT ASSEMBLY, WHEN MOUNTED ON AM
SUPPORTS (REFERENCE--AMCA).
1. K. MEDEARIS. "FAN-1 OMMTION-S02 SYSTEMS -ANALYSIS AND DEM N GWDELWES,"
THE ELECTRIC POWER RESEARCH INSTITUTE, PALO ALTO, CA,1986.
15851- s
CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
TRANSIT CENTER
Specification Index
DIVISION 15
Section No. Description
15010
Basic Mechanical Requirements
15040
Mechanical/Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
15043
Variable Frequency Controllers
15120
Piping Specialties
15125
Pipe Expansion Joints
15135
Meters and Gauges
15140
Supports and Anchors
15190
Mechanical Identification
15241
Vibration Control
15250
Mechanical Insulation
15300
Fire Protection
15410
Domestic Water Distribution Piping
15420
Drainage and Vent Piping
15440
Plumbing Fixtures
15510
Hydronic Piping
15517
Glycol Systems
15520
Steam Piping
15525
Steam Specialties
15540
HVAC Pumps
15755
Heat Exchangers
15830
Terminal Units
15851
Air Handling Fans
15855
Air Handling Units
15891
Metal Ductwork
15910
Ductwork Accessories
15932
Air Outlets and Inlets
15933
Air Terminals
15971
Direct Digital Control Systems
15990
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
F:\29604002\Spec\nech\Bid Documents\Lory Student Ctr Mech Index.doc
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15040 - MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECH EQUIPMENT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.3 STARTERS
A. Motor Starters: To be provided by Division 16.
2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. To be provided by Division 16.
2.5 DRIVES
A. V-Belt Drives:
1. Capacity of V-Belt Drives at rated RPM shall be not less than 150 percent of motor
nameplate horsepower rating.
2. V-Belt Drive combinations shall be limited to A, B, C and fractional horsepower
belts. 3V, 5V and 8V belts and sheaves shall not be used.
3. All fixed pitch sheaves, including single groove fan sheaves, shall be of the bushed
type. Fixed bore sheaves will not be acceptable for adjustable pitch sheaves.
4. Unit manufacturer shall provide OSHA approved belt guard with tachometer holes.
2.6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Refer to Section 15043.
2.7 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate mechanical equipment for secure mounting of motors and other electrical
items included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with equipment, or
adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, special couplings and similar indirect
coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable guards for motor drives,
arranged for lubrication and similar running -maintenance without removal of guards.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND TEST DATA
A. A factory load test shall be performed on each motor of 1,000 watt input or greater to assure
compliance with the energy -efficiency section of this specification.
B. Typical test data on every motor to be used on this project shall be made available upon
request.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's
instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces
inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys
and Allen set screws, except motors of 1/3 HP and less may be secured with Allen set screws
15040-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
$a
}
SHEAVE f
IS"
1
ROTOR ROTOR
SHAFT SHAFT
C=
D=
r
' aerrean D. C
lbndrsuanl ,
� � 5
FAN WHEEL BEARING
(WI)(W-, (B=)
(R'j)
ROTOR
SHAFT
81
DESCRIPILU
Bearing Diameter
62
Hewitt Diameer
Rl
Rotor Shaft Ditottata
R3
Rator Shaft Diameter
R1
Raw Shaft Diameter
Sl
Shem Weight
W I
fan Wheel W eighr
W3
Fan What Diameter
W3
Fan "M
Wa
Polar Moment Of Inertia
FlGl_!RE A. Faa Wheel Between Bearings
15851- 9
m
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AM HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
i
ROTOR
SHAFT
f
1 F 1
SHAFT SHAFT SHAFTDIA. * t D1A. +e2 DIA. a;
BEa1RiNG BEARItiG
DtaM1:TF3t DIAIMETER
SHEAVE 12
SHAFT ERAMETE#t
DIA.1
DIA.
DIA. 3
B.
C.
D.
for 04 FAN
'WIEEL
BEARING DIA. 91
BEARING DIA. R2
SHEAVE WEIGHT
FAN WHEEL
WE(GHT
DIAMETER
RPM
MERTIA
FIGURE B. Fan Wka Nak Between Be: s {Caw►kvcn*=
(for direct -rive fens. the parameters
are those for the motor)
15851- 10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of air handling equipment, and after motor has been
energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory -authorized service
representative to perform the following:
1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including ductwork
and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
3.7 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A. Start-up, test and adjust air handling equipment in presence of manufacturer's authorized
representative.
B. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
C. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.
Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.8 SPARE PARTS
A. General: Furnish to Owner with receipt one (1) spare set of belts for each belt driven air
handling equipment.
3.9 PRE -STARTUP CHECK
A. Final Checks Before Start -Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up:
1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing.
2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for
piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system,
align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory -recommended
lubricants.
6. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the full -open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature control operators.
B. Starting Procedures for Fans:
15851-11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15851- AIR HANDLING FANS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
3. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air -
handling -system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory -authorized service representative to
train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following:
1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting,
servicing, preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts.
2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in
Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Requirements".
B. Schedule training with at least seven (7) days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15851
15851-12
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSFr CENTER
SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 0 18 10.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Air Handling Unit Work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of Packaged Air Handling Units specified in this section include the following:
1. Indoor Air Handling Units
C. Refer to other Division 15 sections for vibration control units used in conjunction with air
handling units; field -applied insulation to air handling units; piping required in conjunction
with packaged air handling units; not work of this section.
D. Electrical Work: Refer to Division 15 section "Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work" for
requirements.
E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of
Division 16 sections:
Control wiring between field -installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control
panels.
a. Control wiring specified as work of Division 15 for Automatic Temperature
Controls is work of that section.
F. Refer to Fan System Requirements, Attachments "1", "2" & "3" at the end of this section for
fan vibration requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged air
handling units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with AMCA
standards.
15855-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CrrY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI 430
"Standard for Central -Station Air Handling Units", display certification symbol on
units of certified models.
3. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance with
ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
4. NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling unit internal insulation having flame spread
rating not over twenty-five (25) and smoke developed rating no higher than fifty (50);
and complying with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems".
UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of air
handling units, which have been listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA
Standards.
6. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable
to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of air
handling units.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air handling units showilig
dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly
indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gauges and finishes of materials, and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly -type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, weight
loadings, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
air handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and
portions to be field -installed.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products
in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication,
filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data,
product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals; in accordance
with requirements of Division 15.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air handling units with factory -installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack
components in factory -fabricated protective containers.
B. Handle air handling units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to air handling
unit manufacturer.
15855 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15955 - AIR HANDLING UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Store air handling units in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.
D. Comply with Manufacturers rigging and installation instructions for unloading air handling
units, and moving them to final location.
E. Air handling units shall be broken down and shipped in components as field conditions
require. A factory authorized representative shall inspect the final installation to certify that
the unit has been reassembled per factory recommendations and specifications.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air handling units of one of
the following:
Packaged Indoor Air Handling Units:
a. Trane (The) Co.
b. York; Division of York International
C. Carrier
2.2 INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. General Description:
1. Factory assembled unit and factory approved by AMCA.
2. Draw -through type with supply fan section, return fan section, coil section, mixing
section, and filter section.
3. Performance rated as scheduled on the drawings.
4. Units shall be shipped in sections to allow installation and future replacement of unit
through the mechanical room door. Provide tags on each section indicating direction
of air flow to facilitate assembly.
5. Constructed to withstand 4 inches of internal positive or negative static pressure
without deflection.
6. Provide factory mounted combination starter/disconnect per requirements of other
sections of this specification.
7. Provide unit with single point connection.
B. Casing:
Double wall construction, G90 gauge galvanized steel adequately reinforced with
structural members. Minimum access door width shall be 22-inches.
a. Provide perforated liner in supply and return fan sections.
b. Provide screens at all openings.
2. Insulate all sections to a minimum R-8 with 2-inch thick 3 pound per cubic foot
density matt -faced fiberglass. Install insulation with adhesive and stick pins. Seal
exposed edges with mastic sealer to prevent erosion into the airstream. Insulation,
adhesive, and mastic sealer shall conform to NFPA 90A.
3. Provide access doors for lubrication and maintenance. Doors shall be full height and
hinged. Access door shall have a full perimeter automotive type gasket to prevent air
15855 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15855 - AM HANDLING UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
leakage, and Ventlock style handle that can be opened from unit interior.
4. Provide a full size service door on the drive side of the fans. Provide belt guard with
tachometer holes to facilitate RPM readings of the fan.
5. The drain pan shall extend under the complete coil section. Drain connections shall
be provided on both sides of each drain pan and shall be constructed so that
condensate does not accumulate. All drain pans shall be of sealed double wall
galvanized construction with the manufacturer's standard insulation sandwiched
between the pan layers.
6. Condensate lines shall have deep -seal traps.
7. Provide galvanized steel finish.
C. Fans:
1. Provide supply fan and return fan sections with fan types as scheduled. Fan shaft
shall be properly sized and protectively coated with lubricating oil. Fan shafts shall
be solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical
speed as unit comes up to 125 percent of rated RPM. Fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced and tested individually and as an assembly at the required
RPM to meet design specifications. Fan wheel shall be properly secured to shaft to
prevent slippage. Provide minimum 14-gauge scroll and 12-gauge sides.
2. Provide self -aligning, grease lubricated pillow -block ball bearings with lubrication
fittings. Provide extended grease lines (inside of fan plenum) to drive side of fan, for
all fan bearings, rigidly attached for easy service access. Service room must be
allowed on the opposite side of the unit to perform regular maintenance. All bearings
shall perform to L-50 with 200,000-hour average life, in accordance with ANSI
B3.15.
3. Fans shall be internally isolated with 1-inch spring isolators.
4. Select fans for peak static efficiency (target is 80%).
D. Motors and Drives:
1. Fan motors to be mounted and isolated on the same integral base as the fan.
2. Fan motors shall be high efficiency open drip -proof, in accordance with other
sections of this specification.
3. Provide multiple V-belt drives minimum 2 belts rated at 1.5 times the motor
nameplate horsepower sized to eliminate belt squeal on startup.
4. Belts shall be oil resistant type with fan guard. Guard shall have perforated facing
and tachometer openings.
5. Motors shall be located on their respective motor bases with two base adjustment
screws per motor assembly allowing for 1/6 of the total motor base travel for
installation of new belts with remaining 5/6 of the travel available for belt tightening.
6. Arc of contact on the smaller sheave should not be less than 120 degrees.
7. Ratios of sheaves shall not exceed 8:1.
8. Belt speed shall not exceed 5,000 feet per minute.
9. A full and free circulation of air shall be around the drive at all times.
10. Drives shall be rated at 150 percent of fan brake horsepower requirement.
E. Coils:
Copper tubes with continuous aluminum plate fins assembled in a zinc -coated steel
frame.
15855 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. Coils shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. Coil face velocity shall
not exceed 500 FPM.
3. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of
mechanical expansion of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the
bonding process. Coil shall be mounted in the unit casing to be accessible for service
and can be removed from the unit either through the side or top. Capacities, pressure
drops and selection procedure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard
410.
4. Heating and Cooling Water Coils:
a. Enclosed in a coil section, removable through doors or access panels.
b. Waterflow shall be counter to airflow.
C. Supply header to ensure distribution of hot water to each tube of coil.
d. Proof tested to 300 psig and leak tested to 200 psig air pressure under water.
e. Fully drainable without air purging.
f. Aluminum or copper fins, bonded to seamless copper tube.
F. Filter Sections:
Factory fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casing
with filter guides and hinged, removable access doors with automotive style gasket
for minimum leakage for filter removal. Filter boxes shall be fabricated to flange to
other unit components. Provide blockoffs to prevent air bypass around filters. Filters
shall be removable with access door open. Door shall stay open without assistance of
maintenance personnel.
2. Provide filter section with 2" thick, 30% efficient throw -away pre -filters and 6-inch
thick 85% efficient final filters. Filters shall be removable from both sides of the
filter section. Provide two (2) sets of filters, one (1) set for use during construction
and one (1) set for use at completion of project.
G. Dampers:
1. Provide internally mounted minimum outside air, outside air, return air, and exhaust
air dampers. Dampers to be Ruskin CD36 or approved equivalent. Dampers shall be
of standard interlocking blade design and galvanized construction; they shall be
parallel blade type with replaceable extruded vinyl blade edge seals on all blades.
Blades shall rotate on synthetic sleeve bearings. Maximum damper blade length shall
be 60 inches. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5.4 cfm per square foot at one -inch WG.
2. Dampers shall be furnished with stainless steel side (jamb) seals.
3. Provide a separate minimum outside air damper.
H. Accessories:
All factory wiring shall be copper and installation shall conform to the latest edition
of the NEC.
2. Provide factory mounted combination starter per Division 16 requirements.
15855 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air handling units are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. General: Install air handling units where indicated, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to
ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor construction, roof
decking, and piping, as necessary to interface installation of air handling units with other
work.
C. Access: Provide access space around air handling units for service as indicated, but in no
case less than that recommended by manufacturer.
D. Support: Install floor -mounted air handling units on 4-inch high reinforced concrete pad,
4-inch larger on each side than unit base.
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory -mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical
Installer.
Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's
submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with
equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to Equipment Installer.
F. Piping Connections: Refer to Division 15 HVAC sections. Provide piping, valves,
accessories, gauges, supports, and as indicated.
1. Provide flexible connectors shutoff valves, balancing valves, unions, thermometers
(supply and return), P and T types (supply and return) and other accessories on all
piping connections.
G. Duct Connections: Refer to Division 15 Air Distribution sections. Provide ductwork,
accessories as indicated.
Provide flexible connections, manual volume dampers with lock and quadrant on all
duct connections.
H. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for air handling unit components.
15855 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15040 - MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECH EQUH'MENT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine
shafts.
B. Deliver starters and wiring devices which have not been factory -installed on equipment unit to
electrical installer for installation.
C. Install power and control connections for motors to comply with NEC and applicable
provisions of Division 16 sections. Install grounding except where non -grounded isolation of
motor is indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION COORDINATION
A. Furnish equipment requiring electrical connections to operate properly and to deliver full
capacity at electrical service available.
B. All control wiring to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be
color -coded and individually numbered to facilitate checking.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished,
set in place, and wired in accordance with the schedule contained in Division 16. The exact
furnishing and installation of the equipment is left to the Contractors involved. Contractor
should note that the intent of the schedule is to have the Division 15 and 16 Contractors
responsible for coordinating all control wiring as outlined, whether or not specifically called
for by the Mechanical or Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Comply with the applicable
requirements of Division 16 for all electrical work which is not otherwise specified. No
extras will be allowed for Contractor's failure to provide for these required items. The
Contractor shall refer to the Division 16 and Division 15 specifications and plans for all
power and control wiring and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to
bidding.
END OF SECTION 15040
15040-6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of air handling units, start-up and operate
equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct
malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
3.4 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide one (1) complete extra set of filters for each air handling unit. Install new filters at
completion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed.
B. Provide one (1) spare set of belts for each belt -driven air handling unit, obtain receipt from
Owner that belts have been received.
3.5 TRAINING
A. Schedule a minimum of four (4) hours of training with Owner. The manufacturer's
representative, and the Division 15 Contractor shall be present. The training shall be
coordinated by the Division 15 Contractor and the Owner in conjunction with the other
mechanical equipment on the project.
B. Training:
1. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on start-up and shutdown procedures,
troubleshooting procedures, and servicing and preventative maintenance schedules
and procedures. Review with the Owner's personnel, the contents of the Operating
and Maintenance Data specified in Division 1 and Section 15010.
2. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect/Engineer with at least seven (7)
days prior notice.
3.6 FAN SYSTEM VIBRATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The following attachments are for fan system vibration requirements that apply to this section.
1. Attachment "1 ": Fan System Requirements Directives
2. Attachment "2": Figure A. "Fan Wheel Between Bearings" sample form
3. Attachment "3": Figure B. "Fan Wheel Not Between Bearings" sample form
15855 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVLSION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSITCENTER
SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
NAILED SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL FAN SYS7VA AND A4+? HANDLER SUPPORT
STRUCTURES (1F APPLICABLE), WILL BE REARED. THESE MUST INCLJI. DE, FOR EXAMPLE,
ROTOR SHAFT D&IENSKONS; WHEEL WMfT AND NNERTIA. BEARING CENTER -TO -CENTER
DISTANCES; WARNMS, BORN &MORE PEDMe/ t MO7TaR a Uff E1r (SEE FIGURES
A & B). RELEVANT SKETCHES GIVING PEIMNENT DETAILS ARE ACCEPTABLE
THE DESIGN RESONANT SPEED" * OF A FAN SYSTEM (NOT CRITICAL SPEED***)
MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 25% ABOVE ITS MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED; NOTE THE
DIFFERENCE IN THE AMCA (Air Movement & Control Association) DEFINITIONS GIVEN
BELOW AND IN REF. 1. IT SHOULD BE N07ID THAT SPR^G SLpPORTS ARE NOT ACCWTABLE
SWCE THE DESIGN RESONfANT SPEED REqJ W46V T CANNOT BE MET FOR SUCR
FACTORY BALANOYG SHALL BE ACCOMPU94ED SUCH THAT DIRECT DRIVE FAN BEARING
MOTIONS (INBOARD AND OUTBOARD) SHALL NOT OUEED a80 MILS, PEAK -TEAK, IN ANY
DIRECTION WHEN MEASURED IN THE "FILTER INN MODE, AT ANY OPERATING SPEED, AND 1.00
MILS, PEAK -TO -PEAK, FOR ALL 07M FANS (BELT DRIVEN, FRP, ETC.). ON -SITE FAN
BALANCMU WILL BE REQUIRED E THE OPERATIONAL DIRECT DIVINE FAN BEARING MOTIONS
(INBOARD AND OUTBOARD) EXCEED 1.20 MILS, PEAK -TO -PEAK. IN ANY DIRECTION WHEN
MEASURED IN THE "FILTER OUT" MODE, AT ANY OPERATING SPEED; AND 1.5 MILS, PEAK -TO -
PEAK, FOR ALL OTW FANS THE VIBRATION MEASUREMENT SYSTEM UTIUIFD, FOR EITHER
CASE, MUST HAVE A FLAT RESPONSE DOWN TO 120 MR.
VELOCITY OR ACCEL6R4TVN/NE4SINREWSMSARENOTACC07ABLE
THE FAN AND AIR HANDLER SUPPORT STRUCTURES ARE AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE
VIBRATORY SYSTEM AND SHOP DRAWINGS WILL BE REQ1JMED. IT IS E.S.SIWTIAL FOR THOSE
STRUCTURES TO BE CAPABLE OF PROVEN A DIECT AVER FOR THE TRANSFER OF FORCES
GEINERATED BY THE FAN($) AND MOTOR(S) TO TFESUIT ORTAG STRpC:TINIAL FLOOR SYSTEM:
IN THAT REGARD, CONIYECTM BOLTS MUST BE GIVEN CAREFLL CONSKOZATKIK ESPECIALLY
NV REGARD TO TFIEAR LOC4TXM
1. ,,.: it , : t![ 1; �: Tat 1i/, I t�h.,rat. 4ilb � • t • • • '
* * * (; RITICAL SPEED- THAT SPEED WHICIi CORRESPONDS TO THE NATURAL FREQUENCY OF
THE ROTATING SYSTEM, LE., IMPELLER AND SHAFT ASSEMBLY, WHEN MOUNTED ON 8($fji
SUPPORTS (REFERENCE--AMCA).
1. K. MEDEARLS. "FAN FOUNDATION SOR SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND DESIGN GLPJXL NES,
THE ELECTRIC POWER RESEARCH INSTITUTE, PALO ALTO. CA. 1986.
15855 - 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15855 - AIR HANDLING UNITS COOVER•CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Bm
C -r
}
SHEAVE
tSi) BEARf:iG
(Bi)
i
ROTOR ROTOR
SHAFT SHAFT
C =
D=
F
FAN WHEEL
(W3)
:lavNrralm
�M�dOY a. C
PYsgit�e/ ,
aeo+i �e.�c Msu� i
5
BEARING
i
ROTOR
SHAFT
81
DE—.=nON PA�RAM=s
Baring Dmneter
82
Bearing Diameter
RI
Rmor Shaft Diameter
lu
Rou* Shaft Diameter
RS
Rota Shaft Dianew
S I
Show Weight
wI
fan Wheel weight
W2
Fat Wheel Diameter
W3
Fm RPM
W 4
Polar Momcm of Inertia
FIGURE A. Fan Wheel BcoNem Bearings
15855 - 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15955 — AIR HANDLING UNITS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
- _— " H"�--
ROTOR
i SHAFT
SHAFT SHAFT Si�AFT
DIA. NI VIA.02 0rA.93
SEARING BEA N-0
DIAIvt)riFR DlANIE'TER
SHEAVE r 822
a�o.ra1
1=01 tw 4WFAi+i
IkIMEL
go SUN -:1150
DIA. I
DIA_ 2
DIA.3
S.
C.
D.
SEARING DIA. t r
BEARING DIA. 92
SHEAVE WEIGHT
FAN WHEEL
%TJGHT
DIAMETER
RPM
WMTIA
FIGURE B. Fan Wbml Not Becwesn Bearings (Cawikvcvd)-
(for direct -rive fans. the parameters
are those for the motor)
END OF SECTION 15855
15855 -10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15891 - METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.2
A. Extent of Metal Ductwork is indicated on the drawings, schedules, and by requirements of
this section.
Ductwork Construction Table
Service
Type
Pressure
Insulation
Seal
Class
Class
Supply Air between Air
Galvanized steel, round or
+3"
Wrapped
B
Handling Unit and Terminal
rectangular
Air Box
Supply Air between
Galvanized steel, round or
+1"
Wrapped
C
Terminal Air Box and Air
rectangular
Devices (concealed)
Supply Air between
Spiral seam round
+1"
None
C
Terminal Air Box and Air
galvanized steel suitable for
Devices (exposed)
painted finish
Return Air
Galvanized steel, round or
-3"
Lined
B
rectangular
Air Handling Unit Exhaust
Rectangular galvanized
+3"
Wrapped
B
and Outside Air
steel
Exterior Supply and Return
Galvanized steel round or
3"
Lined
B
rectangular
General Building Exhaust
-3"
None
B
Transfer Duct
Rectangular galvanized
+1"
Lined
C
steel
Return Grille Sound Boot
Rectangular galvanized
+1"
Lined
C
steel
Shower Room Exhaust
Aluminum construction,
-3"
None
B
round or rectangular with
silicone sealant, install with
no seams longitudinally
along bottom
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork
products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
15891-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation
experience on projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project.
C. References to SMACNA, ASHRAE and NFPA are minimum requirements, the Contractor
shall fabricate, construct, install, seal all ductwork as described in this specification and as
shown on the drawings, in addition to these minimum standard references.
D. Codes and Standards:
1. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
2. SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual".
3. ASHRAE "Systems and Equipment Handbook", Chapter 16, Duct Construction.
4. NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems".
IWc 3Q:1u r�`T.v
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit 1/4-inch scale drawings of ductwork and fittings including, but not
limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor
penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and
equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop
practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not
reduced.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems, in
accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 15.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials and
products. Include maintenance data and shop drawings in maintenance manual.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protection: Protect ductwork and accessories from damage during shipping, storage, and
handling. Prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside. Where necessary to store outside, enclose
with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Rectangular Duct Liner:
15891- 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
a.
CertainTeed Corp.
b.
Johns -Manville Products Corp.
C.
Knauf Fiberglass
d.
Manson
e.
Owens -Coming Fiberglas Corp.
2. Round Duct Liner.
a.
Johns -Manville Products Corp.
3. Flexible Ducts:
a.
Flexmaster
b.
Thermaflex
C.
Genflex
d.
Ominair
e.
Hercules Industries
4. Spin -In Fittings:
a.
Flexmaster
b.
Thermaflex
C.
Genflex
d.
Ominair
e.
Hercules Industries
5. Factory -Fabricated Round Ductwork
a. Semco Mfg., Inc.
b. United Sheet Metal Division, United McGill Corp.
C. Sheet Metal Products Co.
d. Spiral Pipe of Texas, Inc.
e. AccuDuct
f. Metco, Inc.
2.2 DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A. Exposed Ductwork: Where ductwork is exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide mill
phosphatized finish that is free from visual imperfections, including pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, stains, dents, discolorations, and other imperfections, including those that would
impair painting.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized
sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G60 zinc coating in
accordance with ASTM A 525.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167; Type 304 or 316; with No. 4 finish where exposed to
view in occupied spaces, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with factory
applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation.
D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14.
15891- 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials of types and sizes required to comply with ductwork system
requirements.
B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15-degree
change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45-degree laterals
and 45-degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90-degree branches are
indicated, provide conical type tees.
C. Rectangular Duct Liner: ASTM C 1071 fiberglass duct liner with UL approved 25/50 flame/
smoke development. Factory applied edge and air surface coating of acrylic treated with EPA
registered ASTM G21 and G22 anti -microbial agent.
1. K Value: ASTM C 518, 0.25 at 75 degree F mean temperature.
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: ASTM C 423, 0.70 based on Type A Mounting.
3. Maximum Velocity: 5000 fpm.
4. Adhesive: Meeting ASTM C919.
5. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened.
6. Interior Ductwork: I -Inch thick.
D. Round Duct Liner: 1-Inch thick rigid preformed round liner with air surface coated with
acrylic coating treated with EPA registered ASTM G 21 and G22anti-microbial agent and UL
approved 25/50 flame/smoke development.
1. K Value: ASTM C 518, 0.23 at 75 degree F mean temperature.
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: ASTM C 423, 0.70 based on Type A mounting.
3. Maximum Velocity: 500 fpm.
E. Duct Sealant: UL Listed, Class 1, flame spread 0, fuel contributed 0, smoke developed 0,
water -based sealer, non -toxic, non-combustible, and non-flammable. Non -hardening, non -
migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as
compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in
ductwork.
F. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot -dipped galvanized
steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support
materials.
2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials except where materials
are electrolytically separated from ductwork.
G. Flexible Ducts: Flexible air ducts shall be listed under UL-181 standards as Class I Air Duct
Material and shall comply with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. Minimum operating pressure
rating shall be 6-inch W.C. through a temperature range of -20 degree to 150 degree F;
minimum working velocity rating shall be 400 fpm. Contractor shall assume responsibility
for supplying material approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1. All insulated flexible ducts shall be constructed on an all metal or aluminum laminate
inner core, 1-inch thick, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass insulation with minimum "C" factor
15891- 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
of 0.23 or less and an outer jacket made exclusively of fire retardant reinforced
aluminum material.
2. Non -insulated flexible ducts shall be constructed from dead soft aluminum sheet,
spiral corrugated, or aluminum construction over a steel spring helix.
H. Spin -in Fittings: Provide spin -in fittings between flexible and round sheet metal duct takeoffs
and air devices from main ducts. Spin -in fittings shall include bell mouth and butterfly type
manual volume damper with bearings, regulator and locking device.
I. All fasteners and hardware for stainless steel ductwork shall be made of stainless steel.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards" and ASHRAE "Systems and Equipment Handbook", Chapter 16,
Duct Construction.
B. Provide smooth radius elbows with 1.0 radius. Limit angular tapers to 30 degree for
contracting tapers and 20 degree for expanding tapers.
C. Refer to Division 15 section "Ductwork Accessories" for accessory requirements.
2.5 FACTORY -FABRICATED ROUND DUCTWORK (2-Inch Pressure Class and Less)
A. Material: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with
ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
B. Gauge: 28 Gauge minimum for round and oval ducts and fittings, 4-inch through 24-inch
diameter.
C. Elbows: One-piece construction for 90 degree and 45 degree elbows 14-inch and smaller.
Provide multiple gore construction for larger diameters with standing seam circumferential
joint.
D. Divided Flow Fittings: 90 Degree tees, constructed with saddle tap spot welded and bonded
to duct fitting body.
2.6 FACTORY -FABRICATED ROUND DUCTWORK (3-Inch Pressure Class and Above)
A. General: Provide factory -fabricated duct and fittings. All fittings shall be low loss conical
type.
B. Round Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527 by the
following methods and in minimum gauges listed.
15891- 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C.
103
Diameter
Minimum Gauge
Method of Manufacture
3" to 14"
26
Spiral Lockseam
15" to 26"
24
Spiral Lockseam
27" to 36"
22
Spiral Lockseam
37" to 50"
20
Spiral Lockseam
5 1 " to 60"
18
Spiral Lockseam
Over 60"
16
Longitudinal Seam
1. Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion -welded butt seam for longitudinal seam
duct. Provide internal stiffener rings and external reinforcement as required to meet
operating static pressures scheduled on drawings.
2. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous
welds along seams.
Diameter
Minimum Gauge
3" to 36"
20
38" to 50"
18
Over 50"
16
Flat -Oval Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, of
spiral lockseam construction, in minimum gauges listed.
1.
Maximum Width
Minimum Gauge
Under 25"
24
25" to 48"
22
49" to 70"
1 20
Over 70"
1 18
Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous
weld along seams.
Maximum Width
Minimum Gauge
Under 37"
20
37" to 50"
18
Over 50"
16
Internally Insulated Duct and Fittings: Construct with outer pressure shell, 1-inch thick
insulation layer, and perforated inner liner. Construct shell and liner of galvanized sheet steel
15891- 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs)
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General and Special Conditions, General Requirements, and other applicable
technical specifications apply to work of this section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 0 18 10.
B. Section 15040 - Mechanical/Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
C. Division 16 — Electrical; All Sections
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
C. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
D. NEMA AB 1 — Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
E. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
F. NEMA ICS 3.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and
Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems.
G. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
H. ANSI/UL Standard 508.
I. IEEE Standard 519-1992; For Voltage and Total Demand Distortion.
J. FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subpart J; For Radiated RFI.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
15043-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
complying with ASTM A 527, of spiral lockseam construction, use longitudinal seam for over
59-inches, in minimum gauges listed.
Nominal Duct Diameter
Outer Shell
Inner Liner
3" to 12"
26
gauge
24
gauge
13" to 24"
24
gauge
24
gauge
25" to 34"
22
gauge
24
gauge
35" to 48"
20
gauge
24
gauge
49" to 58"
18
gauge
24
gauge
Over 59"
16
gauge
20
gauge
Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous
weld along seams of outer shell.
Nominal Duct Diameter
Outer Shell
Inner Liner
3" to 34"
20 gauge
20 gauge
36" to 48"
18 gauge
20 gauge
Over 48"
1 16 gauge
20 gauge
2. Inner Liner: Perforate with 3/32-inch holes for 22 percent open area. Provide metal
spacers welded in position to maintain spacing and concentricity.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been connected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices that
will achieve airtight and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems. Install each run with
minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8-inch
misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable
ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type that will hold ducts true -to -shape and prevent
buckling, popping or compressing. Support vertical ducts at every floor.
B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as
required to avoid delays in work.
C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever
possible. Locate runs as indicated by drawings, details and notations or, if not otherwise
15891- 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block
access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead
construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
Limit clearance to 1/2-inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but
allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1-inch
clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal
ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above
suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically
shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished
work.
D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
E. Slope shower, locker room, and high moisture ductwork down to air device. Do not provide
joints on bottom of duct in longitudinal direction.
F. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed
to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet
metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on all four (4) sides by at least 1-1/2
inch. Fasten to duct only.
G. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil
frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
H. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
I. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts that are not connected to equipment or air distribution
devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or
other covering that will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be
completed.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER
A. Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Adhere insulation to sheet metal with full coverage of adhesive.
C. Mechanical fasteners should be of length sufficient to limit compression of liner.
D. All exposed edges of the liner must be factory or field coated.
E. Repair liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Do not exceed 6-0" for any flexible duct run.
B. Install in accordance with Chapter 3 of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,
Metal and Flexible".
15891- 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL . TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external
surfaces of foreign substances. Where ductwork is to be painted, clean and prepare surface
for painting.
B. Balancing: Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process.
END OF SECTION 15891
15891- 9
TECHMCAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 01810.
B. Types of Ductwork Accessories required for project include the following:
1. Manual Volume Dampers
2. Control Dampers
3. Smoke Dampers
4. Static Fire Dampers
5. Dynamic Fire Dampers (Curtain Style Blades)
6. Dynamic Fire Dampers (3-V Blades)
7. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers
8. Turning Vanes
9. Duct Hardware
10. Duct Access Doors
11. Flexible Connections
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork
accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of
ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
C. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555
"Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers" 6th Edition and UL Standard 555S "Motor -Driven
Fire/Smoke Dampers" 4`s Edition.
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.
E. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with "Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide" for the installation
of fire, smoke, and fire/smoke dampers.
F. All fire dampers, smoke dampers, fire/smoke dampers and radiation dampers shall meet the
latest local building code requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork
accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction, and installation
instructions.
15910-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturers assembly -type shop drawings for each type of
ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or
support, and methods of assembly of components. Include details of construction equipment
and accessories being provided.
C. Submittals for all damper types specified in this section shall include a schedule for each
damper indicating net free area, actual face velocity and pressure drop (at sea level) based on
net free area and the maximum air quantity which will be passing through the damper.
Submittals without this information will be rejected.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products,
in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each
type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance
manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Dampers:
a.
American Warming and Ventilating
b.
Air Balance, Inc.
C.
Arrow Louver & Damper; Division of Arrow United Industries, Inc.
d.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
e.
Penn Ventilator Co.
f.
Dowco Corp.
g.
Air Stream
h.
Cesco-Advanced Air
i.
Ruskin
j.
Vent Products Inc.
k.
Greenheck
2. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers:
a.
Air Balance, Inc.
b.
Ruskin
C.
Greenheck
3. Turning Vanes:
a. Aero Dyne Co.
b. Airsan Corp.
C. Barb -Aire
d. Duro Dyne Corp.
e. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs. Koppers Co., Inc.
f. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co.
g. Hercules
15910 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
4. Duct Hardware:
a. Ventfabrics, Inc.
b. Young Regulator Co.
5. Duct Access Doors:
a. Flexmaster (Inspector Series)
b. Cesco-Advanced Air
C. Duro Dyne Corp.
d. Ventfabrics, Inc.
6. Flexible Connections:
a. Duro Dyne Corp.
b. Ventfabrics, Inc.
C. General Rubber Corp. (Process and Exhaust Only)
2.2 DAMPERS
A. Low Pressure Rectangular Dampers (Less than 2,000 FPM and Under 4-Inch W.C. S.P.
Differential):
1. For 12-inch in height or larger, use multiple opposed blade type and close fitted to
ducts. 16 Gauge galvanized steel frame and blades with carbon steel shaft mounted
with oil impregnated bronze bearings, aluminum jamb seals and dual durometer vinyl
blade edge seals. Linkage shall be in jamb fixed type located outside the airstream
made of plated steel tie bar and crank plates, with stainless steel pivots. Maximum
damper panel width is 48-inch. Provide jack shafting when duct size required is
greater than 48-inch wide. Provide notched shaft end indicating damper position,
locking quadrant to fix damper position and handle. For flat oval and round
ductwork, provide Type C housing.
2. For ducts less than 12-inch in height, use 16 gauge frame and 20 gauge blade
galvanized steel, steel axle with nylon bearings, locking quadrant handle and notched
shaft end indicating damper position.
B. Low Pressure Round Dampers (Less than 1,500 FPM and Under 1-Inch W.C. S.P.
Differential):
1. For Dampers 4-inch diameter through 18-inch diameter use 18 gauge galvanized steel
frame and the following blade construction:
4-Inch thru 12-inch diameter 22 gauge galvanized steel
13-Inch thru 18-inch diameter 20 gauge galvanized steel
2. Carbon steel axle shaft with retainers mounted on nylon bearings with notched end
shaft indicating damper position, locking quadrant and handle.
C. Medium High Pressure Rectangular Dampers (Less than 4,000 FPM and Under 6-Inch W.C.
(48-Inch Wide or Less) S.P. or 8-Inch W.C. S.P. (36-Inch Wide or Less))-.
15910 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1. Use opposed blade dampers for volume control and parallel blade for
isolation/shutoff service.
2. 16 Gauge galvanized steel frame with welded corners, airfoil shape. Double
durometer vinyl blade edge seals and metallic compression seals at the jambs. Solid
carbon steel axles mounted on bronze oilite bearings. In jamb type linkage located
outside the air stream. 48-Inch wide and 60-inch high maximum damper size. For
fixed position balancing damper, delete blades to maintain 30 percent free area with
all other damper blades are 100 percent closed. For isolation or shutoff duty, damper
leakage shall not exceed 9.5 CFM/square foot at 4-inch W.C. S.P. differential.
Provide extended shaft with notched end indicating damper position, locking
quadrant and handle.
Air Balance Model AC-515/AC-516 (Steel)
D. Medium/High Pressure Round and Flat Oval Dampers (Less than 3,000 FPM and Under
4-Inch W.C. S.P. Differential):
1. Galvanized steel damper frame construction as follows:
I Te JUW
Under 6-inch diameter
12 gauge
6-Inch to 18=inch diameter
14 gauge
20-Inch to 30-inch diameter
2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel
32-Inch to 42-inch diameter
2 x 1 x 1/8 channel
FLAT OVAL
6-Inch to 18-inch wide 2 x 1/2 x 14 gauge channel
19-Inch to 48-inch wide 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel
49-Inch to 72-inch wide (6-inch to 18-inch high) 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel
(19-inch to 26-inch high) 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel
2. Galvanized steel damper blades as follows:
ROUND
4-Inch to 12-inch diameter 14 gauge
14-Inch to 18-inch diameter 12 gauge
20-Inch to 42-inch diameter 10 gauge
FLAT OVAL
6-Inch to 12-inch wide 14 gauge
13-Inch to 18-inch wide 12 gauge
20-Inch to 42-inch wide 10 gauge
3. 1/2-Inch diameter galvanized steel axles up to 18-inch diameter and 18-inch wide flat
oval, and 3/4-inch diameter plated steel sleeve pressed in to the frame with stainless
steel thrust washers with oil impregnated bronze bearings.
4. Provide notched end shaft to indicate damper position, locking quadrant and lever
handle.
15910 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.3 COMBINATION F1RE/SMOKE DAMPERS
A. General: Fire/Smoke dampers with airfoil blades meeting the requirements of UL Standard
555 e Edition and 555S 4 h Edition.
B. Rating: UL 555 fire resistance rating of 1-1/2 hours.
C. Operating Temperature: UL 555S elevated temperature rating of 350 degree F.
D. Leakage: UL 555S Class 11 Leakage Rating.
E. Differential Pressure: Minimum UL 555S differential pressure rating of 4-inch w.g.
F. Velocity: Minimum UL 555S velocity rating of 2000 fpm.
G. Frame: Structural galvanized steel hat channel. Top and bottom frame members on dampers
less than 7-inch high shall be low profile design to maximize the free area of these smaller
dampers. Four -piece construction with 1-1/2 inch minimum integral overlapping gusset
reinforcements in each corner to assure square corners and provide maximum resistance to
racking.
H. Blades: 16 Gauge galvanized steel with full-length structural reinforcement and a double skin
airfoil shape. Each blade shall be symmetrical relative to its axle pivot point, presenting
identical performance characteristics with air flowing in either direction through the damper.
Provide symmetrical blades of varying size as required to completely fill the damper opening.
I. Blade Stops: Blade stops at top and bottom of damper frame shall occupy no more than
1/2-inch of the damper opening area to allow for maximum free area and to minimize pressure
loss across the damper.
J. Linkage: Concealed in jamb.
K. Seals: Extruded silicone rubber permanently bonded to the appropriate blade edges.
L. Jamb: Flexible stainless steel compression type.
M. Axles: Minimum 1/2-inch diameter plated steel.
N. Bearings: Sintered bronze sleeve type rotating in polished extruded holes in the damper
frame.
O. Actuator: Normally closed, 120V, 60 Hz electric motor mounted outside the air stream that
meets UBC 15-second operation requirement and is tested for minimum of one (1) year of
holding with no evidence of spring return failure.
P. Sleeve: Factory supplied as a single assembly with an integral factory sleeve.
Q. Retaining Angles: Factory supplied and sized to provide installation overlap in accordance
with the manufacturer's UL listing.
15910 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
R. Two position indicator switches linked directly to damper blade to remotely indicate damper
blade position.
S. Duct Transition Connection: The Contractor is responsible for selecting and installing the
appropriate duct transition.
T. Heat -Activated Temperature Release Device: Control close and lock damper during test,
smoke detection, power failure, or fire conditions through actuator closure spring. At no time
shall actuator disengage from damper blades. Allow damper to be automatically reset
remotely or manually reset locally after test, smoke detection, or power failure. 165 Degree F
release temperature.
U. Performance: The pressure drop across the damper shall not exceed 0.15-inch w.c
2.4 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated 22 gauge, single blade or 24 gauge double
bladed 4-1/2 inch radius, 3-1/4 inch spacing turning vanes and Type 2, 4-1/2 inch wide
runners, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"
Fig 2.3.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide single blade turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2 inch
wide curved blades set at 3/4-inch O.C., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2-
inch O.C., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.
C. Do not use trailing edge turning vanes.
2.5 DUCT HARDWARE
A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project,
for the following:
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated,
duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests.
2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each manual volume damper, quadrant lock device on
one (1) end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over
12-inch. Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for
externally insulated ductwork.
2.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. General: Provide access doors, whether shown or not, at all fire dampers, smoke dampers,
temperature control dampers, branch balancing dampers, outside air plenums, inlet of fans,
upstream of all duct smoke detectors and all other equipment requiring service and/or access.
B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gauge as ductwork served, provide insulated doors
for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for
externally insulated duct. All access doors shall have gasket and will be air -tight. Provide
one (1) side hinged, other side with one (1) handle -type latch for doors 12-inch high and
smaller, two (2) handle -type latches for larger doors. For spiral ductwork, use United McGill
15910 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
combination access section type ARF-SD for non -insulated duct systems and type ARF-ID
double wall insulated door for insulated ducted systems (all supply ductwork).
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated
equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene -coated flameproof fabric crimped into
duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make air -tight joint. Provide adequate
joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also
capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. Shelf life shall be verified to not
exceed six (6) months. Any sign of cracking on interior or exterior shall be cause for
replacement immediately.
B. Use the following product types for each application accordingly:
1. Indoor Equipment Non -Corrosive Air Systems: Heavy glass fabric, double -coated
with DuPont's NEOPRENE, non-combustible fabric, fire retardant coating with good
resistance to abrasion and flexing. Fabric shall be 30 ounce per square yard, capable
of operating at —10 degree F to 200 degree F, waterproof, air tight, 6-inches wide,
complies with NFPA 90 and UL Standard #214. "Ventglas" Model as manufactured
by VentFabric, Inc.
2. Outdoor Equipment Non -Corrosive Air Systems (Exposed to Weather and Sun):
Heavy glass fabric, double -coated with DuPont's HYPALON, non-combustible
fabric, fire retardant coating with superb resistance to sunlight, ozone and weather
which has documented 20-year-old exposure tests. Fabric shall be 26 ounce per
square yard, capable of operating at —10 degree F to 250 degree F, waterproof, air
tight, 6-inches wide, complies with NFPA 90 and UL Standard #214. "Ventlon"
Model as manufactured by VentFabrics, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to the Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with
applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply, return and exhaust
air systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side,
except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.
15910 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Shop Drawings: Include front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and
weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.
C. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure
details.
D. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and
starting of product.
F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate Start -Up Inspection findings.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
B. Operation Data: Include instructions for starting and operating controllers, and describe
operating limits that may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.
C. Maintenance Data: Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and conforming to
referenced standards as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Store, protect, and handle products under provisions of Section 15010.
C. Accept controllers on site in original packing. Inspect for damage.
D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
E. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided
for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as on Shop Drawings.
15043 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of
ductwork accessories properly with other work.
E. Provide duct access doors whether shown or not for inspection and cleaning before and after
all filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers (minimum 16-inch x 24-inch in
ducts larger than 18-inch), firetsmoke dampers, upstream side of airturns in all return and
exhaust air ductwork, upstream of duct smoke detectors and elsewhere as indicated. Review
locations prior to fabrication. Provide multiple access doors for large ductwork to provide
adequate reach to equipment.
F. Provide 4-inch x 4-inch (104 x 104 mm) quick opening access doors for inspection at
balancing dampers. Install fire dampers and smoke dampers in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
G. Provide fire dampers and smoke dampers at locations shown, where ducts and outlets pass
through fire rated components, and where required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
H. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems
where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing.
I. Provide balancing dampers on high pressure systems where indicated. Use splitter dampers
only where indicated on Drawings.
J. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans
and equipment subject to forced vibration. Provide matching flanged backing frame with
flexible connector where flanged fan. connections are provided.
K. Where fire and smoke dampers are installed in fire and smoke rated construction, provide
firestopping between fire and fire smoke damper sleeve and substrate.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test
for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to
obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.
B. Test every fire and firelsmoke damper for proper operation, provide letter to the Architect/
Engineer certifying this work is complete and all dampers are functioning properly.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire
dampers and adjust for proper action.
B. Label access doors in accordance with Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification".
C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing".
D. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
15910 - 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one (1) link for every ten (10) installed of each
temperature range; obtain receipt.
END OF SECTION 15910
15910.9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15932 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15932 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Air Outlets and Inlets Work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of Air Outlets and Inlets required for project include the following:
1. Ceiling Air Diffusers
2. Wall Registers and Grilles
3. Louvers
C. Refer to other Division 15 sections for ductwork, duct accessories; testing and balancing; not
work of this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and
inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650
"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets".
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with
ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets
and Inlets".
3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under
requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual".
4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal.
5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 50OL-99
"Laboratory Method of Testing Louvers for Rating".
6. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets
including the following:
15932-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15932 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location,
number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory fiunished; indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration
ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings.
Indicate selections on data.
B. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of each type of finish furnished.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawing for each type of air
outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products,
in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and
spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals;
in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory -fabricated fiber -board type containers.
Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid
crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work
traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade
and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:
a. Carnes Co.; Division of Wehr Corp.
b. Krueger; Division of Philips Industries, Inc.
C. Titus Products Division; Philips Industries, Inc.
2. Louvers:
a. Air Balance
b. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.
C. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
d. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
e. Ruskin
f. Greenheck
15932 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15932 - AM OUTLETS AND INLETS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.2 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers
where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and
components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in
manufacturer's current data.
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent
ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate
fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types
of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.
D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed
on Air Device Schedule.
2.3 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard registers and grilles
where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and
components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in
manufacturer's current data.
C. Wall Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with
adjacent wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with
accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications
for types of wall construction which will contain each type of wall register and grille.
D. Types: Provide registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as
listed on air device schedule.
2.4 LOUVERS
A. General: Provide stationary extruded aluminum louvers in sizes and locations indicated on
the Drawings.
B. Performance: Provide beginning of water penetration (0.01 oz. per sq.ft.) at a free area
velocity of no less than 900 fpm at standard air conditions based on mill finish, 48-inch x 48-
inch test size per AMCA Standard 511.
C. Frame: 6-Inch deep channel, 0.81-inch thick 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy. Coordinate
with wall construction shown on the Architectural Drawings and provide frame and sill style
necessary to provide a weatherproof installation.
D. Blades: Drainable blade design 0.81-inch thick, 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy.
15932 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15932 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
E. Mullions: Provide concealed mullions using an extruded concealed blade brace of the same
material as the louvers.
F. Louver Screens: On inside face of louvers, provide removable 1/2-inch expanded mesh
framed aluminum bird screen.
G. Finish: Mill, Kynar, provide standard color chart for color selection by Architect.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended
functions.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to
interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction
"Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical
ceiling modules.
3.3 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, three (3) operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet
that require them.
END OF SECTION 15932
15932-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15933 - AIR TERMINALS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15933 - AIR TERMINALS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Air Terminals Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of Air Terminals specified in this section include the following:
Variable Volume Air Terminals
a. Shutoff Single Duct
b. Reheat
C. Induction
d. By -Pass
C. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 01810.
D. Refer to other Division 15 sections for external insulation of air terminals; testing, adjusting
and balancing of air terminals; temperature controls which are to be furnished by others but
installed as work of this section; temperature controls for air terminals; not work of this
section.
E. Refer to Division 16 sections for the following work; not work of this section.
Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on air terminals.
Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified
as furnished, or factory -installed, by manufacturer.
F. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of
Division 16 sections:
Control wiring between field -installed controls and air terminals.
a. Control wiring specified as work of Division 15 for Automatic Temperature
Controls is work of that section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of air terminals with
characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
ADC Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in
accordance with ADC standards, and bear ADC Seal.
15933-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15933 - AM TERMINALS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. ARI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in
accordance with ARI 880 "Industry Standard for Air Terminals" and bear ARI
certification seal.
3. NFPA Compliance: Construct air terminals using acoustical and thermal insulations
complying with NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including performance and
sound data for each size and type of air terminal furnished; schedule showing drawing
designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished;
and installation and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for electric power and control
components, clearly indicating required field electrical connections.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products,
in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air terminal;
including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop
drawings, and maintenance data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of
Division 15.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air terminals wrapped in factory -fabricated fiber -board type containers. Identify on
outside of container type of air terminal and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or
bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in boxes.
B. Store air terminals in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic.
Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and
enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Air
Terminals:
a.
Titus Products Division
b.
Trane (The) Co.
C.
Enviro-Tec
d.
Krueger
15933 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15933 - AIR TERMINALS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.2 AIR TERMINALS
A. General: Provide factory -fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with
performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule.
B. Air terminal units shall be low pressure drop, single duct throttling type pressure independent
and suitable for use in low pressure variable volume air distribution systems.
C. Casing shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel construction with internal acoustical coated 1-inch
thick, 1-1/2 lb. density fiberglass insulation, inlet and outlet duct connection and discharge
sound attenuator, where scheduled.
D. Internal damper blade shall be extruded aluminum or 18 gauge steel with keyed fit shaft and
nylon bushing. Damper shall seal against gasketed stops maximum 2 percent leakage at
3.0-inch S.P. All mechanical parts shall be galvanized or non-ferrous.
E. Hot water heating coils shall be designed for 200 psig maximum working pressure and 200
degree F maximum operating temperature. Coil shall be serpentine -type, 2-row minimum,
constructed of 1/2-inch O.D. copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins; galvanized
steel casing.
F. Provide label on each air terminal unit, indicating plan designation, unit size, CFM range and
settings and calibration curve.
G. Controls shall include wall mounted thermostat, modulating damper, damper operator
furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor, and factory installed by the equipment
manufacturer, pressure independent pneumatic cross -shaped flow sensor with amplifying total
pressure pickup points connected in parallel to a central averaging chamber (an inlet velocity
sensor with pickup points connected in series shall not be accepted), for measuring inlet
volume. The sensor shall amplify duct velocity pressure by a factor of 1.75 and shall maintain
control accuracy with the same size inlet duct in any configuration. Specific control
component requirements are specified in Division 15 Section Direct Digital Control Systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS
A. General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other work;
and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no case less than
that recommended by manufacturer.
15933 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15933 - AIR TERMINALS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Duct Connections: Connect ductwork to air terminals in accordance with Division 15
ductwork sections.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air
terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak -tight.
B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and retest
to demonstrate compliance.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturers touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION 15933
15933-4
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSFFV
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of controller for two (2) years from Date of Substantial
Completion.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two (2) of each air filter.
B. Provide three (3) of each fuse size and type.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. All VFDs provided for this project shall be of a single manufacturer.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Asea Brown Boveri (ABB)
2. Robicon
3. Danfoss Graham
2.2 GENERAL
A. The VFD shall convert incoming 3-phase 60 Hz AC power to a variable frequency, variable
voltage AC output suitable for control of a standard NEMA Design B induction motor over a
10:1 speed range.
B. The VFD shall consist of a 3-phase full -wave converter section to rectify the incoming AC
source, a filtered DC bus section, and a sinusoidal PWM output section utilizing IGBT type
output transistors, and utilizing sensorless torque vector control logic, as specified below.
C. The VFD shall maintain a near unity power factor regardless of speed or load (0.95 or better
for drives larger than 5 HP).
D. Inverter section shall utilize insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) with a minimum rating
of 1200 VDC, and have an adjustable carrier frequency range of 1 kHz to 12 kHz through 100
HP.
E. The VFD and options shall be tested to ANSUUL Standard 508 and listed by either UL or
ETL.
F. Power line noise shall be limited to a 5% voltage distortion factor and total demand distortion
factor (TDD) as defined in IEEE Standard 519-1992, Guide for Harmonic Control and
Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters. Submittal data shall include calculations
to show TDD based on available short circuit current. The point of common coupling (PCC)
shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
G. The VFD torque characteristic shall match the driven load.
15043 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15971 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 01810.
B. The Contractor shall become aware of the Method of Procedure requirements outlined in
Division 1. Change orders will not be considered for time associated with Method of
Procedure requirements.
C. General: The Control System Contractor shall provide a complete new modified control
system using new control devices to replace existing devices to operate as specified. The
Contractor shall inspect the existing conditions prior to submitting a proposal. The existing
temperature control system control devices, dampers, operators, wiring, conduit, air
piping, valves, etc., not being modified and which are no longer utilized, shall be
removed, and not abandoned in place. Control Contractor shall connect and map the
new standalone controllers into the existing Johnson Controls Network Automation
Engine and the existing workstation.
D. The Control Contractor will be responsible for all installation, programming, commissioning,
testing and performance verification.
E. The Controls Contractor will be responsible for providing all devices required for a complete
operating control system.
F. It shall be a digital, distributed microprocessor -based system with an electronic interface,
where required. The Control System for this project will be referred to as a Building
Automation System (BAS).
G. Total quantity and type of control points shall consist of specifications, drawings and as
required to complete the Sequence of Operation as specified. Additional points shall be
provided as required to meet all sequence of operation functions, safeties and data base. The
Drawings and Specifications are not intended to show all details necessary to make the system
complete and operable.
H. The Control Contractor shall be responsible for all phases of software design, all equipment,
installation and warranty for the BAS. The Control Contractor shall be responsible for
supplying and installing all necessary control devices for completing the BAS.
The system shall include all control device, valves, interlocks, field devices, hardware,
software, automatic dampers, piping, fittings, wire, conduit, etc., as specified and required and
connected so as to perform all functions and operate according to the specified sequences.
J. The Contractor shall leave operable existing controls in operation until the BAS is tested and
proven operative. At that point, and with concurrence from the Owner and the Engineer, the
Contractor shall be responsible for removing existing controls which are no longer necessary.
Start-up of the BAS system, and any installation work that requires the interruption of the
15971 - 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
normal operation of any piece of equipment, shall be scheduled with the Owner. If the
interruption of the normal operation of any piece of equipment during normal working hours
is unacceptable to the Owner, then it shall be scheduled during after hours (night or
weekend).
K. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly
approved by the Owner or Architect/Engineer in writing. Unless approved otherwise, all
products (including firmware revisions) used in this installation shall have been used in at
least twelve (12) projects prior to this installation. The previous sites may be located
anywhere in the U.S.A. This requirement is not intended to restrict the Contractor to the use
of any outdated equipment. Therefore, all products used in this installation shall also be
currently under manufacture and have available, for at least ten (10) years after completion of
the contract, a complete line of spare parts. If the above requirements are mutually exclusive,
the Contractor shall include a specific statement to this effect in the Bid.
L. Refer to other Division 15 sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies and
dampers in mechanical systems.
M. Provide electrical work as required, complying with requirements of Division 16 sections
including, but not limited to raceways, wires, cables, electrical identification, supporting
devices and electrical connections for equipment. Work includes, but is not limited to, the
following:
1. Interlock and control wiring between field -installed controls, indicating devices and
unit control panels.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all additional electrical and other costs
involved to accommodate the temperature control system panel, motors and electrical
devices requiring power which differs from the power requirements shown on the
Electrical Drawings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in installation and commissioning and
servicing of digital control equipment, of types and sizes required, whose firm has been in
business in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Only those manufacturers specified are allowed to bid temperature controls. All bidders shall
make available, upon the Owner's request, open book unit pricing of all materials and labor.
C. The system shall be installed by competent mechanics, regularly employed by the
Temperature Control Contractor.
D. No Field Devices shall be multiplexed to a single UO point unless specified. Each control or
sensing point shall be terminated at a unique location on the BAS panel, Slave or Dedicated
Controller and be associated with a unique software point on the BAS.
E. Codes and Standards:
All equipment and the installation shall comply with the requirements of all
applicable local and national codes including but not limited to the currently enforced
edition of the Uniform Building Code, Uniform Fire Code, Uniform Electrical Code,
15971 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
and all applicable codes of the National Fire Protection Association including the
National Electrical Code.
2. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and
labeled by UL and comply with NEMA Standards.
3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and
devices for electric control systems.
4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control
sequences.
F. The equipment and software proposed by the supplier shall be currently in manufacture. No
custom products shall be allowed unless required by the Specification. All products shall be
supported by the manufacturer for a minimum of five (5) years including spare parts, board
repairs and software revisions.
G. The Temperature Control Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors performing work
on this project necessary to achieve a complete and neat installation. To that end, each
contractor shall consult the drawings and specifications for all trades to determine the nature
and extent of others work.
H. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to work in cooperation with the Owner and with
all other contractors and employees rendering such assistance and so arrange his work such
that the entire project will be delivered complete in the best possible condition and in the
shortest time.
1.3 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
A. Project Documentation: All custom software, programs, code, databases, graphic files and
drawings (whether hard copy or CADD based files) prepared for this system shall be the
exclusive property of the Owner and shall not be reproduced or distributed without prior
written permission from the Owner.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 and 15 submittal requirements.
B. In addition to the requirements set forth in Paragraph A above, the following shall be included
in the shop drawing submittals including, but not limited to:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data sheets for each control
device furnished, each data sheet shall be labeled indicating its' control drawing
descriptor and include the following:
a. Indicating dimensions;
b. Capacities;
C. Performance characteristics;
d. Electrical characteristics;
e. Finishes of materials;
f. Commissioning, installation instructions and start-up instructions.
15971 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. Control system drawings containing pertinent data to provide a functional operating
system and a sequence of operation.
3. Detailed wiring diagrams.
4. A floor plan of each area with a detailed new conduit/wiring layout shall be included.
The plan shall indicate all conduit locations within +/- 2-feet of actual installed
location. All walls, doors and temperature control devices shall be accurately shown.
5. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and
all control devices. Identify all control points with labeling.
6. Label each control device with set point or adjustable range of control. Provide a bill
of materials with manufacturer's part number.
7. Indicate all required point-to-point electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between
portions of wiring that are existing and portions to be field -installed.
8. Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and
labeling.
9. Include verbal description of sequence of operation and reference each device
described by schematic symbol used.
10. Provide a detailed listing of all software program code written for each system.
11. Provide a point list with database input information to include a point name, address,
base and span, action and other required information.
12. Provide a detailed test plan and procedure for each HVAC system and for each type
of terminal unit control including valves. The test plans shall fully define reporting
methods, procedure, equipment utilized, milestones for the tests, identifying the
simulation programs, and personnel. The test procedures shall be developed from the
test plans and shall consist of instructions for test execution and evaluation. A test
report form shall be developed for each point and sequence of operation.
Commissioning procedures shall be provided for each HVAC system and for each
type of terminal unit control system. The procedure shall include set point, prop.
band, integral, derivative, mode constraints input, output settings, tuning procedures.,
etc.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submittal Data and Shop Drawings shall be prepared and submitted in the following formats:
1. All drawings prepared for the project shall be developed using the AutoCad CADD
program Rev. 14.0 or most current version, (or a CADD package capable of
producing AutoCad "DXF" compatible format files).
2. All submittals data shall be the same size for any group of information and shall be in
a three (3) screw and post binder. (NO EXCEPTIONS). All the information shall be
indexed and tabbed with reference to the specific section of these specifications.
3. The format for different groups of submittal information are as follows:
a. Control drawings, building plans (including complete floor plans),
schematics and system configurations shall be CADD prepared drawing,
bound and indexed. Drawings that cannot represent the total information on
an individual ANSI size B (I I " x 17") drawing, i.e., a building plan, shall be
noted with appropriate match lines, cross references and key plans.
b. Technical data, sequence of operations, material list, point lists, program
listings,1/0 schedules, operator's and programmer's manuals, etc., shall be
type written, original product data sheets or CADD prepared drawings,
ANSI Size A or ANSI Size B.
15971 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
4. Upon completion of the project and acceptance of systems, the Contractor shall
provide to the Owner one (1) set of hard copy As -Built Shop Drawings and diskettes.
E. Shop drawings shall include riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers and
workstations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of
each mechanical system showing all connected points with reference to their associated
controller. Typicals will be allowed where appropriate.
F. When the Architect/Engineer requires, the Contractor will resubmit with the corrected or
additional submittal data. This procedure shall be repeated until all corrections are made to
the satisfaction of the Engineer and the submittals are fully reviewed.
G. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the Architect/Engineer are not
change orders, that the purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to
demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that
he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to
furnish and install, and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use.
The Contractor shall be responsible for space requirements, configuration, performance,
changes in bases, supports, structural members and openings in structure, and other apparatus
that may be affected by their use.
H. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing
submittals and the contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are
discovered either prior to or after shop drawing submittals are processed by the
Architect/Engineer, the design drawings and specifications shall control and shall be
followed. If alternates do not meet these requirements, it shall be this Contractor's
responsibility to remove them and install material originally specified, at no cost to the
Owner.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain
cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent any equipment damage,
and to eliminate all dirt and moisture from equipment. Store all equipment and materials
inside and protected from weather.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND CONTRACTORS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, install one (1) of the following systems:
Johnson Controls Inc. Branch Office
2.2 GENERAL PRODUCTS DESCRIPTION
A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be capable of integrating multiple building
function including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy
management, and historical data collection and archiving. All products and materials
installed shall be suitable for the intended application requirements including but not limited
to:
15971 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGrrAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1. Accuracy
2. Rangeability
3. Temperature and pressure ranges
4. Shutoff pressures
5. Differential pressures
6. Repeatability
7. Materials of construction suitable with the environment and/or media in which they
are in contact with
8. Code compliance
9. Velocities
B. The BAS shall consist of the following:
1. Standalone DDC panels
2. Standalone application specific controllers (ASCs)
3. Portable Operator's Terminals
4. Personal Computer Operator Workstations
5. High Speed Communication Network (LAN)
The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and
functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, standalone DDC panels, and operator
devices.
C. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm
reporting and control execution. Each DDC panel shall operate independently by performing
its' own specified control, alarm management, operator 1/0, and historical data collection. The
failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of
control strategies at other operational devices.
D. Standalone DDC panels shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands and
alarm reports directly to, any other DDC panel or combination of panels on the network
without dependence upon a central processing device. Standalone DDC panels shall also be
able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations without dependence upon a
central processing device.
E. Shared points will not be allowed.
F. BAS shall allow third party software to operate on personal computer workstation without any
degradation to the controls operating normally.
2.3 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS
A. The design of the BAS shall network operator workstations and standalone DDC panels as
shown on the attached system configuration drawing. Inherent in the system's design shall be
the ability to expand or modify the network either via the local area network, or auto -dial
telephone line modem connections, or via a combination on the two (2) networking schemes.
Local Area Network:
a. Workstation/DDC Panel Support: Operator workstations and DDC panels
shall directly reside on a local area network such that communications may
15971- 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.4
be executed between controllers, directly between workstations, and between
controllers and workstations on a peer -to -peer basis.
b. Dynamic Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or
connected via dial -up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status
and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other
devices via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon
logical identification of building equipment.
1) Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware
configuration of the BAS. The hardware configuration of the BAS
network shall be totally transparent to the user when accessing data
or developing control programs.
C. General Network Design: Network design shall include the following
provisions:
1) High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report
generation from multiple controllers and upload/download
efficiency between network devices. The minimum baud rate shall
be one (1) Megabaud.
2) Support of any combination of controllers and operator workstations
directly connected to the local area network. A minimum of fifty
(50) devices shall be supported on a single local area network.
3) Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either
workstations, DDC panels, or the network media. The network
shall include provisions for automatically reconfiguring itself to
allow all operational equipment to perform their designated
functions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple
failures.
4) Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being
lost.
5) Error detection, correction, and retransmission to guarantee data
integrity.
6) Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and
ensure alarms are reported as quickly as possible in the event an
operator device does not respond.
7) Commonly available, multiple -sourced, networking components and
protocols shall be used to allow the BAS to coexist with other
networking applications such as office automation. MAP,
ETHERNET, 13M Token Ring and ARCNET are acceptable
technologies.
8) Use of Industry Standard IEEE 802.x protocol. Communications
must be of a deterministic nature to assure calculable performance
under worst -case network loading.
9) Synchronization of the realtime clocks in all DDC panels shall be
provided.
STANDALONE DDC PANELS
A. General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi -tasking, multi-user,
real-time digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular
hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and
input/output modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the
requirements of this specification and the Point List.
15971 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its' own operating system
and data bases including:
1. Control Processes
2. Energy Management Applications
3. Alarm Management
4. Historical/Trend Data for all points
5. Maintenance Support Applications
6. Custom Processes
7. Operator VO
8. Dial -Up Communications
9. Manual Override Monitoring
C. Point Types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
1. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts
2. Digital Outputs for On/Off equipment control
3. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow and position measurements
4. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of
primary equipment
5. Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring
D. Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion
through the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors
and actuators.
The system architecture shall support a minimum spare capacity of 20% for all types of DDC
panels, and all point types included in the initial installation.
E. Serial Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two (2) RS-232C
serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator 1/0 devices
such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted
or portable DDC panel Operator's Terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary
use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected
modems, printers, or network terminals.
F. Hardware Override Switches: The operator shall have the ability to manually override
automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC panel via local, point discrete, onboard
HAND/OFF/AUTO operator override switches for analog control type points. These override
switches shall be operable whether the panel is powered or not.
G. Hardware Override Monitoring: DDC panels shall monitor the status or position of all
overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that
automatic control has been inhibited. DDC panels shall also collect override activity
information for daily and monthly reports.
H. Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each
binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the
need for an operator 1/0 device.
15971 - 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
L Integrated On -Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self -
diagnostics, communication diagnosis, and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. The DDC
panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or
repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be
provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator 1/0 device.
J. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as
well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with the
latest IEEE Standard 587.
1. Provide ISLATROL active tracking filters or equal, which provides both high and
low voltage transients, non -linear characteristics, capable of instantaneously
responding to spikes or transients without degradation to the filter or its performance.
Power protection device shall be UL listed and have a reliability in excess of 100,000
hours of mean time between failure.
2. Signal wiring shall not be installed in same conduit as high voltage wiring.
K. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly
shutdown of all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system
software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration
data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile
memory for a minimum of seventy-two (72) hours.
1. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full
operation without manual intervention.
2. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability
of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS-232C port.,
or via telephone line dial -in.
2.5 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
A. General:
1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
specification shall be provided.
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part
of the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for
execution.
B. Control Software Description:
1. Pre -Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform
the following pre -tested control algorithms.
a. Two Position Control
b. Proportional Control
C. Proportional plus Integral Control
d. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control
e. Automatic Control Loop Tuning
2. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for
limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any
1-hour period.
15971- 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive
demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays
between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
4. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel
shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal
occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal
operation.
C. Energy Management Applications: DDC panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of
the following energy management routines.
1. Time of Day Scheduling
2. Calendar Based Scheduling
3. Temporary Schedule Overrides
4. Optimal Start
5. Optimal Stop
6. Night Setback Control
7. Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer)
8. Peak Demand Limiting
9. Temperature Compensated Load Rolling
10. Fan Speed/CFM Control
11. Heating/Cooling Interlock
12. Cold Deck Reset
13. Condensing Unit Sequencing
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and
shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building
equipment as described in the EXECUTION portion of this specification.
D. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job -
specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special
control routines.
Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a
custom process:
a. Any system -measured point data or status
b. Any calculated data
C. Any results from other processes
d. User -Defined Constants
e. Arithmetic functions (+, -, *, /, square root, exp, etc.)
f. Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.)
g. On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers.
2. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of
the following:
a.
Time interval
b.
Time of day
C.
Date other processes
d.
Time programming
e.
Events (e.g., point alarms)
15971- 10
4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
H. Input Power: 208 Volt, 3-phase, 60 Hz.
I. Voltage Tolerance: ±10%; Frequency tolerance ±3%.
J. The VFD output shall be rated for continuous duty with full load amp ratings that meet or
exceed NEC Table 430-150. The VFD shall have overload capability of 110 percent rated
current for 60 seconds. Output voltage range shall not exceed input rated voltage.
K. Ambient Operating Conditions: Temperature, 0-40 degrees C; Relative Humidity, 0-95
percent, non -condensing, 5001 feet elevation, without deration.
L. All printed circuit boards and power subassemblies shall be burned in at elevated temperature
(50 degrees C minimum) for forty-eight (48) hours minimum. The completed, assembled
VFD shall be functionally tested under motor load before shipment to ensure proper
operation. The manufacturer shall provide certification that these tests have been completed.
2.3 BASIC FEATURES
A. Provide with "N2" card for remote readout and function interface with Building Automation
Systems (BAS).
B. Control power transformer with fused primary and 24V or 120V fused secondary.
C. VFD AC line input high speed semi -conductor type current -limiting fuses rated 200,000 AIC
minimum.
D. Operator Controls:
"HAND -OFF -AUTO" Selector Switch. hi "AUTO' position, drive starts and stops
motor from remote contact closure, and motor speed shall be proportional to a remote
speed control signal. In "HAND" position, motor is started and stopped from VFD
Keypad/Display Module, and the motor speed shall be as set through the VFD
Keypad/Display Module.
2. Pilot Lights: LED Type. 22.5mm IEC Style, Red "VFD On", White "Control Power
On", and Amber "VFD Fault".
E. Keypad/Display Module:
1. A multi -line alpha -numeric backlit display capable of displaying at minimum motor
speed (Hz), motor current (A), motor voltage (V), elapsed time meter (Hrs.), inverter
load (%) and all drive programming parameters.
2. Keypad to enable starting and stopping, and manual speed adjustment when the
selector switch is in "HAND" position.
F. Programmable Relay Outputs (three minimum) capable of indicating the following:
1. VFD in Run Mode
2. VFD at Zero Speed
3. VFD Fault
15043 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or
calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network.
In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all
other DDC panels on the local area network.
4. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages
and advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a
message to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the
execution of a dial -up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager.
5. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be
self -documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented
via graphical flowcharts and English language descriptors.
E. Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct
alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform
distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to
non -critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time
shall the DDC panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC
Workstation or local UO device, or communications with other panels on the network.
1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the
point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.
2. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each
point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed
operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three (3) priority levels shall be
provided. Each DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected
alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually
inhibit alarm reporting for each point.
The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be
acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis
at a later date.
3. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user -defined
list of operator devices, or PCs used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall
also be automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is
found to be off-line.
4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user
shall be able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more fully
describe the alarm condition or direct operator response.
Each standalone DDC panel shall be capable of storing a library of at least 250
Alarm Messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the
panel.
Auto -Dial Alarm Management: In Dial -Up applications, only critical alarms shall
initiate a call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be
minimized by time -stamping and saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a
manual request, or until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a
minimum of fifty (50) alarms.
15971 - 11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical Data collection utilities shall be
provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways.
1. Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC panels shall also provide high
resolution sampling capability with an operator -adjustable resolution of 10-300
seconds in one (1) second increments for verification of control loop performance.
2. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data
shall also be assignable to user -definable trends for the purpose of collecting
operator -specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals
of one (1) minute to two (2) hours, in one (1) minute intervals, shall be provided.
Each standalone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be
capable of storing a minimum of 500 data samples.
3. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the standalone DDC
panels, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall
occur based upon either user -defined interval, manual command, or when the trend
buffers become full. All trend data shall be available in disk file form for use in third
party person computer applications.
G. Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically accumulate and store
runtime hours for binary input and output points as specified in the EXECUTION portion of
this specification.
1. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one (1) minute or less.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization.
Unique, user -specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
H. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically sample, calculate, and
store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user -selected analog and
binary pulse input -type points.
1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9
units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons, etc.).
2. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one (1) minute or less.
3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user -specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
I. Event Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the
number of times a pump or fan system is cycled ON and OFF. Event totalization shall be
performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
1. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a
minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user -specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
15971-12
TECI11'4ICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.6 APPLICATION OF SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS - HVAC APPLICATIONS
A. Each Standalone DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through
the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs).
B. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control
responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a
microprocessor -based, multi -tasking, real-time digital control processor. Points shall not be
shared between controllers.
C. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data base
including:
Control Processes
2. Energy Management Applications
3. Operator 1/0 (Portable Service Terminal)
D. The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through any network -
resident PC workstation, or any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC
panel in the network.
E. Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service
terminal. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:
1. Display temperatures
2. Display status
3. Display set points
4. Display control parameters
5. Override binary output control
6. Override analog set points
7. Modification of gain and offset constants
F. Powerfail Protection: All system set points, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any
other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does
not necessitate reprogramming the controller.
2.7 AHU CONTROLLERS
A. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems
to address current requirements as described in the EXECUTION portion of this specification,
and for future expansion.
1. Large Air Handling Units:
a. Mixed Air -Single Path
b. Mixed Air -Dual Path
C. 100 Percent Single Path
d. 100 Percent Dual Path
B. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the
specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
15971 - 13
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. AHU Controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the
sequence operation as specified in the EXECUTION portion of this specification.
D. Occupancy -Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each AHU Controller shall have a
provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contract status of either a manual
wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall automatically select
either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while
satisfying comfort conditions.
E. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each AHU Controller shall automatically and
continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly
analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past (twenty-four) 24-hours. A
minimum of two (2) samples per hour shall be stored.
F. Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring
and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
2.8 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Basic Interface Description:
Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator Workstation interface software
shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting,
English language point identification, and industry standard PC application software.
The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter style keyboard through
the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and "point and click" approach to
menu selection. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change set points
from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device.
2. Graphical and Text -Based Displays: At the option of the user, operator workstations
shall provide consistent graphical or text -based displays of all system point and
applications data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering
units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all
workstations.
3. Multiple, Concurrent Displays: The Operator Interface shall provide the ability to
simultaneously view several different types of system displays in overlapping
windows to speed building analysis. For example, the interface shall provide the
ability to simultaneously display a graphic depicting an air handling unit, while
displaying the trend graph of several associated space temperatures to allow the user
to analyze the system performance. If the interface is unable to display several
different types of displays at the same time, the BAS Contractor shall provide at least
two (2) operator stations.
4. Password Protection: Multiple -level password access protection shall be provided to
allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display, and data base
manipulation capabilities as deemed appropriate for each user, based upon an
assigned password.
a. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices, including
portable or panel -mounted network terminals. Any additions or changes
made to password definition shall automatically cause passwords at all DDC
15971 - 14
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
panels on a network to be updated and downloaded to minimize the task of
maintaining system security. Users shall not be required to update
passwords for DDC panels individually.
b.
A minimum of five (5) levels of access shall be supported:
1) Level 1 = Data Access and Display
2) Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator Overrides
3) Level 3 = level 2 + Database Modification
4) Level 4 = Level 3 + Database Generation
5) Level 5 = Level 4 + Password Add/Modification
C.
A minimum of fifty (50) passwords shall be supported at each DDC panel.
d.
Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their
respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device,
including portable or panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those
items defined for the access level of the password used to Log -On.
e.
User -definable, automatic Log -Off timers from one (1) to sixty (60) minutes
shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices
on-line.
5. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform
commands including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Start-up or shutdown selected equipment
b.
Adjust set points
C.
Add/Modify/Delete time programming
d.
Enable/Disable process execution
e.
Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point
f.
Enable/Disable Totalization for each point
g.
Enable/Disable Trending for each point
h.
Override PID loop set points
i.
Enter temporary override schedules
j.
Define Holiday Schedules
k.
Change time/date
1.
Enter/Modify analog alarm limits
in.
Enter/Modify analog warning limits
n.
View limits
o.
Enable/Disable demand limiting for each meter
p.
Enable/Disable duty cycle for each load
6. Logs
and Summaries: Reports shall be generated automatically or manually, and
directed to either CRT displays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system
shall
allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:
a.
A general listing of all points in the network
b.
List of all points currently in alarm
C.
List of all off-line points
d.
List all points currently in override status
e.
List of all disabled points
f.
List all points currently locked out
g.
List of all items defined in "Follow -Up" file
h.
List all weekly Schedules
i.
List all Holiday Programming
j.
List of limits and deadbands
Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user -
selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the
15971 - 15
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions
shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system
information.
B. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics
for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems,
and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided as specified in the EXECUTION portion of
this specification to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition.
1. System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the
various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu
selection, or text -based commands.
2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values,
and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall
automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention.
3. Windowing: The windowing environment of the PC Operator Workstation shall
allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze
total building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm
to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.
4. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow
the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.
a. The BAS Contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and
symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (i.e. fans, cooling
coils, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (i.e. constant
volume -terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.
b. The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing
device in conjunction with a drawings program to allow the user to perform
the following:
1) Define symbols
2) Position and size symbols
3) Define background screens
4) Define connecting lines and curves
5) Locate, orient, and size descriptive text
6) Define and display colors for all elements
7) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system
points or other displays.
C. Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of
system points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical
system, building layout, or any other logical grouping ofpoints which aid the
operator in the analysis of the facility.
5. To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point
data from multiple DDC panels, including application specific controllers used for
DDC unitary or VAV terminal unit control.
C. System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and
energy management routines shall be definable by the Operator. System definition and
modification procedures shall not interface with normal system operation and control.
The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation
necessary to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions:
a. Add/Delete/Modify Standalone DDC Panels
15971 - 16
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
b. Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations
C. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers
d. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters,
and tuning constants
e. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point
f. Add/Delete/Modify control loops
g. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications
h. Add/Delete/Modify time and calendar -based programming
i. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point
j. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point
k. Add/Delete/Modify custom control processes
1. Add/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols, and cross-
references to point data
In. Add/Delete/Modify dial -up telecommunication definition
n. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords
o. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages
2. Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, DDC
panels, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed
through fill -in -the -blank templates and graphical programming approach.
Graphical programming shall allow the user to define the software configuration of
DDC control logic for HVAC system control sequences, fan interlocks, pump
interlocks, PID control loops, and other control relationships through the creation of
graphical logic flow diagrams.
a. Graphical Programming: Control sequences are created by using a mouse
input device to draw interconnecting (comparisons and mathematical
calculations), and outputs of a control sequence. As a minimum, graphic
symbols shall be used to represent:
1) Process Inputs, such as temperature, humidity, or pressure values,
status, time, date, or any other measured or calculated system data.
2) Mathematical Process Operators, such as addition, subtraction,
multiplication, or greater than, equal to, less than, etc.
3) Logical Process Operators such as AND, OR, Exclusive OR, NOT,
etc.
4) Time Delays.
5) Process Control Outputs such as start/stop control points, analog
adjust points, etc.
6) Process Calculation Outputs.
7) Text file Outputs and Advisories.
b. Network -Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process
shall not be restricted to a single DDC panel, but shall be able to allow the
development of all other DDC panels to allow the development of network -
wide control strategies. Processes shall also allow the operator to use the
results of one (1) process as the input to any number of other processes
(cascading).
C. Sequencing, Testing, and Simulation: A software tool shall be provided,
which allows a user to simulate Control Sequence Execution to test
strategies before they are actually applied to mechanical systems. Users shall
be able to enter hypothetical input data, and verify desired control response
and calculation results via graphical displays and hardcopy printouts.
15971 - 17
TECM41CAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3. System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system
definition shall be self -documenting to provide hardcopy printouts of all
configuration and application data. Control process and DDC control loop
documentation shall be provided in logical, graphical flow diagram format to allow
control sequences to be easily interpreted and modified at any time in the future.
4. Database Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all standalone DDC panel
databases shall be stored in at least one (1) personal computer operator workstation.
Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel databases shall be provided.
In the event that any DDC panel on the network experiences a loss of its data base for
any reason, the system shall automatically download a new copy of the respective
database to restore proper operation. Database back-up/Download shall occur over
the local area network without operator intervention. Users shall also have the ability
to manually execute downloads of any or all portions of a DDC panel's database.
D. Personal Computer Operator Workstation Description: The workstation is existing.
E. Standalone DDC Panel Local or Portable Operator's Terminals: Each DDC panel shall be
capable of supporting an operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and
historical data display, and program additions and modifications.
1. The DDC Panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously display a minimum of six
(6) points with full English identification to allow an operator to view single 6screen
dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems.
2. The operator functions provided by the DDC Panel Operator Terminal shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
a. Start and Stop Points
b. Modify Set Points
C. Modify PID Loop Set Points
d. Override PID Control
C. Change Time/Date
f. Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling
g. Add/Modify Set Point Weekly Scheduling
h. Enter Temporary Override Schedules
i. Define Holiday Schedules
j. View Analog Limits
k. Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits
1. Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits
in. Enter/Modify Analog Differentials
n. View Point History Files
3. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real or calculated
points in the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the
network. This capability shall not be restricted to a subset of predefined "global
points," but shall provide totally open exchange of data between the operator terminal
and any DDC panel in the network.
4. Operator access at all DDC panel operator terminals shall be identical to each other,
as well as identical to the PC or Laptop Operator Workstations. Any password
changes shall automatically be downloaded to all controllers on the network.
5. The DDC panel operator terminal shall provide English language prompting to
eliminate the need for the user to remember command formats or point names.
15971 - 18
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Prompting shall be provided consistent with a user's password clearance and the
types of points being displayed, to eliminate the possibility of operator error.
6. A multi -function touchpad shall be provided for point and command selection, as
well as parameter entry. To minimize the possibility of operator error, the DDC
panel Operator Terminal shall change and limit touchpad functions based upon an
operator's password clearance, the function being performed, and types of points
being displayed. Screen displays shall clearly indicate only valid touchpad functions.
7. Context -Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user's "Help" manuals and tutorials shall
be provided. Based upon operator request, the "help" function shall provide general
system operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the
currently displayed menus.
8. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be consistent for all network
devices. The same English language names used at PC workstations shall be used to
access points at the DDC panel operator's terminal to eliminate cross-reference or
look -up tables.
9. In addition to instantaneous summaries, the DDC panel operator's terminal shall
allow a user to view a Point History file for system points. Point History files shall
provide a record of value of analog points over the last (twenty-four) 24-hours, at
thirty (30) minute intervals, or a record of the last ten (10) status changes for binary
type points.
2.9 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. General: The Contractor shall provide control products in the sizes and capacities indicated.
Additional controllers, sensors, and devices which are required to make a complete control
system shall be the responsibility of the Controls Contractor.
B. Electric Dampers Operators:
1. All damper operators shall be of the synthetic elastomer diaphragm piston -type and
shall be fully proportioning unless otherwise specified. Dampers operators shall have
metal bodies. The operators shall have ample power to overcome friction of damper
linkage and air pressure acting on the damper blades. The damper operator mounting
arrangement shall be outside the airstream wherever possible. The operators shall
have external adjustable stops to limit the stroke. The operator linkage arrangement
shall permit normally -open or normally -closed positions of the damper as required by
the Sequence of Operation.
2. Damper operators on modulating dampers that are sequenced with other control
devices shall have a pilot positioner of the full relay type with an interconnecting
linkage to provide mechanical feedback so as to accurately position and control the
damper.
3. Electric Type Damper: Size each actuator to operate dampers with sufficient reserve
power to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified.
2.10 INPUTS
A. All input accuracies required by this section shall be end -to -end (from sensing point to BAS
display). End -to -end accuracy includes all errors due to the sensor, transmitter, wiring and
BAS signal measurement and AID conversion.
15971 - 19
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Thermistors or solid state sensors shall be provided for temperature sensing applications
except where accuracies or ranges required cannot be met by these devices, RTD's shall be
used. The sensors shall be powered by the BAS Panel or Dedicated Controller. The solid
state sensors shall be accurate to within +/- 0.5 degree F over the following ranges and meet
the following requirements:
1. Room Type Instruments: 50 degree F to 100 degree F. For room space applications:
Sensor shall be surface mounted in a plastic aluminum cover with an insulated
baseplate and vandalproof screws.
a. Each thermostat have the following features:
1) Exposed set point adjustment dial with temperature graduation
indication.
2. Duct and Plenum Applications: -30 degree F to 240 degree F. Supply, return,
exhaust or mixed air averaging type, which shall have an extended element of
sufficient length to cover the entire duct cross-section with a minimum of three (3)
passes. If a single averaging thermistor of sufficient length to meet the preceding are
not available, then two (2) or more sensors and AIs shall be used and averaged in
software.
C. Where RTD's are required, they shall be 1,000 OHM platinum type and be supplied with a 4-
20 mA DC transmitter. The sensor and transmitter shall be a single unit. They shall be
accurate to within +/- 1.0 degree F over the range of 32 degree F to 600 degree F.
D. Where thermocouples are required, they shall be Type J and be supplied with a 4-20 IDA DC
transmitter. They shall be accurate to within +/- 2.0 degree F over the range of 32 degree F to
1,300 degree F.
E. Provide matched temperature sensors for applications which require both inlet and outlet
temperatures of any device.
F. Outdoor Air Temperature and Humidity Transmitter:
1. Provide Vaisala HMP35D relative humidity and temperature probe with membrane
filters and UV stabilized solar radiation shield 2212HM. Probe shall have a
temperature measuring range of -40 degree F to +120 degree F with an accuracy of
+/- .54 degree F at 68 degree F and relative humidity measuring range of 0 to 100
percent RH with an accuracy of 2 percent, 0 to 90 percent RH with a repeatability
better than 1 percent RH per year. RH and temperature probe shall be capable of a
continuous temperature operating range of -40 degree F to +120 degree F. Provide
necessary transmitter for output signals.
G. Humidity Sensor:
1. The sensor shall be a solid state type, relative humidity sensor of the Bulk Polymer
Design. The sensor element shall resist service contamination.
2. The humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non -interactive span and zero
adjustments, a 2-wire isolated loop powered, 4-20 mA, 0-100% linear proportional
output.
3. The humidity transmitter shall meet the following overall accuracy, including lead
loss and Analog to Digital conversion.
15971 - 20
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
G. Terminals for field -installed external safeties.
H. Field -selectable Auto Restart on power source failure.
I. Adjustable voltage boost for starting high torque loads.
J. Drive shall be capable of starting into a spinning motor by matching frequency and phase
angle to the motor back EMF.
K. Critical Speed Avoidance: Drive shall allow the User to avoid operation at resonant speeds.
Selected speeds shall be stepped over. Four (4) critical speeds shall be capable of being
avoided, with an adjustable bandwidth for each critical speed.
L. Signal Follower: In Auto Speed mode, motor speed shall be proportional to an external 4-20
ma or 0-10 vdc speed control signal. Coordinate with ATC. Loss of reference signal shall
cause drive to go to programmable preset speed.
M. Bypass Device to allow for total isolation of drive unit for service while providing for
temporary operation of motor. This shall include:
A main disconnect switch in the bypass enclosure with a door interlock handle which
provides positive shutdown of all power to both bypass circuitry and VFD. VFD
output contactor and a constant speed contactor. Three -pole motor overload relay
with overload devices connected to shutdown the motor in both VFD and bypass
modes. Timing relay adjustable 5-30 seconds to prevent rapid switching from bypass
to VFD modes. A control relay and terminal blocks which will allow two -wire, start -
stop control of motor from a single remote contact in both VFD and bypass (auto)
modes. Control relay and terminal blocks to allow connection of remote interlock
shutdown contacts such as freezestats, smoke detectors, etc. When this interlock loop
is opened, operation of the motor shall be disabled in both VFD and bypass modes.
Four -position oil -tight selector switch for VFD-OFF-BYPASS(AUTO)-
BYPASS(MANUAL). Indicator lights on face of bypass panel with very long life
indicators to show "POWER ON", "MOTOR ON VFD", "MOTOR ON BYPASS
CONTROL", "MOTOR OVERLOAD", "INTERLOCK SHUTDOWN". 120 Volt
control power transformer with fused secondary and primary. Bypass mode
operation shall be independent of VFD control power. Output contactor shall be
wired to allow a controlled VFD deceleration ramp to stop. Panel shall be arranged
to allow power -off maintenance of VFD while motor is operating on bypass. Bypass
circuitry in same compartment as VFD is not permitted.
2.4 INPUT POWER HARMONIC REDUCTION
A. All VFD's of 3 HP and larger shall have as a minimum; positive and negative DC link
reactors, or AC line input reactors to reduce input power harmonics. If the total harmonics
exceed that allowed as defined in paragraph 2.02-F, above, at the PCC; provided additional
AC line input reactors, input isolation transformers, or line input filters as required to meet the
provisions paragraph 2.02-F.
15043 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
4. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall be installed with a rainproof, perforated
cover. The transmitter shall be installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure with sealtite
fittings and stainless steel bushings.
5. A single point humidity calibrator shall be provided, if required, for field calibration.
Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre -calibrated.
6. Duct type sensing probes shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel, and shall be
equipped with a neoprene grommet, bushings, and a mounting bracket.
7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Veris Industries, and Mamac.
H. Pressure Sensors, Transmitters and Differential Switches:
1. Air Differential Pressure Transmitters shall be Modus Model T30 or T40 (as
required) with an accuracy of +/- 1 percent of range (including non -linearity and
hysteresis), solid state circuitry, no moving parts, capacitance principle capable of
sensing positive, negative and differential pressures. Transmitter shall have 4-20 mA
output signal and be powered by the control system or dedicated controller and
capable of withstanding momentary overpressure of eight (8) times the pressure
range.
2. Differential air pressure switches for filter or proof of airflow status shall be Dwyer
Series 1910, with automatic reset, SPDT.
3. Air and Vacuum Pressure Transmitter: Kele and Associates Model P100GTE, solid
state, 4-20 mA signal, with a full scale accuracy of 1 percent.
Output Devices:
1. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for the application, with a
minimum of two (2) sets of Form C contacts enclosed in a dustproof enclosure.
Relays shall be rated for a minimum life of one million (1,000,000) operations.
Operating time shall be 20 milliseconds or less, with release time of 10 milliseconds
or less. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit
transients to 150 percent of rated coil voltage. Provide with LED to indicate status.
2. Analog output transducers shall be of positioning type with position feedback and
control internal to the transducer. As an option, position feedback may also be input
to the BAS.
3. Analog output transducers shall meet the following requirements:
a. 4-20 mA DC output.
b. Two -pipe electro-mechanical design or microprocessor -based design.
C. 3-15 psi output range adjustable to a 0-20 psi range minimum.
d. Linearity, repeatability and hysteresis no greater than 2 percent of full scale.
e. Air capacity of 1,000 SCIM minimum.
f. Air consumption of no more than 100 SCIM.
g. Pressure gauges shall be installed on the branch and supply lines.
h. Acceptable transducers are the Bellofram T1000, Fairchild T5700, Johnson
N6810, Mamac EP-310 or an equivalent.
4. Electronic analog output transducers shall output a signal to match the controlled
device. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the required signals for all
controlled devices. Transducers shall be completely solid-state with no mechanical
parts.
5. Time Delay Relays: Time delay relay contacts shall be rated for the application with
a minimum of two (2) sets of Form C contacts enclosed in a dustproof enclosure.
Relays shall be rated for a minimum life of one million (1,000,000) operations.
15971- 21
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression, devices to limit transients to
150 percent of rated coil voltage. Delayed contact openings or closing shall be
adjustable from one (1) to sixty (60) seconds with a minimum accuracy of +/- 2
percent of setting.
6. Latching Relays: Latching Relay contacts shall be rated for the application with a
minimum of two (2) sets of Form C contacts enclosed in a dustproof enclosure.
Relays shall be rated for a minimum life of one million (1,000,000) operations.
Operating time shall be 20 milliseconds or less, with release time of 10 milliseconds
of less. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit
transients to 150 percent of rated coil voltage.
J. Room Temperature Sensors:
Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting.
2. Room sensors shall have the following options when specified:
a. Setpoint reset slide switch providing a +3 degree (adjustable) range.
b. Individual heating/cooling setpoint slide switches.
C. A momentary override request pushbutton for activation of after-hours
operation.
K. Carbon Dioxide Sensors:
1. Materials: Molded plastic enclosure
2. Rating: 0 to 5000 ppm
3. Mounting: Duct or Wall
4. Range: 0 to 2000 ppm / 0-5000 User selectable
5. Accuracy: +/- 50 ppm
6. Output: 0-10 vDC
L. CO Gas Sensors/Transmitters:
The Solid State Carbon Monoxide Sensors shall utilize state-of-the-art enhanced
MOS sensor technology. Sensor element is to be micro -processor controlled and
compensated for humidity and temperature. Sensor shall not require the addition of
reagents or field calibrations.
2. All sensor transmitters shall have an expected useful life of three (3) years. The
supplier shall provide replacement sensors at no charge for any sensor that fails
within one year of startup or 18 months from date of shipment.
3. The interconnecting wiring from the sensor to the central panel shall be 3 conductor
shielded cable when using the 4-20 mA sensors. The voltage supplied to the sensor
shall be a minimum of 18 VDC and a maximum of 30 VDC. The 4-20 sensor shall
be capable of remote mounting up to 5,000 feet from the central panel. Sensor units
shall receive power from and send signals corresponding to the central panel.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, MSA Instruments Model UN-TGS.
15971 - 22
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
M. Control Valves:
1. All Automatic Control Valves shall be fully proportioning and provide near linear
heat transfer control. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe open,
closed, or in their last position. All valves shall operate in sequence with another
valve when required by the sequence of operations. All control valves shall be sized
by the control manufacturer, and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling
loads, as specified. All control valves shall be suitable for the system flow conditions
and close against the differential pressures involved. Body pressure rating and
connection type (sweat, screwed, or flanged) shall conform to the pipe schedule
elsewhere in this Specification.
2. Chilled Water Control Valves shall be modulating plug, ball, and/or butterfly, as
required by the specific application. Modulating water valves shall be sized per
manufacturer's recommendations for the given application. In general, valves (2 or 3-
way) serving variable flow air handling unit coils shall be sized for a pressure drop
equal to the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 5 psi. Valves (3-way) serving
constant flow air handling unit coils with secondary circuit pumps shall be sized for a
pressure drop equal to 25% the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 2 psi.
Mixing valves (3-way) serving secondary water circuits shall be sized for a pressure
drop of no less than 5 psi. Valves for terminal reheat coils shall be sized for a 2 psig
pressure drop, but no more than a 5 psi drop.
3. Ball Valves shall be used for hot and chilled water applications, water terminal reheat
coils, radiant panels, unit heaters, package air conditioning units, and fan coil units
except those described hereinafter. Ball valves shall have a stainless steel ball and
stem.
4. Modulating plug water valves of the single -seat type with equal percentage flow
characteristics shall be used for all special applications as indicated on the valve
schedule (for AIM coils and heat exchangers). Valve discs shall be composition
type. Valve stems shall be stainless steel.
5. Butterfly Valves shall be acceptable for modulating large flow applications greater
than modulating plug valves, and for all two -position, open/close applications. In -
line and/or three-way butterfly valves shall be heavy-duty pattern with a body rating
comparable to the pipe rating, replaceable lining suitable for temperature of system,
and a stainless steel vane. Valves for modulating service shall be sized and travel
limited to 50 degrees of full open. Valves for isolation service shall be the same as
the pipe. Valves in the closed position shall be bubble -tight.
6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls.
2.11 POWER MONITORING
A. General: Provide current switches, current transducers, voltage transducers, current
transformers as required to meet the specified Sequence of Operation and indicated below.
B. Current Operated Switches: AC current switch, Neilsen - Kuljian Model PD50AC, or PD75,
solid state, five (5) year warranty, three (3) selectable ranges for optimum adjustability and
resolution. Provide external current transformer where required.
C. Current Transducers: AC current to DC current output, +/- .5 percent accuracy, 4-20 mA
output signal, Kele and Associates Model 4CMA. Provide external current transformer where
required.
15971 - 23
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Voltage Transducers: Kele and Associates Model PVM or LVM as required for each
application, +/- 1/2 percent accuracy, 4-20 mA DC output.
2.12 TEMPERATURE CONTROL CABINETS
A. General: All controllers and field interface devices shall be installed in control panel
cabinet/enclosure as described below.
B. Cabinets shall be UL listed, 14 gauge furniture grade steel, finished with baked enamel
painted finish inside and out, cabinet doors shall have piano hinge and standard key cylinder
locking latch.
C. All devices installed in or on the control cabinet shall be labeled with a fixed mounted, color
contrasted, engraved laminated plastic tags, including describing the function of the device,
similar to the following example:
AP
TRANSMITTER
DEVICE
Label
DSP-1, AHU-1 SUPPLY
DUCT STATIC
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
D. All electrical devices within the panel shall be prewired to terminal strips with all inter -device
wiring within the panel completed prior to installation of the system.
E. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free standing
steel angle supports or "Unistrut" support stand.
2.13 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Variable frequency drives shall be arranged so that it can be operated in an open circuit mode,
disconnected from the motors, for start-up adjustments and trouble shooting.
B. Automatic operation shall be from a 4-20 milliamp signal follower, which shall follow a
transducer signal. The signal follower shall contain the following design features.
1. Shall accept a transducer output signal and condition it to produce a speed reference
signal for the invertor.
2. Minimum speed adjustment (Zero (0) to Maximum RPM).
C. Wire all safeties to operate both in hand and auto positions as well as drive and by-pass
sections.
D. Provide communication cabling and interface necessary to forward VFD computer
communication information to and from the BAS/VFD. See Section 15040.
15971 - 24
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.14 HIGH AND LOW TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROL DEVICES
A. Provide PENN A70 series or equal, DPST, manual reset, two (2) isolated sets of contacts.
Control responds to temperature along any one (1) foot of entire element.
B. Vapor charged sensing element shall be calibrated for altitude of project site.
C. Provide multiple limit control devices as required to provide complete and full coverage of the
entire coil face area and/or duct cross section area.
2.15 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
A. All wiring shall be installed in conduit.
B. Conduit and Conductors: Types as indicated in Division 16 sized per Division 16 except for
low -voltage twisted pair or single jacketed cable (1/2-inch minimum). All low voltage
conductors shall be stranded 22 gauge copper minimum; twisted pair.
C. Fittings per Division 16: Bushings or nylon insulated throats are not required for jacketed
cables.
D. All J-boxes shall be identified and labeled per Division 16.
E. All conductors and cables shall be labeled per Division 16.
F. Conduit and box supports shall be per Division 16.
G. Junction boxes shall be of types and sizes as indicated in Division 16.
H. Conduits shall not exceed 40 percent maximum fill for single conductor and jacketed cables.
2.16 END SWITCHES
A. All end switches shall be NEMA rated contacts and NEMA 4X enclosure, either SPDT,
DPDT DPST as required to meet the Sequence of Operation, complete the Points List and
necessary interlocks or safeties control wiring. End switches shall be as manufactured by
Cutler -Hammer or Allen-Bradley.
B. All end switches shall be designed and configured to provide positive indication of a control
device (i.e. damper or valve) position for the service intended.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall install all equipment, control air piping/tubing, conduit and wiring
parallel to building lines.
B. All automatic control valves and control dampers furnished by the Temperature Control
Contractor shall be installed under his supervision by the Mechanical Contractor.
15971 - 25
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Install Air Measuring Stations per the manufacturer's requirements.
D. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
1. Spare conductor capacity, equal to a minimum of two (2) additional sensors shall be
provided to each underfloor sensor and pendant type sensors.
2. Wiring shall be installed in conduit throughout.
3. Horizontal runs of conduit, trays, tubing or wiring shall be hung from structural
members using new supports, or where feasible, utilizing existing temperature control
conduit and piping. The Contractor shall verify adequacy of existing systems and
warrant these systems as if they were new. Single runs of conduit, tubing or wire
shall be by clevis ring and all thread rod. Multiple runs shall be by "Trapeze" or
"Unistrut" supports. "Plumber's Strap" shall not be allowed. Maximum distance
between supports shall be per the NEC. Existing supports shall only be used upon
written concurrence by the Architect, Engineer or Owner.
4. All vertical runs of conduit or tubing shall be through new core drills. Existing core
drills may be used if approved by the Owner. The installation shall be supported
above each floor penetration using clamps to "Unistrut".
5. All wire that enters or leaves a building structure shall be installed with lightning
protection per NEC.
6. All wire terminations shall be with compression type round hole spade lugs under a
pan head screw landing; Stay-Kon or equivalent. All wire splices shall be with
compression type insulated splice connectors or properly sized "wire -nut" connectors.
Hand twisted, soldered and/or taped terminations or splices are not acceptable.
7. Where tubing, wiring or conduit penetrate floors or walls, sleeves with bushings shall
be provided for tubing and wires. The conduit or sleeve opening shall be sealed with
fire proof packing so the smoke and fire rating of the wall or floor is maintained.
8. Under no circumstances shall wire, tubing, tray, J-boxes or any BAS equipment be
run in, mounted on, or suspended from any of the telephone system's equipment,
cable trays or support structure (Grey Iron).
9. All the material installed under this contract must be mounted on, or supported from
the building structure or supports furnished by this Contractor.
E. Control Wiring:
1. Run wiring in metallic conduit, tubing or raceways. Exceptions are as follows:
a. NEC Class 2 low voltage wiring where not exposed to view such as above
suspended ceilings, in shafts, etc., may be run in cable (when approved by
Code Authority).
b. Wiring enclosed in temperature control panels.
2. Where conduit is used, provide steel fittings.
3. Low Voltage Conductors: 18 Gauge minimum, except 19 gauge may be used for
home runs to central panels and 22 gauge minimum for resistance or thermistor
sensing element connections.
4. Wire control interlocks and control panels, except one (1)120V power circuit to each
temperature control panel shown on drawings and schedules shall be provided under
Division 1.
5. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of Local and National Electrical
Codes.
15971 - 26
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
6. Do not interlock alarms with starter switching to bypass alarm when equipment is
manually disconnected.
7. Variable Frequency Drives shall be arranged so that it can be operated in an open
circuit mode, disconnected from the motors, for start-up adjustments and trouble
shooting.
8. All costs of controls, wiring conduit and associated labor shall be included in the
Temperature Control Bid. The control wiring shall be installed under the supervision
of this Contractor.
3.2 ENCLOSURES
A. The tubing and wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic trays. Tubing and wiring
within BAS panels may be run using adhesive -backed tie wraps.
B. All plastic tubing shall be connected to enclosures through conduit. All copper tubing shall
be connected to enclosures through bulkhead fittings.
C. Mount all enclosures, including those which house BAS Panels, Slaves and Field Device
Panels, so that the top of the enclosure does not exceed six feet, six inches (6-6"); and the
center of any keypad/LCD combination does not exceed five foot, six inches (5'-6") from the
floor or is less than four feet, zero inches (4'-0") from the floor.
D. Field Device Panels contain related Field Devices such as relays, control power (24V)
transformers, output transducers, etc., that are outboard of the BAS Panels or Dedicated
Controllers. Each Field Device Panel shall be mounted within an enclosure. The enclosures
shall be provided with lockable latches that will accept a single key common to all Field
Device Panels, BAS Panels and Slaves.
3.3 EXISTING CONTROLS
A. Remove all existing controls, controllers, receiver/controllers, thermostats, sensors, field
devices, gauges, etc.; and all associated wiring, piping and mounting hardware whose
functions are being replaced by the BAS.
1. When existing equipment is removed, coordinate with a detailed Method of
Procedure (MOP). Do not remove until Owner reviews.
2. Refer to General Conditions.
3.4 INSTALLATION PRACTICES
A. The Contractor shall install and calibrate all Field Devices, Sensors and Transducers
necessary for the complete operation of the 1/0 Points described herein.
B. Sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they are installed.
C. All immersion sensors shall be installed in new, welded thermowells supplied by the
Contractor. Existing thermowells may be reused with concurrence from the Owner.
Coordinate any required shutdown with Owner.
D. Thermistor wire leads shall be permanently terminated at panels or controllers with wire
clamps.
15971 - 27
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DMSION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
E. Where none exist, furnish and install pressure/temperature gauges adjacent to each immersion
type sensor.
F. Sensors shall be installed with the use of a wet or hot tap without draining the system if
required.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. All control air piping/tubing, 7-boxes, conduit and wiring shall be labeled.
B. Electrical devices, wiring, conduit and 1-boxes shall be labeled and identified as required by
Division 16.
As a minimum regardless of Division 16 requirements, all temperature control 7-box
covers shall be painted Blue in color on both sides of cover.
C. Main supply control air piping and tubing shall be labeled with Brady or equivalent markers
or pre-printed identification sleeves at each end and junction point, and protected.
Identification scheme shall be consistent with the drawings.
D. Identification shall be provided for all enclosures, panels, junction boxes, controllers or field
devices. Laminated, bakelite nameplates shall be used. The nameplates shall be 1/16-inch
thick and a minimum of 1-inch by 2-inches. The lettering shall be White on a Blue
background with minimum 1/4-inch high engraved letters. The nameplates shall be installed
with pop rivets.
1. All new devices will be tagged. Color code to differentiate between new devices.
E. Thoroughly clean the surface to which the label shall be applied with a solvent before
applying the identification. Use an epoxy to affix the identification in addition to any
adhesive backing on the identification.
F. The Plan Code Designation shown on all shop drawing identification shall be consistent with
the Contract Documents.
G. All 1/0 Field Devices that are not mounted within Field Device Panel enclosures shall be
identified with engraved plastic laminated nameplates installed so that they are visible from
ground level.
H. The identification shall show the designation used on the Record Documents and identify the
function such as "Mixed Air Temperature Sensor" and "Fan Status DP Switch".
I. Calibration settings shall be marked with paint or indelible ink.
3.6 LOCATIONS
A. All sensing devices and locations shall be located by the Contractor as shown on the submittal
shop drawings with final review by the Engineer.
15971 - 28
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Wall mount space sensors shall be mounted 5-feet above finished floor. Pendant mount space
sensors shall be mounted 8-feet above finished floor.
C. Enclosures housing Field Devices shall be located immediately adjacent horizontally to the
BAS Panels or Slaves which are being interfaced to.
3.7 TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. Temperature controls trades shall verify all wall mounted temperature sensors locations with
the Architect/Engineer/Owner in order to avoid interference with wall mounted and space
furnishings.
Where interferences require moving the temperature sensor more than two (2) feet,
consult with the Architect/Engineer for relocation.
B. Temperature sensors shall be mounted on suitable insulated base and secured to the wall in
such a way as to be easily removed from wall without damage to the sensor.
C. Check and verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and
room details before installation. Locate thermostats 60-inches (1524 mm) above floor.
3.8 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND COORDINATION
A. Where existing walls are penetrated with conduit or piping, provide a fire stop assembly
which meets or exceeds the original rating of the assembly. Refer to Division 15.
B. Extreme care must be exercised while working in existing facilities and around operating
equipment, particularly sensitive telephone switching and computer equipment. Close
coordination with the Owner is required for the protection of this operating equipment from
dust, dirt and construction material while maintaining the operational environment for the
equipment. Under no circumstances shall the power or environmental requirements of the
operating equipment be interrupted during the installation and check-out without submitting
to the Architect, Owner and Engineer for approval.
C. A detailed Method of Procedure (MOP) stating the steps to be taken, time schedule and
impacted systems for the service interruption shall be submitted to the Architect for approval
prior to beginning work. Refer to Division. I and Division 15 for requirements.
3.9 CLEANUP
A. At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be checked and
thoroughly cleaned and all other areas shall be cleaned around equipment provided under this
contract. Clean the exposed surfaces of tubing, hangers, and other exposed metal of all
grease, plaster, dust, or other foreign materials.
B. Upon final completion of work in an area, vacuum and/or damp wipe all finished room
surfaces and furnishings. Use extreme care in cleaning around telephone switching and
computer equipment and under no circumstances shall water or solvents be used around this
equipment.
15971- 29
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. At the completion of the Work and at the end of each work day, remove from the building, the
premises, and surrounding streets, etc., all rubbish and debris resulting from the operations
and leave all equipment spaces absolutely clean and ready for use.
3.10 SOFTWARE, DATABASE AND GRAPHICS
A. Software Installation: The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize,
start-up and debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any
operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful operation of
the system.
B. Database Configuration: The Contractor will provide all labor to configure those portions of
the database that are required by the Points List and Sequence of Operation.
C. Color Graphics: Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, the Contractor will provide color
graphic displays for all systems which are specified with a Sequence of Operation, depicted in
the Mechanical Drawings for each system and floor plan. For each system or floor plan, the
display shall contain the associated points identified in the Point List and allow for set point
changes as required by the Owner.
3.11 TEMPERATURE CONTROL DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of project and after record drawings of the temperature controls have been
prepared and reviewed, the Contractor shall provide one (1) complete set of Temperature
Controls Drawings at each Temperature Control Panel. Each set of drawings shall be
laminated in a plastic coating. The drawings shall consist of only those control functions
associated with the specific control panel and any relevant or pertinent network interface
information.
The laminated drawings shall have a grommet connection attached to a metal cable or chain
which is mechanically fastened to the Temperature Control Cabinet.
3.12 START-UP AND TESTING
A. Prior to Beneficial Use of the BAS, the Contractor shall supply to Architect/Engineer two (2)
debugged printouts of all software entered into the BAS. Also supply all user's programming
and engineering manuals required to interpret the software. Included in the printouts, though
not limited to, shall be the following:
1. Point data base.
2. All custom control programs written in the BAS control language.
3. All parameters required for proper operation of BAS control and utility firmware
such as start -stop routines, etc.
4. Printouts or plotted detailed copies of the complete interactive system graphics.
B. The software printout shall be fully documented for ease of interpretation by the
Architect/Engineer and Owner, without assistance from the Contractor. English language
descriptions shall be either integrated with or attached to the BAS printout. Specifically, the
following shall be documented:
1. All point (1/0 and virtual) names.
15971 - 30
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSFr CENTER
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.5 MOTOR PROTECTION
A. For all installations where the conductors from the VFD to the motor exceed 100 feet in
length, provide a minimum 3 percent reactance motor protecting dv/dt filter at the VFD
output terminals.
2.6 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Acceleration Time: 2 to 20 Second minimum range.
B. Deceleration Time: 2 to 20 Second minimum range.
C. Volts/Hz Ratio: Programmable.
D. Voltage Boost: Programmable.
E. Critical Speed Lockout: Four (4) critical speeds with adjustable bandwidth.
F. Current Limit: 30 to 110 percent sine wave current rating.
G. Carrier Frequency Range: 1 kHz to 12 kHz through 100 HP.
H. Output Frequency Range: 0 to 80 Hz minimum range.
I. All drive parameters shall be stored in non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
2.7 PROTECTIVE FEATURES
A. VFD shall have built-in protection for power source transients, over -voltage, under -voltage,
and phase loss. VFD shall not require an input isolation transformer for transient protection.
B. DC bus over -voltage protection.
C. Instantaneous shutdown when load current exceeds 150 percent.
D. Adjustable electronic Class 20 inverse time characteristic over -current overload protection for
the motor.
E. The VFD shall be capable of withstanding randomly applied short circuit current applied
across the output terminals without damage.
F. Protection of VFD for any external disconnects between the drive and the motor. Provide
control terminals for connection of disconnect switch auxiliary contacts, which will
immediately stop the drive when opened.
G. DC bus discharge circuit for protection of service personnel, with 'BUS CHARGED"
indicator.
15043 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. All BAS Programming Language commands, functions, syntax, operators, and
reserved variables.
3. Use of all BAS firmware.
4. The intended actions, decisions, and calculations of each line or logical group of lines
in the custom control program(s). Sequences of operation are not acceptable for use
in this documentation requirement.
5. Complete descriptions of and theories explaining all software and firmware
algorithms. The algorithms to be described include, but are not limited to, PID,
optimum start/stop, demand limiting, etc.
C. Documentation that was supplied as part of the submittals need not be submitted at this time.
D. Upon review of software, a Point -To -Point Test of the BAS installation shall commence. The
Contractor shall provide two (2) men equipped with two-way communication and shall test
actual field operation of each control and sensing point. This procedure shall occur during
off -hour periods. The purpose is to test the calibration, response, and action of every point.
Any test equipment required to prove the proper operation of the BAS shall be provided by
and operated by the Contractor. The Engineer and Owner will be present to oversee, observe,
and review the test. Demonstrate compliance that system functions per the Sequence of
Operation.
1. Upon review of the Point -To -Point demonstration, the Contractor shall start up the
BAS by putting all controlled equipment in automatic and enabling software.
Contractor shall commence final software and overall BAS hardware/software
debugging.
2. The Point -To -Point demonstration shall include any existing BAS equipment if it
affects the operation of the equipment included under this contract.
3. As a minimum, existing conditions shall be maintained during system changeover.
E. Final acceptance of the BAS is contingent upon a hardware/software system test. All groups
of points that yield a system of control shall be tested for compliance with the sequences of
operation. Included in the test, but not limited to, shall be:
1. BAS Loop Response. The Contractor shall supply a trend data output in graphical
form showing the step response of each BAS loop. The test shall show the loop's
response to a change in set point which represents a change in the actuator position of
at least 25 percent of its full range. The sampling rate of the trend shall be from one
(1) to three (3) minutes depending on the speed of the loop. The trend data shall
show for each sample the set point, actuator position, and controlled variable values.
Any loop that does not yield temperature control of + 0.2 degree F or humidity
control of + 3 percent RH shall require further tuning by the Contractor.
2. Interlocks and other sequences.
3. BAS Control under HVAC equipment failure.
4. HVAC Operation under BAS equipment failure.
5. Battery backup.
6. BAS Control under power failure/restart.
7. Reset schedules.
8. BAS Alarm reporting capability.
F. A detailed test report as defined under Submittals shall be provided indicating its completion
and proper system operation.
15971 - 31
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSITCENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
G. The BAS will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Beneficial Use until all tests
described in this section have been performed to the satisfaction of both the
Architect/Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances
beyond the control of the Contractor shall be exempt from the Beneficial Use requirements if
requested in writing by the Contractor and concurred by the Owner and Architect/Engineer.
Such tests shall be performed as part of the BAS Warranty.
A typed written document stating that the system has been fully checked out on a
point by point basis shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer. All documentation
associated with the check out shall be included.
3.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for updating all existing Project Record Documents
associated with the Scope of Work outlined in the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Prior to final completion of the installation, prepare a complete set of Record Drawings on a
clear and legible set of ANSI size B' (11" x 17") mylar reproducible prints. The content,
format and procedure of the submittal shall be as described by the General Conditions.
C. Provide one (1) laminated and framed set of Control Drawings for each new BAS Control
Panel and one (1) for the Facility Control Room, locate as directed by the Engineer.
D. Prior to final completion of the installation, prepare three (3) Operation and Maintenance
Manuals. The information is to be inserted in the existing Operation and Maintenance
Manuals. The information shall include:
1. Operator's Manual with step-by-step procedures for logging On/Off, interrogating the
system, producing reports, acknowledging alarms, overriding computer control, and
changing firmware parameters.
2. Programmer's manual with complete description of the custom control language and
associated editor, including sample written programs. Provide complete sets of all
programming forms, applications memorandums, and addenda to the programmer's
manual. All software or firmware algorithms shall be completely described and
documented.
3. Maintenance, Installation, and Engineering Manual(s) that clearly explains how to
debug hardware problems, how to repair or replace hardware, preventive
maintenance guidelines and schedules, calibration procedures, and how to engineer
and install new points, panels, and operator interfaces.
4. Documentation of all software. List separately all software parameters that will need
updating by the Owner such as, though not limited to, holiday, seasonal and start/stop
schedules, comfort and duty cycling schedules.
5. All programs, code, databases, graphic files, CADD drawings and symbol libraries
generated for operation of the system shall be included as a part of the system
documentation. This information shall be submitted both in hard copy bound format
and magnetic media format.
6. Input/Output schedules, data sheets, and all other items required under Submittals.
Describe all regular maintenance that will need to be performed on the BAS
hardware. List replacement parts with part numbers.
15971 - 32
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
7. Complete original issue documentation and software diskettes for all third party
software furnished and installed as a part of the system or required for the operation
of the system including text editors, control language program and compiler, database
managers, graphics and CADD packages, operating systems and communications
software.
8. Complete original issue documentation, installation and operational manuals and
supporting software for all third party hardware furnished and installed as a part of
the system or required for the operation of the system including remote terminals,
user's computer workstation, monitors, graphics and memory boards, printers and
modems.
9. During the warranty period, all copies of the drawings and manuals shall be updated
to include all hardware and software changes.
E. All of the above documentation shall record both the equipment installed under this contract
and the exact termination to all other existing control or BAS equipment.
F. The Record Drawings shall document the complete existing control system. This includes all
mechanical equipment in work area which has automatic control.
3.14 WARRANTY
A. The Warranty period shall begin on the date of Beneficial Use Completion as authorized by
the Architect/Engineer and Owner in writing. Beneficial use shall not occur before the
Contractor has performed the tests required. With these requirements met, beneficial use shall
not occur until, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, the BAS is sufficiently complete to
be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended.
1. The warranty start date shall not begin until all phases of the Project are complete,
i.e., the Project shall have a single warranty start date.
B. The BAS System shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in material and workmanship
and in software design and operation for a period of the warranty after completion of the
contract. The Contractor shall provide the necessary skills, labor, and parts to assure the
proper operation of, and to provide all required current and preventive maintenance. This
warranty shall become effective starting the date of Beneficial Use completion.
1. The hardware warranty shall include all equipment which has been purchased by the
Contractor. The existing hardware is not subject to the warranty requirements.
2. All software work completed by the Contractor, associated with existing hardware, is
subject to the warranty requirements outlined herein.
3. The Contractor shall respond to all calls during the warranty period for all problems
or questions experienced in the operation of the installed equipment and shall take
steps to correct any deficiencies that may exist.
4. The response time to any problems shall be four (4) hours maximum (twenty-four)
24-hours per day, seven (7) days per week. Corrective action, temporary or
permanent, shall be made within one (1) business day.
C. The Contractor shall maintain a backup of all BAS software installed in the system. The
backup shall be updated monthly or whenever a change to the software is made. A reload of
backup software into the system shall be performed by the Contractor immediately upon
15971 - 33
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15971- DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
notification by the Owner. The reload shall be free of charge unless it is due to a power
failure of a duration longer than the battery backup.
D. The Contractor shall optimize all control software to assure acceptable operating and space
conditions, and peak energy efficiency.
3.15 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide forty (40) hours of training for the building operators. The
training sessions shall be broken into one (10) 4-hour session or as directed by owner's
representative. The training session shall be made available to the Owner prior to the end of
the warranty period, but after final completion of the contract. The session shall be given at
the Owner's facility. Scheduling shall be approved by the Owner. The training shall focus on
general design, operation, and maintenance procedures of the products installed, though not
necessarily the specific system designed, and shall cover:
1. Hardware configuration including PC boards, switches, communication and point
wiring, and location and installation of all sensors and control devices.
2. Hardware maintenance, calibration, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and repair
instructions.
3. Operation of man -machine interface including logging On/Off, interrogating the
system, producing reports, acknowledging alarms, overriding computer control, and
changing firmware/software parameters.
4. Programming the BAS using the editor and the design of custom control software.
5. Recovery procedures from both BAS and HVAC failures.
B. The Instructor for the above session shall be an employee of the Contractor, who is qualified
to provide customer training and applications support.
END OF SECTION 15971
15971 - 34
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL TRANSITCENTER
SECTION 15"0 — TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Divisions 1 and 15 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 0 18 10.
C. Division 15 "Basic Mechanical Requirements" Section 15010 applies to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section covers Testing and Balancing of Environmental Systems including but not
limited to air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and the equipment and
apparatus connected thereto. The testing and balancing of all environmental systems shall be
the responsibility of one (1) testing, balancing and adjusting firm.
Test, Adjust, and Balance all of the following mechanical systems:
a. Supply Air Systems;
b. Return Air Systems;
C. Exhaust Air Systems;
d. Hydronic Systems;
e. Pumps;
f. Cooling Towers;
g.
Refrigeration Equipment;
h.
Temperature Control System;
i.
Heat Generating Equipment;
j.
Engine Generator System;
k.
Domestic Water Circulating Systems.
2. Report any systems for excessive sound and vibration levels.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR
A. Procure the services of an independent testing and balancing Agency specializing in the
testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental systems to perform the above mentioned
work. An independent agency is defined as an organization that is not engaged in engineering
design or is not a division of a mechanical contractor entity that installs mechanical systems.
It shall be an agency certified by NEBB or TABB. Testing and balancing work shall be
directly supervised by a NEBB certified Supervisor or Professional Engineer on the Testing
and Balancing Agency's staff. The Supervisor shall represent the Testing and Balancing
Agency in progress meetings as requested, and shall be available for interpreting all material
found in the Balance Report.
All field work shall be performed by qualified technicians who are currently certified
by either NEBB or TABB Test and Balance Certification Agencies.
159"-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITv
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15"0 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in
testing and balancing mechanical systems.
1.4 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS REVIEW
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall submit the name of the Testing and Balancing Agency to the
Architect within thirty (30) days of contract award to ensure that the Testing and Balancing
Agency is on the project from the outset of construction.
B. Any testing and balancing agency desiring to offer their services for this Work shall submit
their qualifications to the Architect, not less than seven (7) working days before the bid date.
Review and recommendations to Owner will be given on each request and action on the
recommendation will be given in writing prior to bidding the work. Agencies meeting the
qualifications of the Specification are those Agencies approved by the Owner.
C. Acceptable TBA Agencies are:
1. Griffith Engineering Service
2. JPG Engineering, hic.
3. TAB Services
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1999 Applications Volume, Chapter 36, Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing.
B. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
Systems."
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Upon award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit the name of the Test and Balance
Agency who will be performing the work. The submittal shall include a complete list of all
technicians who will be performing the field work and include a photocopy of their current
certification by either NEBB or TABB Certification Agencies.
B. Only those technicians included in the submittal shall perform the work. Any personnel or
staff used to perform the work who are not included in the submittal shall be grounds for
rejecting the Test and Balance Report and the Project in whole.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Air and water testing and balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is
in full working order.
B. Put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and
continue operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Preliminary
Testing and Balancing requirements shall be ascertained prior to the commencement of work
through a review of the project plans and specifications. In addition, visual observations at
the site during construction shall be made to determine the location of required balancing
1590 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 159" - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
devices, that they are being installed properly, and in an accessible location for the need.
Report in writing any deficiencies to the Contractor and Mechanical Engineer immediately.
C. Before any air balance work is done, the system shall be checked for duct leakage, assure
filters are installed, see that filters are changed if they are dirty, check for correct fan rotation,
equipment vibration, and check automatic dampers for proper operation. All volume control
dampers and outlets shall be wide open at this time.
D. Before any hydronic balancing work is done, the system shall be checked for plugged
strainers, proper pump rotation, proper control valve installation and operation, air locks,
proper system static pressure to assure a full system, proper flow meter and check valve
installation. All throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate scheduling of Work with the Contractor.
1. Schedule TABB work to coincide with testing and verification of the temperature
control systems where practical.
2. Coordinate system start-up and performance verification with the Engineer as TABB
work is in progress.
B. Provide written notification to the Project Manager five (5) working days prior to
commencing TABB and a schedule for completing the work.
C. Provide written notification to the Contractor within twenty-four (24) hours of an equipment
failure preventing TABB work from proceeding.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUMENTS
A. Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
standards and recommendations and requirements of NEBB.
B. Calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination.
C. Use a true RMS amp and harmonic distortion electrical test meter, FLUKE Model 41 or equal
to test and record operating and performance measurements for all motors operating with
variable frequency drives.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. Operate all temperature control systems with the Temperature Control Contractor's
representative for proper sequence of operation and calibration. Report in writing any
deficiencies to the Engineer immediately.
15990 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 159" - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.2 REQUIREMENTS OF WORK
A. Provide all necessary fan belts and sheaves to balance all fans to the specified air delivery for
the actual field conditions.
Test and Balance Agency shall provide and install fan belt and sheave replacement
necessary for final balance condition for specified air quantity when the VFD is
operating in the by-pass mode for final field conditions, without placing the motor
over its nameplate amp rating.
B. Balance all air and water flows at terminals within +5 percent to -5 percent of design flow
quantities for individual terminals. And +5 percent to —10 percent of individual air outlets or
inlets. Measure and record the following data:
C. Air Balance:
1. Air supply, return and exhaust systems with air quantities for each air device; air
handling units including supply, return, mixed, and outside temperatures and fan data
including CFM, static pressure, fan RPM, voltage, rated motor amperage, motor
running amperage before and after final balance, listed motor power factor and motor
running power factor reading. Air diffusion patterns shall be set to minimize
objectionable drafts and noise.
2. The supply, return and exhaust fan static pressure shall be set by the balancing firm
and the Control Contractor if the systems have fan volume control. The duct static
shall be confirmed both through the instrumentation installed on the job and by the
Balancing Agency. The system shall be tested in all operating modes (including
minimum outside air with full return air, full outside air, modulated damper position,
and full cooling with the design diversity). System static pressure and fan motor
amperages shall be recorded in all modes. The fan speed resulting in satisfactory
system performance shall be determined at full design delivery, inlet or outlet fan.
Volume control dampers shall be in the wide open position and variable frequency
drive is at 100 percent of design RPM and one (1) path presenting the greatest
resistance to flow shall be fully open and unobstructed.
3. Provide full pitot traverse and CFM measurements at each fan in addition to terminal
device measurements.
4. Air volume and air temperature rise or drop across each coil, filter, dampers, etc., of
air handling section.
5. Measure, adjust, set, balance and record outside air, return air and exhaust/relief air
quantities for all air handling systems and supply fans.
Air quantities shall be determined by direct airflow measuring procedures wherever
possible, where duct/inlet conditions do not allow for accurate direct measurement of
outside air the following method shall be used:
Outside Air CFM = Supply Fan Total CFM
-Return Fan Total CFM
In addition to the direct measuring of airflow quantities, measure and record outside
air, return air and mixed air temperatures, determine thermal/mass energy balance
and provide calculations to verify measured airflow quantities. Adjusting and setting
the outside air quantity as a percentage of damper position will not be acceptable.
15990 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15"0 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Final adjustments shall include but not be limited to the following:
ITEM ADJUSTMENT
Fan: Belt Drive RPM. Include sheave and belt exchange to deliver
air flow within limits of installed motor
horsepower and mechanical stress limits ofthe fan.
Determine the limiting fan tip speed before
increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall
allow for predicted filter loading and shall
establish proper duct pressures for operation of
zone CFM regulators.
Fan: Direct Drive RPM with speed taps. Set fan speed on tap which
most closely approaches design CFM. Report tap
setting on equipment data sheet as high, medium
or low.
RPM with speed control rheostat. Set output of
fan at design CFM by adjusting the SCR. After
adjustment, check fans ability to re -start after
powering down. Increase setting if required for
proper starting.
CFM with variable pitch blades. Variable fixed
pitch fan blades and variable in motion pitch fan
blades shall be adjusted by the manufacturer at
pitch required to provide design output. Pitch
angle adjustment shall not exceed recommended
maximum to prevent "stall."
Terminal Boxes VAV and Constant Volume Boxes with Reheat.
Set regulators to provide design maximum,
minimum, heating and cooling CFM.
VAV Boxes: Set volume at 100 percent maximum
and 30 percent minimum of design CFM. Check
control sequence operation to assure proper
sequencing. Reset PE switches as required when
furnished with terminal box.
Fan powered boxes with reheat. Set CFM
regulators and control sequence as for VAV
reheat. Set fans as for direct drive with speed tap
or with SCR.
Air Devices All diffusers and registers shall be measured and
balanced.
15990 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 159" - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Cooling Tower Submit measured motor data and nameplate; HI
and LO speed. Measure and record airflow
quantities (CFM) and static pressure rise across the
fans.
Fume Hoods, solvent storage Measure and set air flows for all hoods including
cabinets, flammable cabinets and radioisotope hoods and bio-safety cabinets.
other ventilating equipment.
Motor Starter Division 15 Furnished Magnetic and Manual
Thermal Heaters Starters. Furnish and exchange thermals as
required for proper motor protection.
Division 16 Furnished Motor Control Center
Magnetic Starters. Check for correct sizing.
Notify Electrical Contractor of discrepancies.
Existing Magnetic and Manual Starters. Furnish
and exchange thermals as required for motor
protection.
Variable Frequency Drives Test, measure and record true RMS amperage,
THD for voltage and amperage for each variable
frequency drive at both the input power to the
drive and the output power to the motor in both
the drive mode and through the across the line
by-pass mode.
E. Hydronic Balance:
1. Convertor inlet and outlet water temperatures and pressures with corresponding
system steam pressure or heating water temperatures and pressures.
2. Inlet and outlet water temperatures and pressures (or system steam pressure) of all air
handling unit coils, reheat coils, unit heaters, convectors, finned tube radiation, and
other heat transfer equipment, as well as the corresponding media flows, and air
temperature rise or drops.
3. All heat exchangers.
4. Cooling tower inlet and outlet water temperatures.
5. Chiller inlet and outlet water temperatures, inlet and outlet evaporator and condenser
pressures, motor running amperage, refrigerant temperature.
6. Circulating pump flow rates, pressures, running amperage, and full load amperage at
design flow and shutoff conditions.
7. The hydronic system shall be proportionally balanced being certain that the path to
one (1) terminal is fully open. Total system flow shall be adjusted at the pump by
restricting the discharge balancing valve. If the pump must be severely restricted, the
impeller may have to be trimmed. This decision will be the responsibility of the
Contractor, Supplier, and the Mechanical Engineer.
F. When necessary as determined by the Mechanical Engineer, the Test and Balance Agency
shall provide additional testing and measurements as required by the Mechanical Engineer
including, but not limited to, the following:
15990 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
H. Troubleshooting Diagnostic Features:
1. Indicator lights on inverter power module to indicate correct operation (or failure) of
individual power switching devices.
2. Indicator lights to show drive fault/ready states, and reason for fault shutdown,
including: Instantaneous overload, motor overload, output or DC bus over -voltage,
or source over -voltage, under -voltage, or phase loss. The VFD shall store in memory
at minimum the previous five (5) alarms.
I. Input line fuse or circuit breaker with door interlock disconnect.
J. Provide input line filters sized so that total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5% to
ensure compliance with IEEE Standard 519-1992. Compliance with this standard shall be a
requirement of the VFD system vendor. The vendor shall be responsible for the necessary
calculations and documentation. Owner will furnish building electrical data.
K. Protection against input transients.
L. The drive shall have output line reactors to limit the rise over time (dv/dt), reduce motor
operating temperature, RFI and EMI.
M. Current Rating: A minimum continuous current rating of the VFD shall be a continuous
ampere rating suitable for operation of a premium or standard efficiency motor. Specifically,
VFD continuous amps shall not be less than the amps specified in NEC Table 430-150 for the
specified horsepower motor. Overcurrent rating shall be 110% for 60 seconds and 220% of
rated current for up to 1 second while starting.
N. Provide inverse characteristic time-overcurrent overload protection for the motor sized in
accordance with NEC requirements.
O. Provide current limiting protection to shut down drive under output line -to -line or line -to -
ground short circuit conditions without damage to controller.
P. Protection against input phase loss, undervoltage, overvoltage, short circuit, ground fault and
drive and motor overtemperature.
Q. Torque/Current limit control which will slow the motor without tripping when the motor is
subjected to an overload, or slow the acceleration ramp when accelerating a high inertia load.
R. Automatic restart circuitry to restart motor after a momentary or sustained power failure,
phase loss, or non -damaging fault trip. No more than five (5) restart attempts should be
allowed before lockout. Auto restart feature shall be switch defeatable. For all applications,
the VFD shall be capable of restarting into a forward or reverse rotating motor at any speed.
The VFD shall also incorporate a 5 second control power loss ride through to eliminate
nuisance tripping.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
15043 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSITCENTER
SECTION 159" - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1. Static pressure gradient profiles throughout ductwork and/or piping systems.
2. Temperature gradient profiles throughout ductwork and/or piping system.
3. Miscellaneous electrical measurements.
4. Smoke tests of room pressure relationships.
This work shall be done immediately upon request with complete cooperation and in an
expedient schedule at no additional cost to any other party.
G. All smoke control systems for life safety shall be tested, certified, conducted and reported in
accordance with and as required by the Local Building Code Authority and Fire Department
who have jurisdiction including, but not limited to, smoke tests, pressurization tests and
pressure measurements, door closing forces, system demonstration and system activation, etc.
3.3 REPORT OF WORK
A. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall submit six (6) bound copies of the final Testing and
Balancing Report at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the Contractor's request for final
inspection. All data shall be recorded on applicable reporting forms. The report shall include
all operating data as listed in Paragraph 3.2 above, a list of all equipment used in the testing
and balancing work, and shall be signed by the Supervising Registered Professional Engineer
and affixed with their registration stamp, signed and dated in accordance with State Law.
Final acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received.
B. When deemed necessary by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer, the Testing and Balancing
Agency shall run temperature and/or humidity recordings and shall read any of the report
quantities in the presence of the Engineer for verification purposes.
C. When all air balancing is done and all dampers are set, all test holes shall be plugged and all
dampers shall be marked with paint. The following information shall be recorded for each fan
system in the final report: Design fan and air device inlet or outlet size, actual inlet or outlet
size, design and actual CFM and velocity through the orifice, for each terminal in the system.
The pitot tube traverse method used and location of pitot tube traverse for determining CFM
shall be recorded.
D. Hydronic Systems With Meters: The system shall be balanced proportionally using the flow
meters. On completion of the balance, the following information shall be recorded in the
report: Flow meter size and brand, required flow rate and pressure drop, valve settings on
meters with a readable scale, flow rate in both full coil flow and full bypass modes. Verify
the meters are installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and shall notify the
Contractor of any deficiencies before utilizing meter.
E. Hydronic Systems Without Meters (Thermal or Terminal Rated Pressure Drop Balance): The
system shall be balanced proportionally to the terminal ratings. On completion of the balance,
the following information shall be recorded in the report: Design entering and leaving water
temperature/pressure drop, final balanced entering and leaving water temperature/pressure
drop.
F. When all hydronic balancing is done, all valves shall be marked or the locking rings set.
Control valve bypass loops shall be set with the balancing valve to provide equal flow in
either mode. Confirm in writing this work has been completed.
15990 - 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
G. After all balancing is complete and all coordination with the Contractor and the Engineer is
complete, the balancing firm shall furnish aforementioned bound report which shall contain
the following information:
1. RPM, drive sheave information (as installed and as changed), fan nameplate
information, motor nameplate information, motor amperage, motor voltage and
power factor to all motors (in all operating modes).
2. Static pressure across all components of the system.
3. Required and final balanced CFM at each system terminal. Include the terminal size,
reading orifice size, and velocities read to attain the CFM.
4. Pump and motor nameplate information, amperage and voltage to all motors,
pressure drop across all system terminals, pressure rise across the pump in PSI and
feet of head.
5. Thermal protection for all motors shall be recorded; also power factor for all motors
drawing 1,000 watts or more. Starter brand, model, enclosure type, installed thermal
heaters and the rating of the heaters, required thermal heaters and the rating of the
heaters if different than installed shall be recorded. Starter heaters shall be changed
to the correct size and so noted in the report. If the starters were furnished by the
Division 16, the correct heater sizes shall be noted in the report and the Contractor
shall be advised.
6. The report shall include a sheet which shall report the method of balance, project
altitude, and any correction factors.
7. A complete reduced set of the Blue -line Mechanical Contract Drawings which shall
be included in the report with all equipment, flow measuring devices, terminals
(VAV boxes, outlets, inlets, coils, unit heaters, fintube loops, radiant panel loops,
schedules, etc.) clearly marked and all equipment designated.
8. Include in the report all variable frequency drive electrical performance test
characteristics for each motor as described in this specification section. Include
photocopies of all meter chart recorded <measured data> and/or computer printed
output.
H. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall respond and correct all deficiencies within seven (7)
days of receiving the Engineer's written review of the Balancing Report. Failure to comply
will result in holding retainage of the final payment until all items have been corrected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.4 GUARANTEE OF WORK
A. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall guarantee the accuracy of the tests and balance for a
period of ninety (90) days from date of final acceptance of the Test and Balance Report.
During this period, the Testing and Balancing Agency shall make personnel available at no
cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies that may become apparent in the system balance.
3.5 COMPLETION SERVICES
A. Final Check: Make final checks and do any rebalancing as directed.
B. Report: Submit Balancing Report as specified above, to the Owner. Submit preliminary copy
of report to Engineer for spot-checking as described below.
15990 - 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15"0 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Acceptance: Notify Engineer and Owner that work is complete and submit preliminary copy
of Balancing Report. Schedule time to meet the Owner and Engineer at the site to perform
spot-checking and verification as directed. Test and Balance Agency shall furnish personnel
and equipment and spot check:
1. The TAB representative shall be a member of the same team used during the original
testing.
2. Equipment used during the random testing shall be the same equipment used during
the original testing.
3. The system or equipment being verified shall be in the same operating mode as
during the original TAB test.
4. Up to 10 percent of the air readings shall be re -tested. Ninety percent (90%) of the
re -tested readings must be within tolerances of the specifications.
5. Up to 20 percent of the balanced hydronic component readings shall be re -tested.
Ninety percent (90%) of the re -tested readings must be within tolerances of the
specifications.
6. Whenever system verifications do not meet specifications, the entire system shall be
re -balanced and rechecked.
END OF SECTION 15990
159"-9
TECI IVICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrl'Y
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other Sections of these
specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner. When this is the case, the extent,
source and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in
the specifications.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - general requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
B. The project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 01810.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in addition to
Division 1 - General Requirements.
B. Description: Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies, and materials,
unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as
required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and
conditions of the contract. The Work shall also include the completion of those details of
electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all
electrical systems.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A
listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
B. Latest editions of the following:
ANSI NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (as adopted and amended by the City of
Fort Collins).
2. ANSM EEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.
3. NECA - Standard of Installation.
16010-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CrrY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
4. Colorado State University Design and Construction Standards: Technical Standards,
Division 16 — Electrical, Telecommunications Design Guidelines and Sole Source
Products.
5. Other references as listed elsewhere in these specifications.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. "Furnish" or "Provide": To supply, install and connect up complete and ready for safe and
regular operation of particular work unless specifically otherwise noted.
B. "Install': To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.
C. "Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories.
D. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items
required for proper and complete installation.
E. "Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.
F. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry, concrete or other construction, installed in furred
spaces, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, or in
enclosures.
G. 'Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.
H. "Indicated," "Shown" or "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on drawings or
specifications.
I. "Similar" or 'Equal': Equal in materials, weight, size, design, construction, capacity,
performance, and efficiency of specified product.
J. "Reviewed," "Satisfactory," "Accepted," or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory, accepted,
or directed by or to Engineer.
K. "Related Work" includes, but is not necessarily limited to, mentioned work associated with, or
affected by, the work specified.
L. Refer to Article 100 of the currently adopted National Electrical Code for other definitions as
applicable to this project.
1.6 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 where applicable.
1.7 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches,
panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic, however,
16010-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
recircuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications
are complementary each to the other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called
for by both. Data presented on these drawings is as accurate as planning can determine, but
accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to
suit field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical
Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The
Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings.
B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of the job and ascertain all conditions affecting the
proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs.
C. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between
specifications, or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the
attention of the Engineer in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such
discrepancies exist, and the Engineer is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall
be solely at the discretion of the Engineer.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Prior to fabrication or installation of any electrical work, participate in detailed coordination
planning meetings with all other building utilities system trades, under the direction of the
General Contractor, so as to completely establish routings, elevations, space requirements, and
coordination of access, layout, and suspension requirements in relationship to the building
structure and the work of all other trades.
1.9 SUBMITTALS (Refer to Division 1)
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Division 1
B. Prior to submission, shop drawings, material lists and catalog cuts or manufacturer's printed
data shall be thoroughly checked for compliance with contract requirements, compatibility
with equipment being furnished by the Contractor or Owner, accuracy of dimensions,
coordination with work of other trades, and conformance with sound and safe practice as to
erection of installation. Each submittal shall bear Contractor's signed statement evidencing
such checking.
C. Clearly mark each shop drawing as follows for purposes of identification:
Shop Drawing
Equipment Identification Used on Contract Drawings
Date
Name of Project
Branch of Work
Engineer's Name
Contractor's Name
D. Clearly mark printed material, catalog cuts, pamphlets or specification sheets, and shop
drawings with the same designation shown on the contract document schedules. Identify
specific item proposed, showing catalog number, recess openings, dimensions, capacities,
16010-3
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
electrical characteristics, etc. Submittals which are incomplete will be returned to the
Contractor without review.
E. Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders; that the
purpose of submittals is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the
design concept; and that the Contractor demonstrates this understanding by indicating which
equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and
installation methods he intends to use.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the
job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction, and coordination of his work
with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review
shop drawings before submitting them. If any deviations from the specified requirements for
any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing
and incorporated with the submittal.
G. Maintain one copy of shop drawings at the project field office until completion ofthe project,
and make this copy available, upon request, to representatives of the Engineer and Owner.
H. No equipment or materials shall be installed or stored at the jobsite until submittals for such
equipment or materials have been given review action permitting their use.
I. Shop drawings and manufacturer's published data shall be submitted for:
All panelboards
Lighting fixtures (catalog cuts)
Fire alarm system
1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain a contract set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes, discoveries
and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This
shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to
date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Engineer at all
times. Upon completion of the contract, this set of record drawings shall be delivered to the
Engineer. Record documents to be provided by the Contractor shall clearly and accurately
show the following:
1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of
control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit
breaker size and arrangements.
2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building
lines.
3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials
installed.
16010-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrn
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to those editions of the following as currently adopted by the local code enforcement
authority:
ANSI/NFPA 70.
2. ANSUIEEE C2.
3. City of Fort Collins Building Code, and applicable requirements of the Fire
Prevention Bureau.
4. Comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service
to this installation.
5. Other requirements as listed elsewhere in these specifications.
B. Obtain electrical permits, plan review, and inspections from authority having jurisdiction in
accordance with Division 1.
C. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes,
statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take
precedence when they are more stringent than, or conflict with the drawings and
specifications.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the
use intended, except where more stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract
Documents.
B. Compatibility with Available Space: Equipment layouts shown are based on use of
equipment as specified. If the Contractor chooses equipment available from any other
manufacturer listed as an acceptable manufacturer, or offers equipment under the provision
for substitutions, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for first ascertaining that the
offered equipment can be installed in the space available with ample clearances for
maintenance. Include coordination drawings, as specified herein, when required.
C. All equipment and materials installed shall be new, unless otherwise specified.
D. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer or Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities.
16010-5
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. All major equipment components shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model number,
and serial number permanently attached in a conspicuous location.
2.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and
legible. Store sensitive products in weather tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and
humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover
products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid
condensation.
C. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are
undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.
2.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting
those standards.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers without a Provision for
Substitutions: Products of named manufacturers meeting specifications; no options, no
substitutions allowed.
2.4 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 30 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement, submit complete list of major
products required for submittal under these specifications, with name of manufacturer, trade
name, and model number of each product.
2.5 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
2.6 GUARANTEE
A. The entire electrical system installed under this Contract shall be left in proper working order.
Replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any work, materials, or equipment which
evidences defects in design, construction, or workmanship within two years, or as specifically
noted elsewhere in these specifications, from date of final acceptance.
1601"
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install Work using procedures defined in NECA Standard of Installation.
B. Workmanship shall conform to highest industry standards for each trade involved in erection
of the Work.
C. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be well versed
and skilled in the trades involved.
D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing
by the Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor.
All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where details or specific
installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be
followed.
E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly
checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be
thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all
material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition.
F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material,
cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes.
3.2 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling,
chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the
building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled
mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of
the Architect/Engineer. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or welding as required for
the proper support, concealment, installation or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other
electrical equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as approved by the Engineer.
B. All openings made in fire -rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a
manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated.
C. All penetrations required through completed concrete construction shall be core drilled at
minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to
structural concrete. The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Engineer before
proceeding with drilling.
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building
components. If equipment of a different size is furnished by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall furnish and install the proper motor starter, fuses, circuit breaker, disconnect switch,
16010-7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Enclosure:
1. For Dry, Indoor Applications: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. For Wet, Indoor, Temperature Controlled Applications, NEMA 250, Type 4, with
ventilation provisions, or closed loop heat exchanger, as required for adequate VFD
cooling. Any powered enclosure ventilation or heat exchanger shall be configured to
operate from a single point of electrical connection, common with the VFD.
3. For Outdoor Applications: NEMA 250, Type 4, with NEMA 250, Type 3R rain
shield. In addition, provide panel heaters, and/or panel closed loop heat exchanger or
panel air conditioner as required to maintain the temperature within the VFD
enclosure, within the allowable operating temperature range of the VFD. Any panel
heaters and/or air conditioners shall be configured to operate from a single point of
electrical connection, common with the VFD.
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and production -test each product specified in this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation.
B. Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service
conditions required by the manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. For floor -mounted VFD's, provide concrete housekeeping pad under the provisions of Section
16190.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install controller where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
NEMA ICS 3.1.
B. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
C. Install fuses in fusible switches.
D. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.
E. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served,
nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.
15043 - 8
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
wire and conduit required for the equipment furnished, at no additional cost to the Owner and
shall be approved by the Owner.
3.4 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other
trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit.
Any cost resulting from defective or ill-timed work performed under this Section shall be
borne by this Contractor.
3.5 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in
accordance with the excavating and grading specifications and as herein specified.
B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The trench bottom shall be
graded true and free from stones or soft spots, bottom of trenches must be compacted.
C. After installation of electrical work, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the
possibility of differential settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify
location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair.
3.6 ELECTRICAL COMPLETION
A. Indoctrination of Operating and Maintenance Personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified
representative of the supplier of each item or system itemized below who shall instruct
specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item
or system.
1. Instruction shall be given when the particular system is complete, and shall be
of the number of hours indicated and at the time requested by the Owner. A
representative of the Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations.
System Hours Of Instruction
Fire Alarm System 4 (1-4 hour sessions)
Electrical Distribution Equipment
(under 600 volts) 4 (1-4 hour sessions)
B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists: Deliver three (3) complete operating &
maintenance manuals and parts lists to the Owner at the time of the above required
indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination
and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during
and after the guarantee period.
1. The operating and maintenance manuals and parts lists shall give complete
information as to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts. Include
address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization
regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that
16010-5
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within 24 hours
after requested.
C. Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the
performance of tests as specified below and elsewhere in these specifications. Submit three
copies of a typewritten test report to the Engineer for his approval.
For a seven-day period after building has been placed into normal service, record the
full load current in each phase or line at the main service entrance and submit to the
Engineer.
2. Perform a careful inspection of the main switchboard bus structure and cable
connections to verify that all connections are torqued to manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Clean -Up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation, and leave
the premises and all equipment, lamps, fixtures, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs
to the Owner for clean-up of the site will be charged against the Contractor.
E. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire
installation, including all systems provided under this contract.
F. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received and
Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all
equipment.
END OF SECTION 16010
16010-9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16060 - ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16060 - ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical remodeling.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1: Alteration project procedures.
B. Division 1: Minor demolition for remodeling.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and Equipment for Patching and Extending Work: As specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field verify measurements and circuiting arrangements:
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Maintain electrical
continuity to remaining wiring and equipment.
C. Removal Drawings are based on casual field observation and/or existing record documents.
Report discrepancies to Construction Manager before disturbing existing installation.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall field check all existing conditions prior to bidding and shall
include in his bid an allowance for the removal and relocation of existing conduits, wires, devices,
fixtures, or other equipment as indicated on the plans or as required to coordinate and adapt new
and existing electrical systems to all other work required on this project.
E. Beginning of removal means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
B. Coordinate utility service outages with Colorado State University
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use
personnel experienced in such operations.
16060-1
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16060 - ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Existing Electrical Service, Fire Alarm System and Telephone System: Maintain existing
systems in service until new systems are accepted or as otherwise indicated. Disable systems
only to make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least 36 hours before
partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary
connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3.3 REMOVAL AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Remove and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Divisions 1 and 2, and this
Section.
B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which
are not removed.
F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that
has been removed.
H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other
accessories.
I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
Provide modifications to assure that circuits or systems wiring shall not pass through outlet or
junction boxes which may be rendered inaccessible by changes made to the building.
J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or
provide access panel as appropriate.
K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified.
L. Where the reuse of existing conduits, outlets, junction boxes, etc. is permissible, make certain
that the wiring for them is continuous from outlet to outlet.
M. Connect new work to existing work in a manner that will assure proper raceway grounding
throughout in conformance with the National Electrical Code.
N. Existing conduits, wire, devices, fixtures, etc. which shall be removed shall become the
property of the Contractor unless otherwise noted.
16060-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSITCENTER
SECTION 16060 - ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace
damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed
circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall perform all cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc. as required to
install or remove electrical equipment in areas of remodeling. This work shall be performed
so as to minimize damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces, plastering, or the structures
which are to be reused, resurfaced, plastered, or painted under another division of these
specifications.
B. Carefully coordinate with the required remodeling work, cutting and patching, etc. performed
by other trades. Remove or relocate existing electrical conduits, wires, devices, fixtures, and
other equipment as necessary.
END OF SECTION 16060
16060-3
IiLU N1CAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16111- CONDUIT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES P.C.
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal Conduit
B.
Flexible Metal Conduit
C.
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit
D.
Electrical Metallic Tubing
E.
Nonmetallic Conduit
F.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1 - Cutting and Patching.
B. Division 2 - Trenching: Excavation and backfill for conduit and utilities on site.
C. Division 3 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Protective envelope for underground conduit
installations.
D. Division 7 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
E. Section 16130 — Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
F. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
G. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices and Seals.
H. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. NECA - "Standard of Installation".
F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
G. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC40 and EPC-80).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
H. NEMA TC 3 — PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than two (2) inches or larger, regardless of
location (i.e., above ceiling, below slab, etc.). Dimension from building columns.
C. Accurately record actual routing of all conduits installed in and under the slab. Dimension
from the building columns.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of Section 16010 and Division 1.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route
as required to complete wiring system and to coordinate with the work of other trades.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Size, unless otherwise specified:
1. Homeruns:
a. 3/4-Inch above accessible ceilings.
b. 3/4-Inch above unaccessible ceilings and in concrete slab.
C. 1-Inch below grade and below slab on grade.
B. Branch Circuits after the fast junction point: 3/4-Inch C unless otherwise specified.
C. Underground Installations:
16111-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16111- CONDUIT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1. More than 5-Feet from Foundation Wall: Use PVC Schedule 40 nonmetallic
conduit, except as otherwise noted.
2. Within 5-Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel plastic coated conduit.
3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use PVC Schedule 40 nonmetallic conduit.
4. Minimum Size: 1-Inch.
D. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit.
E. In Slab Above Grade:
1. Use PVC Schedule 40 nonmetallic conduit, unless otherwise specified.
2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: 3/4-Inch or as permitted by the Structural Engineer,
based on field conditions.
F. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit if subject to physical damage. Thickwall
nonmetallic conduit in areas not subject to physical damage and acceptable to the local
authority-
G. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit if subject to damage below 8-feet, otherwise use
electrical metallic tubing.
2.2 METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IM[C): Rigid steel.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.3 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating,20 mil thick.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to
match conduit.
2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
16111-3
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16111- CONDUIT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSUNEMA FB 1; steel, compression or set screw type.
2.7 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel,
provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
supports
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to building
elements and walls.
L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. Dimension from building columns.
M. Do not cross conduits in slab except with written approval from the Structural Engineer.
N. Routing conduits parallel in the slab is prohibited except with written approval from the
Structural Engineer.
16111-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16111- CONDUIT COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
O. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
P. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F. Maintain a minimum 12-inch clearance from flues, steam lines, hot water lines,
etc.
Q. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -bun cut ends.
R. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
S. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic
conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for twenty (20) minutes, minimum.
T. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet
locations and to cast boxes.
U. Install no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies
to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to
fabricate or factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size.
V. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
W. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses,
control and expansion joints.
X. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
Y. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Z. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.
AA. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.
BB. Transition from underground nonmetallic conduit to above grade metal conduit or electrical
metallic tubing shall be made in or below the slab. The transition between nonmetallic
conduit and above grade conduit shall be made with a rigid steel, plastic coated elbow.
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
approved materials and methods.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack
with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified.
END OF SECTION 16111
16111-5
CSU LORY STUDENT CENTER ADDITION
Specification Index
DIVISION 16
Section No, Description
16010
Basic Electrical Requirements
16060
Electrical Remodeling Provisions
16111
Conduit
16114
Cable Trays
16123
Building Wires and Cables
16130
Electrical Boxes and Fittings
16141
Wiring Devices
16160
Cabinets and Enclosures
16170
Grounding and Bonding
16190
Supporting Devices and Seals
16195
Electrical Identification
16441
Enclosed Switches
16470
Panelboards
16477
Fuses
16480
Motor Controllers
16510
Interior Luminaires
16721
Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection Systems
16741
Telephone Service Entrance
16995
Lighting Control Commissioning
F:\29604002\Spec\elec\I000/o MsTory Student Ctr Me Index.doc
4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15043 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS COOVERCLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding.
3.5 START-UP SERVICE
A. Provide minimum two (2) hours of start-up service for each VFD. Service shall be performed
by factory -trained service technicians.
B. Technician shall verify correct installation, start-up the drive, adjust all required operating
parameters, and verify proper operation in all operating modes.
C. Owner Training: Provide minimum eight (8) hours training in operation and trouble -shooting
procedures for the installed drives.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Make final adjustments to installed drive to assure proper operation of fan system. Obtain
performance requirements from installer of driven loads.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes.
END OF SECTION 15043
15043-9
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16114 - CABLE TRAYS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16114 - CABLE TRAYS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cable Trays and Accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 7 - Firestopping.
B. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable.
C. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices and Seals.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
B. ASTM A 123 Specification for Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated
from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
C. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated Galvanized by the Hot -
Dip Process.
D. NEMA VE 1 - Metallic Cable Tray Systems
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.
C. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.
16114-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16114 - CABLE TRAYS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Chalfant
B. Square-D
C. B-Line Systems, Inc.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.
2.2 LADDER -TYPE CABLE TRAY
A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C ladder type tray.
B. Material: Steel.
C. Finish: ASTM A 123, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication, ASTM A 525, mill -galvanized
before fabrication.
D. Inside Width: As indicated.
E. Inside Depth: As indicated.
F. Straight Section Rung Spacing: As indicated.
G. Inside Radius of Fittings: As indicated.
H. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind
ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps.
2.3 WARNING SIGNS
A. Engraved Nameplates: 1/2-inch high black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate,
engraved with the following wording:
WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR
SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND
TUBING!
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 1.
C. Support trays in accordance with Section 16190. Provide supports at each connection point,
at the end of each run, and at other points to maintain the proper loading rate.
16114-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16114 - CABLE TRAYS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Use expansion connectors where required.
E. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of Section 16170.
1. Provide continuity between tray components.
2. Provide #8 AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire length
of tray; bond to each component.
3. Connections to tray may be made using mechanical or exothermic connectors.
F. Install warning signs at 50-8 centers along cable tray, located to be visible.
END OF SECTION 16114
16114-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Building Wire and Cable.
B. Wiring Connections and Terminations
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16111 - Conduit
B. Section 16130 — Electrical Boxes and Fittings
C. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices and Seals
D. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification
1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A
listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
B. NEMA WC 3 — Rubber -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of
Electrical Energy.
C. NEMA WC 5 — Thermoplastic -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Division 1.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Conductor sizes are based on copper.
C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is appropriate unless dimensioned. Route wire
and cable as required to meet project conditions.
16123-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact
routing and lengths required.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Determine required separation between wiring and other work.
C. Determine routing to avoid interference with other work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A. Thermoplastic -Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5.
B. Rubber -Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3.
C. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt, insulation,
THHNITHWN, or XHHW.
D. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN, or
XHHW.
2.2 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE
A. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 600 volt
insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered
with a PVC jacket.
B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor,
300 volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and
covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed.
C. Plenum Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor,
300 volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and
covered with a non-metallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used
as ducts, and plenums.
D. Install all remote control and signal cables in cable tray, raceways, or supported every 4'-0" on
bridal rings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A. Use no wire smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than
16123-2
TECMWAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
No. 16 AWG for control wiring.
B. Use No. 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75-
feet.
C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable.
D. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes.
E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. Make temporary
connections to panelboard devices with sufficient slack conductor to facilitate reconnections
required for balancing loads between phases.
F. Damaged conductors during installation shall be replaced.
G. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for
pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wires.
B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the
weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.
C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
3.3 WIRING CONNECTION AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.
B. For No. 8 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps.
C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, No. 6 AWG and larger. Tape
uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation
value of conductor.
D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible
temperature rise.
F. Terminate up to 410 AWG spare conductors with wire nuts. Use electrical tape for spare
conductor #8 AWG and larger.
G. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting aluminum
conductors to copper conductors.
H. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and
taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
16123-3
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16123- BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
I. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps,
10 AWG and smaller.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1.
B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values.
D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper
phasing connections.
3.5 WIRE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways as approved herein.
B. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceways or cable as approved herein.
D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
E. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
F. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceways.
3.6 WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODING
A. Wires No. 8 AWG and smaller shall be factory color -coded. Wire No. 6 AWG and larger
shall be color -coded with color tape 6-inch length of exposed ends, and at every accessible
junction box on the branch circuit or feeder.
120/208 Volts
A = Black
B = Red
C = Blue
Neutral = White
Ground = Green
B. Maintain the color coding throughout the system from panel to the last device on the branch
circuit.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to energizing, all feeders from transformers, switchboards, and building service cables,
are to be tested with a 500-volt insulation megohm meter to determine insulation resistance
levels to assure requirements are fulfilled. All field test data is to be recorded and submitted.
Test is to include meggering for one minute between conductors and between each conductor
16123-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
and ground. Cables are to be meggered after installation with cables disconnected at both
ends. The values must be not less than as follows:
Conductor Size Resistance
(AWG or MCM) (Meizohms-1,000 ft)
#16 AWG to #8 AWG 200
#6 AWG to #2/0 AWG 100
#3/0 AWG to 500 KCMIL 50
END OF SECTION 16123
16123-5
TECENICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16130-ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Wall and Ceiling Outlet Boxes
B. Floor Boxes
C. Pull and Junction Boxes
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 7 - Firestopping.
B. Division 8 - Access Doors: Wall and ceiling access doors.
C. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices: Service fittings and fire -rated poke -through fittings for floor
boxes.
D. Section 16160 - Cabinets and Enclosures.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A
listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
B. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
C. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough -in.
16130-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install
at location required for box to serve intended purpose. Include installation within 10-feet of
location shown. Refer to Architectural Drawings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 2-inch male fixture
studs where required.
B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.
2.2 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor Boxes: ANSI NEMA OS 1 or NEMA FB 1, fully adjustable.
2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.
B. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger than 12-Inches in Any Dimension: Hinged enclosure in
accordance with Section 16160.
C. Surface -Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat -flanged, surface -mounted
junction box.
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover
screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.
C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6-inches from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials
and methods under the provisions of Division 7.
16130-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Piping Specialties Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of Piping Specialties specified in this section include the following:
1. Hydronic Specialties
2. Escutcheons
3. Strainers
4. Dielectric Fittings
5. Mechanical Sleeve Seal
6. Fire and Smoke Barrier Penetration Seal
7. Drip Pan
8. Pipe Sleeve
9. Sleeve Seals
C. Piping Specialties furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment, are specified as part of
equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping specialties
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
FCI Compliance: Test and rate "Y" type strainers in accordance with FCI 73-1
"Pressure Rating Standard for "Y" Type Strainers." Test and rate other type strainers
in accordance with FCI 78-1 "Pressure Rating Standard for Pipeline Strainers Other
than "Y" Type."
2. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation.
3. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
4. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
5. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section DC, "Welding and Brazing
Qualification" for qualifications for welding processes and operators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured piping specialty.
15120-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Align adjacent wall -mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with
each other.
G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.
H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6-inch
separation. Provide minimum 12-inches separation between back-to-back boxes in acoustic
rated walls.
L Do not install through -the -wall boxes.
J. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow
for surface finish thickness.
K. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
L. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
M. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
N. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
O. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two (2) rigid
metal conduits both supported within 12-inches of box.
P. Use gang box where more than one (1) device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
Q. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
R. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
S. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for
other installations.
T. Set floor boxes level.
U. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12-inches in any
dimension.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure under provisions of Section 16160.
2. Other Locations: Use surface -mounted cast iron box.
V. Minimum junction and pull box size 4-11/16" x 4-11/16" x 2-1/4".
W. Minimum outlet box size 4" x 4" x 1-1/2".
X. Minimum telephone outlet box size 4-11/16" x 4-11/16" x 2-1/4".
16130-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS COOVER-CIAARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Y. Minimum junction box size for fire alarm pull stations, control module, monitor module, 4" x
4" x 2-3/4". Provide plaster ring at all pull station locations.
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for products famished under other sections.
B. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Division 8.
C. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit comer only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
D. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and
backsplashes.
E. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.
B. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closure in unused box openings.
END OF SECTION 16130
16130-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16141- WIRING DEVICES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
SECTION 16141-WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Wall Switches.
B. Receptacles.
C. Floor -Mounted Service Fittings.
D. Device Plates and Box Covers.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A
listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
B. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet
C. NEMA WD 1 - General -Purpose Wiring Devices.
D. NEMA WD 5 - Specific -Purpose Wiring Devices.
1.4 SUBMITTALS (Refer to Division 1)
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, and dimensions.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES
A. Leviton
B. Pass & Seymour
C. General Electric
D. Arrow, Hart & Hegeman
E. Hubbell
F. Bryant
2.2 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits and Motor Loads Under 1/2 HP: NEMA WD; heavy-
duty; (suitable for high abuse areas) AC general use switch.
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16141- WIRING DEVICES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Device Body: Ivory plastic (or as directed by Architect) with toggle handle. Key -operated;
where indicated.
C. Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; green color lens, where indicated.
D. Voltage Rating: 120-277 Volts, AC.
E. Current Rating: 20 Amperes.
2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES
A.
Leviton
B.
Pass & Seymour
C.
General Electric
D.
Arrow, Hart & Hegeman
E.
Hubbell
F.
Bryant
2.4 RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience and Straight -Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1 with a current rating of 20
amperes.
B. Locking -Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 5.
C. Specification Grade 250 Volt Duplex Receptacles: NEMA WD l; Type 5-20R, suitable for
high abuse areas, ivory plastic face (or as directed by Architect). Provide orange face for
isolated -ground applications. Provide red face for emergency duplex receptacles.
D. Corridor: Hospital grade receptacles.
E. Specific -Use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on
drawings; brown plastic face. Provide with matching cord cap, to be provided to Facilities
Management prior to final acceptance of Building.
F. GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault current
interrupter.
2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLOOR -MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Russell & Stoll
B. Steel City
2.6 FLOOR -MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Flush Covers for Duplex Convenience Receptacle: Aluminum flush cover suitable for floor
box, with duplex flap opening. Provide aluminum carpet rings.
B. Flush Covers for Communications and Data Cables: Aluminum flush cover suitable for floor
box, with 2-1/8 x 1 inch combination threaded opening. Provide aluminum finish protective
rings.
16141-2
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORAD ESTATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16141- WIRING DEVICES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL PLATES
A. Bryant
B. Hubbell
C. Leviton
D. Pass & Seymour
E. Arrow & Hart
2.8 WALL PLATES
A. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless steel SS#4 or as directed by Architect.
B. Weather -Proof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast iron with hinged gasketed device covers.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall switches 42 inches above floor, OFF position down.
B. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 2 inches above counters or backsplash,
grounding pole on bottom.
C. Install specific -use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings or as required to suit
application.
D. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas, using
jumbo -size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
E. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above
accessible ceilings, and on surface -mounted outlets.
F. Install devices and wall plates flush and level.
G. All devices to be grounded to box with ground jumper except isolated ground receptacles and
branch circuits containing a separate ground conductor.
H. Install blank covers on all unused openings.
END OF SECTION 16141
16141-3
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16160 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16160-CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hinged Cover Enclosures.
B. Cabinets.
C. Terminal Blocks.
D. Accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices and Seals.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
B. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems.
C. ANSIMPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of products.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two (2) of each cabinet key.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure.
B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key.
16160-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16160 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components;
finish with matte white enamel.
D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.2 CABINETS
A. Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls.
B. Box Size: As indicated.
C. Backboard: Provide 3/4-inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint
matte white enamel.
D. Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit
panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel.
E. Knockouts: As required.
F. Provide metal barriers to separate compartments containing control wiring operating at less
than 50 volts from power wiring.
G. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment.
2.3 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4.
B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw
connectors, rated 600 volts.
C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting,
with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts.
D. Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in
accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6.
B. Provide conduit hubs on enclosures.
C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and
layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure.
16160-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16160 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each
corner.
C. Install cabinet fronts plumb.
END OF SECTION 16160
16160-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
SECTION 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Power System Grounding
B. Communication System Grounding
C. Electrical Equipment and Raceway Grounding and Bonding
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
B. NFPA Compliance: NFPA 70 'National Electrical Code (NEC).
C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 'Electrical Grounding
and Bonding Equipment," and 869, 'Electrical Service Equipment," pertaining to grounding
and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. In addition, require compliance with UL Std
486A, "Wire Connectors". Grounding and bonding products which are to be UL-listed and
labeled for their intended usage.
D. IEEE Compliance: Applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE
Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and
equipment.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to metallic cold
water service, building steel and to supplementary grounding electrodes, as indicated on
drawings.
B. Ground each separately -derived system neutral to nearest metallic cold water pipe 2-inch
diameter or larger, building steel and where present to the referenced ground bar as shown on
drawings.
C. Provide communications system grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect
to nearest referenced ground bar as shown on drawings.
D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non -current carrying
metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways
and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems.
16170-1
TECAMCAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Indicate layout of ground ring, location of system grounding electrode connections, and
routing of grounding electrode conductors.
C. Submit all field test reports.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Ground Rods: Copper or copper -clad steel, 3/4-inch diameter, minimum length 10-feet.
B. Mechanical Grounding Connectors: For all grounding connections above grade.
1. Manufacturer: Burndy Electrical
2. Material: Copper.
3. Compression Type: Irreversible.
4. UL listed under Standard UL467.
C. Wire:
1. Material: Copper.
2. Size: As indicated on the drawings. When size is not indicated, size per Article 250
of NEC requirements.
D. Grounding Connection Accessories:
1. Electrical insulating tape, heat -shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials,
bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type service
required.
E. Field Welding: Exothermic welded connections are required where grounding conductors
connect to underground grounding conductors and to underground grounding electrodes, and
for bonding to steel. All underground connection shall be exothermic welded.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits.
Terminate each ground conductor to the bushing and ground lug.
B. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp.
Make connections to flanged piping at street side of flange.
C. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use grounding mats, or driven ground rods, where
indicated. Install ground rods in suitable recessed well; fill with gravel after connection is
made.
16170-z
{
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of pipeline strainer. Submit
schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required
piping specialty.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated specialties, indicating details of fabrication, materials,
and method of support.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of
manufactured piping specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Divisions 15.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
C. Spirax Sarco
d. Watts Regulator Co.
2. Pressure Reducing Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
d. Taco, Inc.
e. Keckley
3. Air Vents (Manual and Automatic):
a. Armstrong Machine Works.
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
C. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Division
d. Spirax Sarco
4. Air Separators:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
d. Taco, Inc.
e. The John Wood Co.
f. Spirotherm
5. Diaphragm -Type Compression Tanks:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Bell and Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
d. Taco, Inc.
e. The John Wood Co.
15120 - 2
TECM41CAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Use minimum No. 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding
conductor. Leave 10-feet slack conductor at terminal board or cabinet.
E. Provide isolated grounds for all microprocessor and data processing equipment, where
indicated on drawings.
F. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in
accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.
Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, connections are to be tightened
to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and
effective grounding.
G. Provide code -sized ground cable bonding jumpers, installed with ground clamps, across all
conduit expansion couplings and fittings.
H. Route grounding connections, conductors to ground, and grounding conductors to protective
devices in the shortest and straightest paths possible to minimize transient voltage rises.
Provide a corrosion -resistant finish to field connections, buried metallic bonding products,
and where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, where subject to corrosive
action.
All continuous runs of cable tray and all isolated sections of cable tray shall be grounded at
intervals not to exceed 20-feet.
K. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all non-metallic conduits.
L. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metallic conduits.
M. Grounding conductor in feeders and branch circuits extend ground conductor to switches,
receptacle, equipment enclosures, equipment, and panels etc. and ground as required.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, the ground
resistance shall be tested with an earth ground resistance tester in accordance with IEEE 81,
"Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a
Ground System". Where tests show resistance -to -ground is over values in Table 1 below,
Contractor shall take appropriate action to reduce resistance to the values in Table 1, by
driving additional ground rods; and then retest to demonstrate compliance. All results shall
be recorded and submitted.
Table 1
Earth Ground Resistance
To Equipment Equipment (Ohms)
Pad Mount Transformer 5
Secondary Neutrals and Other Ground 10
END OF SECTION 16170
16170-3
TECHHICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 161" - SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Conduit and Equipment Supports.
B. Fastening Hardware.
C. Wall and Floor Seals.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 3 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. Concrete equipment pads.
B. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Division 3.
C. Refer to Section 16010 for coordination requirements.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A
listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring,
which they carry.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel for non -corrosive environment.
B. Hardware: Corrosion -resistant.
16190-1
"IECHN1CAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 161" - SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using
precast insert system, expansion anchors, preset inserts, or beam clamps. Do not use spring
steel clips and clamps; however, caddy fasteners are accepted.
B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board
partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self -drilling
anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs;
and wood screws in wood construction.
C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
D. Do not drill structural steel members.
E. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a
neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.
F. Install all free-standing electrical equipment on a 4-inch concrete housekeeping pad.
G. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
H. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush -mounted cabinets and
panelboards in stud walls.
I. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls, concrete and/or masonry walls and floors, it shall
be sleeved. Seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer
compound.
J. Where conduit penetrates waterproofed floors or exterior walls subject to entry of moisture,
provide pipe sleeves two sizes larger than conduit, suitably flashed or sealed where
appropriate. Seal annular space around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer
compound.
K. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise,
route through roof jack with pitch pocket.
L. No suspended conduit or box supports shall be less than 1 /4" diameter steel rod. Rod used as
pedestal support is not acceptable. The contractor shall not use tie wire or wire of any type to
support conduits, junction boxes or pull boxes.
M. No more than five (5) 1/2" conduits, three (3) 3/4" conduits or two (2) 1" conduits shall be
supported on a single 1/4" diameter steel rod.
161"-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 161" - SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
3.2
N. All conduits shall be supported by approved hangers. Supports installed and used by other
trades such as duct hangers, pipe hangers, ceiling hangers, etc. shall not be used for conduit
support. No conduit shall be hung from air handling duct of any type. Electrical conduit
systems "shall stand alone".
O. All light fixtures shall be independently supported at opposite corners from structural steel or
from trapeze supported from structural steel by electrical contractor.
P. Wall -mounted fixtures shall be supported from building structure with approved backing
support to prevent any damage to the wall.
Q. Concrete anchors shall not be used to suspend heavy electrical loads such as electrical switch
panels or four -inch and larger conduits. Anchors shall be designed to support conduits and
cable tray when full fitted to maximum capacity with cables.
EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Provide equipment pad bases of concrete type, construction, and finish as herein specified.
Bases shall be of dimensions indicated or, where not specifically indicated or specified,
dimensions shall be 4 inches height with width and length providing 4 inches of projection of
base beyond outline dimension of supported equipment.
Concrete shall be Class 3000, prepared in conformity with ACI 301, ASTM C 33,
and ASTM C 94, as applicable. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating
equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding, or tamping, using equipment and
procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. Perform
consolidation so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other
embedded items and into corners. Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by
moisture -retaining cover curing, or by combinations thereof, as directed or approved.
2. Provide oiled wood forms for concrete placement, adequately braced to ensure
straight and vertical sides for bases. Finished bases shall provide a 3/4-inch chamfer
at all exposed edges. Except where vibration attenuating base mountings are
specified, provide No. 4 dowels (conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60), grouted
into place, for anchorage of bases to substrate for all applications for which imposed
strains or dynamic forces produced by equipment operation introduce the possibility
of displacement of bases. Spacing of dowels shall be not less than 24 inches o.c.,
with a minimum of 4 dowels for each base.
3. Bases where indicated shall be reinforced by installation of 6 x 6 No. 8 AWG welded
wire fabric conforming to ASTM A 185. Apply measures, during concrete
placement, to ensure that fabric remains vertically centered in bases.
4. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Do not disturb
slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. Float finish surfaces and
provide steel trowel final finish.
B. For all equipment to be installed on concrete bases or other concrete construction, provide
templates, anchor bolts, and accessories as required. When installing equipment, set
16190-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
equipment into final position, shim equipment bases, skids or rails for level positioning, and
install non -shrink grout for uniform support, and securely bolt into final position.
END OF SECTION 16190
161" 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Electrical Power, Control and Communication Conductors and Conduit
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
B. Operational Instructions and Warnings
C. Danger Signs
D. Equipment/System Identification Signs
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 9 - Painting.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A
listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Section 01091.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI Compliance: Applicable requirements of ANSI A 13.1, 'Piping and Piping Systems".
B. FS Compliance: Applicable requirements of FS L-P-387 'Plastic Sheet, Laminated,
Thermosetting (for designation plates)".
C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standard 969, "Marking and Labeling
Systems," pertaining to electrical identification systems.
D. NEMA Compliance: Applicable requirements of NEMA Standard Nos. WC-1 and WC-2
pertaining to identification of power and control conductors.
E. Comply with "OSHA" sign standards for danger, caution, warning, etc.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Include schedule for all specified applications of electrical identification.
16195-1
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: The manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required are to be used
for each application.
B. Cable/Conductor Identification Bands:
For cables smaller than No. 2/0 manufacturer's standard vinyl -cloth self-adhesive
cable/conductor markers of wrap -around type, either prenumbered plastic coated
type, or write -on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap are to be used and
numbered to show circuit identification.
2. For cables No. 2/0 AWG and larger, heat shrink sleeving is to be used for phase color
coding.
C. Plasticized Tags:
1. Manufacturer's standard preprinted or partially preprinted accident -prevention and
operational tags, on plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing,
approximately 3-1/4-inch x 5-5/8-inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and
with appropriate preprinted wording including large -size primary wording, e.g.,
DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE.
D. Baked Enamel Danger Signs:
Manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs of baked enamel finish on 20-gauge steel;
of standard Red, Black and White graphics; 14-inch x 10-inch size except where 10-
inch x 7-inch is the largest size which can be applied where needed; with recognized
standard explanation wording, e.g., XXXX VOLTS, KEEP AWAY, BURIED
CABLE, DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH, etc.
E. Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs:
Engraved stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in sizes and
thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and
wording indicated, Black face and White core (White letters on a Black background)
except as otherwise required (fire alarm shall be Red with White letters), punched for
mechanical fastening with a minimum of two (2) screws.
2. Thickness: 1/16-Inch, for units up to 20 square inches or 8-inch length; 1/8-inch for
larger units.
Fasteners: A minimum of two (2) self -tapping stainless steel screws.
4. Minimum letter height shall be as follows:
a. 1/4-Inch:
1) Panelboard name.
2) System control panel name.
3) Voltage rating.
16195-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
4) Ampere rating.
5) Individual circuit breaker number and load name.
6) Individual switch circuit number and load name.
7) Individual motor starter circuit number and load name.
8) Individual indicating light function.
9) Individual pushbutton function.
10) Individual selector switch functions.
F. Lettering and Graphics:
Names, abbreviations and other designations used in electric identification work are
to be coordinated with corresponding designation shown, specified or scheduled.
Numbers, lettering and wording as required or as recommended by manufacturer or
as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems
and equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Regulations: Governing regulations and requests of governing authorities are to be
complied with for identification of electrical work.
B. Conductor Identification:
The application of conductor identification, with circuit number, on each conductor
in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or
communication/signal system are present is required. The identification is to match
the marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and
similar previously established identification for project's electrical work.
C. Junction Box and Pull Box Identification:
On the Cover of each junction box and pull box: The panel name and circuit
number(s) of the enclosed conductors are to be legibly written with a Black
permanent ink broad tip marking pen and the system identified for FA (Fire Alarm),
PA (Public Address), S (Security), or TC (Temperature Control).
2. Covers for the Fire Alarm System junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted
Red.
D. Operational Identification and Warnings:
Wherever required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of
electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems
and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized
personnel, self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction
or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical
enclosures shall be provided. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed,
16195-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended
purposes.
E. Equipment/System Identification:
An engraved plastic -laminated sign is to be provided on each major unit of electrical
equipment in the building; including central or master unit of each electrical system
including communication/control/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with
its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise
indicated, provide single line of text, letter height as specified, black lettering on
white field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract
documents and shop drawings. The sign shall include unit designation, source circuit
number, circuit voltage, and other data specifically indicated. Also, the sign shall
indicate normal source circuit number ("Fed from ... ") and emergency source circuit
number when the equipment is a transfer switch or fed directly from a transfer
switch. Include signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work:
a. Panelboards (include main bus ampacity on sign), electrical cabinets and
enclosures.
b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities.
c. Push buttons, selector switches, indicating lights. (Circuit number and
voltage not required on sign).
d. Telephone cabinets and switching equipment. (Circuit number and voltage
not required on sign.)
e. Fire Alarm Control Panel.
2. The installation of signs are required at locations indicated or, where not otherwise
indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with
operation and maintenance of equipment. The sign shall be secured to the substrate
with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate
substrate.
END OF SECTION 16195
16195-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16441- ENCLOSED SWITCHES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16441 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fusible Switches
B. Nonfusible Switches
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16477 - Fuses.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NECA - Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors
Association).
B. NEMA FU1 -Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
C. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum).
D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 16010: Procedures for Submittals.
B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
16441-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSUPY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
6. Hydronic System Safety Relief Valves:
a. Kunkle Valve Co., Inc.
b. Lunkenheimer Co.
C. Watts Regulator Co.
d. Lonergan
e. Keckley
f. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
g. Conbraco
7. Pipe Escutcheons:
a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
b. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp.
C. Sanitary -Dash Mfg. Co.
8. Low Pressure Strainers:
a. Armstrong Machine Works
b. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Division
C. Metraflex Co.
d. R-P&C Valve; Division White Consolidated Industries, Inc.
e. Spirax Sarco
f. Victaulic Co. of America
g. Watts Regulator Co.
9. Dielectric Fittings:
a. B & K Industries, Inc.
b. Capital Mfg. Co.; Division of Harsco Corp.
C. Eclipse, Inc.
d. Epco Sales, Inc.
e. Perfection Corp.
f. Rockford -Eclipse Division
10. Mechanical Sleeve Seal:
a. Thunderline Corp.
b. "Metraseal" by Metraflex Co.
11. Fire and Smoke Barrier Penetration Seal:
a. Electrical Products Division/3M
b. Dow Corning
C. Flame Stop, Inc.
d. MetaCaulk
2.2 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. General: Provide factory -fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use
in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for
each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply
with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly
mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one (1) type is indicated,
selection is Installer's option.
15120 - 3
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16441- ENCLOSED SWITCHES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES P.C.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cutler Hammer
B.
General Electric
C.
Square-D
D.
Siemens
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.
2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle
lockable in OFF position.
B. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FUI, Class R or J fuses.
2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle
lockable in OFF position.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
3. Elevator Locations: Type 4X.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and
size installed.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with META ATS, except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
END OF SECTION 16441
16441-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Branch Circuit Panelboards.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.3
A. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
C. Section 16477 - Fuses.
A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors
Association).
B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum).
E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
F. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).
H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 16010: Procedures for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus
ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch
arrangement and sizes.
16470-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES P.C.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish two (2) of each panelboard key.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square-D
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.
2.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboard.
B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each
panelboard, provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.
C. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt
panelboards, or as indicated.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SAID for lighting circuits,
Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter
circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
E. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with
integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with
automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating
100,000 symmetrical amperes, let -through current and energy level less than permitted
for same size Class RK-5 fuse.
F. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
16470-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
G. Cabinet Box: 6-Inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards.
H. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface cabinet front as shown on plans, with concealed trim
clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of
Installation."
B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
C. Height: 6-Feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6-feet with bottom
no more than 4-inches above floor.
D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to
reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Revise directory to reflect
final Colorado State University Room Number Schedule.
F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.
G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above
ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: Five (5) empty 1-inch (DN27). Identify each as
SPARE.
H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16170.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5
for circuit breakers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain
proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits.
3.4 PANELBOARD SCHEDULE
A. Panelboards shall be furnished and equipped as follows, except as otherwise specified:
16470-3
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Manufacturer 120/208V*
Square-D NQOB
Panelboards may contain not more than two (2) subfeed breakers with ratings in
excess of 100A, but less than 225A.
END OF SECTION 16470
16470-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16477 - FUSES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES P.C.
SECTION 16477 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fuses.
B. Spare Fuse Cabinet.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 9: Painting of spare fuse cabinet.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time -
current curves.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Record actual fuse sizes.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL and referenced standards as suitable for
purpose specified and indicated.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide two (2) fuse pullers.
16477-1
TECIt LAICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL TRANSITCENTER
SECTION 16477 - FUSES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide three (3) of each size and type fuse installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bussman
2. General Electric
3. Feffaz-Shawmut
4. Reliance
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.2 FUSE REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.
B. Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase -to -phase voltage.
2.3 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Description: Wall -mounted sheet metal cabinet, suitably sized to store spare fuses and
fuse pullers specified.
B. Doors: Hinged, with hasp for Owner's padlock.
C. Finish: Prime finish for field painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
C. Install spare fuse cabinet where indicated.
END OF SECTION 16477
16477-2
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CrrY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16480 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16480 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Manual Motor Starters.
B. Magnetic Motor Starters.
C. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 16 - Electrical: All Sections.
B. Section 15040 — Mechanical/Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
A listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
B. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 —1993: Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.
C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays.
1.5 SUBMITTALS (Refer to Division 1)
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Provide product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot devices,
and switching and overcurrent protective devices.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies;
and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
16480-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE tMVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16480 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 16010.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MOTOR STARTERS
A. Square-D
2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A. Manual Motor Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated non -
reversing full -voltage controller for induction motors rated in horsepower, with overload
relay for each phase, low -voltage protection, red pilot light, field -convertible auxiliary
contact, and toggle operator.
B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A
manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with
thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and key or toggle operator as indicated.
C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated
pole, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal
overload unit, red pilot light, field convertible auxiliary contact, and toggle operator.
D. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for indoor applications, and type 3R for outdoor
applications.
2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
A. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A, combination type
magnetic controller as specified herein, for induction motors, rated in horsepower.
B. Magnetic Motor Starters shall be circuit breaker or motor circuit protector combination
type, with external operator, in common enclosure with starter. External circuit breaker
operator environmental rating shall match the enclosure rating. Disconnecting means shall
be equipped with provisions enabling locking in the "OFF" position.
C. Full Voltage Starting: Reversing or non -reversing type as indicated.
D. Two -Speed Starting: Two -speed, one or two winding, and variable torque or constant
torque as required to match the motor and the driven load. All two -speed motors with 2:1
ratio shall be single -winding type (refer to Section 15040); all other two -speed motors shall
be two -winding type. Division under which motor starters will be supplied is responsible
for verifying motor winding configuration so as to assure proper motor starter selection.
Provide two-speed/reversing starter, with reversing contactor for low speed operation only,
where indicated. Include integral time delay transition between FAST and SLOW speeds,
16480 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16480 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
and between FORWARD and REVERSE rotation, as applicable. Starters for motors rated
25 horsepower, or larger shall include controls forcing low -speed start followed by
transition to high speed, irrespective of concurrent control systems demand for high-speed
operation.
E. Coil Operating Voltage: Unless otherwise specified, 120 volts, 60 hertz.
F. Size: NEMA ICS 2; size as shown on Drawings, or as required for the motor horsepower.
G. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; self -powered, adjustable trip electronic type, with
selectable trip class operation. Motor protection functions shall include: phase loss, phase
unbalance, and ground fault.
II. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for indoor applications, and type 3R for outdoor
applications.
L Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; two field -convertible contacts in addition to seal -in
contact.
J. Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2; HAND/OFF/AUTO, maintained type, in front cover.
NEMA ICS 2; HIGH SPEED/LOW SPEED, AND FOREWARD/REVERSE maintained
type, in front cover, as applicable for 2-speed and two-speed/reversing applications.
K. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2; RUN: red LED type, in front cover with press -to -test
lamp testing feature. For two -speed applications, provide separate red LED type LOW
SPEED RUN, and HIGH SPEED RUN pilot lights in lieu of single RUN pilot light. For
reversing applications, provide amber LED type REVERSE pilot light, which illuminates in
conjunction with the LOW SPEED RUN pilot light.
L. Relays: NEMA ICS 2; as required.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Select and adjust electronic overloads to match installed motor characteristics.
C. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door
identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service
factor, and voltage/phase rating.
D. Floor mounted equipment shall be on a flinch concrete housekeeping pad.
E. Provide Nameplates per Section 16195.
END OF SECTION 16480
16480-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES P.C.
B. Hydronic System Safety Relief Valves: Diaphragm operated, cast iron or brass body valve,
with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and
non -corrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit
system. Valve shall be factory -set at operating pressure to suit system and have the capability
for field adjustment. Safety relief valve shall be designed, manufactured, tested and labeled
in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code. Valve body shall be cast iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and
rubber; 125 psig working pressure and 250 degree F maximum operating temperature. Select
valve to suit actual system pressure and BTU capacity. Set valve to relieve at 10 psi above
operating pressure.
C. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure,
212 degree F operating temperature; manually coin operated and having discharge outlet
connection and 1/8-inch NPT male connection.
D. Automatic Air Vent: Float type vent designed to vent automatically; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts. 150 psig working pressure, 240 degree F operating temperature.
1/4-Inch discharge connection and 1/2-inch inlet connection.
E. Air Separators: Cast iron; constructed and labeled for minimum 175 psig water working
pressure and 300 degree F operating temperature; integral weir designed to decelerate system
flow and direct released air into compression tank; inline inlet and outlet connections;
screwed connections up to and including 3-inch NPS; flanged connections for 4-inch NPS
and above; threaded blowdown connection; sized as indicated for full system flow capacity.
F. Diaphragm -Type Compression Tanks: Size and number as indicated; construct of welded
carbon steel for 125 psig working pressure, 240 degree F maximum operating temperature.
Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by means of a
flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Diaphragm material shall be chemically inert to
Propylene Glycol. Provide taps for pressure gauge and air charging fitting, and drain fitting.
Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles.
Tank, with taps and supports, shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with
ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIR, Division 1.
G. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Class 150, cast iron housing, stainless steel operating parts;
threaded connections for 2-inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2 inch and larger.
Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while
compensating for system operating pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for
flow measuring equipment. Provide a metal identification tag with chain for each valve,
factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and rate flow in GPM.
2.3 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting
pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside
diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings;
and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for
occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
15120 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16510 -INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior Luminaires and Accessories.
B. Emergency Lighting Units.
C. Exit Signs.
D. Ballasts.
E. Fluorescent Dimming Ballasts and Controls.
F. Fluorescent Lamp Emergency Power Supply.
G. Lamps.
H. Luminaire Accessories.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and
systems to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process
and contractor responsibilities are described in Section 0 18 10.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High -Intensity Discharge Reflector
Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns.
B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications.
C. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High -Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps
(Multiple Supply Type).
D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices -Dimensional Requirements.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 16010: Procedures for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a
standard product of the manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.
16510-1
TECEMCAL SPECIFICATIONS CrrY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.7 EXTRA PRODUCTS
A. Furnish two (2) of each plastic lens type.
B. Furnish one (1) replacement lamp for each lamp type.
C. Furnish two (2) of each ballast type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish Products as scheduled. Refer to Section 16010 for substitutions and product
options.
2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. Furnish Products as scheduled. Refer to Section 16010 for substitutions and product
options.
2.3 EXIT SIGNS
A. Furnish Products as scheduled. Refer to Section 16010 for substitutions and product
options.
2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Advance
2. Magnetek
3. Motorola
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.
C. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electromagnetic ballast, suitable for
lamps specified.
D. Voltage: 120 Volts.
E. Source Quality Control: Certify fluourescent ballast design and construction by
Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc.
16510-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNiVERSrrY
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.5 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS
A. Furnish Products as scheduled. Refer to Section 16010 for substitutions and product
options.
2.6 FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
General Electric
2.
Advance
3.
Universal
4.
Jefferson
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.
C. Ballast: Selected by dimming system manufacturer as suitable for operation with control
unit.
D. Lamps: Suitable for lamp type and quantity specified for luminaire.
2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Bodine
2. Siltron
3. Radiant Illumination
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.
C. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast
compartment of fluorescent luminaire.
D. Lamp Ratings: One (1) F40CW lamp providing 600 lumens, minimum.
E. Battery: Sealed lead calcium type, rated for 10-year life.
F. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible
from the outside of an assembled luminaire.
2.8 LAMPS
A. Acceptable Lamp Manufacturers:
1. General Electric
2. Osram
3. Phillips
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.
16510-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16510 -INTERIOR LUMINAIRES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. Refer to Section 16010 for substitutions and
product options.
D. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: ANSI C78.379.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel
hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
B. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing.
C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building
lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly
from building structure. Fasten surface mounted luminaires to ceiling grid members
using bolts, screws, rivets, or suitable clips.
F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet
regulatory requirements for fire rating.
H. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place.
1. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as
scheduled.
J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
K. Connect luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit outlets as
indicated.
L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable
for temperature conditions within luminaire.
M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
N. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.
O. Bum fluorescent lamps that are controlled with dimmer switches 100 hours at full
intensity before building turnover.
16510-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection
and operation.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed.
B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate luminaire operation for minimum of two (2) hours.
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 16510
16510-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16721- FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual Fire Alarm Stations
B. Automatic Smoke and Heat Detectors
C. Fire Alarm Signaling Appliances
D. Auxiliary Fire Alarm Equipment
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 8: Door Closers, Electric Locks, Electric Releases.
B. Division 8: Sectional Overhead Doors.
C. Division 15 - Standpipe and Fire Hose System.
D. Division 15 - Sprinkler Systems.
E. Division 15 - Ductwork Accessories: Smoke Dampers.
F. Section 16111 - Conduit.
G. Section 16123 — Building Wires and Cables.
H. Section 16130 — Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
I. Section 16160 - Cabinets and Enclosures.
J. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices and Seals.
K. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
B. NFPA 72 - National Fire Code.
16721-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16721- FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
D. City of Fort Collins Building and Fire Codes.
E. LTL 864 and other applicable standards.
F. Complete Fire Protection System; UL listed.
G. Conform to requirements of NFPA applicable sections.
H. The American Disabilities Act (ADA).
I. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72, extend existing fire alarm system in areas of remodel and
addition work as shown on Drawings.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010, Art. 10 of UFC 97, and Authority having
jurisdiction.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide annunciator layout and system wiring diagram showing each
device and wiring connection required.
C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Record actual locations of initiating devices, signaling appliances, and end -of -line
devices.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Operation Data: Operating instructions.
C. Maintenance Data: Maintenance and repair procedures.
16721-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16721- FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three (3) years documented experience, and with service facilities
within 100 miles of Project.
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with
minimum three (3) years documented experience, and certified by State of Colorado as
fire alarm installer.
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, 72, and NFPA 101.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by U.L. as suitable for purpose specified and
indicated.
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide ten (10) manual station break -glass rods.
B. Provide six (6) keys of each type.
C. Provide three (3) of each type of automatic smoke detector.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured,
and regularly utilized in the manufacturer's system.
B. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.
C. All equipment shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
D. All sensors shall be of the intelligent type where possible. All sensors intelligent shall
mount on a common base. This base shall be incompatible with conventional detectors.
E. Where equipment of different manufacturers is used, such equipment shall be included
under the required overall UL system listing as a component of the integrated fire alarm
system.
16721-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16721- FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. The system shall be designed to operate with the unshielded wire, to the maximum
practicable extent. Shielded wire may be used, and fiber optic cable [shall] [may] be
utilized, as required or as indicated by the design documents.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, products of the following
manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Match existing.
2.3 INITIATING DEVICES
A. General:
1. Each device shall be assigned a unique address via easily understood decade (01
to 96) switch. Address selection by jumpers is not acceptable. Devices which
take their address from their position in the circuit are unacceptable because, if
devices are added later, existing addresses, descriptors and commands must be
reprogrammed.
2. Devices shall receive power and communication from the same pair of wires.
For fault -tolerant circuits, any separate power wiring shall also be made fault -
tolerant.
3. Each device shall contain screw terminals with rising plates for positive
termination of up to #14 AWG wire.
B. Manual Station: Surface mounted, coded type, single action manual station with break -
glass rod. Provide manufacturer's standard backbox.
C. Spot Heat Detector: Fixed temperature, rated 135 degrees F, and temperature rate of
rise.
D. Ceiling Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, ionization type, photoelectric type with
adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, auxiliary relay contact, integral thermal element rated
135 degrees F, and visual indication of detector actuation, suitable for mounting on 4
inch outlet box. Provide two -wire detector with common power supply and signal
circuits.
2.4 SIGNALING APPLIANCES
A. Visible Appliance: NFPA 72, strobe lamp and flasher with Red lettered "FIRE" on
White lens.
B. Audio Appliance:
Horn: NFPA 72, surface type fire alarm horn. Sound Rating: 87 Db at 10-feet.
Provide integral strobe lamp and flasher with Red lettered "FIRE" on White lens.
16721-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16721- FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. Speaker: NFPA 72
a. Speakers shall be suitable for voice communications and tone signals
with frequency response flat within 3 dB from 400 to 4000 Hz. Speakers
shall be provided with not less than 8 transformer taps providing for
power outputs ranging from 1/8 to 10 watts. Mountings shall be surface
or ceiling -recessed (as indicated on the drawings) on standard electrical
boxes.
b. Strobe lights shall be provided with white or clear Lexan lenses with the
word "FIRE" engraved in red letters. Strobe lights shall provide a
luminous intensity of 100 candela, minimum.
C. Fire Alarm Remote Lights: Shall be red LED type, mounted on a plate fitted to a
standard electrical box. Plates shall be labeled with the name of the equipment served.
2.5 AUXILIARY DEVICES
A. Monitor Modules:
The Monitor Mudule shall provide an addressable input for N.O. or N.C. contact
devices such as manual stations, water flow switches, sprinkler supervisory
devices, door contacts, intrusion detectors, etc.
2. The Monitor Module shall provide a supervised initiating circuit. An open -
circuit fault shall be annunciated at the FAMP, FARP, PCFC, and applicable
GAP. Upon determination of an alarm condition, the LED shall be latched on.
3. The Module shall contain a LED which blinks upon being scanned by the FAMP
or FARP. Upon determination of an alarm condition, the LED shall be latched
on.
4. The Module shall mount in a standard electrical box.
B. Controls Modules:
1. The Control Module shall provide an addressable output for a separately -
powered alarm -indicating circuit or for a control relay.
2. The Control Module shall provide a supervised indicating circuit where
indicated on the drawings. An open -circuit fault shall be annunciated at the
FAMP, FARP, PCFC, and applicable GAP.
3. The Control Module shall provide a control relay where indicated on the plans.
The relay contacts shall be SPST (Form "C" rated at 2 amps at 28 VDC).
4. The module shall contain a LED which blinks upon being scanned by the FAMP
or FARP. Upon activation of the Module, the LED shall be latched on.
5. The module shall mount in a standard electrical box.
16721-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and
condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons,
solid or split hinged.
C. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
2.4 LOW PRESSURE PIPELINE STRAINERS
A. General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping
system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel
screens, with 3/64-inch perforations at 233 per square inch.
B. Threaded Ends, 2-Inch and Smaller: Cast iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered
blowdown fitted with pipe plug.
C. Threaded Ends, 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Cast iron body, bolted screen retainer with off -center
blowdown fitted with pipe plug.
D. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Cast iron body, bolted screen retainer with off -center
blowdown fitted with pipe plug.
E. Butt Welded Ends, 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Schedule 40 cast carbon steel body, bolted screen
retainer with off -center blowdown fitted with pipe plug.
F. Grooved Ends, 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Tee pattern, ductile -iron or malleable -iron body and
access end cap, access coupling with EDPM gasket.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service
indicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance),
prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.
B. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions on open systems where indicated on the
Drawings. Not to be used in Closed Heating Systems.
C. Dielectric Waterway Fittings:
1. ASTM-A53 Xinc electroplated steel pipe casing with inert, non -corrosive
thermoplastic lining (NSF/FDA listed).
2. Thread x thread ends 1/2-inch x 3-inch through 4-inch x 6-inch.
3. Groove x thread ends 1/2-inch x 4-inch through 4-inch x 6-inch.
4. Listed by IAPMO/UPC and SBCC PST and ESI.
5. Dielectric unions are not an acceptable substitute for dielectric waterway fittings.
D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits:
1. Field -assembled, companion flange assembly, full face or ring type.
2. Neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
3. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts.
15120 - 5
TECW41CAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16721- FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Fault Isolator Module:
1. The Fault Isolator Module shall detect and isolate a short-circuited segment of a
fire alarm loop.
2. The module shall automatically determine a return -to -normal condition of the
loop and restore the isolated equipment.
3. Modules shall be placed on every floor to limit the number lost in the event of a
short-circuit.
2.6 OTHER DEVICES
A. Tamper Switches: Installed under another Section.
B. Flow Switches: Installed under another Section.
C. Provide addressable control and/or monitor module for each device indicated in
paragraphs A, B., C., D and E above. Include wiring to the device and to the fire alarm
loop as required.
D. Provide control relays as required to accomplish functions such as fan shutdown, damper
positioning, door release, etc. Relays shall have 24 VDC coils, with DPDT contacts
rated at 10A, minimum, at 120 VAC, shall be provided with screw terminals, and shall
be UL listed as fire alarm control accessories. Relay enclosures shall provide conduit
knockouts at top and bottom, and shall have manufacturer's standard finish. Control
relays shall be installed near the associated fire alarm system control modules.
2.7 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16123.
B. Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Building wire as specified in
Section 16123.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install manual station with operating handle 4-feet 6-inches above floor. Install audible
and visual signal devices 7-feet 6-inches above floor.
C. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit
conductors. Install wiring in conduit.
D. Mount end -of -line device box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in
16721-6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 16721- FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
circuit.
E. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force.
F. Make conduit and wiring connections to sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper
switches, and fire suppression system control panels.
G. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Prepare and start systems.
B. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final
connections, and system testing.
3.4 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE
A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as follows, or using
colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box.
B. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white.
C. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red.
D. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown.
E. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative).
F. Door Release: Gray, gray.
G. Municipal Trip Circuit: Orange, orange.
H. Municipal Fire Alarm Loop: Black, white.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each.
END OF SECTION 16721
16721-7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16741 - TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16741 - TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Equipment and Terminal Backboards.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division I - general requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 9 - Painting: Field painting of backboards and cabinets.
B. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices and Seals: Supports for conduit, backboards, and
cabinets.
C. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Nameplates for termination cabinets.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Accurately record location of service entrance conduit and termination backboards and
cabinets.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS
A. Material: Plywood.
B. Size: 4 x 8-Feet, 3/4-inch thick, fire -rated type. Quantity as shown on the drawings.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
16741-1
M
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16741- TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Finish -paint termination backboards with durable white enamel under the provisions of
Division 9 prior to installation of telephone equipment.
B. Support raceways, backboards, and cabinets under the provisions of Section 16190.
C. Mount standard telephone outlets (long axis vertically) 18-inches above finished floor.
D. Mount public wall telephone outlet in casework as indicated on drawings.
E. Mount paging telephone outlet as indicated on drawings.
F. Install termination backboards and cabinets plumb, and attach securely at each corner. Install
cabinet trim plumb.
G. Install recessed cabinets flush with wall finishes, and stub five (5) empty one -inch conduits to
accessible location above ceiling at each location.
H. Install polyethylene pulling string in each empty telephone conduit containing a bend or over
10-feet in length.
I. Mark all backboards and cabinets with the legend "TELEPHONE" under the provisions of
Section 16195.
J. All telephone wires shall be in raceways or cable trays.
END OF SECTION 16741
16741-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16995 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 16995 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - General
1.1 COMMISSIONING METHODS
A. Jobsite Inspections
B. Prefunctional and Functional Check Lists
C. Functional Testing
D. Trending and Data Logging
1.2 COMMISSIONING ISSUES FOR LIGHTING CONTROL APPLICATIONS
A. Daylighting with Dimming
B. Sweep Function
C. Occupancy Sensors
D. General Indoor Light Levels
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Commissioning Team
The members of the commissioning team consist of the Commissioning Agent
(CA), the Owner's Representative (PM), the General Contractor (GC or
Contractor), the architect and design engineers (A/E), the Electrical Contractor
(EC), the Controls Contractor (CC), the owner's maintenance staff, and any other
installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment.
2. The Commissioning Agent (Architectural Energy Corporation of Boulder,
Colorado) is already under contract with the owner. The General Contractor that
is awarded the project shall not include the cost of the Commissioning Authority
in their price. The General Contractor (and their sub -contractors) shall include
cost for their involvement in the commissioning process including demonstration
of installed equipment to the commissioning team members during the
acceptance portion of the project, and other responsibilities as described in the
specification.
1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The responsibilities of various parties in the commissioning process are provided in this
section. It is noted that the services for the Project Manager, Design Team, and
Commissioning Agent are not provided for in this contract. That is, the Contractor is not
responsible for providing their services. Their responsibilities are listed here to clarify
the commissioning process.
16995 - 1
'I EURN1CAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16"5 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
B. All Parties
Attend commissioning scoping meeting and additional meetings, as necessary.
C. Architect (A/E)
Construction and Acceptance Phase
a. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and selected commissioning
team meetings.
b. Perform normal submittal review, construction observation, as -built
drawing preparation, O&M manual preparation, etc., as contracted.
C. Provide design narrative documentation requested by the CA.
d. Coordinate resolution of system deficiencies identified during
commissioning, according to the contract documents.
e. Prepare and submit final as -built design intent documentation for
inclusion in the O&M manuals. Review and approve the O&M manuals.
2. Warranty Period
a. Coordinate resolution of design non-conformance and design
deficiencies identified during warranty period commissioning.
D. Electrical Designer/Engineer (A/E)
1. Construction and Acceptance Phase
a. Perform normal submittal review, construction observation, as -built
drawing preparation, etc., as contracted.
b. Provide design narrative and sequences documentation requested by the
CA.
C. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and other selected
commissioning team meetings.
d. Participate in the resolution of system deficiencies identified during
commissioning, according to the contract documents.
e. Prepare and submit the final as -built design intent and operating
parameters documentation for inclusion in the O&M manuals. Review
and approve the O&M manuals.
f. Optional: Review the equipment start-up and pre -functional checklists.
Review the functional performance test plans. Witness performance
testing
16"5 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Crff OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNivERsrrY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16995 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. Warranty Period
a. Participate in the resolution of non-compliance, non-conformance and
design deficiencies identified during warranty period commissioning.
E. Commissioning Agent (CA)
The CA is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with
codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating, or construction
management. The CA may assist with problem -solving non-conformance or
deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the general contractor
and the A/E team. The primary role of the CA is to develop and coordinate the
execution of a testing plan, observe and document performance --that systems
are functioning in accordance with the documented design intent and the
Contract Documents.
2. Construction and Acceptance Phase
a. Coordinates and directs all commissioning activities in a logical and
efficient manner. Work with the GC and PM to ensure that
commissioning activities are being scheduled.
b. Revise, as necessary, the Commissioning Plan.
C. Plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting.
d. Request and review additional information required to perform
commissioning tasks, including O&M materials, contractor start-up and
checkout procedures, and sequences of operation.
e. Review Contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned
for compliance with commissioning needs, concurrent with the A/E
reviews.
f. Develop start-up and checkout plan with Subs. Write and distribute pre -
functional checklists.
g. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system
installations. Attend selected planning and job -site meetings to obtain
information on construction progress.
h. Review completed pre -functional checklist and start-up reports for owner
approval.
i. Coordinate any start-up requirements with TAB contractor.
j. Write the functional performance test procedures for equipment and
systems. Submit to PM and A/E for review.
16995 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16"5 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
k. Coordinate, witness, and document functional performance tests
performed by installing contractors. Coordinate retesting as necessary
until satisfactory performance is achieved.
Maintain a master deficiency and resolution record. Provide the PM with
written progress reports and test results with recommended actions.
in. Review the training of the Owner's operating personnel.
n. Review the preparation of the O&M manuals.
o. Provide a final commissioning report.
Warranty Period
a. Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred testing and
deficiency corrections.
b. Assist in the development of a preventative maintenance plan and review
as -built documentation.
F. Owner's Project Manager (PM)
Construction and Acceptance Phase
a. Manage the contract of the A/E, GC, and of the CA.
b. Arrange for facility operating and maintenance personnel to attend
various field commissioning activities and field training sessions
according to the Commissioning Plan.
C. Provide final approval for the completion of the commissioning work.
Warranty Period
a. Ensure that any seasonal or deferred testing and any deficiency issues are
addressed.
G. General Contractor (GC)
1. Construction and Acceptance Phase
a. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CA.
b. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders
and approved submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned
equipment to the CA.
C. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for
submittal data, O&M data, commissioning tasks and training.
d. Ensure that all Subs execute their commissioning responsibilities
according to the Contract Documents and schedule.
16"5 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT. CENTER
SECTION 16"5 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
e. A representative shall attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other
necessary meetings scheduled by the CA to facilitate the commissioning
process.
f. Coordinate the training of owner personnel.
g. Prepare O&M manuals, according to the Contract Documents, including
clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as -built
conditions.
2. Warranty Period
a. Ensure that Subs execute required seasonal or deferred functional
performance testing.
b. Ensure that Subs correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to
O&M manuals and as -built drawings for issues identified in seasonal
testing.
H. Electrical Contractor (EC)
The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the electrical contractor are as
follows:
Construction and Acceptance Phases
a. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings
scheduled by the CA to facilitate the commissioning process.
b. Contractors shall provide normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals
to the CA of commissioned equipment.
C. Provide additional requested documentation to the CA for development
of start-up and functional testing procedures.
d. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the
operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the
specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not
sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.
e. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer's
start-up procedures and the pre -functional checklists from the CA.
Submit manufacturer's detailed start-up procedures and the full start-up
plan and procedures to CA for review.
During the startup and initial checkout process, execute and document
the electrical -related portions of the pre -functional checklists provided by
the CA for all commissioned equipment. Perform and clearly document
all completed startup and system operational checkout procedures,
providing a copy to the CA.
g. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing.
16"5 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16"5 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
h. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CA for
specified equipment in Section 0 18 10.
Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed
performance) as interpreted by the CA, PM and A/E and retest the
equipment.
Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including
clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as -built
conditions.
k. Provide training of the Owner's operating personnel as specified.
Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific
requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty.
Warranty Period
a. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed
by the CA, according to the specifications.
b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals
and as -built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal
testing.
I. Equipment Suppliers
Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and
specific responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force.
2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with Subs.
Provide information requested by CA regarding equipment sequence of operation
and testing procedures.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. All work required to deliver a Lighting Control System that operates as specified in the
Contract Documents shall be performed by the Contractor. All sampling and verification
noted in Part 2 of this Section shall be performed by the Commissioning Agent, with the
Contractor present.
2.2 COMMISSIONING METHODS
A. Daylighting issues targeted during a commissioning effort fall into two general
categories. Those items that can be addressed with prefunctional or functional check lists
and items that must be verified with functional testing or trending/logging. Both
commissioning methods must be used to ensure a successful commissioning process.
16"5 - 6
i
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
4. Rated at 175 psi conforming to ANSI B16.42 (iron) B16.24 (bronze).
5. Factory certified to withstand minimum of 600 volts on a dry line without flashover.
6. Meets federal specifications for tensile strength and thread end connections.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. General: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped
to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure
plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight
seal and electrical insulation.
2.7 FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALS
A. General: Provide UL listed products for sealing all openings through fire or fire/smoke rated
walls, floors, or ceilings used as passage for mechanical piping.
2.8 FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion -resistant sheet metal with watertight
joints, and with edges turned up 2-1/2 inch, and with double sloped to drain bottom.
Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over 1/4-inch steel rod. Provide
hole, gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1-inch drain line connection.
B. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one (1) of the following:
1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock
joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following
gauges: 3-inch and smaller, 20 gauge; 4-inch to 6-inch, 16 gauge; over 6-inch,
14 gauge.
2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove buns.
3. Iron Pipe: Fabricate from cast iron or ductile iron pipe; remove burrs.
C. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in
exterior walls, of one (1) of the following:
Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Installed between sleeve and pipe.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls,
partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building.
Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush
with adjoining surface.
B. Strainers: Install strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutoff full port ball valve with 3/4-inch hose end and
brass cap with hose "washer" and chain in strainer blowdown connection. Where indicated,
provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blowdown connection.
15120 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DMSION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16"5 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Checklists are to be developed by the Commissioning Agent and completed by the
contractor. Completed installation and checklists ensure the lighting system, control
system, and building furnishings are ready for functional testing and/or trending.
C. Functional testing shall occur with the installing contractor present so that issues that
arise during testing can be quickly resolved. Trending with the lighting control system or
installation of data loggers could often be used as a substitute for functional testing but
may not be as cost effective as testing.
D. Cost of Retesting
1. The cost for the Sub to retest a pre -functional or functional test, if they are
responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any
cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.
The time for the CA and PM to direct any retesting required because a specific
pre -functional checklist or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully
completed but determined during functional testing to be faulty, will be
backcharged to the GC. The GC may choose to recover costs from the party
responsible for executing the faulty pre -functional test.
2.3 COMMISSIONING ISSUES FOR DAYLIGITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Daylighting Function
Verify all space furnishings and interior finishes as being installed before
functional testing or logging begins
Light levels
a. Light levels in the space shall meet requirements of the specification
throughout the functional area of the space.
b. Light levels at 30 in. above finished floor (the work level) shall meet
requirements as specified. If no requirements are specified, use 50 foot-
candles as the suggested requirement.
C. Light levels on all vertical work surfaces shall meet requirements as
specified. If no requirements are specified, use 15 foot-candles as the
suggested requirement.
d. Functional area of the space will exclude a 3 foot border around the
perimeter of the room.
e. Light levels will be measured in a 5 foot grid pattern to determine
compliance with these requirements.
f. Sampling strategy
1) For rooms with identical exposures, shapes, furnishings, sources
of natural and electrical lighting and daylighting controls, light
levels will be evaluated in one room randomly selected.
16"5 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DMSION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16"5 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Variation in light level intensity
a. Variations in light level intensity throughout the space shall conform to
average to minimum ratio of 4:1 or less.
b. Variation in light level intensity throughout the space shall conform to
maximum to minimum ratio of 8:1 or less.
C. Light levels will be measured in a 5 foot grid pattern to determine
compliance with these requirements.
d. Sampling strategy
1) For rooms with identical exposures, shapes, furnishings, sources
of natural and electrical lighting and daylighting controls, light
levels will be evaluated in one room randomly selected.
4. Dimming function
a. Verify all new lamps were burned in by operating at full power for a
minimum of 100 hours.
b. Closed loop system — photocell measures combination of electric and
natural lighting. Verify the following for 100% of the photocells;
1) Verify the photocell is of the closed loop type.
2) Verify photocell mounting location in the space and orientation
is such that it measures light level typical of the space work level
away from the point of natural light entry into the space.
3) Confirm spacer layout and material reflective properties have
been finalized and remain the same after adjustment of the
photocell.
C. Open loop system — photocell measures natural light level entering
space. Verify the following for 1001/6 of the photocells;
1) Verify photocell is of the open loop type.
2) Verify photocell mounting location and orientation is such that it
measures natural light level entering space.
d. Verify all types of dimming light fixtures match specifications with
regard to dimming ability
e. Verify all dimming light fixtures match specifications with regard to
mounting locations.
f. Simulate reduced natural light levels or perform test at dawn to verify
dimming fixtures are functioning. Measure amperage draw change
16"5-8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DMSION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16995 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
during dimming process to confirm functionality of at least one fixture
per zone.
g. Verify or adjust daytime light level setpoint to comply with item 3.A.2
above. For zones with similar geometry and natural light entry paths,
replicate the calibrated setpoints in the similar zones.
h. Verify or adjust rate of change function to be not noticeable.
i. Verify 100% of dimming override location(s) to be as specified.
j. Verify dimming override feature(s) to be functional.
k. Verify dimming does not cause lower than specified light levels in
adjacent "non -dimmed" spaces.
1. Verify manual dimming upper and lower limit range is set as specified.
in. Verify programmed length of override function meets specifications
n. Simulate a power failure to confirm power -up restart functions are
operating as specified.
o. Sampling strategy should be applied to all daylighting functions unless
noted otherwise.
p. Of the total controlled room lighting circuits, 10% should be tested to
confirm functions as listed. If 10% of the first group fails the test, select
another 10% of the total room lighting circuits. If 10% of these rooms
fail, test all remaining rooms.
B. Lighting Sweep Controls
1. Either simulate sweep function by manual program initiation or by witnessing
sweep function at the programmed times of occurrence. If the sweep function is
simulated, verify programmed time of occurrence meets specifications by
visually viewing programming screens.
2. Verify programmed time of sweep functions meets specifications for weekdays,
weekends and all holidays.
3. Verify front-end PC and all controllers with independent time clocks are set for
the correct identical time and date.
4. Verify front-end PC security and access codes are in place.
5. If sweep function is implemented for 10 or more independently controlled room
lighting circuits with identical control hardware and software, utilize a sampling
strategy to implement functional testing.
6. Verify sweep function is operational for 50% of the room lighting circuits or a
minimum of 2 circuits per controller or controlled relay.
16995 - 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16995 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Verify override function is operational by turning lights back on after a sweep
with a minimum of 25% of the local override switches or 4 switches, whichever
is greater.
8. Verify 100% of the local override switches are installed and located as specified.
9. Verify telephone and remote keypad override functions operate as specified.
10. For the conditions, specified sequences and modes tested, the sweep controls,
integral components and related equipment respond to changing conditions and
parameters appropriately as expected, as specified and according to acceptable
operating practice.
11. Sampling strategy should be applied to all sweep functions unless noted
otherwise.
a. Of the total controlled room lighting circuits, 10% should be tested to
confirm sweep functions as listed. If 10% of the first group fails the test,
select another 10% of the total room lighting circuits. If 10% of these
rooms fail, test all remaining rooms.
12. Simulate a power failure of the lighting system to confirm power -up restart
functions are operating as specified.
C. Occupancy Sensor controls
Verify 100% of occupancy sensors cover the entire space at its mounting location
and adjusted angle. In addition, confirm the following for each type of occupancy
sensor.
a. Passive infra -red sensor
1) Verify lens is adjusted for the space geometry and size of space
2) Verify sensitivity is adjusted for coverage of entire space.
b. Ultrasonic sensor
1) Verify sensitivity is adjusted for coverage of entire space.
2. Verify sensitivity adjustment for both types of sensors does not trigger nuisance
trips from air diffusers close to the sensor.
Verify sensitivity adjustment eliminates trips from movement in an adjacent
space
After room lighting circuit is triggered on from an occupancy sensor, confirm
programmed delay off time is functional. Temporarily reprogram the delay off
time to expedite testing. If reprogrammed, verify final programmed delay off
time matches specifications.
16995 -10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 16"5 - LIGHTING CONTROL COMMISSIONING COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
5. Verify all types of sensors installed have an additional contact for use by the
HVAC control system if so specified.
6. Simulate a power failure of the lighting system to confirm power -up restart
functions are operating as specified.
Sampling strategy applied to all occupancy sensor issues unless noted otherwise.
a. Of the total controlled room lighting circuits, 10% should be tested to
confirm occupancy sensor controls. If 10% of the first group fails the
test, select another 10% of the total room lighting circuits. If 10% of
these rooms fail, test all remaining rooms.
D. General indoor light levels
1. Average light levels in the space at the work elevation shall not be less than 10%
below nor greater than 30% above the specified light level range for the space.
2. Light fixtures with dimming capability will be adjusted to maintain light levels in
compliance of 3.A.4 above during the nighttime.
3. Sampling strategy applied to all general indoor light level issues
a. Of the total controlled room lighting circuits, 10% should be tested to
confirm proper light levels. If 10% of the first group fails the test, select
another 10% of the total room lighting circuits. If 10% of these rooms
fail, test all remaining rooms.
4. Refer to sample lighting checklist below.
16"5 - 11
�
n
Lighting Space Sunrmary
Facility+tirsme: Sample Project
Spired Served
Drawhg M Grcui # Diesign f Aetral fc Area
space NmesCn
Watts LAD
Fiume Type
ti Futures Controls
1Yedffesdaty, April 24 2AP5
PF FPT Notes
M CA " M
o p
a
�$
r
�
BASEMENT LEVEL NORTH %TNG
trot
rein
Z
COMM N00I
ON
&10 £LN-1 20
62
0.00
F (EMERG)
I
Emergency, Wall Switch {otdeflf
®
®
y y
pro
H
CORR M004
G
E-3.0 LLNt-2 15
434
0.00
L
7
E-3.0 LLNI.2 15
434
Q00
Al
2
®
®
o
CORR N004 (E)
n
E-10 ELN-1 15
270
0.00
LiEMERGi
5
Emergency
rm
ELEC N002
E-3.0 ELN-1 20
62
Q00
F (EMER)
I
Emergency, Walt Switch {ankh
®
®
G
ELEV EQUIP N003
E-3.0 ELN-1 20
62
0.00
F(EMERG)
I
Emergency, Wall Switch (on/off)
ELEVATOR El, I
E-10 ERN-2 20
100
0.00
U MERGI
ik
t
Ema gpag, tYalt Switch {onloff}
FUTURE OFFICE N005
6eu 4"
sections of the C52E fixtures in this
space arc connected to ELN-I
E-3:6 LLN1- 28
0576
0.00
C52
6
O
13,5
y
E-3:6 LLNI- 28
0T6
Q00
C52E
3
®
®
A
r
1CN0I0
E-16 LLNI-6 20
0
0,00
F
1
Wall Switch{anlotf}
n
MECHANICAL N007
AIL 5
C
E-3 6 LLN1.6 20
186
0.00
F
3
Wall Switch (onlofff
®
®
h
MECHANICALN007{E)
Alt. 5
E-16 ELN-I 20
62
Q00
REMERG)
I
Emergency
®
®
O
MEN NOI2
y y
E-3A LLNI-4 23
0
0,00
Al
I
E-10 LLNI-4 25
0
0.00
D
I
MEN N012 (E)
d
Architeetnrsl E"tr qs CoMaration
PnRe 1 of 27
6gftwma +
CS Dambme ?, 2003 Arrhiteet+anl Energy Corpa anion
K
APPENDIX A
No Text
i • ' ► 1 Nal..l�
Environmental Scientists and Engineers, LLC
an ecology and environment company
April 22, 2005
Mr. Steve White
Project Manager
City of Fort Collins
Operations Services Department
117 North Mason Street
P.O. Box 580
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522-0580
Subject: Renovation/Demolition Specific Building Inspection Report
Transit Center Phase II Project
Colorado State University
Lory Student Center
1101 Center Avenue Mall, Fort Coffins, Colorado
WALSHProject No. 5370-010
INTRODUCTION
Walsh Environmental Scientists and Engineers, LLC (WALSH) was contracted to perform a
renovation/demolition specific building inspection for the Transit Center Phase II project at
Colorado State University, Lory Student Center located at 1101 Center Avenue Mall in Fort
Collins, Colorado. The inspection was conducted in anticipation of a planned
renovation/addition to the structure and focused only on the materials that would likely be
disturbed during the renovation/addition. The field work was conducted between April 1 and
April 8, 2005. The scope of work of the inspection consisted of a visual assessment and
collecting bulk samples of suspected asbestos -containing building materials (ACBMs),
performing screening for lead based paint (LBP) with a portable spectrum X-ray fluorescence
(SXRF) analyzer, sampling of the anticipated demolition debris for lead, and preparing an
inventory of hazardous building materials.
ASBESTOS SAMPLING METHODOLOGY
The collection of samples was performed by an Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act
(AHERA) and State of Colorado accredited building inspectors.
A homogeneous area (material) is defined as an area containing a material that appears similar
throughout with regard to color, texture, and date of application. Each homogeneous material is
classified into one of the following three types of materials:
'EH9dE!tEdli:lt#�17i3fFkfa '{i S:as.s r.. a:.;�i :. .;.:,
Fort Collins Office: 2629 Redwing Road • Suite 280 • Fort Collins, Colorado • 80526-2879 • Phone (970) 223-5655 • FAX (970) 223-8577
Corporate Office: 4888 Pearl East Circle • Suite 108 • Boulder, Colorado • 80301-2475 • Phone (303) 443-3282 • FAX (303) 443-0367
Mr. Steve White
City of Fort Collins
April22, 2005
Page 2 of 7
■ Surfacing Material refers to a wide range of trowel- or spray -applied materials typically
used for acoustical or fireproofing purposes. Examples include spray -applied
fireproofing and acoustical textured ceilings.
■ Thermal System Insulation (TSI) refers to insulation that is applied to heating or
mechanical system components. Examples include pipe, tank and boiler insulation.
■ Miscellaneous Materials refers to all other materials that do not fall into one of the
above categories. Examples include floor tiles, adhesives, and ceiling tiles.
Once the type of homogeneous material was determined it was then classified as friable or non -
friable. The United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) distinguishes between
friable and non -friable forms of ACBMs. Friable materials can be crumbled or reduced to
powder by hand pressure, whereas non -friable materials cannot. Friable materials are more
likely to be released into the air, especially during renovation and demolition activities.
Therefore, the distinction between friable and non -friable homogeneous material is important.
The Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) and USEPA have
identified two categories of non -friable ACBM. CDPHE and USEPA define Category I non -
friable ACBM as packings, gaskets, resilient floor covering, and asphalt roofing products
containing more than 1% asbestos that cannot be crumbled or reduced to powder by hand
pressure. Whereas Category II non -friable ACBM are any material, excluding Category I
materials, containing more than 1% asbestos that cannot be crumbled or reduced to powder by
hand pressure. CDPHE and USEPA National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
(NESHAP) regulations require removal of all friable ACBM and all non -friable ACBM that
would become friable during demolition/renovation activities. Many non -friable ACBMs may
remain in place during demolition/renovation provided demolition/renovation methods do not
render the material friable.
The following Bulk Sampling Strategy satisfies CDPHE requirements for sampling for suspect
ACBMs, and was used to determine the number of samples to be collected.
Table 1. Bulk Sampling Strategy
Material
Homogeneous
Units
Minimum Number
Area
of Samples
Friable Surfacing
less than 1,000
SF
3
1,000 to 5,000
SF
5
more than 5,000
SF
7
Non -friable Surfacing
- - -
---
Inspectors Discretion
Friable and Non -friable Thermal
- - -
---
3 *
System Insulation
Friable and Non -friable
- - -
---
Inspectors Discretion
Miscellaneous Materials
* One sample is typically collected for limited quantity replacement or patch (salient) materials.
AM
.W"
Environmental Scientists and Engineers, LLC
an ecology and environment company
4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Provide strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as
indicated.
a. Pumps
b. Control Valves
C. Pressure Reducing Valves
d. Temperature or Pressure Regulating Valves
e. Solenoid Valves
C. Dielectric Unions: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping.
Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Not to be used in Closed Heating
Systems.
D. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure
plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until
links have expanded to form watertight seal.
E. Fire or Fire/Smoke Barrier Penetration Seals: Where pipe penetration occurs in fire or
fire/smoke rated walls, provide the following:
1. Fill the entire length of the opening with sealing compound. Adhere to
manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4-Inch Diameter: Use putty or caulking, one-piece
intumescent elastomer, non -corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable
jackets, and capable of expanding ten (10) times when exposed to flame or heat, UL-
listed.
3. Openings 4-Inch or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing three (3) hour
fire test in accordance with ASTM E-814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions,
and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350
degree F (121 to 177 degree C), UL-listed.
F. Where pipe penetrations occur in non -fire rated floors, roof slabs, or walls, the space between
pipe insert and the sleeve shall be packed on each end with mineral wool or other non-
combustible material, positively fastened in place.
G. Provide dielectric waterways or insulating flanges, as required by pipe size, on all connections
of dissimilar metals.
3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Manual Air Vent: Provide manual air vents at all high points and drops in the direction of
flow, of all mains and risers of the hydronic systems, at heat transfer coils, radiation and
elsewhere shown and as required for system air venting.
1. Provide enlarged air collection standpipe where large air quantities can accumulate.
2. Provide a 1/2-inch ball valve, reducer and pipe nipple installed between hydronic
system pipe and manual air vent.
3. Provide 1/4-inch discharge pipe from manual air vent discharge connection to nearest
floor drain or as indicated.
15120 - 7
Mr. Steve White
City of Fort Collins
April22, 2005
Page 3 of 7
WALSH collected bulk samples of suspect materials in a random and representative manner, as
determined by the inspector. Samples were collected by obtaining a sample that included all
layers within the suspect material. Each sample was collected using hand tools such as a razor
knife, screwdriver or pliers, and immediately placed within a sealed sampling container and
labeled with a unique identification number. Each suspect material was identified and
catalogued on field sampling worksheets, the primary working document. Upon completion of
collection of samples, the numerical identification information was transcribed to a chain -of -
custody document to accompany samples during transport to the laboratory.
The bulk samples were submitted for analyses to Reservoirs Environmental, Inc. a National
Voluntary Lab Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited laboratory. Analysis of the bulk
samples was performed using Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) using procedures developed by
McCrone Research Institute and in compliance with the guidelines established by the USEPA
(EPA-600/M4-82-020, Dec. 1982) to determine asbestos type and content. The PLM analytical
results are reported as percent asbestos by weight. Percent asbestos for separate layers and total
for the sample are delineated in the laboratory report. Unused portions of samples are archived
for six months unless the client requests special handling.
ASBESTOS FINDINGS
WALSH performed the inspection and sampling between April 1 and April 8, 2005. One
hundred fifteen (115) samples were collected from sixty (60) suspect materials identified in the
effected areas for the Transit Center Phase II project. In addition, one (1) material was not
sampled but assumed to contain asbestos, as current occupancy and ongoing activities prohibited
sampling. Samples were submitted to the accredited laboratory for PLM analysis. Eight (8) of
the samples analyzed by PLM methods required further analysis utilizing the confirmatory point
count analytical technique. The USEPA and United States Department of Labor -Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) define ACBM as material containing more than 1%
asbestos or a material that is assumed to contain asbestos. Eighteen (18) samples from ten (10)
materials were found to contain greater than 1% asbestos. The following table summarizes
information regarding the confirmed and assumed ACBM found as a result of the building
inspection:
Environmental Scientists and Engineers, LLC
an ecology and environment company
Mr. Steve White
City of Fort Collins
April22, 2005
Page 4 of 7
Table 2. Confirmed and Assumed ACBM
Transit Center Phase II Project
Colorado State University, Lory Student Center, Fort Collins, Colorado
Material ID-
Material Location
Material
Friability
Percentage
Approximate
Description
Type
and Type
Quantity
of Asbestos
CA05-Black carpet
47, 47A, 47B, 47C,
Miscellaneous
Non -friable
8%
3,089 SF
adhesive, remnant
47D, 47E, 47F,
II
Chrysotile
under new
47G, 47H, 48, 48A,
adhesive
4813, 49, N95, N96
CKO1-Gray
178, 178B, 178C
Miscellaneous
Non -friable
7%
50 LF
caulking, around
II
Chrysotile
interior windows
and doors
CK02-Gray/green
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable
5-8%
256 LF
caulking, attaching
II
Chrysotile
"wine rack" pieces
to metal frame
MA01-Wood
227
Miscellaneous
Unknown
Assumed
180 SF
paneling adhesive
(Assumed
Non -friable
II)
PF01-Mudded pipe
47, 47C, 47D, 47E,
TSI
Friable
6-8%
235 EA
fitting insulation
47F, 47H, 48, 48A,
Chrysotile
48C, 49, N91, N90,
1% Amosite
N92, N94, N96,
138A, 178, 180
RSL02-Black tar
Exterior roof of 48,
Miscellaneous
Non -friable
12%
56 SF
sealant, outer edge
48A, 48B, 48C
I
Chrysotile
of roof
RTOl-Black
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable
15%
10 SF
roofing tar at
I
Chrysotile
"wine rack"
bottom mount
RTFO1-Black tar
Exterior roof of 48,
Miscellaneous
Non -friable
1.75%
1,408 SF
and felt on roof
48A, 48B, 48C
I
Chrysotile
SOAOI-Tan
201, 227, 228
Surfacing
Friable
5%
560 SF
granular acoustical
Chrysotile
ceiling texture
W atsil
mot:
Environmental Scientists and Engineers, LLC
an ecology and environment company
Mr. Steve White
City of Fort Collins
April22, 2005
Page 5 of 7
Material ID-
Description
Material Location
Material
Type
Friability
Percentage
and Type
of Asbestos
Approximate
Quantity
WCOI-Gray
All exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable
4-6%
295 LF
window caulking
windows
II
Chrysotile
around exterior
windows
WG01-White
All exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable
0.25%-
648 LF
window glazing on
windows
II
1.25%
exterior windows
Chrysotile
EA= Each, LF= Linear Feet, SF= Square Feet,
In addition, the inspection of the building revealed the presence of three (3) materials which
contained a trace (less than 1%) amount of asbestos. The following table summarizes
information regarding the building materials found to contain a trace amount of asbestos as result
of the building inspection:
Table 3. Building Materials Containing a Trace Amount of Asbestos
Transit Center Phase II Project
Colorado State University, Lory Student Center, Fort Collins, Colorado
Material
Material Location
Percentage and Type of Asbestos
Description
BBA01-Medium
200
Less than 0.25 % Anthophyllite
brown baseboard
(Point Count)
adhesive
BBA04-Dark tan
180, 227, 228
Less than 0.25 % Tremolite-
baseboard adhesive
Actinolite Point Count
BBA05-Dark brown
100, 178, 178B, 180, 227, 228
Less than 0.25 % Anthophyllite
baseboard adhesive
Point Count
Figures which graphically depict the approximate locations of the confirmed ACBM are included
in Attachment 1. Summary tables and copies of the laboratory results and chain -of -custody
documentation for the bulk asbestos samples are included in Attachment 2.
The USEPA and CDPHE regulations currently require the removal of the two (2) friable asbestos
containing materials (PFO1-Mudded pipe fitting insulation and SOA01-Tan granular acoustical
ceiling texture) and five (5) the non -friable materials (CA05-Black carpet adhesive, CKO1-Gray
caulking, MA01-Wood paneling adhesive, WCO1-Gray window caulking, and WGOl-White
window glazing) that would likely become friable during demolition, prior to initiating
demolition activities. WALSH recommends that a qualified State of Colorado licensed General
Abatement Contractor (GAC) be contracted to perform this abatement in accordance with all
applicable regulations. In addition, it is recommended that a State of Colorado licensed Air
Environmental Scientists and Engineers, LLC
an ecology and environment company
Mr. Steve White
City of Fort Collins
April22, 2005
Page 6 of 7
Monitoring Specialist (AMS) perform daily ambient air monitoring, post -abatement final visual
inspections, and final clearance air monitoring activities.
The USEPA and CDPHE regulations do not require the removal of the materials containing a
trace amount of asbestos (BBA01-Medium brown baseboard adhesive, BBA04-Dark tan
baseboard adhesive, and BBA05-Dark brown baseboard adhesive) or the remainder of the non -
friable materials (CK02-Gray/green caulking, RSL02-Black tar sealant, RTO1-Black roofing tar,
and RTF01-Black tar and felt on roof) prior to initiation of demolition activities. In addition,
these materials can be disposed of with the demolition debris as construction waste. If these
materials are not removed, the demolition contractor/personnel should be made aware of the
presence of the materials prior to beginning demolition activities and comply with all current
OSHA regulations for employee exposure to asbestos as well as proper disposal requirements.
LEAD -BASED PAINT SCREENING METHODOLOGY AND FINDINGS
The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development defines lead -based paint
(LBP) as paint having a lead content of greater than or equal to 1.0 milligrams per square
centimeter (mg/cm2) using SXRF analysis. Tables included in Attachment 3 of this report
provide a summary of the components screened for lead at the site and LBP screening results.
The screening did not identify any LBP painted components. Due to no LBP present in the
demolition/renovation area of the building, it was determined that the collection of a demolition
debris sample for lead waste characterization purposes was not necessary prior to demolition and
disposal. The anticipated demolition debris generated from the structure's demolition would not
require management as a hazardous waste.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INVENTORY METHODOLOGY AND FINDINGS
The hazardous materials assessment included conducting a demolition specific inventory of
regulated or hazardous materials where proper handling, management, and/or disposal are
required by regulation. The inventory process identified presumed common regulated building
materials where proper management is customary prior to renovation/demolition to comply with
applicable regulations and general industry standards.
The inspection of the building identified numerous hazardous materials that likely require proper
management. These items include approximately six (6) exit signs with bulbs and batteries, five
hundred sixty three (563) fluorescent bulbs, two hundred ninety (290) potential polychlorinated
biphenyl (PCB) containing ballasts, twenty two (22) smoke/heat detectors, and two (2)
sodium/mercury vapor bulbs. Tables included in Attachment 4 of this report provide the detailed
locations of the hazardous materials found in the interior and exterior portions of the building.
WALSH recommends that these materials be removed by properly trained personnel and
managed or disposed prior to beginning demolition of the structure.
Environmental Scientists and Engineers, LLC
Kra
an ecology and environment company
Mr. Steve White
City of Fort Collins
April22, 2005
Page 7 of 7
LIMITATIONS
WALSH performed these services in a manner consistent with the level of care and expertise
exercised by members of the asbestos and lead inspection and assessment profession. WALSH
does not imply or guarantee that every potential asbestos -containing material on or in the
building has been identified or sampled. Historically, asbestos has been added as a component to
over three thousand materials and products produced in the United States. The inspection was
intended to identify those accessible materials that were reasonably suspect and that were most
likely to contain asbestos in quantities subject to regulation, based on existing industry and
regulatory standards.
If you have any questions or comments regarding the information presented in this report, please
contact us at (970) 223-5655.
Sincerely,
WALSH ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENTISTS AND ENGINEERS, LLC
Michael P. Castell Troy C. Sanders, P.G.
Environmental Scientist District Manager
CC: Eric March, CSU EHS
Attachments
Environmental Scientists and Engineers, LLC
:•
an ecology and environment company
ATTACHMENT 1
FIGURES
No Text
BBA03-01
LIP05-Ol•
I I
!� M507-C1• ��
51 III
�I
I f • MA03 02
FTC06 02 •�I Ili
WGO1-02
I
PF 1- O1 0 •
i 1,
b
CAOS-0�
I
PF01-02 • 1 ..
L _-_--
n
III
FTC06 01•
--,
77 T7T
MA02-01
- _
III• CDW04-02
I
II
I
MA03-03
IT
9
�4
h R- ,'
1 II WCO 0^ I
IL--_._ _WG01 03 ��
•
LIP05 02 _.L
II I I'
i
I'I
I
I�1
I
WC01-03�
CK01-02 •II
1:1
I_
L:PO. -01 r
•II P60
4
02 b
r- - - -
1' I
PLOa-03' n
SOA02-03R-_; r�SrJA02-001ll
--- SOAd24 IiryI�I
PL03-01
L•LIP07 Z
MM.i •aWi
BnvftomsaoW Scimtieb wd
Pgr OXO -S iLTITilII
JP05-03 •
I
�A05-03,
' II
I 1
�• MSC2-01
1
^COB-0, FTCOI-01 ❑
Lower Level
Asbestos Sample Locations
Dab: 04M DMM BY RW
s 0 r = R*d No. mumo Ch@CWd Bp. MC
- FOM: t Shag i
0
i `al &
En *ownenw Sc 86M end
a
u
;• T501-02
d,
Tso1 -; �-3,1,
CDW01-03
BBA08-01
FrC01-
CK01-02
-01
FrCO
/DW
♦♦i♦♦\ �♦CDW♦0♦♦2 ♦♦-♦♦01♦I;2 ;♦�`I�II�II _U-.p�02-=0=2
M3-01
♦IX�,
r06_0 JP03-01 III
CK01-01 I
�1
1» BBA0-02 I I;I
,1I UP03-030 I ICDW02-03 III
I 11 II I I
♦�� I II II � / \ I I
I
1--Z_ -----
-- ----- I
FTC04-01 �i �1JP04 03 \ /
FrCo1-0261 I \ \ X
,. 11
BBA07-01 B801-01
IPlaza Level I
Asbestos Sample Locations
•---------------------
------- -----------
----
Rt
Tyr94
Dow 0408 Dim. By: RW
Sde: 1' _
e PtgettNIL 5378-010 Chededor. MC
FOM 2 Sheet c
SOA01-02 •
PLO1 -02 • • PL03-02
PL01-01
o' PL02-01
PLO 1-03 L03-01 LIP01-01 4
PL02-03 � • LIPO1-03 10
PL03-03 CT01-PL02-02 LIP01-02
-------------------------- i� • • • WP01-01
—r— r—--r—r—T—--r—r— r--r—r—r—--r—r—T—�--r —r Iij
—--r—n------------------------
—
I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 11 •• BBAO1 —02
-4--+--a-- --+-+-A---+-4--4---+-4--1-+-A--1--4--4-4--�--+I
I I I I I I I 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 11 BBA02-02
I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11
I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 II
_n
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11
-t-Y-1--F-t-t-ti--t-t-t-t-t-t-i--F--t-t-1--1--t-Y-ti--r-t-t-1--r-11
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 II
I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 II
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I t l 1 II
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 It
-r--1--r-T-1-1--r-T--,--r-T-1--r-r-T-1--r-r-7-1--r4-7-"1-4-n
I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 II
I I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I 11 BBA02-01
—L-1—J--� —L— �— �--�--1-1--i--L— �—J--L—L-1—J--L—L— �—'�--� -j --}--1
CTO 1 -0 1 ; T01-03 A02-01
`mayBBA03-01 CAO 01
:15-01
SOA01-014
=�A�Si1
hmuonmeaW SwentM and Enpwm%LLc UACAMM10WO Demo Plan. dwg
3BA03-02
BBA04-02
BBA05-02
CAO 1-02
CA02-02
Upper Level
Asbestos Sample Locations
Dow Duos 01=I er: Rw
I .-- W sa�aolo Ch@Wwd Br• MC
�: sSM&I of
{
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15120 -PIPING SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Dip Tube Fittings: Install dip tube fittings in hydronic systems boiler outlet. Run piping to
compression tank with 1/4-inch per foot (2 percent) upward slope towards tank. Connect
boiler outlet piping.
C. Air Separator: Install inline air separators in hydronic systems pump suction lines. Run
piping to compression tank with 1/4-inch per foot (2 percent) upward slope towards tank.
Install drain valve on units 2-inch and larger.
D. Combination Air Separator/Strainer: Install combination air separator/strainer in hydronic
systems pump suction lines. Run piping to compression tank with 1/4-inch per foot (2
percent) upward slope towards tank. Install blowdown piping with gate valve; extend to
nearest drain.
E. Pump Suction Diffuser: Install pump suction diffusers on hydronic systems pump suction
inlet, adjust foot support to carry weight of suction piping. Install nipple and ball valve in
blowdown connection.
Diaphragm -Type Compression Tank: Install diaphragm -type compression tanks in hydronic
systems on floor as indicated. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, charge tank with
proper air charge to suit system design requirements.
Support tank as detailed on the drawings. Provide support from the floor or structure
adequate to carry twice the weight of the tank, piping connections, fittings, and
weight of water assuming a full tank of water. Do not overload building components
and structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Drip Pans: Locate drip pans under piping as indicated. Hang from structure with rods and
building attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying.
Connect 1-inch drain line to drain connection, and run to nearest plumbing drain or elsewhere
as indicated.
B. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls,
floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except
as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately
centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insert will have free movement in
sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than two (2) pipe sizes larger
than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and
finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves in rooms 1/2-inch above
level floor finish, in rooms 3/4-inch above floor finish sloped to drain and 4-inch above
finished floor in all Mechanical Equipment Rooms and pipe chases. Provide temporary
support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide
temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.
1. Install sheet metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended
ceilings.
2. Install iron pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations; both above and below grade.
3. Install steel pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated.
15120 - a
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
CK02-0,
• WMI-02
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
•�CK02-02 • -07
I • RSLA2 ,
i
RSM-0,
i
i
i
i
Roof and Exterior
Asbestos Sample Locations
No. RWWOM
61
43
��.5978.O,a By-. MC
BnvnaommW Sci nUmb and Bogmems, LLC U:IACADUM76.010" Dena Plan. Fes: 4 Sheet d
I
° CA05 - Black Carpet Adhesive
12 PF01 - Hard Mudded Fitting (QT1)
WC01 - Gray window caulking and
WG01 -White window glazing �WNW--
-------------------------------------
SCWO: r=
i.�—
Lower Level I
Confirmed ACBM
DGW aaos Oman ar• RW
I rOW NIL 537& G Chadad &f.. MC
Fla••: 5 Shag of
CI ❑
CI ❑
[] ❑
BnvirmmmW Scientists and Haws, MC UMCADUM76-0IM" Demo
— — CK01 - Gray Caulking
12 PFO1 - Hard Mudded Fitting (QTY)
WCO1 - Gray window caulking and
WGO1 - White window glazing
Plaza Level
Confirmed ACBM
ors: 04M
PMJOdNo. 537"10
FO= 8
Dam W. Rw
Checked Br. MC
Sher of
w
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
I l l l l l l l l l l l l t l l l l
I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-r-T-�--r-r-T-�--r-r-�--r-r-T-�-T--r-T-�
I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-t-t-1--r-t--t-t-r-t-i--r-r-t-l-t-r-t--I
I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
I l l l l l l l l t l l l l l l l l
-r-�-�--r-r-�--1--r-r-T--r-r-T-�--r-r-T-�
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 1
I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
_L_1_J__L_1_1_J__L_1_1_�_�_i_1_�_L_�_�
M
BnaoommW Scantio ma teas, LLC u:VWAD+xiMlOWO Demo PWmdwg
1 TT_—_____—_—_.__________________________.—_—
\\ II I
11 I
\\ I I I
�L------------------------------------
- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 II
I I I I I I I I I 11
-r-r-r-�--r-r-�-�--r-n
I I I I I I I I I tl
-r-r-t-1--t--r-t--+--r-n
I l l l l l l t l 11
I I 1 I I I I 1 I 11
SOA01 -Tan granular acoustical ceiling texture
MAO1- Wood paneling adhesive
Upper Level
Confirmed & Assumed ACBM
nre: M/08 �" er RW
sow: r = PMj*d Na 5376-010 ChWW W. MC
—�� F4Pw 1 slrM of
-X\
K
x
x �x'
RTFOIl -Black ter and felt
RSL02 - Black tar sealant
CK02- Gray green caulking
RTOI- Black tar
EnyhonmeaW Scicudew and
Roof and Exterior
Confirmed ACBM I
Does: 04M
ftJW NM 5370-010
Fom
Drown W. RW
Chocked Dr. MC
Shad of
No Text
ATTACHMENT 2
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLING INFORMATION TABLE,
LABORATORY RESULTS, AND CHAIN -OF -CUSTODY
FORMS
No Text
Asbestos Bulk Sampling Information and Analytical Results
Transit Center Phase H Project
Colorado State University, Lory Student Center
1101 Center Avenue Mall, Fort Collins, Colorado
Sample Number*
Suspect Material
Room/Area
Type
Friability
Analytical Result
(Percent and Type of
Asbestos
BBOI-01
DARK BROWN BASEBOARD W/ BROWN
ADHESIVE
100
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBAOI-01
MEDIUM BROWN BASEBOARD
ADHESIVE
200
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBAOI-02
MEDIUM BROWN BASEBOARD
ADHESIVE
200
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
<0.25%Anthophylite
PC
BBA02-01
CREAM BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
200
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBA02-02
CREAM BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
200
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBA03-01
CREAM BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
227
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBA03-02
CREAM BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
228
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBA04-01
DARK TAN BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
227
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBA04-02
DARK TAN BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
228
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
<0.25% Trem-Act PC
BBA05-01
DARK BROWN BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
227
Miscellaneous
Non -friable It
<0.25%Anthophylite
PC
BBA05-02
DARK BROWN BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
228
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
<0.25%Anthophylite
PC
BBA06-01
YELLOW BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
178
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBA06-02
YELLOW BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
178C
Miscellaneous
Non -friable It
NAD
BBA06-03
YELLOW BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
138
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBA07-01
DARK YELLOW BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
100
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
BBA08-01
BEIGE BASEBOARD ADHESIVE
49
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CAO1-01
CREAM CARPET ADHESIVE
227
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CAOI-02
CREAM CARPET ADHESIVE
228
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CA02-01
DARK YELLOW CARPET ADHESIVE
227
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CA02-02
DARK YELLOW CARPET ADHESIVE
228
Miscellaneous
Non-friableII
NAD
CA03-01
YELLOW STICKY CARPET ADHESIVE
178
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CA04-01
YELLOW STICKY CARPET ADHESIVE,
PLIABLE
49
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CA05-01
BLACK CARPET ADHESIVE
49
Miscellaneous
Non-friable11
8% Chrysotile
CA05-02
BLACK CARPET ADHESIVE
47H
Miscellaneous
Non-friable11
8% Chrysotile
CA05-03
BLACK CARPET ADHESIVE
N95
Miscellaneous
Non-friableI1
8% Chrysotilc
CDWOI-01
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
180
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDWOI-02
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
180
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDWOI-03
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
180
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDW02-01
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
178
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDW02-02
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
178
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDW02-03
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
178C
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDW03-01
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
138
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDW03-02
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
138
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDW03-03
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
138A
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDW04-01
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
49
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDW04-02
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
48
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
CDW04-03
COMPOSITE DRYWALL
47
Miscellaneous
Non -friable If
NAD
CKOI-01
GRAY CAULKING
178
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
7%Ch sotile
CKOI-02
GRAY CAULKING
178
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
7% Chrysotile
CK02-01
GRAY/GREEN CAULKING
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
5% Chrysotile
CK02-02
GRAY/GREEN CAULKING
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
8% Chrysotile
CT01-01
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
200
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
CTOI-02
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
200
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
CTOI-03
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
200
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
FTCOI-01
WHITE FLOOR LEVELING COMPOUND
178
Miscellaneous
Non -friable If
NAD
FTCOI-01
WHITE FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
138
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
FTCOI-02
WHITE FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
138A
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
Sample Number*
Suspect Material
Room/Area
Type
Friability
Analytical Result
(Percent and Type of
Asbestos
FTCO2-01
RED FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
138
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
FTC03-01
BLACK FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
138
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
FTC04-01
WHITE FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
138
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
FTC05-01
WHITE FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
138
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
FTC06-01
TAN FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
48
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
FTC06-02
TAN FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
48C
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
FTC07-01
BLACK FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
43
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
FTCO8-01
RUST RED FLOOR TILE WITH YELLOW
MASTIC
43
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
LIPOI-01
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
228
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIPOI-02
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
228
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIPOI-03
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
228
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP02-01
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
178E
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP03-01
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
178C
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP03-02
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
178
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP03-03
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
178B
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP04-01
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
138
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP04-02
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
138
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP04-03
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
138A
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP05-01
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
49
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP05-02
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
48
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP05-03
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
N96
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP06-01
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
43
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP07-01
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
41
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP07-02
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
41
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
LIP07-03
WHITE/GRAY CEILING TILE
41
Miscellaneous
Friable
NAD
MA01-01
ASSUMED UNDER WOOD PANELING
227
ASSUMED
MA02-01
WHITE ADHESIVE, HARD
N94
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
MA03-01
BROWN ADHESIVE W/CEILING TILE
48
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I1
NAD
MA03-02
BROWN ADHESIVE W/CEILING TILE
48A
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
MA03-03
BROWN ADHESIVE W/CEILING TILE
48
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
MSOI-01
OLIVE GRAY SEALANT
49
Miscellaneous
Non -friable 11
NAD
MS02-01
BLACK DRY TAR SEALANT
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
PFOI-01
MUDDED PIPE INSULATION
49
TSI
Friable
6% Chrysotile
1%Amosite
PF01-02
MUDDED PIPE INSULATION
48
TSI
Friable
8%Chrysotile
1%Amosite
PLOI-01
BEIGE PLASTER
228
Surfacing
Non -friable 11
NAD
PL01-02
BEIGE PLASTER
228
Surfacing
Non -friable II
NAD
PLO T-03
BEIGE PLASTER
200
Surfacing
Non -friable II
NAD
PL02-01
WHITE PLASTER
228
Surfacing
Non -friable II
NAD
PL02-02
WHITE PLASTER
228
Surfacing
Non -friable it
NAD
PL02-03
WHITE PLASTER
200
Surfacing
Non -friable 11
NAD
PL03-0I
GRAY PLASTER
228
Surfacing
Friable
NAD
PL03-02
GRAY PLASTER
228
Surfacing
Friable
NAD
PL03-03
GRAY PLASTER
200
Surfacing
Friable
NAD
PL04-01
BEIGE PLASTER
41
Surfacing
Non -friable II
NAD
PL04-02
BEIGE PLASTER
41
Surfacing
Non -friable II
NAD
PL04-03
BEIGE PLASTER
41
Surfacing
Non -friable II
NAD
PSOI-01
WHITE SEALANT
N94
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
RSLOI-Ol
BLACK TAR
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
RSL02-01
BLACK TAR
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable 1
12% Chrysotile
RSL03-01
SILVER SEALANT
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
RTOI-01
BLACK TAR
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable[
IS%Ch sotile
RTFOI-01
BLACK TAR W/FELT
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable 1
1.75% Chrysotile PC
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
Fire and Smoke Penetration Seal: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and
pipe with an approved fire and smoke penetration seal material on both sides.
END OF SECTION 15120
15120-9
Sample Number*
Suspect Material
Room/Area
Type
Friability
Analytical Result
(Percent and Type of
Asbestos
RTF01-02
BLACK TAR W/FELT AND INSULATION
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable I
NAD
SOA01-01
TAN GRANULAR ACOUSTICAL
201
Surfacing
Friable
5% Chrysotile
SOA01-02
TAN GRANULAR ACOUSTICAL
228
Surfacing
Friable
5% Chrysotile
SOA02-01
WHITE FIBROUS ACOUSTICAL
41
Surfacing
Friable
NAD
SOA02-02
WHITE FBROUS ACOUSTICAL
41
SurfacinR
Friable
NAD
SOA02-03
WHITE FBROUS ACOUSTICAL
41
Surfacing
Friable
NAD
TSOI-01
WHITE CHAULKY TEXTURE
180
Surfacing
Friable
NAD
TSOI-02
WHITE CHAULKY TEXTURE
180
Surfacing
Friable
NAD
TSOI-03
WHITE CHAULKY TEXTURE
180
Surfacing
Friable
NAD
UC01-01
GRAY UNDERCOATING
47H
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
WC01-01
GRAY CAULKING
178
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
6% Chrysotile
WCOI-02
GRAY CAULKING
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non-friableIl
5% Chrysotile
WCOI-03
GRAY CAULKING
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
4% Chrysotile
WGOI-01
WHITE WINDOW GLAZING
178
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
0.75% Chrysotile PC
WGOI-02
WHITE WINDOW GLAZING
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
1.25% Chrysotile PC
WGOI-03
WHITE WINDOW GLAZING
Exterior
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
0.25%Ch otile PC
WP01-01
WOVEN WALLPAPER
228
Miscellaneous
Non -friable II
NAD
upma uuvc a p�cain m �oiwry
NAD = No Asbestos Detected
PC = Point Count (confirmatory analysis)
Trem-Act = Tremolite and Actinolite
No Text
April 7, 2005
Michael Castell
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
2629 Redwing Rd., Suite 280
Ft. Collins CO 80526
Dear Customer,
Page 1 of 13
2059 Bryant St. Denver, CO 80211
(303) 964-1986 Fax (303) 477-4275 Toil Free (866) RESI-ENV
Laboratory Code:
Subcontract Number:
Laboratory Report:
Project Description:
RES
NA
RES 114654-1,2
5376-010
COFC/LSC Transit Center
Reservoirs Environmental, Inc. is an analytical laboratory accredited for the analysis of Industrial Hygiene
and Environmental matrices by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), Lab
Code # 101896 and the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), Lab ID 101533 - Accreditation
Certificate #480. This laboratory is currently proficient in both Proficiency Testing and PAT programs
respectively.
Reservoirs Environmental, Inc. has analyzed the following samples for asbestos content as per your
request. The analysis has been completed in general accordance with the appropriate methodology as
stated in the attached analysis table. The results have been submitted to your office.
RES 114654-1,2 is the job number assigned to this study. This report is considered highly confidential
and the sole property of the customer. Reservoirs Environmental, Inc. will not discuss any part of this study
with personnel other than those of the client. The results described in this report only apply to the samples
analyzed. This report must not be used to claim endorsement of products or analytical results by NVLAP or
any agency of the U.S. Government. This report shall not be reproduced except in full, without written
approval from Reservoirs Environmental, Inc. Samples will be disposed of after sixty days unless longer
storage is requested. If you have any questions about this report, please feel free to call 303-964-1986.
Sincerely,
Jeanne Spencer Orr
President
Analyst(s):,
Paul D. LoScalzo Wenlong Liu
Paul F. Knappe Rich Wegrzyn
Michael Scales
No Text
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
Client:
Client Project Number / P.O.
Client Project Description:
Date Samples Received:
Analysis Type:
Turnaround:
Date Analyzed:
RES 114654-1,2
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
5376-010
COFC/LSC Transit Center
April 6, 2005
PLM, Short Report
24 Hour
April 7, 2005
Page 2 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & MS
Client
Sample
Number
a
ID Number
L
A Sub
Y Physical Part
E Description (%)
R
Mineral i visual
Estimate (%
Non
Asbestos
Fibers
omponents
on
Fibrous
Components
(%)
5376010-BB01-01
EM 956449
A Brown adhesive 10
ND
5
95
B Brown baseboard 90
ND
0
100
5376010-BBA01-01
EM 956450
A Brown adhesive 100
NO
3
97
5376010-BBA01-02
EM 956451
A Brown adhesive 100
Anthophyllite TR
3
97
Point Count <0.25
5376010-BBA02-01
EM 956452
A Cream adhesive 100
ND
0
100
6376010-BBA02-02
EM 956453
A Cream adhesive 100
ND
0
100
6376010-BBA03-01
EM 956454
A Cream adhesive 100
ND
0
100
5376010-BBA03-02
EM 956455
A Cream adhesive 100
ND
0
100
5376010-BBA04-01
EM 956456
A Tan adhesive 100
ND
TR
100
5376010-BBA04-02
EM 956457
A Tan adhesive 100
Trem-Act TR
TR
100
Point Count <0.25
537601 O-BBA05-01
EM 956458
A Brown adhesive 100
Anthophyllite TR
5
95
Point Count <0.25
-0 /ND = None Detected
Yi p
YWn
TR = Trace, < I % Visual Estimate Tram -Act = Tremolite-Actinolite = /�
Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
Client:
Client Project Number / P.O.
Client Project Description:
Date Samples Received:
Analysis Type:
Turnaround:
Date Analyzed:
RES 114654-1,2
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
5376-010
COFC/LSC Transit Center
April 6, 2005
PLM, Short Report
24 Hour
April 7, 2005
Page 3 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & MS
Client
Sample
Number
a
ID Number
L
A Sub
Y Physical Part
E Description (%)
R
Mineral visual
EsUmate (9(0
Non
Asbestos
Fibers
Components
on
Fibrous
omponent
(%)
5376010-BBA05-02
EM 956459
A Brown adhesive 100
Anthophyilite TR
8
92
Point Count <0.25
5376010-BBA06-01
EM 956460
A Tan adhesive 100
ND
0
100
5376010-BBA06-02
EM 956461
A Cream adhesive 100
ND
0
100
5376010-BBA06-03
EM 956462
A Cream adhesive 100
ND
0
100
6376010-BBA07-01
EM 956463
A Tan adhesive 100
ND
0
100
5376010-BBA08-01
EM 956464
A White adhesive 100
ND
0
100
6376010-CA01-01
EM 956465
A Tan adhesive 100
ND
0
100
537601 0-CA01 -02
EM 956466
A Tan adhesive 100
ND
0
100
5376010-CA02-01
EM 956467
A Tan adhesive 100
ND
0
100
5376010-CA02-02
EM 956468
A Orange adhesive 100
ND
0
100
5376010-CA03-01
EM 956469
A Tan adhesive 100
ND
0
100
5376010-CA04-01
EM 956470
A Tan adhesive 100
ND
0
100
ND = None Detected ~
o Trem-Act = Tremolite-Actinolite
TR =Trace, < 1 /o Visual Estimate _
Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
RES 114654-1,2
Client:
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
Client Project Number / P.O.:
5376-010
Client Project Description:
COFC/LSC Transit Center
Date Samples Received:
April 6, 2005
Analysis Type:
PLM, Short Report
Turnaround:
24 Hour
Date Analyzed:
April 7, 2005
Page 4 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & MS
Client
Sample
Number
a
ID Number
L
q Sub
Y Physical Part
E Description (°/n)
R
Mineral Visual
Estimate (%
on
Asbestos
Fibers
omponents
on
Fibrous
Components
(%)
5376010-CA05-01
EM 956471
A Black adhesive 100
Chrysotile 8
0
92
5376010-CA05-02
EM 956472
A Black adhesive 100
Chrysotile 8
0
92
6376010-CA06-03
EM 956473
A Black adhesive 100
Chrysotile 8
0
92
6376010-CDW01-01
EM 956474
A White plaster w/ tan paint 15
ND
0
100
B White drywall 85
ND
15
85
6376010-CDW01-02
EM 956475
A White plaster w/ tan paint 4
ND
0
100
B White drywall 96
ND
15
85
5376010-CDW01-03
EM 956476
A White plaster w/ tan paint 5
ND
0
100
B White drywall 95
ND
15
85
5376010-CDW02-01
EM 956477
A White plaster 5
ND
0
100
B White drywall 95
ND
15
85
5376010-CDW02-02
EM 956478
A Yellow resin 2
ND
0
100
B White plaster 10
ND
0
100
C White drywall 88
ND
15
85
w
ND =None Detected
TR = Trace, < 1% Visual Estimate Tram -Act = Tremolite-Actinolite
Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
RES 114654-1,2
Client:
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
Client Project Number / P.O.:
5376-010
Client Project Description:
COFC/LSC Transit Center
Date Samples Received:
April 6, 2005
Analysis Type:
PLM, Short Report
Turnaround:
24 Hour
Date Analyzed:
April 7, 2006
Page 5 of 13
Anayst: PDL, PFK & MS
Client
Sample
a
ID Number
L
A Sub
Non
Asbestos
Non:
Fibrous
Number
Y Physical Part
Fibers
Components
E Description (%)
Mineral visual
L-:,Estlmato
omponents
(%)
R
(%
5376010-CDW02-03
EM 956479
A White plaster 25
ND
0
100
B Pink drywall 75
ND
15
85
5376010-CDW03-01
EM 956480
A White plaster 3
ND
0
100
B Pink drywall 97
ND
15
85
6376010-CDW03-02
EM 956481
A White plaster 15
ND
0
100
B White drywall 85
ND
15
85
5376010-CDW03-03
EM 956482
A White plaster 5
ND
0
100
B Pink drywall 95
ND
15
85
5376010-CDW04-01
EM 956483
A White plaster w/ white paint 10
ND
0
100
B White drywall 90
ND
15
85
5376010-CDW04-02
EM 956484
A White plaster w/ white paint 20
ND
0
100
B White drywall 80
ND
15
85
5376010-CDW04-03
EM 956485
A White plaster w/ white paint 10
ND
0
100
B White drywall 90
ND
15
85
5376010-CK01-01
EM 956486
A Tan caulk w/ white paint 100
Chrysotile 7
0
93
ND = None Detected
TR = Trace, < 1 % Visual Estimate
Trem-Act = Tremolite-Actinolite
a.,
Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
RES 114664-1,2
Client:
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
Client Project Number / P.O.:
5376-010
Client Project Description:
COFC/LSC Transit Center
Date Samples Received:
April 6, 2005
Analysis Type:
PLM, Short Report
Turnaround:
24 Hour
Date Analyzed:
April 7, 2005
Page 6 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & MS
Client
Sample
ID Number
L
A Sub
on
Asbestos
on -
Fibrous
Number
Y Physical Part
Fibers
Components
E Description (%)
Mineral visual
omponents
(%)
R
Estimate (%
5376010-CK01-02
EM 956487
A Gray caulk w/ tan paint 100
Chrysotile 7
0
93
6376010-CK02-01
EM 956488
A Gray caulk 100
Chrysotile 5
0
95
5376010-CK02-02
EM 956489
A Gray caulk 100
Chrysotile 8
0
92
5376010-CT01-01
EM 956490
A White/tan ceiling tile 100
ND
80
20
5376010-CT01-02
EM 956491
A Whitettan ceiling tile 100
ND
80
20
537601 O-CT01 -03
EM 956492
A Whitettan ceiling tile 100
ND
80
20
5376010-FLC01-01
EM 956493
A Yellow resin 2
ND
0
100
B Tan granular plaster 98
ND
TR
100
6376010-FTC01-01
EM 956494
A Yellow resin 1
ND
0
100
B White/black tile 99
ND
0
100
537601 0-FTC01 -02
EM 956495
A Brown tar w/ yellow resin 1
ND
0
100
B White/black tile 99
ND
0
100
5376010-FTCO2-01
EM 956496
A Yellow resin 1
ND
0
100
B Red the 99
ND
0
100
ND = None Detected F1�
TR = Trace, < 1 % Visual Estimate Trem-Ad = Tremolite-Actinolite
Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
RES 114654-1,2
Client:
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
Client Project Number / P.O.:
5376-010
Client Project Description:
COFC/LSC Transit Center
Date Samples Received:
April 6, 2006
Analysis Type:
PLM, Short Report
Turnaround:
24 Hour
Date Analyzed:
April 7, 2005
Page 7 of 13
Anayst: PDL, PFK & MS
client
Sample
a
ID Number
L
A Sub=:,
Non
Asbestos
on -
Fibrous
Number
Y Physical PartFibers
Components
E Description (°k)
omponents
(%)
R
5376010-FTC03-01
EM 956497
A Yellow resin TR
ND
0
100
B Black tile 100
ND
0
100
5376010-FTC04-01
EM 956498
A Yellow resin 2
ND
0
100
B White tile 98
ND
0
100
5376010-FTC05-01
EM 956499
A Whitelblack the 100
ND
0
100
5376010-FTC06-01
EM 956500
A Yellow mastic 1
ND
0
100
B Light tan tile 99
ND
0
100
5376010-FTC06-02
EM 956501
A Yellow mastic w/ inseparable white paint 2
ND
0
100
B Light tan tile 98
ND
0
100
5376010-FTC07-01
EM 956502
A Light tan mastic 1
ND
0
100
B Black tile 99
ND
0
100
5376010-FTC08-01
EM 956503
A Light tan mastic 2
ND
0
100
B Pink the 98
ND
0
100
6376010-LIP01-01
EM 956504
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
60
40
6376010-LIP01-02
EM 956505
A White ceilino the 100
NDI
651
35
ND = None Detected
TR = Trace, < 1 % Visual Estimate
Trem-Act = Tremolite-Actinolite
Data QA
YXCHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division-1 Conditions specification sections apply to the Division 15
specifications and drawings.
B. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 01810.
C. Related Sections: Refer to all sections in Division 15. Refer to Division 16 specification
section and Division 16 drawings.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes
requirements common to more than one (1) section of Division 15. It expands and
supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all times for all new to existing
connections, system shutdowns and restart -up, flushing and filling both new and existing
systems.
C. Provide temporary ductwork and piping services where required to maintain existing areas
operable, as shown on the drawings.
D. Coordinate all services shutdown with the Owner, provide temporary services as shown on the
drawings.
E. Relocate existing thermostats and humidistats as shown on the drawings.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall be required to attend a mandatory pre -bid walk-thru and shall make
themselves familiar with the existing conditions. No additional costs to the Owner shall be
accepted for additional work for these existing conditions.
B. Field verify all existing conditions prior to submitting bids.
C. Report any existing damaged equipment or systems to the Owner prior to any work.
D. Protect all mechanical and electrical work against theft, injury or damage from all causes until
it has been tested and accepted.
E. Be responsible for all damage to the property of the Owner or to the work of other contractors
during the construction and guarantee period. Repair or replace any part of the Work which
may show defect during one (1) year from the final acceptance of all work. Provided such
15010-1
a
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15125 - PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15125 - PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Expansion Compensation Products required by this section is indicated on drawings
and/or specified in other Division 15 sections.
B. Types of Expansion Compensation Products specified in this section include the following:
1. Packless Expansion Joints:
a. Externally Pressurized Bellows Expansion Joints
b. Bellows Expansion Joints
C. Rubber Expansion Joints
2. Pipe Alignment Guides.
C. Expansion Compensation Products furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment, are
specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of expansion
compensation products of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. EJMA Compliance: Construct expansion compensation products in accordance with
standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association (EJMA).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions for each type of expansion compensation product. Submit expansion
compensation schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for
each required expansion compensation product.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings for each type of
expansion compensation product, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and
methods of assembly of components.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabricated expansion loops indicating location,
dimensions, pipe sizes, and location and method of attachment of anchors.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of expansion
compensation product. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance
Manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
15125-1
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
RES 114654-1,2
Client:
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
Client Project Number / P.O.:
5376-010
Client Project Description:
COFC/LSC Transit Center
Date Samples Received:
April 6, 2005
Analysis Type:
PLM, Short Report
Turnaround:
24 Hour
Date Analyzed:
April 7, 2005
Page 8 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & NIS
Client
Sample
a
ID Number
L
A Sub
Non
Asbestos
on
Fibrous
Number
Y Physical Part
Fibers
Components
E Description (%)
Mineral visual
omponents
(%)
R
: Estimate
5376010-LIP01-03
EM 956506
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
60
40
5376010-LIP02-01
EM 956507
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
65
35
5376010-LIP03-01
EM 956508
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
65
35
5376010-LIP03-02
EM 956509
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
65
35
5376010-LIP03-03
EM 956510
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
65
35
5376010-LIP04-01
EM 956511
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
60
40
5376010-LIP04-02
EM 956512
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
60
40
5376010-LIP04-03
EM 956513
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
65
35
5376010-LIP05-01
EM 956514
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
65
35
5376010-LIP05-02
EM 956515
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
65
35
5376010-LIP05-03
EM 956516
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
60
40
ND = None Detected
TR = Trace, < I % Visual Estimate
Trem-Act = Tremolite-Actinolite
/ � M
wzs
aeor
Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number: RES 114654-1,2
Client:
Client Project Number / P.O.
Client Project Description:
Date Samples Received:
Analysis Type:
Turnaround:
Date Analyzed:
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
6376-010
COFC/LSC Transit Center
April 6, 2005
PLM, Short Report
24 Hour
April 7, 2005
Page 9 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & MS
Client
Sample
a
ID Number
L
A Sub
on
Asbestos
on -
Fibrous
Number
Y Physical Part
7M,
Fibers
Components
E Description (%)
Mineral ;
omponents
(%)
R
; Es
6376010-LIP06-01
EM 956517
A White textured plaster covering w/ 8
ND
TR
100
adhesive
B White ceiling tile 92
ND
65
35
6376010-LIP07-01
EM 956518
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
60
40
5376010-LIP07-02
EM 956519
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
60
40
5376010-LIP07-03
EM 956520
A White ceiling tile 100
ND
60
40
6376010-MA02-01
EM 956521
A White granular plaster 100
ND
0
100
5376010-MA03-01
EM 956522
A White fibrous material 22
ND
75
25
B Brown adhesive w/ inseparable gray plaster 78
ND
TR
100
5376010-MA03-02
EM 956523
A White fibrous material 33
ND
75
25
B Brown adhesive w/ inseparable gray plaster 67
ND
TR
100
5376010-MA03-03
EM 956524
A White fibrous material 44
ND
75
25
B Brown adhesive w/ inseparable gray plaster 56
ND
TR
100
ND = None Detected -a
TR = Trace, < t% Visual Estimate Trem-Act = Tremolite-Actinolite _
^Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
Client:
Client Project Number / P.O.
Client Project Description:
Date Samples Received:
Analysis Type:
Turnaround:
Date Analyzed:
RES 114664-1,2
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
5376-010
COFC/LSC Transit Center
April 6, 2006
PLM, Short Report
24 Hour
April 7, 2006
Page 10 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & MS
Tent
Sample
Number
Lab
ID Number
L
A
Y
E
R
Physical
Description
Sub
Part
(%)
Mineral
visual
Estimate (°�
on
Asbestos
Fibers
omponents
%
on -
Fibrous
Components
(%)
6376010-MS01-01
EM
956525
A
Gray sealant
100
ND
3
97
5376010-PF01-01
EM
956526
A
White fibrous woven wrap
4
ND
90
10
B
White mud insulation
96
Chrysotile
6
10
83
Amosite
1
5376010-PF01-02
EM
956527
A
White mud insulation
100
Chrysotile
8
10
81
Amosite
1
5376010-PL01-01
EM
956528
A
White granular plaster
100
ND
0
100
6376010-PL01-02
EM
956529
A
White granular plaster
100
ND
0
100
6376010-PL01-03
EM
956530
A
White granular plaster
100
ND
0
100
6376010-PL02-01
EM
956531
A
White granular plaster
2
ND
0
100
B
White plaster
98
ND
0
100
5376010-PL02-02
EM
956532
A
White plaster
100
ND
0
100
5376010-PL02-03
EM
956533
A
White plaster
100
ND
0
100
5376010-PL03-01
EM
956534
A
White granular plaster
100
ND
0
100
ND = None Detected
TR = Trace, < I % Visual Estimate Trem-Act = Tremolite-Actinolite
Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number.
RES 114654-1,2
Client:
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
Client Project Number / P.O.:
5376-010
Client Project Description:
COFC/LSC Transit Center
Date Samples Received:
April 6, 2005
Analysis Type:
PLM, Short Report
Turnaround:
24 Hour
Date Analyzed:
April 7, 2005
Page 11 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & MS
Client
Sample
a
ID Number
L
A Sub
on
Asbestos
on -
Fibrous
Number
Y Physical Part
[mineral
Fibers
omponent
E Description N
Visual
omponents
N
R
Estimate (%
0-PL03-02
EM
956535
A
White granular plaster
100
0-PL03-03
EM
956536
A
White granular plaster
100
0-PL04-01
EM
956537
A
White granular plaster
100
0-PL04-02
EM
956538
A
White granular plaster
100
0-PL04-03
EM
956539
A
White granular plaster
100
0-PS01-01
EM
956540
A
White sealant
100
0-RSL01-01
EM
956541
A
Black tar
100
0-RSL02-01
EM
956542
A
Black material
100
0-RSL03-01
EM
956543
A
Silver sealant
100
0-RT01-01
EM
956544
A
Black fibrous tar
100
0-RFT01-01
EM
956545
A
Silver paint w/ inseparable black tar
1
B
Black felt w/ black resinous tar
99
Count
12 0
W 8
15 0
2 0
10
1
1
1
1
1
90
ND = None Detected ,a
TR = Trace, < 1 % Visual Estimate Trem-Act = Tremolite-Actinolite _
Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
Client:
Client Project Number / P.O.
Client Project Description:
Date Samples Received:
Analysis Type:
Turnaround:
Date Analyzed:
RES 114654-1,2
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
6376-010
COFC/LSC Transit Center
April 6, 2005
PLM, Short Report
24 Hour
April 7, 2006
Page 12 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & MS
L
A Sub=iVlsual
on
Asbestos
on -
Fibrous
Client
Sample
a
ID Number
Number
Y Physical PartFibers
Components
E Description (%)
omponentsR
5376010-SOA01-01
EM 956546
A White perlitic material & tan vermiculite 100
Chrysotile 5
TR
95
insulation
6376010-SOA01-02
EM 956547
A White perlitic material & tan vermiculite 100
Chrysotile 5
TR
95
insulation
5376010SOA02-01
EM 956548
A White fibrous insulation 100
ND
70
30
6376010-SOA02-02
EM 956549
A White fibrous insulation 100
ND
70
30
6376010SOA02-03
EM 956550
A White fibrous insulation 100
ND
70
30
5376010-TS01-01
EM 956551
A White material 100
ND
0
100
5376010-TS01-02
EM 956552
A White material 100
ND
0
100
5376010-TS01-03
EM 956553
A White material 100
ND
0
100
6376010-UC01-01
EM 956554
A Gray material 100
ND
20
80
5376010-WC01-01
EM 956555
A Light gray caulking 100
Chrysotile 6
0
94
5376010-WC01-02
JEM 956556
1 A Gray caulking w/white paint 100
lChrysotile 61
0
95
ND = None Detected
TR = Trace, < 1% Visual Estimate Trem-Act = Tremolite-Ae inoide Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
Client:
Client Project Number / P.O
Client Project Description:
Date Samples Received:
Analysis Type:
Turnaround:
Date Analyzed•
RES 114654-1,2
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
5376-010
COFC/LSC Transit Center
April 6, 2005
PLM, Short Report
24 Hour
April 7, 2006
Page 13 of 13
Analyst: PDL, PFK & MS
on
Asbestos
on -
Fibrous
Client
Sample
a
ID Number
L
A
Sub
Number
Y Physical
Part
Fibers
Components
E Description
(%)
Mineral visual
omponents
(%)
R
1 Estimate (%
5376010-WC01-03
EM 956557
A Light gray caulking 100
Chrysotile 4
0
96
5376010-WG01-01
EM 956558
A Gray glazing 100
Chrysotile 2
0
98
Point Count 0.75
5376010-WG01-02
EM 956559
A Gray glazing 100
Chrysotile 2
0
98
Point Count 1.25
6376010-WG01-03
EM 956560
A Gray glazing 100
Chrysotile 3
0
97
Point Count 0.25
6376010-WP01-01
EM 956561
A White mastic 2
ND
ND
5
40
95
60
B Green fibrous woven wall covering 98
ND = None Detected
TR = Trace, < 1% Visual Estimate
Trem-Act = Tremolite-Actinolite
I,
or
mos.w
a
i 4
. aem
Data QA
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
205fl Bryant St, Denver CO 80211
Cijri
R L 81 -1 n b "
1 1,
Z -S 1 14f,`4
ISAMPLES SU 7-177E4 BY,
It-NVOICE TO: OF DIFFERENT}
E
C sii,
970-2234577
CIO Ad,:N,!;�
7
::0-1
ckend SiHARGL
After EH
Aw, t Authorized by:
Aec,'i: -n�jloply fcr
n '7"�:-Jays f,"." ali types. S--rnp:-.s ,%ik 1j9 an-:ityzaj dt;niq normal iahoratory hours ufl:,Jss
whervA4�n ,:rT-it jod and •pe6l
C-alrl cf „:c,aj ?'um; ,round is s[qect 10 latioratory volume. You MR be nmifiee if delays are
ex ece,
F—
�ASBESTOS U 30RAT RY Hk',,JPS
141�f-kdays: 7am - 7prn ANALYTICAL METHOD
1 , I 17 1 r"?J 740CA 4 . ,�A
-1FM
2 ut U, wic"i
-4 3-6 Y'—dwjs AZ!
TEM
E-7
-J U Li: 5� r_m71t1-,1.-1-z.', --1--
"-„>
_-L
-24
W -Wj METALS LATOR`HOL,
V, kAays� Scan.Scan.m - 5p
AA i Ir-? A R���
kv, PECIAI-i�JSH
3-5 -Iv Paint, ��w Clji! TCLP
(ASTM F 171-11
!RCRA 9 OCCiAl, P- I 5H
1 'ATFR '.vas,E V�3!�,,
ISH
D '-� S; lf:,,,A L F
LP SPFC,iLfkw�
HA 41 CY 71--Lr !OTHER
!,t 20lixnarour�j
A
Client -AMple
011i rne Em #
011
S 71;0! 11 SaA�11 i
7;�O! 0 RKArr-1 I
IV, I J
_seACII
6. 53'601[) EPA04- I ''ARK
-A'I `,1r-SfVF
9_ SBAN '2
ARK I "-ESNE
a111
N1 W'M
-M-4111--
": I ["
iiNr D A
51 1
Nim-,t-v c, 1, .,pas
at 7 rcc-cfid,i
NO I E. 1 No, lu?, r r d 'W
311`_ RES;-,
'IL I ifi lot taspar,�'ol- !,A tfrot-, one-.vms in fiasulfipg 6rcJn lt�. ma rura�7y of cciQ na, nM, TiWafodhl tirtX* .3
Relinquished Ei:
Laboritory Us( C
�j "none Ile
A,,KhC
Resul, ; Dt,. Resj.!-
Lab E
Trotes:
Az
Tole jftt�a!S
enchfCount, Sheets Received
Date
x3) sct-i 4?7 -42,5 WATS: 1-Atf,-RESJ ENV J737.43EO)
Altcmil- P-prs: P01JEM PCVA-07s 50-2098 eAPIIER. HOURS USE CSLN",
e- 2 R--SEJR\j')lRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC,
RESI Job #:
SAMPLES SUBMI „TEES ;,IY.
Due Date,
company. Va11?� I Envil �qw, i'a
Due Tme:
contacL
M.�e t as!i)ll
Project
DoscriDlion ndim R(-'
1"370 0
SAMPLES:
No
Clip,�jSam.AeNij
Volime EM #4
17
Ir
Y,
20
'37E'IU- )2-02
YPOVV ADHESI`,'E:
21
5376,: 1 u -
—Z- fit". T i C K Y Ay 11 1 -E S . v E
22
5376010-
CA 34-01
y -I3iY ADESIVE, Pf IABLE
CA
24
K H E. S I V
25
51376f"l 0-
CA ,5,03
K r S I V E
26
TJ777 10-
0
28
5 3 7 633 11,2 -
Cr 1411-N
A
It FE7 V.—
29
537601-U-
CC ".-v 2 - " 1
1 a YOL;, E DRYI,%'ik,-L
5376)110-
Cl, V02-02
DRYWALL
31
6C 10-
-�3 �7
E �02�03
G", 1 -F DRYWAL
32
5376(t10- C E V C, 3 - Cll I
i r !POt
33
",�76,)'0-
CC-NO3-1,12
PO v,7 A
3-1
5376!-l-J'-
CF-
35
. .
5376010-
. . ........
CC M04-01
; `',PO�;!TF DRYWA-:1
3",
5376010,
CC
38
-73 7 6c, i —.
c�,,, 'I -o i
39
CK F1 -02
G P Y C;,' 1
40
537K,10-
CK02-01
(314- CAU"!,KING
41
5376,l 0-
CK 2-02
c '06-� �CAULKING
42
—.I
CT T—Gi
5L
43
53760'0-
CT 1-02
V=E CE I L IN( 1 TILE
44
53761"0-
CT' 1-0'3
VE.(,'i,- '—< CEUNG TILE
45
5376Cl,0-
FD 11-01
'F, �-)(,,R LEVI"-ING CCN'POUND
46
2537uGc'o-
rF-,I 01 (,1
V -E )OIR TILE Vi;`-i YFLu-0'4 MAS7�,��
47
5376*, 0-
F`
-E
48
537-6ii 0-
F-, 1 0201
RE", ��LO,',R.TILE
49
5376010-
FT f 03-01
BLA,C,K F'1-0014 TILE 1,1117H YE? I -OW NIASTIC ,
50
5376010-
FTC� �4-01
44f ',E F TILE ),%'! T-i Y EU C)lwv MAST C
51
53.116(110-
F 05-0
Vv', F, A"RTILF -i
52
F-,,-g 06-01
I-c" TILE VVIT-1
!iV&-,(x
F- 06-02
-L -R ILE V -,'IT -4. YE' N' �6'r K-'
54
537fjC'.,-t-
F71 07-01
F-- 'I( F, :R TILF ',%j TH Y:-4--Yv,' MASTIC
55
5 3 7 6,1
P'T� 0,9-`i1
Z�-, Cli-, H MASTIC
;!3
55
53 NiG 1 Cl-
L'r 31-0 1;TILE
57
53-,6orj-
Lir
58
537GC10-
LIP 11-03
t. EjQfvA'� C-ElLt,\'G, FILE
59
5376010-
LIF Q-01
CEIUNG TILE
60
5 3 7 f. K, ' Ol -
UP
'D,--A'- (", E I UN* C- T 1, C
r32
537K'0-
L,::-3-C3
63
53794 10-
LIP )4-01
4 k TEi( -,4V CEILIN,,z TILE
54
b7l(T,77
LT
65
C Ell L;
lla;e .3 cf ;, FEES: --'R", "ARS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
RESI Job #:
SAMPLES SUBMI rTEO 4Y
Due Date:
company: 'Nia ;h Env -orr;
Die Time:
Cortac"
Mli�,e
Project
Oe� ,ipicn --Lin d—,'o.
SAMPLES-
Nc,
Cht�n' Sar pie N,
-n L
Volume EM
67
537
53' L �-�5-03
!!TE I`t-Y TILE
L ),j C
177, �AY CElih( TILE
'0'- LP
T
70
537;-',C1D- _ '107-01,
,;TE'—�AVCEILIHG E
7 1
L 7
7E� p� Y C E T L;7,
72
Y C -- —IL N G TILE
73
51376010- V.kO2-01
V-ITEADII-FSIVE HARD
74
5�7(--Cjl 0, V , 0, C, I
P-- ,- -,P FESNE
�
75
!,',aaS1VF
TILE
75
�-� --1 '1, � t*,- 10,11-3
M
2 11V�iN 1 1
TILL
77
537 1 C, - M �O GI
1E SEAL;,117
78
553 7 f,'-' I Pm-oi
79
537,�'110- 11 0 02'
-:E 1NS--,'TI,)%'
80
R D1-0i
E, E - `;TER P
8
-537f,"If-1-
PI
RR 6E i A'JER
62
537 L, - P1 01-0
BE-aa1E P:-ASTER
83
537L,`[,-
PI-)2-01
Vv-iTE i'.-ASTFR
B4
�717 —;'GPi
2 0-2
-�T—Pi -A 37 —ER
86
5317tL '-
PI
c�Ay P, ',S TE R
87
5376010-
Fit,)3-02
G�'-'IAY P-,Ae-JER
88
5376cO-
P, 2-03
G, AY P ASTER
89
WV-O-
Pl-34-0-,
6 �E: P ASTFR
90
7K',Q-
Plam -02
AVJER
91
537V00-
P1 714-03
Bi i,;E P, A,1JER
92
517U010-
P,01-01
W,i:TE AW'
93
7 1
7
94
5:7t'.IC-
FR: L 0 2
'-K
95
537F�10-
W I-03,f) I
96
537(z,'ID
R- I I - 0
98
-fll
7,1111-1—ir TAR A(:,'31i-'Mf--AL
99
537t:ID,
St AOI-�2
74, GR,',V.-U�P, ACCUSICA
I(71
537E-. 1!4-
S( A02-a1
v%- TF: F.131-':OQS Fit 1,,-fljSTICA-----
101
537C�10
S(TO2.02'
V, TEFiIROUSAGOUSTICA' -
102
537E-C10-
S1'402-M
AT;� 'T�5JS ACCI USTI
1 C) 31
5537F1+:;77
:�!-.kel
�, 11-01
.)':-KY TF,i�-! URE
104
.
71 11-02
A JLKY TE'<TUH.E
1 '7
105
517 1
T' 'I -402
V.- 7E IRJLKY TEXTI-iRE
10.6
U(- 01 -01
G P, A Y L;','D 2 RC 0 A-f! i3
474
107
5 37F, 1
JKIN`�
108
537j.;VV-
01-o2
0�-- -y Cr JUX1440
109
'0 1 - C1 3
G-,AY C,,ULKING
44
110
537 10 -
W;01-D1
W,JE ViNOOW GLAZING
W 011-02
V,"i'T' V, DO'. GL"Zi�G
112
537`21'-
W ;01-03
No Text
.4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15125 - PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Packless Expansion Joints Compensators:
a. Flexonics Division; UOP, Inc.
b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
C. Keflex, Inc.
d. Metraflex Co.
e. American BOA, Inc.
2. Packless Rubber Expansion Joints:
a. Garlock; Mechanical Packing Division
b. Mason Industries, Inc.
C. Metraflex Co.
3. Pipe Alignment Guides:
a. Hyspan Precision Products,lnc.
b. Metraflex Co.
C. Keyflex, Inc.
2.2 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL
A. Pipe expansion joints shall provide 200 percent absorption capacity of calculated piping
expansion between anchors.
2.3 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Provide bellows expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials
and pressure/temperature ratings selected by manufacturer to suit intended service. Select
expansion joints to provide 200 percent absorption capacity with 30 percent safety factor.
B. Bellows -Type Expansion Joints:
Externally Pressurized, Bellows -Type:
a. ASTM A240 T304 Stainless Steel laminated bellows.
b. Flanged Connections, conforming to ANSI B 16.5.
C. Lifting lug.
d. Drain port.
e. 150 psig design pressure.
f. Minimal warranted cycle life of 10,000 full -stroke cycles.
g. Internally guided.
2. Bellows -Type Expansion Joint:
& ASTM A240 T304 Stainless Steel laminated bellows.
b. Flanged connections, conforming to ANSI B 16.5.
C. 150 psig design pressure.
d. Internal stainless steel liner.
15125 - 2
April 12, 2005
Michael Castel
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
2629 Redwing Rd. , Suite 280
Ft. Collins CO 80526
Dear Customer,
2059 Bryant St. Denver, CO 80211
(303) 964-1986 Fax (303) 477.4275 Toll Free (866) RESI-ENV
Laboratory Code:
Subcontract Number:
Laboratory Report:
Project Description:
Page 1 of 2
RES
NA
RES 114787-1
5376-010
COFCILSC Transit Center
Reservoirs Environmental, Inc. is an analytical laboratory accredited for the analysis of Industrial Hygiene
and Environmental matrices by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), Lab
Code # 101896 and the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), Lab ID 101533 - Accreditation
Certificate #480. This laboratory is currently proficient in both Proficiency Testing and PAT programs
respectively.
Reservoirs Environmental, Inc. has analyzed the following samples for asbestos content as per your
request. The analysis has been completed in general accordance with the appropriate methodology as
stated in the attached analysis table. The results have been submitted to your office.
RES 114787-1 is the job number assigned to this study. This report is considered highly confidential
and the sole property of the customer. Reservoirs Environmental, Inc. will not discuss any part of this study
with personnel other than those of the client. The results described in this report only apply to the samples
analyzed. This report must not be used to claim endorsement of products or analytical results by NVLAP or
any agency of the U.S. Government. This report shall not be reproduced except in full, without written
approval from Reservoirs Environmental, Inc. Samples will be disposed of after sixty days unless longer
storage is requested. If you have any questions about this report, please feel free to call 303-964-1986.
Sincerely,
Jeanne Spencer Orr
President
Analyst(s):
Paul D. LoScalzo Wenlong Liu
Paul F. Knappe Rich Wegrzyn
Michael Scales
No Text
RESERVOIRS ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
NVLAP Accredited Laboratory # 101896
TDH Licensed Laboratory # 30-0136
TABLE PLM BULK ANALYSIS, PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION BY VOLUME
RES Job Number:
Client:
Client Project Number / P.O.
Client Project Description:
Date Samples Received:
Analysis Type:
Turnaround:
Date Analyzed:
RES 114787-1
Walsh Environmental - (F.C.)
5376-010
COFC/LSC Transit Center
April 11, 2005
PLM, Short Report
24 Hour
April 11, 2005
Page 2 of 2
Analyst: RSW
UllerifL
Sample
Number
ID Number
A Sub
Y Physical Part
Nnni
Asbestos
Fibers
Non -
Fibrous
Components
E Description (%)
Mineral visual
Components
(%)
R
I Estimate (%
6376010-MS02-01
EM 957455
A Black tar 100
ND
TR
100
5376010-RTF01-02
EM 957456
A Black tar 5
ND
TR
100
B Tan fibrous perlitic material 35
ND
60
40
C Black fibrous tar 60
ND
35
65
ND = None Detected
TR = Trace, < I % Visual Estimate
Trem-Act = Tremolite-Actinolite
12 Validity
unknow
n
Digitally signed by Gina
Date: 2005.04.12
09:33:36-06'00'
Data QA
RCRA#
TCLP
0.
VL
i5l
�j�-JA jig JIMI'l
NW5W/'Z*A
mw
..... .....
177
:.,w ATTACMNT 3
LEAD -'BASED PAINT SCREENING RESULTS
No Text
Lead Based Paint Screening Results
Transit Center Phase II Project
Colorado State University, Lory Student Center
1101 Center Avenue Mall, Fort Collins, Colorado
Date
Room/Area
Component
Color
Reading
Lead Based Paint
5-5-05
228
Wall
White
-0.02
No
5-5-05
228
Door Frame
Cream
-0.16
No
5-5-05
200
Wall
Cream
-0.78
No
5-5-05
200
Door Trim
Cream
0.30
No
5-5-05
200
Window Base
Cream
0.36
No
5-5-05
227
Wall
Off White
-0.37
No
5-5-05
100
Wall
Pink
0.50
No
5-5-05
100
Door
Blue
-0.14
No
5-5-05
100
Locker
Blue
-0.45
No
5-5-05
149
Wall
White
0.04
No
5-5-05
149
Wall
Cream
0.44
No
5-5-05
138
Wall
White
0.12
No
5-5-05
138A
Wall
White
-0.07
No
5-5-05
138
Door Frame
Blue
0.11
No
5-5-05
178
Window Frame
Tan
-0.16
No
5-5-05
178
Wall
Cream
-0.65
No
5-5-05
178
Wall
Cream
0.09
No
5-5-05
178B
Wall
Cream
0.01
No
5-5-05
180
Wall
Yellow
-0.53
No
5-5-05
180
Wall
Off White
0.38
No
5-5-05
180
Door Trim
Cream
-0.18
No
5-5-05
41
Soffit
Green
-0.72
No
5-5-05
41
Soffit
Light Green
-0.77
No
5-5-05
41
Light Soffit
Gold
-0.22
No
5-5-05
41
Window Trim
Dark Green
0.17
No
5-5-05
41
Column
Yellow
-0.36
No
5-5-05
N96
Wall
White
-0.12
No
5-5-05
N96
Wall
Green
-0.08
No
5-5-05
N96
Wall
Yellow
0.24
No
5-5-05
N96
Wall
Yellow
-0.16
No
5-5-05
N96
Window Trim
Tan
-0.19
No
5-5-05
N95
Wall
Pale Yellow
-0.27
No
5-5-05
N95
Heat Register
Cream
-0.43
No
5-5-05
47
Column
White
0.05
No
5-5-05
47
Door Frame
Blue
-0.56
No
5-5-05
47
Door Frame
Blue
-0.68
No
5-5-05
47
Wall
Cream
-0.07
No
5-5-05
47H
Wall
Peach
0.11
No
5-5-05
47H
Wall
Dark Peach
0.18
No
5-5-05
47
Wall
White
-0.08
No
5-5-05
47
Electric Panel
Gray
0.11
No
5-5-05
N90
Wall
Yellow
-0.90
No
5-5-05
N90
Fire Extinguisher Case
White
0.03
No
5-5-05
N90
Door
Brown
0.04
No
5-5-05
48
Wall
White
-0.16
No
5-5-05
48C
Wall
White
-0.28
No
5-5-05
48
Door Trim
Teal
0.02
No
5-5-05
N94
Wall
Off White
-0.26
No
5-5-05
Exterior
Wall
White
-0.32
No
5-5-05
Exterior
Ceiling
White
0.69
No
5-5-05
Exterior
Wall
White
-0.90
No
5-5-05
Exterior
Wall
White
-0.10
No
No Text
ATTACHMENT 4
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INVENTORY
No Text
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15125 - PH'E EXPANSION JOINTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
e. Shouldered support of bellows to minimize stress at pipe -bellows weld.
f. External shroud
g. Minimum warranted life of 10,000 full -stroke cycles.
C. Rubber Expansion Joints: Fabric -reinforced butyl rubber with full-faced integral flanges,
external control rods and shall be internally reinforced with steel retaining rings over entire
surface of flanges, drilled to match flange bolt holes.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which expansion compensation products are to be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Install expansion joints where indicated, and elsewhere as determined by Installer for
adequate expansion of installed piping system. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, and in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations. Align units properly to avoid end loading and
torsional stress.
3.3 EXPANSION LOOPS
A. Fabricate expansion loops to dimensions indicated, in locations indicated, for adequate
expansion compensation of installed piping system. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment
guides as indicated, to properly anchor and align piping in relationship to expansion loops.
3.4 EXPANSION COMPENSATION FOR RISERS AND TERMINALS
A. Install connection between piping mains and risers with at least five (5) pipe fittings including
tee in main. Install connections between piping risers and terminal units with at least four (4)
pipe fittings, including tee in riser.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins expansion joints and elsewhere as
indicated.
B. Anchor to building substrate.
END OF SECTION 15125
15125-3
Hazardous Material Inventory
Transit Center Phase H Project
Colorado State University, Lory Student Center
1101 Center Avenue Mall, Fort Collins, Colorado
Date
Room/Area
Exit Signs
Fluorescent
Bulbs
Ballasts
Smoke/Heat Detectors,
Sodium/Mercury
Vapor Bulbs
5-5-05
41
36
24
1
5-5-05
43
16
8
1
5-5-05
47 - 47H
109
51
5
5-5-05
48 - 48C
1
88
44
1
5-5-05
49
24
12
5-5-05
N90
2
16
8
1
5-5-05
N91
6
6
5-4-05
N92
2
1
1
5-5-05
N94
6
6
5-5-05
N96
2
64
32
2
5-5-05
138 — 138A
36
18
2
5-5-05
178 through 178D
108
54
3
5-5-05
180
12
6
5-5-05
200
1
16
8
2
5-5-05
201
1
5-5-05
227
1
5-5-05
228
24
12
1
5-5-05
Exterior
2
No Text
ATTACHMENT 5
ONSUILTANT . CERTIFICATIONS
No Text
NY,
10 �p jeU -'k k� —Ge�YrN V
X
.hli.... y"c.ir Yet S X k V k4 VVJl4 ".0 , ""'N "A 0', 1,J
,4 ",W "—k�
N
7V
�0v. lir 64"
M
, 4
V;1_1
STATE OFCOLORADO
ASBESTOS
CERTIFICATION*
-JLIL.JL
Colorado Department of Public Health
and Environment
Air Pollution Control Division
This certifies that
Michael Phillip Castell
Certification No: 4210
has met the requirements of 25-7-507, C.R.S. and Air Quality Control
Commission Regulation No. 8, Part B, and is hereby certified by the
state of Colorado in the following discipline:
Inspector/Management Planner*
Issued: 11/9/2004
Expires on: 11/9/2005
CC A t�6onze CD Representative
This certificate is valid only with the possession of a current Division -approved training course
certification in the discipline specified above.
SEAL
No Text
nvi ron ental
Eraining
onsulting
2761 West Oxford Avenue #7
Englewood, CO 80110
(303)781-0422
CERTIFIES THAT
This course meets the
requirements of
AQCC Reg.#8
MICHAEL P. CASTELL
has successfully completed
the EPA -APPROVED AHERA ASBESTOS COURSE for MANAGEMENT PLANNER
and passed the required examination in that discipline
This course is EPA -approved under Section 206 of the Toxic Substance
Course Date
No. of hours
Exam date
Certificate No
Expires
09/30—10/01104
16
10/01 /04
DOI00104 - 18AM
10101105
Authorized Signature
Act (TSCA)
without raised seal
No Text
This course meets the
requirements of
raining
onsultinm
2761 West Oxford Avenue 47
Englewood, CO 80110
(303)781-0422
CERTIFIES THAT
MICHAEL P. CASTELL
has successfully completed the
EPA -APPROVED AHERA ANNUAL REFRESHER COURSE for INSPECTOR
and passed the required examination in that discipline
This course is EPA -approved under Section 206 of the Toxic Substance Control Act (TSCA)
Course Date
09/21/04
No. of hours
4
Certificate No.
DR092104 - 03AI
Expires
09/21/05
Authorized Signature
No Text
d
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Meters and Gauges required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or
specified in other Division 15 sections.
B. The Project will have selected building systems commissioned. The equipment and systems
to be commissioned are specified in Section 01810. The commissioning process and
contractor responsibilities are described in Section 0 18 10.
C. Types of Meters and Gauges specified in this section include the following:
Temperature Gauges and Fittings:
a. Direct Mount Dial Thermometers
b. Remote Reading Dial Thermometers
C. Dial Type Insertion Thermometers
d. Solar Digital Thermometers
e. Thermometer Wells
f. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs
2. Pressure Gauges and Fittings:
a. Pressure Gauges
b. Pressure Gauge Cocks
C. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs
3. Flow Measuring Meters:
a. Venturi Tube Flow Measuring Elements
b. Calibrated Balancing Valves
D. Meters and gauges furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment are specified as part of
equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of meters and gauges,
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL Standards pertaining to meters and
gauges.
2. ANSI and ISA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI and
Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standards pertaining to construction and
installation of meters and gauges.
15135-1
on�
STATE OF COLORADO
ASBESTOS
rr,
_D
qL-E FICATION*,
o
tment of Public Health.
Colorado Depar
and EnA vir ampnt
o
Air -Pollution i)ivis
onM
..........
A
This c
Troy.
Sanders
. . . . . . . . Cerfifte,ation,
Nq: 9346
N.
has met therequirements of 2577-507� Cj�,S. and Air
Quality Control
ommission Regulation No,.:,I$ PaTt:,%:and is hereby certified
state ofC
'o104dq in the fqIloWiTi -9"discipline:
.
by the
Representative
* This certificate is valid only With the possession of current Division -approved training course
certification its the discipline specified above.
No Text
10056 Franklin, Thornton, Colorado 80229
Tel: 303.424.4647
Fax: 303.432.8669
CERTIFIES THAT
TROY C. SANDERS
Has successfully completed
The EPA -Approved AHERA Annual Refresher Course for
INSPECTOR/MANAGEMENT PLANNER . This course is EPA -approved under
Section 206 of the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) and meets the requirements of
Colorado Regulation No. 8.
Course Date: 3/14/05
Exam Date: NIA
Certificate No.: AE05-013-BI/MP-01
Expiration Date: 3/14/06 K. Jay Ga "Pr ent
No Text
APPENDIX B
No Text
ralm-
• •
Mai i M c e e P o•• r I s
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE 11
LORY STUDENT CENTER
FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
Prepared For:
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
OPERATION SERVICES DEPARTMENT
P.O. Box 580
117 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522-0580
Attention: Mr. Steve White
Facilities Project Manager
Project No. FC03417-125
February 3, 2005
375 E. Horsetooth Road I The Shores Office Park { Building 3, Suite 100 1 Ft. Collins, Colorado 80525
Telephone:970-206-9455 Fax:970-206-9441
No Text
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
1
SUMMARY OF CONCLUSIONS
1
SITE CONDITIONS
2
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION
3
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
3
SEISMICITY
5
CSU TRANSIT CENTER ADDITION
5
CONNECTION TO EXISTING BUILDINGS
10
RETAINING WALLS and STAIR AREAS
10
SLAB -ON -GRADE FLOOR
12
BELOW GRADE AREAS
14
PAVEMENT
14
SURFACE DRAINAGE 16
EXCAVATION AND UTILITIES 17
CONCRETE 17
LIMITATIONS 18
FIGURE 1 - LOCATIONS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS
FIGURE 2 - SUMMARY LOGS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS
FIGURES 3 THROUGH 7 - SWELL CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS
FIGURE 8 - GRADATION TEST RESULTS
TABLE 1 - SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
APPENDIX A - CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST FOR PAVEMENTS
APPENDIX B - MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
No Text
4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Certification: Provide meters and gauges whose accuracies, under specified operating
conditions, are certified by manufacturer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions for each type of meter and gauge. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated
performance curves, certified where indicated. Submit meter and gauge schedule showing
manufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gauge.
B. All flow measuring devices to be provided shall be reviewed and approved by the Test and
Balance Contractor and the Temperature Control Contractor for proper scale, rangeability and
function prior to submitting shop drawings. The Test and Balance Contractor and
Temperature Control Contractor shall provide a typed letter stating this review has been
completed and included with shop drawing submittals.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of meter and
gauge. Include this data and product data in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with
requirements of Division 15.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Direct Mount Dial Thermometers:
a. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal
b. Miljoco Corp.
C. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
d. Dwyer
2. Remote Reading Dial Thermometers:
a. Ametek/U.S. Gauge
b. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal
C. Miljoco Corp.
d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
3. Dial Type Insertion Thermometers and Wells:
a. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal
b. Taylor Instrument Co.
C. Miljoco Corp.
d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
4. Solar Digital Thermometers:
a. Miljoco Corp.
5. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs:
a. Fairfax Company
b. Peterson Equipment Co.
15135 - 2
SCOPE
This report presents the results of our soils and foundations investigation for
the proposed CSU Transit Center to be constructed as an addition adjacent to the
north side of the existing Lory Student Center building on the Colorado State
University campus, located southwest of the intersection of Laurel Street and South
Meldrum Street in Fort Collins, Colorado. The project is a joint undertaking between
the City of Fort Collins and Colorado State University. Our investigation was
conducted to evaluate subsurface conditions at the site and recommend geotechnical
criteria for design and construction of the transit center addition foundation, slab -on -
grade floors, walkways, and vehicle pavements.
Included in this report are descriptions of the subsurface conditions found in
our borings, our characterization of the engineering properties of the subsoils,
recommended foundation(s) for the addition and geotechnical design criteria for them
and other design and construction details influenced by the subsoils. Our
conclusions are summarized in the following paragraphs. More complete
descriptions of subsurface conditions, results of field and laboratory tests and our
opinions, conclusions and recommendations are included in subsequent sections.
SUMMARY OF CONCLUSIONS
1. The borings drilled for the transit center addition to the student center
building penetrated 8 feet to 13 feet of medium stiff, sandy clays over
nil to 6 feet of loose gravelly sands underlain by hard to very hard
claystone bedrock at 13 feet and 14 feet with the upper nil to 4 feet
weathered to a very stiff clay. Ground water was measured at 10 feet to
13 feet when the borings were drilled and 11 feet to 12 feet several days
after.
The borings drilled from the plaza level behind the existing retaining
walls in areas of plaza floor settlement penetrated a 3-inch concrete
pavement over 6 inches or 8 inches of coarse gravel underlain by 13
feet and 15 feet of loose, clayey sand, man -placed fill underlain by 1
foot and 5 feet of natural, medium stiff, sandy clays and then very stiff
clays (weathered claystone bedrock) at 21 feet. No ground water was
found in the borings in the plaza. A 4-inch space was found under the
concrete pavement at one boring location.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 1
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE 11
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
IF
2. The soils underlying the addition location are weak clays and sands.
We opine the transit center addition should be founded with straight -
shaft, drilled piers that penetrate the claystone bedrock to minimize the
differential movement between the existing building and the new
addition.
3. We believe the transit center ground floor can be a slab -on -grade floor.
Preparation of the subgrade is discussed in the "SLAB -ON -GRADE
FLOOR" section of this report.
4. Retaining walls attached to the new addition or existing building
should be founded with straight -shaft, drilled piers penetrating the
claystone bedrock. Freestanding retaining walls can be founded with
footings bearing on the natural soils.
5. Pavement design criteria are discussed in the "PAVEMENT" section of
this report.
6. The man -placed fill under the existing Lory Student Center plaza is
loose, clayey sands. We opine the man -placed fill under the existing
plaza is not an acceptable foundation strata or floor subgrade as
evidenced by the settlement of areas of the plaza. Reconstruction of
the existing stairway and appurtenances are discussed in the
"RETAINING WALLS AND STAIRS" section of this report.
SITE CONDITIONS
The transit center will be an addition to the north side of the student center
building. Presently landscaped areas, retaining walls and screen walls, walks and a
single -story building attached to the student center are located on the transit center
site. Exterior stairs from the parking area on the north side of the student center and
engineering building up to a second floor plaza are located east of the proposed
transit center site. The engineering building is located east of the stairs.
A parking lot and bus stops and shelters are located to the north and west of
the transit center addition site. The ground elevation on the south sides of the
student center and engineering building is at the second floor elevation of the
buildings. The ground level on the north sides of the engineering building and
student center is a story lower, at the ground elevation of the buildings.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 2
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE 11
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417.125
W
The second floor level between the student center and the engineering
building is a concrete paved plaza. The concrete is scored into squares and
rectangles. The plaza between the two buildings is partially covered by a roofed
passageway. The roof is supported on concrete columns. Portions of the plaza and
stairs adjacent to the student center and engineering building and behind the
retaining walls for the stairway have settled. Sections of the plaza pavement have
moved down and tilted relative to the building walls.
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION
We understand the proposed transit center building will be a three-story
structure with a steel frame. The present plan is to construct only the first story, but
design the foundation and superstructure of the first story for the future second and
third stories that will be added at some future date. The new structure will adjoin the
north side of the student center building. We have assumed for this study the ground
floor of the transit center will be at or very near the exterior ground elevation on the
north side of the student center.
The ground level to the north and west will be partially landscaped and
partially paved with 2-foot and 4-foot square sections of colored, scored concrete.
The existing stairs up to the plaza will be reconstructed and the plaza will be repaved.
The retaining wall east of the stairs will remain. The retaining and screen walls west
of the stairs will be removed for construction of the east wall of the transit center
building. Thus, the east wall of the transit center will be a retaining wall for the
backfill under the rebuilt stairs to the plaza.
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
We drilled and sampled five exploratory borings (THA through TH-5) in the
approximate footprint of the transit center addition and two borings (TH-6 and TH-7) in
the plaza where settlement has occurred. The boring locations are shown on Figure
1. Samples were obtained during drilling by driving a modified California sampler into
the soils and bedrock with a 140 lb. hammer falling 30 inches and by pushing thin
walled "Shelby" tube samplers into the soils using the drill rig hydraulic system.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 3
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
T
Standard penetration resistance tests were performed during sampling. The samples
were returned to our laboratory where they were classified and samples were
selected fortesting. Graphic logs summarizing the soils encountered in each boring
are presented on Figure 2. The results of our laboratory tests are presented on Figure
3 through Figure 8 and are summarized in Table I, attached.
The borings drilled for the transit center addition to the student center
penetrated 8 feet to 13 feet of medium stiff, sandy clays over nil to 6 feet of loose
gravelly sands underlain by hard to very hard claystone bedrock at 13 feet and 14 feet
with the upper nil to 4 feet weathered to a verystiff clay. Ground waterwas measured
at 10 feet to 13 feet when the borings were drilled and 11 feet to 12 feet several days
after.
The borings drilled from the plaza level in areas of plaza floor settlement
penetrated a 3-inch concrete pavement over 6 inches or 8 inches of coarse gravel
underlain by 13 feet and 15 feet of loose, clayey sand, man -placed fill underlain by 1
foot and 5 feet of natural, medium stiff, sandy clays and then very stiff clays
(weathered claystone bedrock) at 21 feet. No ground water was found in the borings
in the plaza. A 4-inch space was found under the concrete pavement at one boring
location (TH-6).
Free water was encountered at 10 feet to 12 feet deep in TH-1, TH-2, TH-4, and
TH-5 at the time of drilling. All the holes except TH-1 and TH-4 were backfilled
immediately after drilling to reduce the hazard to pedestrians in the area. Perforated
plastic pipe was inserted in borings TH-1 and TH-4 and the depths to ground water
measured several days after drilling at depths of 10 feet and 12 feet, respectively.
Ground water will fluctuate seasonally. Our experience suggests the ground water
level can rise of the order of 5 feet during wetter seasons and wetter years.
Three samples of sandy clay and four samples of the claystone bedrock were
tested in our one dimensional swell consolidation apparatus to determine volume
change characteristics. Measured swell ranged from 0 percent to 2.0 percent when
the sample was flooded under pressures of 1,000 pounds per square foot (psf) to
3,000 psf. We judge the sandy clays and claystone have low swell potentials. A
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II 4
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
sample of the clayey, sand fill had an unconfined compressive strength of 2,400 psf.
The results of our laboratory tests are shown, on Figure 3 through Figure 8 and are
summarized in Table 1, attached.
SEISMICITY
Based upon the 1997 Uniform Building Code (1997 UBC) the site is located in
Seismic Zone 1, with Soil Profile Type So. If the 2000 or 2003 International Building
Code applies, the site classifies at Site Class D. The soil and ground water conditions
indicate low susceptibility to liquefaction.
CSU TRANSIT CENTER ADDITION
The proposed transit center will be a three-story addition to the student center
building. The first story will be built soon but the second and third stories will be
added at some future date. Several characteristics of the addition influence the
selection of a feasible and practical foundation for the addition. Two considerations
that are common to most additions are a) the influence of the addition foundation on
the existing building foundation and b) the differential movement between the new
addition and the existing building. Athird consideration forthe transit center addition
is that stories will be added at future dates. Each new story will add additional load to
the addition foundation causing it to "adjust".
We have considered several foundations for the transit center addition
including footings bearing on the natural ground, end -bearing piling driven to refusal
in the claystone and straight -shaft, drilled piers penetrating the claystone. We do not
believe end -bearing piling are a feasible foundation alternative because (1) the
locations of at least some of the piling will be close to the foundations of the existing
building, therefore, increasing the possibility the existing building would be damaged
during pile driving and (2) the claystone is comparatively shallow so piling will be
more expensive than drilled piers.
We opine footings bearing on the natural ground have three disadvantages,
namely (a) the addition footings next to the existing building would cause some
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 5
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417.125
IF
settlement of the existing building foundation if it is founded with footings and
possibly the ground floor in the existing building, (b) the natural ground is medium
stiff clays and loose sands which will support only low footing bearing pressures
resulting in large footings and (c) the settlement of the addition that does occur will
be entirely differential relative to the student center and as each future story is added
the already completed parts of the addition would adjust to the settlement caused by
the load added to the footings. This will likely cause at least some superficial damage
to the parts of the addition that are finished.
We believe the better foundation forthe addition is straight -shaft, drilled piers
into the claystone. Drilled piers are a commonly used foundation and were used to
found the recent addition to the engineering building. Drilled piers do not have the
noise or vibrations associated with their installation that piling do. Piers at the transit
addition site can be designed to limit foundation movement as the future additions
are added to nearly eliminate the risk of adjustment related damage to the addition as
future stories are added and reduce to a minimum the differential movement between
the new addition and the existing building.
We recommend founding the addition with straight -shaft, drilled piers
designed using the criteria written below. For the reasons cited above, we do not
believe footings of piling are practical foundations for the addition and have not
discussed them further. If other members of the design team or owner request, we
will be pleased to discuss footings and piling further and provide the geotechnical
design criteria for them.
We recommend the following geotechnical criteria for the design and
construction of a straight -shaft drilled pier foundation for the transit center addition.
1. Straight -shaft drilled piers should penetrate the hard claystone bedrock
underlying the weathered bedrock at least 5 feet. Piers that bottom
above elevation 65 (see Figure 2) should be designed for a maximum
end -bearing pressure of 25,000 psf and a side -shear value of 2,500 psf
for that of the pier in the hard claystone above elevation 65. Piers that
bottom below elevation 65 can be designed for a maximum end -bearing
pressure of 65,000 psf and a side shear value of 6,500 psf for that part
of a pier below elevation 65 and 2,500 psf for that part of the pier in the
hard claystone above elevation 65. All piers should be designed for a
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 6
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE If
CTL T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
minimum dead -load pressure of 10,000 psf based on the cross -
sectional area of the pier at the top. It should be noted that only part of
the total dead -load will "come-on" the piers as each story is added.
This will likely complicate achieving the desired minimum dead -toad on
the piers when only the first story is built.
Should it be difficult to obtain the desired minimum dead -load on a
lightly loaded pier then the pier should be lengthened to take the
difference in the "desired" minimum dead -load and "obtainable" dead -
load by side shear resistance between the pier concrete and claystone.
The side shear values given above can be used to calculate the needed
additional pier length.
Should piers be subjected to uplift 0.7 times the side shear values
given above should be used to calculate pier resistance to uplift.
2. The pier should be reinforced full length and the reinforcement should
extend into the grade beams or foundation walls. Piers should be
reinforced with at least two No. 6 reinforcing bars, but no pier should
be reinforced with less reinforcement than results in a ratio of steel
area to pier cross-section area of 0.005. All reinforcement should be
Grade 60 steel.
3. A 4-inch void space should be provided beneath grade beams between
the piers to help concentrate the dead -load of the addition on the piers.
4. Piers should have a center4o-center spacing of at least three pier
diameters when designing for vertical loading conditions or they
should be designed as a group. Piers aligned in the direction of lateral
forces should have a center -to -center spacing of at least six pier
diameters. Reductions for closely spaced piers are discussed in the
following section.
5. The pier holes will need to be cased to permit cleaning and inspection
of the pier holes due to the ground water and caving soils. The pier
hole drilling contractor should have casing on the site before starting
pier hole drilling. At least 5 feet of concrete should be maintained
above the ground water level before starting and during casing
removal.
6. The claystone is hard to very hard and will be difficult to drill with the
largest of pier hole drilling rigs. The pier hole -drilling contractor should
be required to use a large, heavy pier hole -drilling rig such as Hughes
LLDH (or equivalent) to drill pier holes. Refusal with a smaller rig at
penetrations into the claystone less than specified is not satisfactory
evidence the anticipated bearing strata for a pier has been reached. If
refusal with a large, heavy rig is reached at a penetration into the
claystone less than specified in the contract documents we should be
called to confirm the bearing strata is acceptable.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 7
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
7. Concrete should have a slump of 6 inches (+/-1 inch). Concrete should
be ready and placed in the pier holes immediately after the holes are
drilled, cleaned, observed and the reinforcing steel is set.
a. The installation of the drilled piers should be observed by a
representative of our firm to confirm the bearing strata are that we
anticipated from our borings.
The piers will likely be laterally loaded from wind or seismic loads. Several
methods are available to analyze laterally loaded piers. With a pier length to diameter
ratio of 7 or greater, we believe the method of analysis developed by Matlock and
Reese is most appropriate. Should the length to diameter ratio prove less than 7 we
should be called to provide the needed criteria for a "rigid" pier. The method is an
iterative procedure using applied loading and soil profile to develop deflection and
moment versus depth curves. The computer programs LPILE and COM624 were
developed to perform this procedure. Suggested criteria for LPILE analysis are
presented in the following table.
TABLE A
SOIL INPUT DATA FOR LPILE or COM624
Clay Soils or °-
Granular, Solls' "
Bedrock `
.w sU001
layfil)a„'
Stiff Clay w/o
Soil Type
Free Water
Sand
Claystone
Effective Unit Weight,
Above Water 0.07
0.07
0.07
Below Water 0.03
Y (pci)
Cohesive Strength,
10
-
50
c (psi)
Friction Angle 0
(Degrees)
-
35
-
Soil Strain, e5o (in/in)
0.005
-
0.002
p-y Modulus ks (pci)
1,000
90
2,000
The E50 represents the strain corresponding to 50 percent of the maximum
principle stress difference.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 8
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
{
I
We believe the following formulas in Table B are appropriate for calculating
horizontal modulus of subgrade reaction (Kh),values.
TABLE B
MODULI OF SUBGRADE REACTION
_ .Clay or.Cla -Fill ..
Granular Soils_
Bedrock
Modulus of Subgrade
Reaction Kh (tcf)
Kh = 20
d
Kh = 20z
d
Kh = 150
d
Where d = pier diameter (ft) and z = depth (ft).
Often it is necessary to place piers close together. For axial loading, a
minimum spacing of three diameters is recommended to avoid reducing a piers load
carrying capacity. At one diameter, (piers touching) the skin friction reduction factor
for both piers would be 0.5. End bearing values would not be reduced provided the
bases of the piers are at similar elevations. Linear interpolation can be used between
one and three diameters.
Piers in -line with the direction of the lateral load should have a minimum
spacing of six diameters (center -to -center) based upon the larger pier. If a closer
spacing is required, the modulus of subgrade reaction for initial and trailing piers
should be reduced. At a spacing of three diameters, the effective modulus of
subgrade reaction of the first pier can be estimated by multiplying the given modulus
by 0.6. For trailing piers in a line at three -diameter spacing, the factor is 0.4. Linear
interpolation can be used for spacing between three and six diameters.
Reductions to the modulus of subgrade reaction can be accomplished in
LPILE by inputting the appropriate modification factors for the p-y curves. Reducing
the modulus of subgrade reaction in trailing piers will result in greater computed
deflections on these piers. In practice, the grade beam can force deflections of piers
to be equal. Load -deflection graphs can be generated for each pier in the group using
the appropriate p-multiplier values. The sum of the piers' lateral load resistance at
CITY OF FORT COLLINS g
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
selected deflections can be used to develop a total lateral load versus deflection
relationship for the system of piers.
For lateral loads perpendicular to the line of piers, a minimum spacing of three
diameters can be used with no capacity reduction. At one diameter, (piers touching)
the piers can be analyzed as a single unit. Linear interpolation can be used for
intermediate conditions.
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING BUILDINGS
We believe the existing student center building may have been founded with
piers, but no information regarding the existing foundation or geotechnical design
criteria were available to us. The student center building has been completed for
several years. It is likely the movement this building will experience has occurred.
However, the new transit center addition will experience some movement as
the foundation strata "adjusts" to the imposed foundation loads. All movement of the
addition will be differential relative to the existing building. This movement needs to
be considered in the design of the joint between the addition and the existing
building. We estimate the differential movement between the existing building and a
pier founded addition will be of the order of 0.75 inches when the piers are completely
loaded by the completed three story addition. However, part of the total movement
will occur as each story is completed.
RETAINING WALLS AND STAIR AREAS
We believe the existing stairs will be removed and a new set of stairs will be
constructed. We assumed this work will include new, reinforced concrete retaining
walls.
Rigid concrete retaining walls that would be free to rotate sufficiently to
mobilize the strength of the backfill can be designed for the "active" earth pressure
condition. Such freestanding walls can be founded with footings bearing on the
natural sand and clay soils and designed for a maximum soil bearing pressure of
1,500 psf. If retaining walls are connected to side walls or buildings and cannot
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 10
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
I
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSITCENTER
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
C. Universal Lancaster
d. Sisco
e. MG Piping Products Co.
6. Pressure Gauges:
a. Ametek/U.S. Gauge
b. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal
C. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.
d. Miljoco Corp.
e. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
f. MG Piping Products Co.
g. Dwyer
7. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs:
a.
Fairfax Company
b.
Peterson Equipment Co.
C.
Universal Lancaster
d.
Sisco
e.
MG Piping Products Co.
f.
Miljoco Corp.
8. Venturi Tube Flow Measuring Elements:
a. Gerand
b. Barco/Aeroquip Corp.
C. Griswold
d. Preso
9. Calibrated Balancing Valves:
a. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Division
b. "Flowset" - Flow Design, Inc.
C. Thrush Products, Inc.
d. Tour and Anderson, Inc.
e. Gerand'Balvalve Indicator"
f. Griswold
g. Preso
2.2 DIRECT MOUNT DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. General: Provide direct mount dial thermometers of materials, capacities, and range
indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.
B. Type: Vapor tension, universal angle.
C. Case: Stainless steel, drawn steel, or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2 inch diameter.
D. Adjustable Joint: Brass or die cast aluminum, 180 degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360
degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
E. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phospher bronze bourdon pressure tube, one (1) scale division
accuracy.
15135 - 3
m
rotate, they should be founded with straight -shaft drilled piers designed as discussed
above for the addition.
We recommend an equivalent fluid density of 40 pcf for the "active" condition.
We recommend an equivalent fluid density of 55 pcf for the "at rest' condition. An
equivalent fluid density of 270 pcf should be used for the "passive" condition. These
values do not include an allowance for surcharge or hydrostatic pressure.
Unbalanced hydrostatic pressure behind a wall caused by differential water levels
across the wall can be relieved by providing weep holes through the wall.
We recommend the following additional geotechnical design criteria and
construction guidelines for retaining wall footing foundations:
Footings should bear on undisturbed natural soils. All existing man -
placed fill should be removed from under footings. Where soil is
loosened during excavation, it should be removed from the floor of
footing excavations.
2. Footings bearing on the natural soils can be designed for a maximum
soil bearing pressure of 1,500 psf. The soil pressure can be increased
30 percent for short duration live -loads such as wind or seismic loads.
3. The subsoils beneath footings can be assigned a coefficient of friction
of 0.4 to resist lateral loads.
4. The ground under footings should be protected from freezing. We
recommend placing footing bottoms at least 30 inches below exterior
grade to protect the ground under footings from freezing.
5. Completed footing excavations should be observed by a representative
of our firm to confirm that the soils are as we anticipated from our
borings.
The backfill behind the retaining walls can be constructed using soils from the
required excavation that are free of debris, organic material and are less than 3 inches
in diameter. Backfill beside the retaining wall should be placed in thin lifts, moisture
conditioned to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content, and compacted to at
least 95 percent of standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698).
Two of our exploratory borings were placed in retaining wall backfill areas
behind the existing retaining walls (between the existing student center building and
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 11
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
the existing engineering building) to investigate the soil conditions where settlement
is visible in the concrete walkways. The existing wall backfill we encountered is
loose, clayey sands with some included medium stiff clay layers. The densities of the
samples of the backfill we retrieved, but more importantly, the settlement of the
existing plaza pavement is evidence the backfill was not compacted well enough
when it was placed. It is not clear if settlement of the backfill is complete. We believe
it likely if the existing concrete pavement is removed and simply replaced with new
pavement on the existing backfill, that with time the new pavement will settle
unacceptably. We believe that in order to achieve acceptable performance of the
backfill under the stairs up to the plaza and the plaza the existing backfill should be
completely removed and replaced with backfill constructed of coarse sands and fine
gravels with 100 percent finerthan 3-inch particles and less than 10 percent passing
the number 200 screen. This backfill should be placed in 8-inch thick (maximum)
loose lifts and compacted to at least 75 percent of relative density (ASTM D 4253 and
ASTM D 4254).
SLAB -ON -GRADE FLOOR
We anticipated the proposed addition will be constructed with a concrete slab -
on -grade ground floor. The natural soils encountered at this site have a low swell
potential and we consider the risk for slab movement due to swelling soil to be low.
The only method to eliminate the risk of floor movement due to swelling soils is the
use of a structural floor supported by the foundation system with a space under the
floor. If no floor movement can be tolerated, a structural floor should be considered.
If a structural floor is used, we recommend a minimum air space of 6 inches between
the soil and the floor.
We understand the finished ground floor elevation of the new addition will be
the same as the floor elevation of the existing student center building. Therefore, we
believe the slab -on -grade floor will be on the natural sands and clays encountered in
our borings in that area. If man -placed fill is encountered, such as that found in the
retaining wall areas, it should not be relied on for floor or foundation support. In our
opinion, the fill should be removed and replaced with on -site soils or similar, non -
expansive, imported soils free of organic matter and other deleterious materials.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 12
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
I
I
Structural fill under the building floor constructed of the on -site soils or similar
off -site soils should have a maximum size of 3,inches and should be placed in 8 inch
maximum loose lifts, moisture conditioned to within 2 percent of optimum moisture
content and compacted to at least 95 percent of standard Proctor maximum dry
density (ASTM D 698). Subgrade soils to receive fill should be scarified a minimum of
6 inches, moisture treated to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content and
compacted to at least 95 percent of standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D
698).
Where slabs -on -grade are used, the following recommendations should be
incorporated into slab design and construction:
A gravel layer of 4 inches or more can be placed below the concrete to
provide a capillary break. We do not recommend a plastic vapor barrier
be placed at the mid -point of the gravel layer because of the potential to
trap moisture below the slab -on -grade floor. Flooring manufacturers
should provide specific requirements according to the products being
considered for the floor surface.
2. Conventional slabs should be separated from exterior walls and interior
bearing members with a slip joint, which allows free vertical movement
of the slabs. These joints must be maintained by building owners to
avoid transfer of movement.
3. Underslab plumbing should be thoroughly pressure tested during
construction for leaks and be provided with flexible couplings. Gas
and water lines leading to slab -supported appliances should be
constructed with flexibility. These connections must be maintained by
the owner.
4. Slab bearing partitions should be designed to withstand movement.
Doorways should also be designed to allow vertical movement of slabs.
To limit damage in the event of movement, sheetrock should not
extend to the floor. Partition voids and other connections should be
monitored and reestablished before they close to less than 2 inch.
5. Plumbing and utilities which pass through slabs should be isolated
from the slabs. Heating and air-conditioning systems supported by
slabs should be provided with flexible connections capable of vertical
movement so that slab movement is not transmitted to the ductwork.
These connections must be maintained by the building owner.
6. Exterior slabs with overhanging roofs should be structurally supported
on the same foundations as the building.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 13
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
7. Exterior slabs -on -grade without roofs and other exterior flatwork
should be isolated from the foundation or be designed so that slab
movement does not affect the foundation.
8. Frequent control joints should be provided in conventional slabs -on -
grade to reduce problems associated with shrinkage and curling.
Panels, which are approximately square generally, perform better than
rectangular areas. The American Concrete Institute (ACI) recommends
panels no larger than 20 feet by 20 feet. We advocate an additional
joint about 3 feet from and parallel to foundation walls.
BELOW GRADE AREAS
No basement areas are planned forthe building. Forthis condition, perimeter
drains are not usually necessary around the building. The building will likely have an
elevator pit area. Lateral earth pressure on the pit walls can be calculated using an
equivalent fluid density of 50 pcf. This value does not include pressure due to
surcharge or hydrostatic pressure. We should be contacted to provide foundation
drain recommendations if plans change to include basement areas.
PAVEMENT
Subgrade soils in pavement areas are expected to predominantly consist of
silty and clayey sands and sandy clays that have fair to poor subgrade support
characteristics. We calculated pavement thickness forthis project using a Hveem R-
value of 10. If imported fill is utilized, it should have equal or better pavement support
characteristics than the on -site soils. Imported soils to support pavement should be
approved by our firm before use on the site.
We designed the pavement thickness using the City of Fort Collins pavement
design criteria for a commercial collector street. We used an equivalent daily load
application (EDLA) of 50 and calculated an equivalent single axle load (ESAL) of
730,000. If traffic volumes are expected to differ from our assumption, we should be
notified to review our recommendations. Pavement section alternatives are shown on
Table C (below).
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 14
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE it
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
TABLE C
PAVEMENT SECTION ALTERNATIVES
Full -Depth
Asphalt Concrete over
Portland
Asphalt Concrete
Aggregate Base -Course
Cement
Concrete
Commercial
9"
7" AC + 8" ABC
9"
Collector Street
Our experience indicates Portland cement concrete pavements generally
perform better than asphaltic concrete pavement in truck and bus areas due to the
small turning radii, slow speeds, and frequent parking of trucks in these areas. A
minimum section consisting of 9 inches of Portland cement concrete should be used.
If Portland cement concrete is used, joints should be provided per ACI
recommendations. These pavement sections should be reviewed subsequent to
grading based on the materials placed at subgrade.
The design of a pavement system is as much a function of the paving materials
as the support characteristics of the subgrade. If the pavement system is constructed
of inferior materials, the life and serviceability will be substantially reduced. Prior to
paving, the subgrade should be moisture conditioned and compacted. Guideline
recommendations for pavement construction are contained in Appendix A.
The asphalt component of the pavement sections has been designed
assuming at least 1,800 pound Marshall stability. Normally, an asphaltic concrete
should have a low permeability and should be designed with awell-graded aggregate
mix. The oil content, void ratio, and gradation need to be considered in design. We
recommend a mix design be performed and that periodic checks on the job site be
made to verify compliance with project specifications.
The aggregate base course, if used, should have a minimum Hveem
Stabilometer R-value of 78. Base course that meets Colorado Department of
Transportation Standards will normally meet this requirement. However, base course
varies considerably in strength and moisture stability. We recommend the material
planned for construction be laboratory testing prior to importing.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 15
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE 11
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
IF
If the construction materials cannot meet these recommendations, then the
pavement design should be evaluated based upon available materials. Materials and
placement methods should conform to the requirements of the City of Fort Collins,
Colorado State University, or those listed in the Colorado Department of
Transportation Standard Specifications. All materials planned for construction
should be submitted and testing performed to verify compliance with the
specifications.
SURFACE DRAINAGE
The performance of foundations, slab -on -grade floors and exterior concrete
flatwork depends upon subsoil moisture conditions. The risk of wetting the
foundation soils and subgrades can be reduced by planned and maintained surface
grading. We recommend the following precautions be observed during construction
and maintained after completion of the building:
1. Wetting or drying of the open foundation excavations should be
avoided during construction. Clay soils within the footing excavations
should be kept moist during construction.
2. Positive drainage should be provided away from all foundations. We
recommend providing a minimum slope of at least 6 inches in the first
10 feet away from the foundation in landscaped areas. Pavements
adjacent to the buildings should also be sloped for positive drainage
away from the buildings. Water should not be allowed to pond near the
buildings or on pavements.
3. Roof drains should be directed away from buildings. Down spout
extensions and splash blocks should be provided at discharge points.
We do not recommend directing roof drains below floor slabs.
4. Landscaping should be carefully designed to minimize irrigation in
building areas. Plants used close to foundation walls should be limited
to those with low moisture requirements; irrigated grass should not be
located within 5 feet of the foundation. Sprinklers should not discharge
within 5 feet of foundations. Irrigation should be limited to the
minimum amount sufficient to maintain vegetation; application of more
water will increase the likelihood of slab and foundation movements.
5. Plastic membranes should not be used to cover the ground surface
immediately surrounding the building. These membranes tend to trap
moisture and prevent normal evaporation from occurring. Geotextile
fabrics can be used to limit weed growth and allow for evaporation.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 16
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
EXCAVATION AND UTILITIES
Excavations of 5 to 10 feet may be needed for utility construction or relocation.
We believe the near -surface soils can be excavated with heavy-duty excavation
equipment.
We recommend the owners and contractor become familiar with applicable
local, State and Federal safety regulations, including the current OSHA Excavation
and Trench Safety Standards. The contractor should be aware that in no case should
slope height, inclinations, excavations or depths including utility trench excavations
exceed those specified in local, State and Federal safety regulations. Specifically, the
current "OSHA Health and Safety Standards for Excavations" should be followed.
Excavations should be sloped or braced to meet OSHA requirements. We
believe the silty to clayey sands encountered below the site will be classified as Type
C soils using the OSHA criteria. For Type C soils, excavations should slope at 1.5:1
(horizontal to vertical) or be braced. The stiff, sandy clay may classify as Type B soil,
allowing excavation slopes of 1:1. Where type A or B soils overly type C soils, the
type C soils should control the slope design. Our preliminary soil classification is
based on the materials encountered in our exploratory test borings. The soil
penetrated by the proposed excavation will vary across the site. The contractors
responsible person should evaluate the soil exposed in excavations as part of the
contractor's safety procedures. If an excavation (including a utility trench) is
extended to a depth of more than 20 feet, it will be necessary to have the side slopes
designed by a registered engineer. Vehicles and soil stockpiles should be kept a
minimum lateral distance from the crest of the slope equal to one-half the slope
height. The exposed slope face should also be protected against the elements. As an
alternative to temporary slopes, vertical excavations can be temporarily shored.
CONCRETE
Concrete that comes into contact with the subsoil and bedrock can be subject
to sulfate attack. Three samples from the site tested in the laboratory exhibited
CITY OF FORT COLLINS 17
CSII TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE 11
CTL I T PROJECT NO, FC03417-125
sulfate concentrations of 0.002 percent to 0.006 percent. Sulfate concentrations in
this range have negligible effect on concrete according to the American Concrete
Institute (ACI). ACI indicates Type I or Type II cement can be used for concrete that
comes into contact with the subsoil at this site.
LIMITATIONS
Our borings were spaced to obtain a reasonably accurate picture of subsoil
conditions. Variations in the subsoil conditions not indicated by our borings will
occur. We should observe drilled pier installation to confirm soils are as we
anticipated from our borings. We should observe placement and test compaction of
all fills, backfill, and pavements.
We believe this investigation was conducted in a manner consistent with that
level of care and skill ordinarily used by geotechnical engineers practicing in this area
at this time. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made. The recommendations
presented in this report are based on our understanding of the proposed building.
We should be advised if the building is different from our understanding so we can
review our criteria.
be of further service in discussing the contents of this report, or in
the anf�r ence of the subsurface conditions on the design, please call.
FRANK .410LLIDP,
F
sent)
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
18
0
SCALE: 1 "=30'
ING
TH-4
•
LORY STUDENT
CENTER
TH-5
•
= TOP OF I TH-2
GROUND FLOOR •
SLAB (EL. 100.9
ASSUMED BY CTL 1 T)
TH-1
•
I.6 RETAI
• Wi i
�STAIRS'�
TH-7'J
•; RETAINING
WALLS
ENGINEERING
BUILDING
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
CSU TRANSIT CENTER
PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
W
� J
0
Lu U
2
vi LAUREL ST.
SIT
UNIVERSITY AVE
CSU CAMPUS
VICINITY MAP
(FORT COLLINS AREA)
NOT TO SCALE
LEGEND:
TH-1 LOCATION OF EXPLORATORY
TH-3 • BORINGS
•
LOCATION OF BENCHMARK
EXISTING STRUCTURES
PROPOSED STRUCTURE
Locations of
Exploratory
Borings
FIGURE 1
-t
LOWER
TH-1
TH-2
TH-3
El. 100
El. 99
El. 98 R OVER 6 INCHES (TH-7), 8 INCHES (TH-6) AND 0
INCH SPACE WAS FOUND IN TH-6 JUST BELOW
120
—
:LAYEY (SC).
D LENSES, SANDY, MOIST, BROWN (CL).
— 110
HOIST, BROWN (SP).
GROUND FLOOR EL
PROPOSED ADDITILENSES, MOIST, RUST, BROWN, OLIVE
—
(ASSUMED BY CTL
— 100
Jo
i, BROWN, OLIVE (BEDROCK).
''
00, 6/1240
L
7l12
5/1:GRAY
(BEDROCK).
L90
13/12
1
6112
5/t
LTES 6 BLOWS OF A 140-POUND HAMMER
21112
DRIVE A 2.5-INCH O.D. SAMPLER 12 INCHES.
Lu
50/Lu
LL
0 80
50/9
Q
150/8
i
W
w
50/9
BILLING.
50/•S AFTER DRILLING.
70
1
50/3
ou
50/3
.LED WITH A 4-INCH DIAMETER CONTINUOUS
2UCK AND BORINGS TH-6 AND TH-7 WERE
VUOUS FLIGHT POWER AUGER USING A
—50
i
50/6 'ER TO THE BENCHMARK SHOWN ON FIGURE 1.
\NATIONS, LIMITATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS IN
40
SUMMARY
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
CSLI TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II FIGURE 2
PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Movement: Brass precision geared.
G. Scale: Progressive, satin faced, non -reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.
H. Stem: Copper plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.
I. Range: Conform to the following:
1. Hot Water: 30 Degree - 240 degree F (0 degree - 115 degree Q.
2. Chilled Water: 40 Degree - 110 degree F (5 degree - 45 degree Q.
2.3 DIAL TYPE INSERTION THERMOMETERS
A. General: Provide dial type insertion thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges
indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.
B. Type: Bi-metal, stainless steel case and stem, 1-inch diameter dial, dust and leak proof,
1/8-inch diameter stem with nominal length of 5-inch.
C. Accuracy: 0.5 Percent of dial range.
D. Range: Conform to the following:
1. Hot Water: 0 Degree - 220 degree F (-20 degree - 110 degree C).
2. Chilled Water: 25 Degree - 125 degree F (0 degree - 50 degree Q.
2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to
match piping system design pressure. Provide 2-inch extension for insulated piping. Provide
cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.
2.5 TEMPERATURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS
A. General: Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 PSI and
200 degree F (93 degree C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel -plate, equip with 1/2-inch
NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting
1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with
gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for
insulated piping.
2.6 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and
constructed for use in service indicated.
B. Type: General Use, 1 percent accuracy, ANSI B40.1 Grade A, phospher bronze bourdon
type, bottom connection.
C. Case: Stainless steel, drawn steel, or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2 inch diameter.
15135 - 4
3
2
Z 0
O
N
z
Q
a -1
x
w
e
z -2
O
w
IX -3
IL
2
O
U
-a
0.1 1.0
APPLIED PRESSURE -KSF
Sample of WEATHERED CLAYSTONE
From TH-1 AT 14 FEET
3
2
1
z
O 0
z
Q
x -,
x
w
0
z
0 -2
w
Q' -3
a
E
O
U
-.1
0.1 1.0
APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF
Sample of CLAY, SANDY (CL)
From TH-2 AT 4 FFFT
10 100
NATURAL DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 115 PCF
NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT= 16.1 %
10 100
NATURAL DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 106 PCF
NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT= 20.0 %
Swell Consolidation
Test Results FIG.3
19
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
I !� I ! ? i I �' i! � I J�� I
3
2
0
-2 - - - - - - - - - - -
-3
-5
EXPA 4 UDI�R��C D 3' rANT
10 ET, 'I N G
PR=SUIROE1 DUE
. .. ..... ...........
0.1 1.0 10 100
APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF
Sample of CLAY, SANDY (CL) NATURAL DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 104 PCF
From f—H-3 AT 9 FEET NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT= 23.4 %
Swell Consolidation
Test Results FIG. 4
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
Ir
-GOTT
P..R SSUT�UrETC WE* ]N�
2
0 -
� � � i i i� ( � j �� � � i i t
-3
I i' ��i C i� l �1) 11 I � i,�
-5 I I l i l
-7
0.1 1.0 10 100
APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF
Sample of CLAYSTONE NATURAL DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 107 PCF
From TH-3 AT 14 FEET NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT= 15.7 %
Swell Consolidation
Test Results FIG. 5
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
6
117
4
3
2 1 t 1
EXPAN
SION UNDER CON
STANT
IPE QUE ITO
-2 --------
-3
I ! � j
-4
-6
-7
01 1.0 10 100
APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF
Sample of CLAYSTONE NATURAL DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 121 PCF
From TH-3 AT 24 FEET NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT= 13.5 %
Swell Consolidation
Test Results FIG. 6
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
3
2
1
Z 0
O
U)
Z
Q
IL -1
K
w
e
Z -2
O
N
0)
w
X -3
a
2
O
U
0.1 1.0
APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF
Sample Of CLAYSTONE
From TH-4 AT 19 FEET
a
z
1
Z
O 0
N
Z
Q
IL -1
W
w
0
Z
O -z
N
w
IX -3
a
Z
O
U
a
0.1 1.0
APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF
Sample of CLAYSTONE
From TH-5 AT 14 FEET
10 100
NATURAL DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 122 PCF
NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT= 14.5 %
10 100
NATURAL DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 121 PCF
NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT= 13.6 %
Swell Consolidation
Test Results FIG. 7
W-
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
HYDROMETER ANALYSIS I
SIEVE ANALYSIS
25 HR. 7 HR. TIME READINGS U.S. STANDARD SERIES
45 MIN. 15 MIN. 60 MIN. 19 MIN. 4 MIN. 1 MIN. 200 '100 '50 '40 90 116
100
CLEAR SQUARE OPENINGS
'10 '8 '4 318" 3/4" 1 W 3" 5"6" 8"
0
=— —
---
80
zo
z 70
30
—
--
Z
a60
_-
40
w
K
-
r
w 50
F
50
w
U
U
a
a
40
60
30 �_�_
-___-
- 70
20
80
10
90
0-..: __� -_
-_ -
-
-- 100
'001 0.002 '005 009 019 .037 074 .149 .297 .590 1.19 2.0 2.38 4.76 9.52
0.42
DIAMETER OF PARTICLE IN MILLIMETERS
19.1 36.1
76.2 127 200
152
CLAY (PLASTIC) TO SILT(NON-PLASTIC)
SANDS
GRAVEL
FINE MEDIUM COARSE
FINE COARSE I COBBLES
Sample of SAND, GRAVELLY, SLIGHTLY SILTY (SP-SM) GRAVEL 16 % SAND 76 %
From TH 1 AT 9 FEET SILT & CLAN-8 % LIQUID LIMIT -
PLASTICITY INDEX - %
HYDROMETER ANALYSIS I
SIEVE ANALYSIS
25 HR. 7 HR. TIME READINGS U.S. STANDARD SERIES
45 MIN. 15 MIN. 60 MIN.19 M(N. 4 MIN. 1 MIN. 200 '100 '50 '40 '30 '16
CLEAR SQUARE OPENINGS
'10 '8 '4 318" 3/4" tW 3"
51,6" 8"
100
0
90
10
80
20
z 70
30
z
to
�-
G
i 60
-- _
w
40
C
HOK
w 50
50
w
w
n 40
_.__
wa
60
—_--
30
—.. —_-_
__---
70
20
80
-_-
10
—__ -
__. _—____
--- _—_
90
0
100
001 0.002 005 009 019 037 074 149 .297 ' 590 1.19 2.0 2 38 4 76 9.52
0.42
DIAMETER OF PARTICLE IN MILLIMETERS
191 36.1 76.2
127 200
152
CLAY(PLASTIC) TO SILT(NON-PLASTIC)SANDS
GRAVEL
FINE I MEDIUM ICOARSE
FINE COARSE COBBLES
Sample of SAND, GRAVELLY, SILTY (SM)
From TH 5 AT 9 FEET
GRAVEL _ 19 % SAND _6.1 %
SILT & CLAY 20 % LIQUID LIMIT
PLASTICITY INDEX - %
Gradation
Test Results FIG.8
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
TABLE I
SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
EEffEEf
ffw
BORING
NO.
DEPTH
FEET
MOISTURE
(%)
DRY
DENSITY
(PCF)
SWELL TEST DATA
SOIL
SUCTION
VALUE
(F)
ATTERBERG LIMITS
UNCONFINED
COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH
(PSF
SOLUBLE
SULFATES
(%)
PASSING
NO. 200
SIEVE
%)
SOIL TYPE
SWELL
I°lo
APPLIED
PRESSURE
PSF
LIQUID
LIMIT
%
PLASTICITY
INDEX
%)
TH-1
4
24.6
98
1,940
CLAY, SANDY CL
TH-1
9
11.9
8
SAND, SLIGHTLY SILTY SP
TH-1
14
16.1
115
0.4
1,000
36
22
29
SAND, GRAVELLY, SLIGHTLY SILTY SP-SM
TH-2
4
20.0
106
0.0
1,000
CLAY, SANDY CL
TH-3
9
23.4
104
0.3
1,100
0,9703
CLAY, SANDY (CL)
TH-3
14
15.7
107
1.2
1,000
3.6141
CLAYSTONE
TH-3
24
13.5
121
1.1
3,000
3.8652
CLAYSTONE
TH-4
4
21.1
102
0.040
CLAY, SANDY (CL)
TH-4
19
14.5
122
2.0
1,000
CLAYSTONE
TH-5
4
18.7
110
35
20
41
SAND, CLAYEY SC
TH-5
9
12.9
20
SAND, GRAVELLY, SILTYISM)
TH-5
14
13.6
121
0.7
1,000
0.020
CLAYSTONE
TH-5
19
13.0
124
27,500
CLAYSTONE
TH-6
3 TO 4
20.8
100
FILL, SAND, CLAYEY
TH-6
4
19.4
107
2,400
FILL, SAND, CLAYEY
TH-6
6 TO 8
19.9
105
FILL, SAND, CLAYEY
TH-6
9
21.7
100
38
23
48
FILL, SAND, CLAYEY
TH-7
1 TO 2
17.6
110
FILL, SAND, CLAYEY
TH-7
2
20.1
107
0.060
35
FILL, SAND, CLAYEY
TH-7
5 TO 7
22.7
104
FILL, SAND, CLAYEY
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125 Page 1 of 1
APPENDIX A
CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST FOR PAVEMENTS
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
No Text
CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST FOR PAVEMENTS
The construction procedures of the pavement system are as important as the
quality of the materials. Inadequate compaction of the subgrade is often the reason
for early pavement failure, resulting in pavement instability, rutting, cracking,
settlement and heave. We recommend the proposed pavement be constructed in the
following manner.
PREPARATION
Subgrade Preparation
► Subgrade shall be stripped of organic matter, scarified, moisture
treated, and compacted.
► Utility trenches and all subsequently placed fill shall also be compacted
and tested prior to paving.
► Final grading of the subgrade should be carefully controlled so the
design cross -slope is maintained and low spots in the subgrade that
could trap water are eliminated.
Cohesive Soils (A-6)
► Soils shall be moisture treated between optimum to 3% above optimum
moisture content.
► Soils shall be compacted to at least 95% of maximum standard Proctor
dry density (ASTM D 698, AASHTO T 99).
Proof Testing
► After final subgrade elevation has been reached and the subgrade
compacted, the area shall be proof -rolled with a pneumatic -tired vehicle
loaded to at least 18 kips per axle.
► Subgrade that is pumping or deforming shall be scarified, moisture
conditioned, and tested.
► If limited areas of very soft or wet subgrade are found, the material
shall be sub excavated and replaced with approved on -site or import
material, moisture conditioned, compacted and tested.
Construction Observation
► Where soft, yielding subgrade is encountered, the excavation shall be
inspected by a representative of CTL I Thompson, Inc.
► CTL I Thompson shall be notified to conduct tests to confirm whether
the subgrade substantially meets the specifications.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS A-1
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE 11
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
F
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Connector: Brass with 1/4-inch male NPT. Provide protective syphon when used for steam
service.
E. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
F. Range: Conform to the following:
1. Vacuum: 30-Inch Hg - 15 PSI.
2. Water: 0 - 100 PSI.
3. Steam: 0 - 200 PSI.
2.7 PRESSURE GAUGE COCKS
A. General: Provide pressure gauge cocks between pressure gauges and gauge tees on piping
systems. Construct gauge cock of brass with 1/4-inch female NPT on each end, and "T"
handle brass plug.
B. Syphon: 1/4-Inch straight coil constructed of brass tubing with 1/4-inch male NPT on each
end.
C. Snubber: 1/4-Inch brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which
pressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.
2.8 PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS
A. General: Provide pressure gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 PSI and
200 degree F (93 degree Q. Construct of brass and finish in nickel -plate equip with 1/2-inch
NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting
1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion pressure gauge. Equip orifice with
gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for
insulated piping.
2.9 VENTURI TUBE FLOW MEASURING ELEMENTS
A. Primary flow measuring elements shall consist of Venturi tubes. Arrange piping in
accordance with manufacturer's published literature. In horizontal pipes, place connections
slightly above horizontal centerline of pipe.
B. Provide each primary element with integral tab, or metal tag on stainless steel wire, extending
outside pipe covering on which is stamped or clearly printed in plainly visible position the
following information:
1. Manufacturer's name and address.
2. Serial number of meter to which element is to be connected.
3. Name, number, or location of equipment served.
4. Specified rate of flow.
5. Multiplier (including unity, where applicable) to be applied to meter reading.
C. Provide taps with shutoff valves and quick connecting hose fittings for portable meters or
double -ferrule compression fittings for connection to tubing for permanently located meters or
recorders.
15135 - 5
W
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Aggregate base course that meets Wyoming Department of
Transportation specifications shall be laid in thin, loose lifts, moisture
treated to within 2% of optimum moisture content, and compacted to at
least 95% of Standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698,
AASHTO T 99).
CURB AND GUTTER
Curb and gutter shall be backfilled and the backfill compacted to
reduce the potential of heave or settlement that would cause water to
pond adjacent to the pavement.
► Compaction shall be in accordance with Wyoming Department of
Transportation Specifications.
An asphalt cement tack coat should be applied to the curb, subgrade
and all joints at a rate of not more than 0.10 gallon persquare yard. The
tack should be applied at a temperature between 800 F and 130' F and
allowed to cure for at least 2 hour prior to paving.
ASPHALT CONCRETE
Asphalt concrete shall be hot plant -mixed material compacted to at
least 93 to 96% of maximum theoretical density.
Paving should only be performed when subgrade temperatures are
high enough to allow proper compaction of the lift. General guidelines
are often for subgrade temperatures above 40' F and air temperatures
at least 400 F and rising.
► The temperature at laydown time shall be determined according to the
temperature -viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement. Experience
indicates that the laydown temperature shall be at least 275° F for AC-10
asphalt cement.
► The maximum compacted lift should be 3.0 inches for mixtures
containing maximum 3/4-inch nominal size aggregate and joints shall
be staggered. No joints shall be placed within wheel paths.
► Surface shall be sealed with a finish roller prior to the mix cooling to
1750F.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
► Concrete shall not be placed on subgrade colderthan 400 F orwhen air
temperatures are less than 40' F.
► Concrete shall have a minimum flexural strength of 600 psi and a
minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi.
Test shall be conducted at 28 days.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS A-2
CSIJ TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417d25
I
CURING PROCEDURES
Curing procedures shall protedt the concrete against moisture loss,
rapid temperature change, freezing, and mechanical injury for at least
3 days after placement.
Traffic shall not be allowed on the pavement for at least one week.
A white, liquid membrane -curing compound, applied at the rate
recommended by the manufacturer, shall be sprayed within 24 hours of
placement. The minimum application rate is one gallon per 150 square
feet.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints, including longitudinal joints and transverse joints,
shall be formed during construction or shall be sawed after the
concrete has begun to set, but prior to uncontrolled cracking.
Transverse joints shall be sawed within 24 hours of placement while
longitudinal joints shall be sawed within 48 hours.
The subgrade preparation and the placement and compaction of all pavement
material shall be observed and tested by CTL I Thompson, Inc. Compaction criteria
shall be met prior to the placement of the next paving lift.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II A-3
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
No Text
IF
APPENDIX B
MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FLEXIBLE PAVMENTS
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE II
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
No Text
IF
MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS
The primary cause for deterioration of low traffic volume pavements is
oxidative aging resulting in brittle pavements. Tire loads from traffic are necessary to
"work" or knead the asphalt concrete to keep it flexible and rejuvenated. Preventive
maintenance treatments will typically preserve the original or existing pavement by
providing a protective seal or rejuvenating the asphalt binder to extend pavement life.
1. Annual Preventive Maintenance
1. Visual pavement evaluations shall be performed each spring or fall.
2. Reports documenting the progress of distress shall be kept current to
provide information on effective times to apply preventive maintenance
treatments.
3. Crack sealing shall be performed annually as new cracks appear.
2. 3 to 5 Year Preventive Maintenance
1. The owner should budget for a preventive treatment at approximate
intervals of 3 to 5 years to reduce oxidative embrittlement problems.
2. Typical preventive maintenance treatments include chip seals, fog
seals, slurry seals, and crack sealing.
3. 5 to 10 Year Corrective Maintenance
1. Corrective maintenance may be necessary, as dictated by the pavement
condition, to correct rutting, cracking and structurally failed areas.
2. Corrective maintenance may include full depth patching, milling and
overlays.
3. In order for the pavement to provide a 20-year service life, at least one
major corrective overlay can be expected.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS B-1
CSU TRANSIT CENTER, PHASE 11
CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC03417-125
M
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15135 -METERS AND GAUGES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Manufacturer shall certify Venturi tubes for actual piping configuration. Any necessary
piping changes required for certification shall be provided without cost to Owner. Insert type
tubes may be furnished, provided they meet specification requirements in other respects.
E. Provide Venturi with throat diameter such that specified rate of flow will register scale
reading of between 20 percent and 80 percent of full scale value.
F. Venturi sizes and beta ratios shall be selected so that design flow rates shall read between
20 percent and the full scale range on a linear meter (e.g. between 10-inch and 50-inch on a
0-50-inch meter), with permanent pressure loss of not more than 25 percent of indicated flow
rate differential pressure.
G. Provide Venturi tubes of solid brass or bronze. Tubes larger than 2-inch shall have flanges or
butt weld connections and may be cast iron or steel. Steel tubes may be fabricated or cast
with cadmium or zinc -plating. Line throats of cast iron tubes with bronze and plate cast iron
portion with cadmium.
H. Tubes shall be calibrated and tested by independent testing laboratory and performance data
famished with shop drawings.
I. Connections for attachment to portable flow meter hoses shall be readily accessible.
J. Provide pressure differential transmitter with 4-20 milli -amp output signal for each Venturi
where required by temperature control sequence. Foxboro Model #843 (complete with
mounting hardware) or equal as reviewed by Engineer. [For all steam flow meters and
variable flow rates systems provide multiple stacked differential pressure transducers to
provide full range scale and maintained accuracy.]
2.10 CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVES
A. General: Provide as indicated, calibrated balance valves equipped with readout valves to
facilitate connecting of differential pressure meter to balance valves. Equip each readout
valve with integral EPT check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during
monitoring process. Provide calibrated nameplate to indicated degree of closure of precision
machined orifice. Construct balancing valve with internal EPT O-ring seals to prevent
leakage around rotating element. Provide balance valves with preformed polyurethane
insulation suitable for use on heating and cooling systems, and to protect balance valves
during shipment.
B. Balancing Valve Manufacturer shall select valve sizes to provide meter readings between
7-inch and 25-inch w.g. at rated GPM.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Installer.
15135 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAUGES
A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily
read by observer standing on floor.
B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.
2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units.
3. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat recovery unit.
C. Remote Reading Dial Thermometers: Install on control panels as indicated. Run tubing
between panel and thermometer bulb, adequately supported to prevent kinks. Select tubing
length so as to not require coiling of tubing.
D. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill
well with oil or graphite, secure cap.
E. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at
most readable position. Secure cap. Provide portable temperature gauge for each plug
connection.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES
A. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipe at
most readable position.
B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At suction and discharge of each pump.
2. At discharge of each pressure reducing valve.
3. At water service outlet.
4. At inlet and outlet of water-cooled condensers and refrigerant cooled chillers.
C. Pressure Gauge Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon for steam pressure
gauges.
D. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at
most readable position. Secure cap. Provide portable pressure gauge for each plug
connection.
E. All pressure gauges shall have coil syphon and isolation gauge cock, "snubber" valve, to
service the gauge and isolate it from the pipe system service without having to drain the
piping system.
F. For 6-Inch and Larger Piping Service, use ball valve for gauge isolation valve which shall be
not less than 1/4-inch diameter for full gauge pipe correction diameter.
15135 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUHIEMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
defect is, in the opinion of the Architect, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not
due to the Owner's carelessness or improper use.
1.4 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance.
Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final
location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that
require replacement or servicing.
B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown on drawings or not, in
all walls and ceilings for access to all concealed valves, shock absorbers, air vents, motors,
fans, balancing cocks, and other operating devices requiring adjustment or servicing. Refer to
Division 1 for access door specification and Division 15 for duct access door requirements.
D. The minimum size of any access door shall not be less than the size of the equipment to be
removed or 24-inch x 24-inch if used for service only.
E. Furnish doors to trades performing work in which they are to be built, in ample time for
building -in as the work progresses. Whenever possible, group valves, cocks, etc., to permit
use of minimum number of access doors within a given room or space.
F. Factory manufactured doors shall be of a type compatible with the finish in which they are to
be installed. In lieu of these doors, shop fabricated access doors with DuroDyne hinges may
be used.
G. Access doors in fire -rated walls and ceilings shall have equivalent UL label and fire rating.
1.5 ROUGH -IN
A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the
actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements for actual provided
equipment for rough -in requirements.
1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Execute and inspect all work in accordance with all Underwriters, local and state codes, rules
and regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans and/or
specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the greater
requirement shall be followed. Follow recommendations ofNFPA, SMACNA, EPA, OSHA
and ASHRAE.
C. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a
standard or specific date or edition is indicated.
15010-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOW MEASURING METERS
A. General: Install flow measuring meters on piping systems located in accessible locations at
most readable position.
B. Calibrated Balance Valves: Install on piping with readout valves in vertical upright position.
Maintain minimum length of straight unrestricted piping equivalent to three (3) pipe
diameters upstream of valve.
C. BTU Meters: Install in piping where indicated, in hydronic supply line. Provide thermal well
in return line for remote sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible, if not, provide bracket to
support meter.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.
B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory -finished surfaces. Replace
cracked or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces with manufacturer's
touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION 15135
15135-8
a
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 — SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER—CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Supports and Anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or
specified in other Division 15 sections.
B. Types of Supports and Anchors specified in this section include the following:
1. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports
2. Vertical -Piping Clamps
3. Hanger -Rod Attachments
4. Building Attachments
5. Saddles and Shields
6. Spring Hangers and Supports
7. Miscellaneous Materials
8. Roof Equipment Supports
9. Anchors
10. Equipment Supports
C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment, are specified as part
of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and
anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Plumbing Codes pertaining to
product materials and installation of supports and anchors.
2. NFPA Compliance: Hangers and supports shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 13
when used as a component of a fire protection system and NFPA Standard No. 14
when used as a component of a standpipe system.
3. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components shall be listed and
labeled by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems.
4. Duct Hangers: SMACNA Duct Manuals.
5. MSS Standard Compliance:
a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and
manufacture comply with MSS SP-58.
15140 —1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule
showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe
hanger and support.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings for each type of
support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of
assembly of components.
C. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their
products meet the specified requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and
anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of Division 15.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Pipe Hangers and Supports:
a. B-Line Systems Inc.
b. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.
C. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Division Figgie International
d. Grinnell Corp.
e. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
f. Elcen Metal Products Company
g. Michigan Hanger Company
h. ITT Grinnell Corp.
i. Unistrut Metal Framing Systems
j. Hubbard Enterprises (Supports for domestic water piping)
k. Specialty Products Co. (Supports for domestic water piping)
1. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
2. Saddles and Shields:
a.
Grinnell Corp.
b.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
C.
Insulation Pipe Supports Manufacturing
d.
Insulated Saddle Shield Insert Product Inc.
e.
Joy Dot Marketing
f.
Future Market Industries, Inc.
g.
Michigan Hanger Company
h.
Component Products Co.
i.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
15140 - 2
y
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3. Roof Equipment Supports:
a. Custom Curb, Inc.
b. Pate Co.
C. Thycurb Division; Thybar Corp.
4. Roof Pipe Supports:
a. MAPA
5. Concrete Inserts and Anchors:
a.
Phillips Drill Company
b.
Michigan Hanger Company
C.
Unistrut Metal Framing Systems
d.
Elcen Metal Products Company
e.
ITW Ramset/Red Head
f.
Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and
manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58.
1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment
that will not have field -applied finish.
2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1
i. Steel Pipe, size 3/8-inch thru 12-inch, Grinnell Fig. 260
2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, Grinnell Fig. CT-65
3. Cast Iron Pipe, size 4-inch thru 24-inch, Grinnell Fig. 590
C. Adjustable Swivel Ring: MSS Type 10
1. Steel Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 2-inch, Grinnell Fig. 69; size 2-1/2 inch thru 8-inch,
Grinnell Figs. 69 or 70
2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, Grinnell Fig. CT-69
D. Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 8
1. Steel Pipe, size 3/4-inch thru 20-inch, Grinnell Fig. 261
2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, Grinnell Fig. CT-121
E. U Bolts: MSS Type 24
1. Steel Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 36-inch, Grinnell Fig. 137
2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 8-inch, Grinnell Fig. 137C
F. Straps: MSS Type 26
1. Steel Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, Grinnell Fig. 262
15140 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
G. Pipe Stanchion Saddle: MSS Type 37
Steel Pipe, size 4-inch thru 12-inch, Grinnell Fig. 259
H. Yoke and Roller Hanger: MSS Type 43
2-1/2 inch thru 20-inch, Grinnell Fig. 181
I. Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified.
J. Hangers:
Hot Pipes:
a. 1/2-Inch thru 1-1/2 Inch: Adjustable wrought steel ring.
b. 2-Inch thru 5-Inch: Adjustable wrought steel clevis.
C. 6-Inch and Over: Adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roller.
2. Cold Pipes:
a. 1/2-Inch thru 1-1/2 Inch: Adjustable wrought steel ring.
b. 2-Inch and Over: Adjustable wrought steel clevis.
3. Multiple or Trapeze: Structural steel channel (with web vertical), with welded
spacers and hanger rods. Provide cast iron roller and stand for hot pipe sizes 6-inch
and over. Provide hanger rods one (1) size larger than for largest pipe in trapeze. If
the deflection at center of trapeze exceeds 1/360 of the distance between the end
hangers, install an additional hanger at mid -span or use a larger channel.
K. Wall Supports for Horizontal Pipe:
1. 1/2-Inch thru 3-1/2 Inch: Steel offset hook.
2. 4-Inch and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. Provide adjustable
steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe 200 degree F and over and sizes 6-inch and
over.
L. Supports for Vertical Pipe: Steel riser clamp.
M. Upper Attachments:
For attaching hanger rods to structural steel I -beams:
a. Provide adjustable beam clamp, Elcen No. 95 with No. 235 rod socket or
equal. Attach to bottom flange of beam.
2. For attaching hanger rods to bar joists:
a. When bottom chord is constructed of structural steel angles, provide Elcen
No. 84H square washer or equal with nut. Place hanger rod between backs
of the two (2) angles and support with the washer on top of the angles. Spot
weld washer to angles.
b. When bottom chord is constructed of round bars, provide Elcen No. 137 bar
joint washer or equal.
15140 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.3 CONCRETE INSERTS AND ANCHORS
A. Inserts: Case shall be of galvanized carbon steel with square threaded concrete insert nut for
hanger rod connection; 3/4-inch lateral adjustment; top lugs for reinforcing rods, nail holes
for attaching to forms. Michigan Hanger Models 355 and 355N or equal Unistrut or Elcen.
This type of upper attachment is to be used for all areas having poured in place concrete
construction.
1. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
B. Provide fasteners attached to concrete ceilings that are vibration and shock resistant. Provide
hangers for piping and cuts attached to concrete construction with one (1) of the following
types.
1. Concrete insert per MSS SP 58, Type 18.
2. Powder driven fasteners subject to approval of Structural Engineer. Each fastener
shall be capable of holding a test load of 1,000 pounds whereas the actual load shall
not exceed 50 pounds.
3. Self -drilling expansion shields. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the
proof test load required.
4. Machine bolt expansion anchor. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the
proof test load required.
C. Anchors: Carbon steel, zinc plated. Installation shall be in holes drilled with carbide -tipped
drill bits or by use of self -drilling anchors.
Provide anchors suitable for the location of installation and designed to withstand all
forces and movements acting in the anchor. Manufacture pipe anchors in accordance
with MSS SP 58. Provide a safety factor of four (4) for the anchor installation.
2.4 SADDLES AND THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS
A. General: Provide thermal shield inserts under all insulated piping hangers and thermal shield
inserts on all piping through floors, wall and roof construction penetrations. Size saddles and
shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation or a minimum of 1-inch thick for uninsulated
pipe thermal shield inserts.
B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching
adjoining insulation.
Grinnell Figs. 160-165
C. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent
crushing of insulation.
Grinnell Fig. 167
D. Thermal Shield Inserts: Provide 100-psi average compressive strength, waterproof, asbestos
free calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal enclosure. Insert and shield shall cover the
entire circumference on vertical pipes, or the bottom half circumference of the pipe on
15140 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CI.ARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
horizontal mounting supports, and shall be of length recommended by the manufacturer for
pipe size and thickness of insulation or the thickness of the wall, roof or floor construction.
2.5 SPRING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide factory -fabricated spring hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58,
of one (1) of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in
accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one
(1) type by one (1) manufacturer for each piping service. Select spring hangers and supports
to suit pipe size and loading.
B. Restraint Control Devices: MSS Type 47
Grinnell Fig. 211
C. Spring Cushion Hangers: MSS Type 48
Grinnell Fig. 247
D. Spring Cushion Roll Hangers: MSS Type 49
Grinnell Fig. 178
E. Spring Sway Braces: MSS Type 49
Grinnell Fig. 296
F. Variable Spring Hangers: MSS Type 51; preset to indicated load and limit variability factor
to 25 percent.
Grinnell Fig. B-268
G. Variable Spring Base Supports: MSS Type 52; preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent; include load flange.
Grinnell Fig. B-268, Type F
H. Variable Spring Trapeze Hangers: MSS Type 53; preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent.
Grinnell Fig. B-268, Type G
I. Constant Supports: Provide one (1) of the following types, selected to suit piping system.
Include auxiliary stops for erection and hydrostatic test, and field load -adjustment capability.
1. Horizontal Type: MSS Type 54
Grinnell Fig. 81-H
2. Vertical Type: MSS Type 55
15140 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Grinnell Fig. 80-V
3. Trapeze Type: MSS Type 56
Grinnell Fig. 80-V, Type G
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type Inn and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0
parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.
C. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld
steel in accordance with AWS Standards.
D. Pipe Guides: Provide factory -fabricated guides, of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated steel,
consisting of bolted two -section outer cylinder and base with two -section guiding spider
bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder.
Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.
2.7 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. General: Construct roof equipment supports using minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel with
fully mitered and welded corners, 3-inch cant, internal bulkhead reinforcing, integral base
plates, pressure treated wood nailer, 18 gauge galvanized steel counterflashing and rigid
insulation.
B. Configuration: Construct of sizes as indicated, compensate for slope in roof so top of support
is dead level.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Installer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building
structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other
building structural attachments. Review Structural Drawings to obtain structural support
limitations.
B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at
Project Site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and
testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with
15140 - 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
work of this section and Architect/Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and
procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified.
Provide Shop Drawing showing method and support locations from structure.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Install building attachments within concrete or on structural steel. Space attachments within
maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at
changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert
to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install
reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
B. New Construction:
1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable.
2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in
concrete for inserts carrying pipe over 4-inch or ducts over 60-inch wide.
3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface.
4. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod
with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab, if construction above permits.
C. Existing Construction:
In existing concrete construction, drill into concrete slab and insert and tighten
expansion anchor bolt. Connect anchor bolt to hanger rod. Care must be taken in
existing concrete construction not to sever reinforcement rods or tension wires.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping to be supported together on field fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers
where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69.
Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for
smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire
or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and
other accessories.
C. Support fire -water piping independently from other piping systems.
D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are
copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.
E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units and within P-0" of each horizontal elbow.
15140 - s
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
G. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not
exceeded.
H. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements:
1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.
2. Saddles: Install Protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor
barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match
adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Thermal Shield Inserts: Install thermal shield inserts MSS Type 40 on cold and
chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Thermal shield inserts shall span an arc
of 360 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following:
NPS
Length
Thickness
1/4 thru 3-1/2
12
0.048
4
12
0.060
5 and 6
18
0.060
8 thru 14
24
0.075
16 thru 24
24
0.105
4. Pipes 8-inches and larger shall have wood inserts.
5. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield.
6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness
as piping.
L Install refrigerant, steam and hydronic piping (copper and steel) hangers with the following
minimum rod sizes and maximum
spacing:
Size S Maximum Span
Minimum Rod
in Feet
Size -Inches
1 7
3/8
1-1/2 9
3/8
2 10
3/8
3 12
1/2
4 12
5/8
5 12
5/8
6 14
3/4
8 14
7/8
10 14
7/8
12 14
7/8
15140 - 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUHIEMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. The handling, removal and disposal of regulated refrigerants shall be in accordance with U.S.
EPA, state and local regulations.
E. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet
these requirements without additional expense to the Owner.
1.7 REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES
A. Comply with rules and regulations of local utility companies. Include in bid the cost of all
valves, valve boxes, meter boxes, meters and such accessory equipment which will be
required for the project.
1.8 PERMITS AND FEES
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Contractor shall pay all tap, development, meter, etc., fees required for connection to
municipal and public utility facilities.
C. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all inspections, licenses and certificates required in
connection with the Work.
1.9 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required offset,
valve, fitting, etc.
B. Drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as
though called for in both.
C. Drawings shall not be scaled for rough -in measurements or used as shop drawings. Where
drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurement, take the
necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.
D. Before any Work is installed, determine that equipment will properly fit the space; that
required piping grades can be maintained and that ductwork can be run as contemplated
without interferences between systems, with structural elements or with the work of other
trades.
E. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above and below ceilings
with suspension system, light fixtures, and other building components.
Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict,
install mechanical and electric systems within the cavity space allocation in the
following order of priority.
a. Plumbing waste, vent piping and roof drain mains and leaders
b. Supply, return and exhaust ductwork
C. Fire sprinkler mains and leaders
d. Electrical conduit
e. Domestic hot and cold water, medical gas piping
f. Pneumatic control piping
15010-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
J. Support vertical runs at each floor.
K. Install laboratory supply piping systems not to exceed 10'-0" spacing between pipe hangers
for any size pipe.
L. Install steel natural gas piping with the following minimum rod size and maximum spacing:
Size (NPS) Maximum Span Minimum Rod
in Feet Size - Inches
1/2 6 3/8
3/4 to 1 8 3/8
1-1/4 or larger (horizontal) 10 1/2
Vertical, all sizes Every floor level
M. Install medical gas piping hangers with the following maximum spacing.
1/2-Inch Pipe Size: 6-Foot O.C.
3/4-Inch to 1-Inch Pipe Size: 8-Foot O.C.
1-1/4 Inch or Larger Pipe Size: 10-Foot O.C.
Vertical Piping: Every floor level.
N. Install horizontal water distribution piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
Nom. Pipe Size Steel Pipe Max. Copper Tube Max. Min. Rod Diameter _
- Inches Span - Feet Span - Feet Inches
Up to 1/2
6
6
3/8
3/4 & 1
8
6
3/8
1-1/4
10
6
3/8
1-1/2
10
6
3/8
2
10
10
3/8
2-1/2
10
10
1/2
3
10
10
1/2
4
10
10
5/8 (1/2 for copper)
5
10
10
5/8 (1/2 for copper)
6
10
10
3/4 (5/8 for copper)
8
10
10
7/8 (3/4 for copper)
10
10
10
7/8 (3/4 for copper)
12
10
10
7/8 (3/4 for copper)
I5140 - 10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
O. Install sanitary drainage and vent systems with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
Pipe Material Max Horizontal Max Vertical
Spacing in Ft. Spacing in Ft.
Cast Iron, No Hub 4 --
Cast Iron Pipe, Lead & Oakum 5 15
Cast Iron Pipe, Compression Gasket 4 15
(at every other joint, unless pipe
length over 4', then each joint)
Copper Tubing - 1-1/2" and Smaller 6 10
Copper Tubing - 2" and Larger 10 10
P. Support horizontal cast iron pipe as follows:
1. Hub and Spigot: All sizes - One (1) hanger to each joint.
2. No -Hub: All sizes.
a. With Clamp -All and Anaheim Series 4,000 stainless steel couplings and MG
cast iron couplings: One (1) hanger to each joint.
b. With all other stainless steel band type couplings: One (1) hanger to each
side of joint.
C. Support all horizontal cast iron pipe within 18-inches of each joint and with
5-feet maximum spacing between hangers, except that pipe exceeding 5-feet
in length shall be supported at intervals no greater than 10-feet.
d. Use hanger rods same size as for steel.
e. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Secure
vertical hub and spigot pipe immediately below the hub. Support vertical
no -hub pipe so that the weight is carried from the pipe to the support and not
from the joint to the support.
Q. Provide copper or copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or provide sheet lead
packing between hanger or support and piping.
R Place a hanger within 1-foot (0.305 m) of each horizontal elbow.
S. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) minimum after piping is
erected.
T. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height but at not more than 15-foot
intervals for steel and 10-feet for copper.
U. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze
hangers.
V. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
W. Support steam supply and condensate return pipe runs on adjustable roller hangers.
X. All insulated pipes shall have thermal shield insert at all support points. All piping shall have
thermal shield inserts at each penetration through wall, floor and roof.
15140 - I1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Y. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides
shall be securely anchored to the building structure.
Z. Install all couplings with torque wrench, torqued to inch -pounds as specified by the
manufacturer.
AA. Securely anchor and support plumbing domestic water piping in chases or walls. Use factory
manufactured clamps and brackets connected to fixture carriers, waste/vent piping or brackets
connected to studs. Wires or straps will not be permitted.
1. When copper supplies are connected to flush valves, support the tubing by the studs
or by a fixture carrier, not by clamping to waste/vent piping.
2. Prevent copper tubes from making contact with steel brackets using duct tape, fire
retardant polyethylene inserts or other dielectric insulating material.
3. Place supports every 10-feet on vertical pipe and every 5-feet on horizontal pipe.
BB. Hang all insulated pipe at the point of support in the following manner:
Hanger: See Paragraph 2.03 B.
2. Thermal Shield Insert: Provide thermal shield insert of the same thickness as
adjoining insulation for insulated pipe. The entire 360 degrees shall be waterproof,
asbestos free, calcium silicate.
a. If the pipe hanger spacing exceeds 10-feet or if there are to be pipe rollers,
utilize a double thick shield on bearing surface.
b. On refrigerant, domestic cold water, chilled water and horizontal roof drain
pipe the thermal shield insert shall extend 2-inches beyond the construction
material and the sheet metal shield shall span an arc of 360 degrees. All
hangers shall be properly sized to accommodate the thermal shield insert and
no hanger shall penetrate or crush any of the insulating material.
CC. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the
following:
1. In the event a self -drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is
considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an
acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by performing an
on -site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equal to twice the
actual load.
2. Powder -driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after the
construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly
installed, additional fastener(s) shall be driven nearby (not closer than six (6) inches)
in undisturbed concrete. Where it is considered that many fasteners are improperly
installed, the Contractor shall test load any fifty (50) successively driven fasteners. If
10 percent or more of these fasteners fail, the Contractor shall utilize other fastening
means as approved and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Hangers for piping and ducts shall be attached to cellular steel floor decks with steel
plates and bolted rod conforming to the steel deck manufacturer's requirements.
Where the individual hanger load exceeds the capacity of a single floor deck
15140 - 12
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
attachment, steel angles, beams or channels shall be provided to span the number of
floor deck attachments required.
4. Welding may be used for securing hangers to steel structural members. Welded
attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point of the weld or
attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
ANSI B31.9, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ANSI B31.9 and with AWS Standards D1.1.
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion
unit manufacturer's written instructions, to control movement to compensators.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe -
runs, at intermediate points in pipe -runs between expansion loops and bends. Make
provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction
of piping.
3.6 SHEET METAL DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Minimum Sizes:
1. Up to 30-Inch Wide: 1-inch x 16 gauge at 10-foot spacing.
2. 31-Inch to 48-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 16 gauge at 10-foot spacing.
3. Over 48-Inch Wide: Trapeze hangers with angle iron and 1/2-inch rods spaced not
more than 8-foot on centers.
B. Horizontal Duct on Wall Supports Minimum Sizes:
1. Up to 18-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 16 gauge or 1-inch x 1-inch x 1/8 inch at 8-foot
spacing.
2. 19-Inch to 40-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/8-inch angle at 4-foot spacing.
C. Vertical Duct on Wall Supports Minimum Sizes:
1'. At 10-foot spacing.
2. Up to 24-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 16 gauge; 25-inch to 36-inch wide: 1-inch x
1-inch x 1/8-inch angle.
3. 37-Inch to 48-Inch Wide: 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch x 1/8-inch angle.
D. Vertical Duct Floor Supports Minimum Sizes:
1. Riveted or screwed to duct.
2. Up to 60-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/8-inch angle.
3. Over 60-Inch Wide: 2-inch x 1/8-inch.
E. Provide sway bracing on all ductwork in accordance with local codes and regulations.
15I40 - 13
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.
C. Concrete based for the mechanical equipment indoors or outdoors will be provided by the
General Contractor only if shown on the Architectural or Structural Drawings. Otherwise, all
bases shall be provided by this Contractor.
D. For Inertia Bases, see Section 15241.
E. Housekeeping bases shall be 4-inch thick minimum, extended 4-inch beyond machinery
bedplates.
F. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location of all bases and shall
furnish all required anchor bolts and sleeves. If bases are provided by the General Contractor,
furnish him with templates showing the bolt locations.
G. Equipment shall be secured to the bases with anchor bolts of ample size. Bolts shall have
bottom plates and pipe sleeves and shall be securely imbedded in the concrete. All machinery
shall be grouted under the entire bearing surface. After grout has set, all wedges, shims and
jack bolts shall be removed and the space filled with non -shrinking grout. This Contractor
shall provide lead washers at all equipment anchor bolts.
H. Construct equipment supports above floor of structural steel members or steel pipe and
fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
I. Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration connections to
equipment. See also Section 15241.
3.8 SPIRAL LOCK SEAM DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Round Duct Hangers Minimum Sizes:
1. At 10-foot spacings.
2. Up to 18-Inch Diameter: 1-inch x 16 gauge.
3. 19-Inch to 36-Inch Diameter: 1-inch x 12 gauge.
4. 37-Inch to 50-Inch Diameter: 1-1/2 inch x 12 gauge.
5. 51-Inch to 84-Inch Diameter: Trapeze hangers with angle iron and 1/2-inch rods
spaced not more than 8-foot on center.
B. Vertical Duct Floor Supports Minimum Sizes:
1. Rivet to duct and tie angles together with road, angles or cinch band.
2. Up to 48-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/8-inch angle.
3. Over 48-Inch Wide: 2-inch x 2-inch x 3/16-inch angle.
I5140 - 14
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Additional Hanger Requirements:
1. 2-Inch to 24-inch from flexible connections of fans.
2. 2-Inch to 24-inch from the outlets or flexible connections of VAV control units or
mixing boxes.
3. 12-Inch to 36-inch from the main duct to the fast hanger of long branch ducts.
4. 2-Inch to 12-inch from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums.
5. 2-Inch to 24-inch from fire or fire/smoke damper break -away joints.
6. Hangers at throat and heal of round or square elbows 48-inch or greater in width.
3.9 PREFABRICATED ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Equipment Bases:
1. Equipment base shall be solid top equipment base and stepped cant to match roof
insulation. Base shall pitch to match roof pitch and provide level unit installation.
2. Base shall be constructed of reinforced 18 gauge galvanized steel with all welded
components, full mitered comers, factory installed 1-1/2 inch thick rigid fiberglass
insulation, wood nailer, and galvanized steel counter -flashing. Base shall be shipped
as one (1) piece.
B. Equipment Rails:
Equipment rail shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel shell, base plate,
and counterflashing with factory installed wood nailer, fully mitered end sections,
stepped cant to match roof insulation. Rails shall pitch to match roof pitch and
provide level installation.
C. All supports shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.10 FLASHING AND SAFING
A. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through weather or water -proofed
walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Provide lead flashing around ducts and pipes passing from equipment rooms, installed
according to manufacturer's data for sound control.
3.11 SLEEVES AND SEALS
A. General:
Encase all insulated pipes penetrating fire rated walls and floors in 360 degree metal -
shielded insulation inserts as manufactured by Pipe Shields, Inc. or equal. Extend
insulation insert on all domestic cold water, chilled water and refrigerant lines 1-inch
beyond sheet metal shield.
15140 - 15
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Pipes:
Pipes:
a. New Construction: Pipes penetrating fire rated concrete or masonry
construction, whether insulated or not, shall be provided with sheet metal or
pipe sleeves fitted into place at time of construction. In poured concrete, the
sleeves shall be steel pipe with a full circle, continuously welded water stop
plate to also act as a sleeve anchor. When installing Link -Seal (see
Paragraph f.) the sleeve and Link -Seal shall be of matched sizes. Otherwise,
sleeves shall be of such size to provide all around clearance of 1/4-inch to
1-inch. Seal entire space between pipe and sleeve with fire stopping as
specified in Paragraph A.
b. Existing Construction: For existing construction or masonry construction,
prepare pipe opening by carefully cutting or core drilling, install sheet metal
sleeve, and fill any open space with fire stopping material. Cutting of
concrete or masonry shall be done after approval of Structural Engineer.
C. Sleeves in non -fire rated or non -bearing walls, floors or ceilings, new or
existing construction, shall be steel pipe or galvanized sheet metal with lock -
type longitudinal seam. Pack all open spaces on each end with mineral
wood or other non-combustible material, positively fastened in place.
Asbestos is not acceptable.
d. Where a pipe of any description passes through a concrete floor, the sleeve
shall extend at least 2-inch above the finished floor, except when using the
ProSet Systems.
e. At Contractor's option, where uninsulated pipes penetrate cast -in -place
concrete floors, the "ProSet Systems," Atlanta, Georgia, sleeving may be
employed.
f. For pipes penetrating foundation walls, water -proofing membrane floors or
other places where water leakage could be encountered, install Link -Seal
wall sleeves by Thunderline Corporation in manner recommended by the
manufacturer.
2. Ducts:
a.
Round Ducts: Form sleeves with galvanized steel.
b.
Rectangular Ducts: Fonn sleeves with galvanized steel.
C.
Construct opening large enough to allow for movement due to expansion
and to provide for continuous insulation where required.
d.
Where ductwork passes through fire rated floor, ceiling or wall, close off
space between duct and construction with metal angles on both sides of wall
on all four (4) surfaces.
e.
Where ductwork passes through non -fire rated floors and walls, close off
space between duct and construction with non-combustible insulation.
Asbestos is not permitted. Provide metal angles on both sides of wall on all
four (4) surfaces.
f.
General Contractor shall provide roof curbs for duct penetrations.
Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location
and shall counterflash in an approved manner.
r
15140 - 16
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-Cl A & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Seals:
General:
a. Seal all holes or voids where mechanical systems penetrate fire rated floors
and walls with a fire stopping sealant having a fire rating equal to or greater
than that of the construction being penetrated, but not less than two (2)
hours. The sealant shall meet the requirements of ASTM E-814, ASTM E-
119 and UL-1479. It shall be installed with strict adherence to the
manufacturer's instructions and according to the product's UL Laboratory
listing. The use of asbestos in any form is not permitted.
2. Types of Seals:
a. Intumescent (3M Company CP25 Caulk and 303 Putty)
b. Expanding Foam (Dow Coming 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam)
C. Refractory Putty (SOHIO Carbomndum Fire Putty)
3. Method of Use:
a. Intumescent Type: For insulated pipe, install insulation through the sleeve
with a continuous vapor seal if required. Install intumescent seal in the
annular space between the pipe insulation and the pipe sleeve. Refer to
manufacturer's data sheets for maximum annular space allowable and
thickness of material required to maintain the rating of the construction
being penetrated in conformance with applicable UL Fire Stop Classification
for the product.
b. Expanding Foam: For insulated pipe, terminate the insulation on both sides
of the wall or floor being penetrated and fill the space between the
construction and the bare pipe with the foam. For uninsulated pipe, continue
pipe through the penetration and proceed as with insulated pipe.
C. Refractory Putty: For insulated pipe, provide a 360 degree metal -shielded
calcium silicate insulation insert as specified in Paragraph A. Pack and seal
the entire space between shield and sleeve with refractory putty. When
sealing bare pipe, omit the metal -shielded insert.
D. Escutcheons:
In finished parts of the building, after painting is completed, install chromium plated
escutcheons on all pipes passing through walls and floors.
3.12 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports.
Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot
be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work,
and the following:
15140 - 17
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing.
3.13 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds
and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field -painted surfaces.
Touch -Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified
in Division 9 section "PAINTING" of these specifications.
C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 15140
15140 -18
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 151" - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Mechanical Identification Work required by this section is indicated on drawings
and/or specified in other Division 15 sections.
B. Types of Identification Devices specified in this section include the following:
1. Painted Identification Materials
2. Plastic Pipe Markers
3. Plastic Duct Markers
4. Plastic Tape
5. Underground -Type Plastic Line Marker
6. Valve Tags
7. Valve Schedule Frames
8. Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs
9. Plasticized Tags
10. Lettering and Graphics
C. Refer to other Division 15 sections for Identification Requirements at Central -Station
Mechanical Control Center; not work of this section.
D. Refer to Division 16 sections for Identification Requirements of Electrical Work; not work of
this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification
devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Existing Building Standards: Comply with the existing lettering size, length of color
field, colors and identification method as presently exists in the existing building
unless otherwise indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
each identification material and device required.
B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-
1 /2" x 11 " bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown
on tag), location of valve (room or space), size of valve, and variations for identification
(if any). Only tag valves which are intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses,
such as valve to isolate individual system risers, individual floor branches or building system
15190 -1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
g. Fire sprinkler branch piping and sprinkler runouts
F. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
G. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical
installations.
H. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in
place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
I. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing -in the building.
J. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation
of mechanical equipment and materials.
K. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and
overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
L. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of
equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,
with minimum of interference with other installations.
M. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
1.10 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. General:
1. Provide all necessary excavation and backfill for installation of Mechanical Work in
accordance with Division 2.
2. In general, follow all regulations of OSHA as specified in Part 1926, Subpart P,
"Excavations, Trenching and Shoring". Follow specifications of Division 15 as they
refer specifically to the Mechanical Work.
B. Contact Owners of all underground utilities to have them located and marked, at least two (2)
business days before excavation is to begin. Also, prior to starting excavation, brief
employees on marking and color codes and train employees on excavation and safety
procedures for natural gas lines. When excavation approaches gas lines, expose lines by
carefully probing and hand digging.
C. Provide all necessary pumping, cribbing and shoring.
D. Walls of all trenches shall be a minimum of 6-inch clearance from the side of the nearest
mechanical work. Install pipes with a minimum of 6-inch clearance between them when
located in same trench.
15010-a
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
shut-off valves. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals
as specified in Division 15.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Allen Systems, Inc.
2. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Division
3. Brimar Industries, Inc.
4. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
5. Seton Name Plate Corp.
2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division 15 sections. Where more than single type is
specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each
product category.
2.3 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes
generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A 13.1 for piping or to match existing
size in existing building, but not less than 1-114 inch high letters for ductwork and not less
than 3/4-inch high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.
B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; Black, except as otherwise indicated;
either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade.
C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors or to match existing building standard
identification.
2.4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi -rigid snap -on, color -coded
pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.
B. Insulation: Furnish 1-inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe
marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125 degree F
(52 degree C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2-inch beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6-inch (including insulation if any), provide
full -band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one
(1) of the following methods:
15190 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1. Snap -on application of pre -tensioned semi -rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than
3/4-inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 inch.
D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6-inch and larger (including insulation if any), provide
either full -band or strip -type pipe markers, but not narrower than three (3) times letter height
(and of required length), fastened by one (1) of the following methods:
1. Steel spring or non-metallic fasteners.
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than
1-1/2 inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3-inches.
3. Strapped -to -pipe (or insulation) application of semi -rigid type, with manufacturer's
standard stainless steel bands.
E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, shown, or to
match existing building lettering nomenclature system and abbreviate only as necessary for
each application length.
Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally
with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of
plastic.
2.5 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, duct markers.
B. For Hazardous Exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.
C. Nomenclature: Include the following:
l . Direction of air flow
2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.)
3. Duct origin (from)
4. Duct destination (to)
5. Design CFM
2.6 PLASTIC TAPE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color -coded pressure -sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl
tape, not less than 3 mils thick.
B. Width: Provide 1-1/2 inch wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including
insulation, if any) of less than 6-inch, 2-1/2 inch wide tape for larger pipes.
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.
151" - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 151" - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2.7 UNDERGROUND -TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright -colored, continuous -printed plastic tape,
intended for direct -burial service; not less than 6-inch wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with
printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe.
B. Provide multi -ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between 2-layers of plastic tape.
2.8 VALVE TAGS
A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp -engraved piping
system abbreviation in 1/4-inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2-inch high,
valve normal position 1/4-inch high letters, and with 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
i . Provide 1-1 /2 inch diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Fill tag engraving with Black enamel.
B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded
type), and solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves,
and manufactured specifically for that purpose.
C. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16-inch thick engraved plastic
laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed
valve. Include 1/8-inch center hole to allow attachment.
2.9 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Valve Schedule shall be printed on company letterhead and shall include the following
columns:
1. Valve Tag Number (example: HWS-1)
2. Service (example: ISOLATE AHU-1 HEATING COIL)
3. Room Number (location of valve)
4. Size of Valve
5. Type of Valve
6. Normal Position of the Valve (open or closed)
B. Frame: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for
removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded
aluminum, with non -glare type plexiglass.
2.10 ENGRAVED PLASTIC -LAMINATE SIGNS
A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in
the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes
and wording indicated, Black with White core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated,
punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of
substrate.
B. Thickness: 1/8-Inch, except as otherwise indicated.
151" - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive where
screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
2.11 PLASTICIZED TAGS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident -prevention
tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4 inch x
5-5/8 inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording
including large -size primary wording (As examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT
OPERATE).
2.12 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical
identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled and
approved by the Owner/Engineer. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated and
approved by the Owner/Engineer for proper identification and operation/maintenance of
mechanical systems and equipment.
B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified,
provide identification which indicates individual system number as designated on the
drawings or schedule as well as service.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation,
painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to
installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
3.2 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork and duct access doors
with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and
direction of flow, in Black or White (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color).
Existing building identification shall match the existing method which exists in the building.
B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling
system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed
enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50-foot spacings along
exposed runs.
C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and
housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment), other maintenance and operating
instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information.
D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar
concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at
Installer's option.
15190 - 5
z
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 151" - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive
identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Existing building
identification shall match the existing method which exists in the building.
B. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "MATERIALS" in this
section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non -insulated pipes.
C. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in
occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums)
and exterior non -concealed locations.
D. Near each valve and control device.
E. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at
branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.
F. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non -accessible
enclosures.
G. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.
H. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
I. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 25-foot along each piping run, except reduce
spacing to 15-foot in congested areas of piping and equipment.
J. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.
3.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping systems, install
continuous underground -type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6-inch to
8-inch below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench and do
not exceed overall width of 16-inch, install single line marker. For tile fields and similar
installations, mark only edge pipelines of field.
3.5 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Provide valve tag on valves in each piping system. List each tagged valve in valve
schedule for each piping system.
1. Building services main shutoff valves.
2. Each individual system main shutoff valves.
3. Each individual system riser shutoff valves.
4. Each individual system floor shutoff valves.
5. Each individual system major branch shutoff valves.
15190 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Provide the following columns and information for each valve:
1. Valve Tag Number
2. Service
3. Location
4. Size
5. Type
6. Normal Position
C. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in mechanical equipment rooms where directed
by Architect/Owner/Engineer.
D. Where more than one (1) major mechanical equipment room is shown for project, install
mounted valve schedule in each major mechanical equipment room, and repeat only main
valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than single
mechanical equipment room.
3.6 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install minimum 2-inch x 4-inch engraved plastic laminate equipment marker on
each individual items of mechanical equipment. Provide signs for the following general
categories of equipment.
1. Main building systems control and operating valves, including safety devices and
hazardous units such as gas outlets.
2. Room thermostats, except gun tag labels are acceptable for room thermostats.
3. Fuel -burning units including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills and absorption chillers.
4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor -driven units.
5. Heat exchangers, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar equipment.
6. Fans and blowers.
7. HVAC units.
8. Tanks and pressure vessels.
9. Water treatment systems and similar equipment.
B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch high lettering for name of unit.
C. Text of Signs: In addition to the identified unit, inform operator of operational requirements,
indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked
by work of this division or other divisions.
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION 15190
15190-7
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15241- VIBRATION CONTROL COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15241 - VIBRATION CONTROL
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Vibration Control Work required by this section is indicated on Drawings and
Schedules, and/or specified in other Division 15 sections.
B. Types of Vibration Control Products specified in this section include the following:
1. Fiberglass Pads and Shapes
2. Neoprene Pads
3. Vibration Isolation Springs
4. All -Directional Anchors
5. Neoprene Mountings
6. Spring Isolators, Free -Standing
7. Spring Isolators, Vertically -Restrained
8. Thrust Restraints
9. Equipment Rails
10. Fabricated Equipment Bases
11. Inertia Base Frames
12. Roof -Curb Isolators
13, Isolation Hangers
14. Riser Isolators
15. Flexible Pipe Connectors
C. Vibration Control Products furnished as integral part of factory -fabricated equipment, are
specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.
D. Refer to other Division 15 sections for equipment foundations; Hangers; Sealants; Gaskets;
requirements of electrical connections to equipment isolated on vibration control products;
requirements of duct connections to air handling equipment isolated on vibration control
products.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control
products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than five (5) years.
1. Except as otherwise indicated, obtain Vibration Control Products from single
manufacturer.
2. Engage Manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of support
isolation units produced, and of associated inertia bases (if any).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, and
location for each product furnished.
15241 -1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15241- VIBRATION CONTROL COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
1. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness,
natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment.
2. For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid -compression
height, operating height, fatigue characteristics, ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness
and bases of spring -rated selection for range of loading weights.
3. Include performance certifications from manufacturers.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components. Detail bases and show
location of equipment anchoring points coordinated with equipment manufacturer's shop
drawings.
1. Shop drawings showing structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam
bases and other custom -fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted
data.
a. Furnish templates, anchor bolts and sleeve for equipment bases, foundations
and other support systems for coordination of vibration isolation units with
other work.
2. Submit shop drawings indicating scope of vibration isolation work and locations of
units and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping and
ductwork including risers, air housings and inertia bases.
a. Include schedule of units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, and
weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product.
Include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with
requirements of Divisions 15.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Vibration Control Products:
a. Mason Industries, Inc.
b. Peabody Noise Control, Inc.
C. Vibration Eliminator
d. Senior Flexonics
2.2 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS
A. Fiberglass Pads and Shapes: Glassfiber of not more than 0.18 mil diameter, produced by
multiple -flame attenuation process, molded with manufacturer's standard fillers and binders
through ten (10) compression cycles at three (3) times rated load bearing capacity, to achieve
natural frequency of not more than 12 Hertz, in thicknesses and shapes required for use in
vibration isolation units.
15241 - 2
TECM41CAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15241- VIBRATION CONTROL COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Neoprene Pads: Oil -resistant neoprene sheets of manufacturer's standard hardness and cross -
ribbed or waffled pattern.
Mason Industries Type W
C. Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound -steel compression springs, of high -strength, heat -treated,
spring alloy steel with outside diameter not less than 0.8 times operating height; with lateral
stiffness not less than vertical stiffness and designed to reach solid height before exceeding
rated fatigue point of steel.
1. Color coated springs for ease of identification.
2. Spring shall have a minimum of 50 percent additional travel to solid.
Mason Industries Type SLF
D. All -Directional Anchors: Provide all -directional acoustical pipe anchor consisting of
telescopic arrangement of sizes of steel tubing separated by minimum 1/2-inch thickness of
heavy-duty neoprene and duck, or neoprene isolation material. Provide vertical restraints by
similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Design for maximum
500 PSI load on isolation materials, and provide for equal resistance in any direction. Equip
anchor with threaded hole on top and two (2) holes in base plate for bolting down or provide
welding provisions top and bottom, if indicated.
Mason Industries Type ADA
E. Neoprene Mountings: Provide neoprene mountings consisting of neoprene element bonded
between two (2) steel plates that are neoprene -covered to prevent corrosion. Provide
minimum rated deflection of 0.35-inch. Provide threaded hole in upper plate and two (2)
holes in base plate for securing to equipment and to substrate.
Mason Industries Type ND
Spring Isolators, Free -Standing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation
spring Type C between top and bottom loading plates, and with pad -type Type B isolator
bonded to bottom of bottom loading plate. Include studs or cups to ensure centering of spring
on plates. Include leveling bolt with lock nuts and washers, centered in top plate, arranged for
leveling and anchoring supported equipment as indicated.
Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate as indicated.
Mason Industries Type SLFH
G. Spring Isolators, Vertically -Restrained: Provide spring isolators Type C in housing that
includes vertical limit stops. Design housing to act as blocking during erection, and with
installed height and operating height being equal. Maintain 1/2-inch minimum clearance
around restraining bolts, and between housing and springs. Design so limit stops are out of
contact during normal operation.
Mounting used outdoors shall be hot dipped galvanized, spring shall be cadmium
plated.
15241 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15241- VIBRATION CONTROL COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. Mounting used outdoors shall have certified calculation by a registered professional
engineer showing ability to withstand 109 MPH wind load in three (3) principal axis.
Mason Industries Type SLRS or Type SLR
H. Thrust Restraints: Provide horizontal thrust restraints consisting of spring elements in series
with neoprene pad. Select spring deflection same as for equipment loading. Design so thrust
restraints can be pre-set and adjusted in field. Attach horizontal restraints at centerline of
thrust and symmetrically on either side of unit.
1. Provide same deflection as isolated equipment.
2. Select load to provide 1/4-inch maximum displacement under full system operating
pressure.
Mason Industries Type WBUWBD
Equipment Rails: Where rails or beams are indicated for use with isolator units to support
equipment, provide steel beams complying with ASTM A36, with minimum depth of 6-inch
or 0.10 x span of beam between isolators (whichever is greater). Provide welded bracket at
each end of beams, and anchor each end to spring isolator unit. Provide bolt holes in beams
matching anchor bolt holes in equipment. Provide beams of section modules indicated or, if
not indicated, selected for normal -weight equipment loading to limit static load stress to
16,000 PSI.
Beam depth need not exceed 14-inch provided that deflection and misalignment is
kept within manufacturer's acceptable limits.
Mason Industries Type ICS
J. Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for use with isolator
units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment), provide welded rectangular
unit, fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36.
Provide welded support brackets and anchor base to spring isolator units. Except as otherwise
indicated arrange brackets to result in lowest possible mounting height for equipment, but
provide minimum of 1-inch. Provide bolt holes in base matching anchor bolt holes in
equipment.
1. Provide for auxiliary motor slide base under motor or motor slide rails for adjusting
belt tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or slide base in position.
2. Where sizes of base framing members are not indicated, fabricate base with depth of
structure not less than 0.10 x longest span of base, rigidly braced to support
equipment without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to
equipment or isolator performance.
3. Beam depth need not exceed 14-inch provided that deflection and misalignment is
kept within manufacturer's limits.
Mason Industries Type WF
K. Inertia Base Frames: Where inertia bases are indicated for use with isolation units to support
equipment, provide rectangular structural beam channel, or complete sheet metal box concrete
forms for floating foundations, with materials complying with ASTM A36. Frame unit as
15241 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSTPY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
E. Pipe Trenching:
Dig trenches to depth, width, configuration, and grade appropriate to the piping being
installed. Dig trenches to 6-inches below the level of the bottom of the pipe to be
installed. Install 6-inch bed of pea gravel or squeegee, mechanically tamp to provide
a firm bed for piping, true to line and grade without irregularity. Provide depressions
only at hubs, couplings, flanges, or other normal pipe protrusions.
Backfilling shall not be started until all work has been inspected, tested and accepted. All
backfill material shall be reviewed by the Soils Engineer. In no case shall lumber, metal or
other debris be buried in with backfill.
G. Trench Backfill:
1. Backfill to 12-inches above top of piping with pea gravel or squeegee, the same as
used for piping bed, compact properly.
2. Continue backfill to finish grade, using friable material free of rock and other debris.
Install in 6-inch layers, each properly moistened and mechanically compacted prior to
installation of ensuing layer. Compaction by hydraulic jetting is not permissible.
H. After backfilling and compacting, any settling shall be refilled, tamped, and refinished at this
Contractor's expense.
This Contractor shall repair and pay for any damage to finished surfaces.
Complete the backfilling near manholes using pea gravel or squeegee, installing it in 6-inch
lifts and mechanically tamping to achieve 95 percent compaction.
K. Use suitable excavated material to complete the backfill, installed in 6-inch lifts and
mechanically compacted to seal against water infiltration. Compact to 95 percent for the
upper 30-inches below paving and slabs and 90 percent elsewhere.
1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and
materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and
equipment.
B. Refer to Division 1.
C. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and
patching.
D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of
mechanical installations.
E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is
necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non -conforming installations.
F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:
15010-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15241- VIBRATION CONTROL COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
shown or, if not shown, with minimum depth of 0.08 x longest dimension of base, but not less
than 6-inch deep. Size frame as shown or, if not shown, so that weight of frame plus concrete
fill will be greater than operating weight of equipment supported. Provide steel reinforcing
both ways with both ends of reinforcing buttwelded to base framing.
1. Provide welded support brackets and anchor base frame to spring isolator units.
2. Provide anchor bolts, located as required for equipment anchorage and supported for
casting of concrete. Locate bolts as indicated or, if not indicated, locate bolts so that
operating weight of equipment will be centered both ways on inertia base.
3. Provide adjustable bolts in pipe sleeves.
4. Provide mounting bracket to provide 1-inch floor clearance.
5. Provide sufficient mass to allow 1/4-inch maximum displacement under starting and
normal conditions.
Mason Industries Type KSL
L. Roof -Curb Isolators: Fabricated frame units sized to match roof curbs, formed with isolation
springs Type C between extruded aluminum upper and lower sections, which are shaped and
positioned to prevent metal -to -metal contact. Provide continuous airtight and waterproof seal
between upper and lower extrusions. Include provisions for anchorage of frame unit to roof
curb, and for anchorage of equipment to unit.
Mason Industries Type CMAB
M. Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard
compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for five (5) times rated loading of
units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degree off center in any direction before
contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and including
acoustical washers to prevent metal -to -metal contacts.
1. Provide vibration isolation spring Type C with cap in lower pad -type isolator rubber
hanger element in bottom, securely retained in unit.
2. Provide neoprene element, with minimum deflection of 0.35-inch, securely retained
in hanger box.
Mason Industries Type 30N
N. Riser Isolators: Suspend risers from, or support risers by, spring hangers Type ND or spring
isolators Type F. Wherever possible, anchor risers at central point with resilient anchors,
Type D. Provide hanger or mounting deflection of 0.75-inch except in those expansion
locations where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load changes to +25
percent of initial deflection. Provide sliding guides held in position by resilient anchors,
located between anchor points and end of piping, spaced as indicated.
O. Flexible Pipe Connectors:
For Non -Ferrous Piping, provide bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid with
copper tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze -welded to hose.
Mason Industries Type BBF
15241 - 5
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15241- VIBRATION CONTROL COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. For Ferrous Piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire
braid with NPT steel nipples or 150 PSI ANSI flanges, welded to hose.
Mason Industries Type BSS
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Owner or his representative.
3.2 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS
A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection
and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.
B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application ofvibration isolation materials
and units to achieve minimum static deflection and displacement requirements.
3.3 APPLICATIONS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, select vibration control products in accordance with
ASHRAE Handbook, 1999 HVAC Applications Volume, Chapter 42 "Sound and Vibration
Control", Table 34.
B. Piping: For piping connected to equipment mounted on vibration control products, install
isolation hangers Type N, as indicated, and for first three (3) points of support for pipe sizes
4-inch and less, for first four (4) points of support for pipe sizes 6-inch through 8-inch, and
for fast six (6) points of support for pipe sizes 10-inch and over.
Where applicable, apply restraint system in accordance with SMACNA GFSR 1982.
C. Fan Sets: All fan sets should have thrust restraints when operating over 2-inch W.C. S.P.
unless they are mounted on a concrete inertia base, in which case the inertia base will not
allow fan movement. The fan position at operating and stop positions should not move more
than 1/4-inch displacement at these two (2) conditions.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for
installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure
that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not
short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices
(if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation.
B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces.
15241 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15241- VIBRATION CONTROL COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units
as required where substrate is not level.
D. Install inertia base frames on isolator units so that minimum of 1=mch clearance below base
will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed and
loaded for operation.
E. For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust
exceeds 10 percent of equipment weight.
F. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.
G. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and
operations.
H. Flexible Pipe Connectors_ Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and
parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible.
3.5 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK
A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to
vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after
completion of other related work (but before equipment start-up), shall furnish written report
to Engineer listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration
isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
l . Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators.
2. Piping connections, including flexible connections.
3. Ductwork connections, including provisions for flexible connections.
4. Passage of piping and ductwork, which is to be isolated through walls and floors.
B. Do not start-up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in manner acceptable to
vibration isolation installer.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no
dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.
3.7 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS
A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare report showing measured equipment
deflections theoretical floor deflection and isolation efficiency for each major item of
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15241
15241- 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15250 — MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES. P.C.
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes:
1. Piping Insulation, Jackets and Accessories
2. Ductwork Insulation and Jackets
3. Equipment Insulation and Covering
B. Refer to other Division 15 sections for Shields, Inserts, and Mechanical Identification.
C. Insulation thickness based on 1999 ASHRAE 90.1 recommendations. Ductwork insulation
thickness is based on Table 6.2.4.2B, Envelope Criteria Table 5-16 through 5-19 for Exterior,
Unvented Attic With Roof Insulation, Unconditioned Space and Indirectly Conditioned
Spaces. Piping insulation thickness is based on Table 6.2.4.5.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical
insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least five (5) years successful installation experience
on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.
C. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics and insulating cements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and schedule listing materials,
thickness, K-value, density, and furnished accessories for each service or equipment specified.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products, name of
manufacturer, and brand.
B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
15250-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the
following:
Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (flexible elastomeric)
b. Johns -Manville Products Corp. (fiberglass, calcium silicate)
C. Knauf Fiber Glass (fiberglass)
d. Manson Insulation Co. (fiberglass, calcium silicate)
e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. (fiberglass)
f. Rubatex Corp. (flexible elastomeric)
2. Jacketing and Covering Products:
a. Childers
b. Ceel-Co.
C. Johns -Manville Products Corp.
d. Knauf Fiber Glass
2.2 PIPING INSULATION
A. Glass Fiber: ASTM C 547, Type 1, rigid molded, noncombustible (NFPA 259), 0.23 "K"
value at 75 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 850 degree F, moisture
sorption less than 0.2% by volume. Composite 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating
(ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 255).
Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASTM C 1136, 451bs/in tensile strength (ASTM D 828), beach
puncture 50 oz in/in tear minimum (ASTM D 781). White Kraft paper reinforced with glass
fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum foil, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt
strips.
Connections: Tacks, pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape, Perma-Weld adhesive.
B. Calcium Silicate: ASTM C 533, Type I, rigid molded, noncombustible (ASTME E 136),
0.42 "K" value at 300 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 1200 degree
F, 160 psi compressive strength for 5 percent compression (ASTM C 165), flexural strength
70 psi (ASTM C 203). 0/0 flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84).
Tie Wire: 16-Gauge stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12-inch centers.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Foam: ASTM C 534, Type I, flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded,
0.27 "K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 220 degree F,
water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm -inch, 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating
(ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 255).
D. Field Applied Fittings and Jackets:
PVC Plastic:
15250 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
a. One-piece, gloss white, molded fitting covers with factory installed
fiberglass insulation inserts.
b. 20 Mil (30 mil for exterior applications) cut and curled gloss white jacketing
material. Composite 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM
E84, UL 723 and NFPA 90A).
C. Connect with tacks and pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
2. Canvas: UL Listed fabric, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire
retardant lagging adhesive.
3. Aluminum: 0.016-Inch thick sheet with factory applied moisture barrier, with
longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps, die shaped fitting covers.
4. Stainless Steel: Type 304 stainless steel, 0.010-inch.
2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Rigid Fiberglass Board: ASTM C 612, Type IA and 113, 3 lb/cu ft density, 0.23 "K" value at
75 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 450 degree F, moisture sorption
less than 5.0% by weight, aluminum foil facing reinforced with fiberglass scrim laminated to
UL rated Kraft paper. Composite 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84,
UL 723, and NFPA 90A).
Secure with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples and
vapor barrier mastic as needed.
B. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type 11, 3/41b/cu 11 density, 1-1/2 inch thickness,
0.27 "K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature at compressed thickness, maximum service
temperature 250 degree F, moisture sorption less than 0.2% by volume, aluminum foil facing
reinforced with fiberglass scrim laminated to UL rated Kraft paper. Composite 25/50-flame
spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84, UL 40, and NFPA 90A).
Secure with UL Listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples and
vapor barrier mastic as needed.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Foam: ASTM C 534, Type I, flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded,
0.27 "K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 220 degree F,
water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm -inch, 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating
(ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 255).
D. Field Applied Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type I for ductwork with temperatures below ambient,
Type H for ductwork with temperatures above ambient.
Aluminum: 0.016-inch thick sheet with factory applied moisture barrier, with
longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps, die shaped fitting covers.
E. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles
and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications
indicated.
F. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective
finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications
indicated.
15250 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
G. Round Ducts and Concealed Rectangular Ducts: Adhere flexible insulation to ductwork with
adhesive applied in 6-inch wide strips on 16-inch centers. Butt insulation and seal joints and
breaks with 2-inch lap of foil adhered over joint.
2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Rigid Fiberglass Board (Low Temperature): ASTM C 612, Type IA and 113, 3 lb/cu ft
density, 0.23 "K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 450
degree F, moisture sorption less than 5.0% by weight, aluminum foil facing reinforced with
fiberglass scrim laminated to UL rated Krafft paper. Composite 25/50-flame spread/smoke
developed rating (ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 90A).
Secure with UL Listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples and
vapor barrier mastic as needed.
B. Rigid Fiberglass Board (High Temperature): ASTM C 612, Type H, 3 lb/cu ft density, 0.23
"K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 850 degree F,
moisture sorption less than 5.0% by weight, 1-inch galvanized hexagonal wire mesh facing
stitched on face of insulation. Composite 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating
(ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 90A).
Secure with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples and
vapor barrier mastic as needed.
C. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type 11, 1.5 lb/cu ft density, 0.27 "K" value at 75
degree F mean temperature at compressed thickness, maximum service temperature 450
degree F, moisture sorption less than 0.2% by volume, aluminum foil facing reinforced with
fiberglass scrim laminated to UL rated Kraft paper. Composite 25/50-flame spread/smoke
developed rating (ASTM E 84, UL 40, and NFPA 90A).
Secure with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples and
vapor barrier mastic as needed.
D. Calcium Silicate: ASTM C 533, Type I, rigid molded block, noncombustible (ASTME E
136), 0.41 "K" value at 300 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 1200
degree F, 160 psi compressive strength for 5 percent compression (ASTM C 165), flexural
strength 70 psi (ASTM C 203). 0/0 flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84).
Banded in place, tightly butted, joints staggered and secured with 16 gauge galvanized or
stainless steel wive or 1/2-inch x 0.015-inch galvanized steel bands on 12-inch maximum
centers for large areas.
E. Flexible Elastomeric Foam: ASTM C 534, Type 11, flexible, cellular elastomeric sheet, 0.27
"K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 220 degree F,
water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm -inch, 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating
(ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 255). Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed. UV -
protective coating for exterior applications.
15250 - 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
F. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre -sized glass clothjacketing material,
not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option, except as
otherwise indicated.
G. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner
angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications
indicated.
H. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and
protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions where mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
A. Cold Piping:
1. Applications:
a. Potable and non -potable cold water.
b. Potable chilled water.
C. Interior aboveground storm water (including overflow system).
d. Plumbing vents within six (6) lineal feet of roof outlet.
e. Roof drain bowls.
2. Insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 1/2-Inch thickness up to 2-inch pipe size, 1-inch thickness for
2-inch pipe size and larger.
B. Hot Piping:
1. Applications:
a. Potable hot water.
b. Potable hot water and hot water circulation.
C. Hot equipment drain.
2. Insulation:
a. Hot Water and Circulating Water: Fiberglass: 1/2-Inch thickness for
runouts, 1-inch thickness up to 2-inch pipe size, 1-1/2 inch thickness for
2-1/2 inch pipe sizes and larger.
3.3 HVAC PIPING INSULATION (Based on Colorado Energy Guidelines)
A. Refrigerant Piping:
Applications:
a. Suction
b. Hot Gas
C. Hot Gas Bypass
15250 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DMSION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CI.ARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
2. Insulation:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2-Inch thickness for 3/4-inch pipe,l -Inch thickness
for 1-inch size and above.
B. Sub -Freezing Piping (0 to 39 Degree F (-18 to 4 Degree C)):
1. Applications:
a. Glycol water supply and return.
2. Insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 1-Inch thickness for 3/4-inch and 1-inch pipe, 1-1/2 inch
thickness for 1-1/4 inch pipe and above.
C. Cold Piping (40 Degree F (4 Degree C) to Ambient):
1. Applications:
a. Chilled water supply and return.
b. Cooling coil condensate drain.
2. Insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 1/2-Inch thickness up to 1-inch pipe size, 3/4-inch for 1-1/4 inch
to 2-inch, 1-inch thickness for 2-1/2 inch and larger pipe.
D. Hot Piping (105 to 140 Degree F):
1. Applications:
a. Heat Recovery Supply and Return.
2. Insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 1/2-Inch thickness up to 1-inch pipe size, 1-inch thickness for
1-inch up to 2-inch, 1-1/2 inch for 2-1/2 inch and larger.
E. Hot Low Pressure Piping (Water to 250 Degree F (121 Degree C):
1. Applications:
a. Hot water supply and return.
2. Insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 1-1/2 Inch thickness up to 2-inch pipe, 2-inch thickness for all
other pipe sizes.
b. Fiberglass for runouts up to 2-inch, 1-inch thickness.
3.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket:
1. Concealed supply ductwork without liner: 1-1/2 Inch thickness.
2. Return ductwork in unconditioned spaces without liner: 1-1/2 Inch thickness.
3. Exhaust ductwork within 10 ft. of exterior opening without liner: 1-1/2 Inch
thickness.
4. Unit housings that are not factory insulated: 1-1/2 Inch thickness.
15250 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3.5
3.6
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
C.
Cold Equipment (Below Ambient Temperature):
Applications:
a. Chilled water pump impeller housings.
b. Expansion tanks.
C. Air separators.
2. Insulation:
a. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: 1-1/2 Inch thickness.
Hot Equipment (Above Ambient Temperature):
1. Applications:
a.
Boiler surfaces not factory insulated.
b.
Hot water storage tanks.
C.
Water heater surfaces not factory insulated.
d.
Heat exchangers.
e.
Condensate receivers.
f.
Hot water expansion tanks.
g.
Flash tanks.
h.
Air separators.
i.
Blow down separators.
j.
Feedwater storage tanks, dearators.
k.
Absorption chiller hot surfaces not factory insulated.
2. Insulation:
a.
Fiberglass (High Temperature): 2-Inch thickness, except 3-inch thickness
for low-pressure boilers and steam jacketed heat exchangers. Do not use for
equipment above 450 degree F (232 degree C).
b.
Calcium Silicate: 2-Inch thickness, except 3-inch thickness for low-pressure
boilers and steam jacketed heat exchangers.
Breeching and Stacks:
Applications:
a. Breechings between heating equipment outlet and stack or chimney
connection, except for double wall or factory insulated breechings.
b. Stacks that are not factory insulated.
C. Generator exhaust piping, fittings, and mufflers.
2. Insulation:
a. Calcium Silicate: 4-Inch thickness.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION
A. Install insulation after piping system tests have been completed.
B. Clean piping to remove foreign substances and moisture prior to applying insulation.
C. Install insulation products according to manufacturer's written instructions, building codes,
and recognized industry standards.
15250 - 7
I tUH LAICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUHIEMEMTS COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work;
2. Remove and replace defective work;
3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents;
4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing;
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures;
6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore work to provide for
Architect observation of concealed work.
G. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and
materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating
units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new
work.
H. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled
to be removed.
I. Provide and maintain an approved type of temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to
prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
J. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical and electrical services passing through remodeling or
demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. When
services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the affected areas and
notify the Owner prior to changeover.
1.12 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Light, Heat, Power, Etc.:
Responsibility for providing temporary electricity, heat and other facilities shall be as
specified in Division 1.
B. Use of Permanent Building Equipment for Temporary Heating or Cooling:
Permanent building equipment shall not be used without written permission from the
Owner. If this equipment is used for temporary heating or cooling, it shall be
adequately maintained per manufacturer's instructions and protected with filters,
strainers, controls, reliefs, etc. The guarantee period shall not start until the
equipment is turned over to the Owner for his use.
1.13 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and Division 1, "PRODUCTS, OPTIONS AND
SUBSTITUTION".
1.14 MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Division 1 and ALA
Document A201 (1987) Edition, "SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES".
15010-6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
D. Omit insulation on exposed chrome -plated piping (except for handicapped fixtures), air
chambers, unions, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage
piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre -
insulated equipment.
E. Omit insulation on hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinets; on cold piping
within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; on heating piping beyond
control valve, located within heated space; on condensate piping between steam trap and
union; and on unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
F. Secure longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips according to manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Firmly rub lap and butt strips to pressurize seam and ensure positive closure.
H. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut
piece to complete run. Do not use scraps.
I. Apply insulation to piping with all joints tightly fitted to eliminate voids.
J. Apply insulation on cold surfaces with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Hangers, supports,
and anchors that are secured directly to cold surfaces must be adequately insulated and vapor
sealed to prevent condensation. Seal pipe terminations in chilled water or glycol systems
every four (4) pipe sections.
K. Extend surface finishes to protect all surfaces, end, and raw edges of insulation.
L. Protect vapor -barrier jackets on pipe insulation from puncture or other damage. Avoid the use
of staples on vapor barrier jackets. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier finish
recommended by the manufacturer.
M. Cover valves, fittings and similar items with equivalent thickness and composition of
insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded or job fabricated covers (at
Installer's option).
N. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping
penetrations, except where fire -stopping materials are required.
O. Provide thermal shield inserts on all pipe (Refer to 15140). For piping below ambient
temperature, apply vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal with 3-inch wide vapor
barrier tape.
Minimum insulation insert lengths:
a. 1-1/2 — 2-1/2 Inch Pipe: 10-Inches
b. 3 — 6-Inch Pipe: 12-Inches
C. 8 — 10-Inch Pipe: 16-Inches
d. 12-Inch and Larger Pipe: 22-Inches
P. Apply galvanized metal shields between hangers or supports and pipe insulation. Form
shields to fit the insulation and extend up to the centerline of the pipe. The shield length shall
be 4-inches less than the associated insulation hanger insert to allow for vapor retarding butt
joints on each side of the shields.
15250 - 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
Q. Apply adhesives, mastics and coatings at manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage
per gallon.
R. Replace all damaged insulation in whole; Repair of damaged insulation will not be accepted.
S. Insulate fittings and valves with PVC insulated fitting covers and insulation inserts per
manufacturer's recommendations.
T. Install aluminum jacket on exterior piping.
Install metal jackets by overlapping seams 2-inches and securing with metal bands on 24-inch
centers. Caulk all seams with clear silicone. Locate longitudinal seams at the bottom of
piping. Finish elbows and tees with matching metal fitting covers. Finish other fittings with
conventional weather insulation materials with aluminum finish.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Install insulation products according to manufacturer's written instructions, building codes,
and recognized industry standards.
B. Do not insulate fiberglass ductwork or lined ductwork.
C. Clean ductwork to remove foreign substances and moisture prior to applying insulation.
D. Apply insulation to ductwork with all joints tightly fitted to eliminate voids
E. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor retardant
adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Secure insulation to the underside of duct 24-inches or greater with mechanical fasteners or
speed clips spaced 18-inches on center. Cut off protruding ends of fasteners after speed clips
are installed and seal penetration of vapor barrier.
G. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar
penetrations, except where fire -stopping materials are required.
H. Install aluminum jacket on exterior ductwork insulation when not lined.
I. Install comer angles on all external comers of insulation in exposed finished spaces before
covering with jacketing.
J. Adhere flexible elastomeric sheets to ductwork by compression fit and full coverage of
adhesive. Seal buttjoints with same adhesive. Apply the same sheet thickness on standing
metal duct seams as installed on the duct surface.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Install insulation products according to manufacturer's instructions, building codes, and
recognized industry standards.
15250 - 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling
insulation, if necessary. As required, secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips,
adhesive, wires, or bands
C. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface.
On cold equipment use vapor retardant cement
D. Provide insulated dual temperature or cold equipment containing fluids below ambient
temperature with vapor retardant jackets
E. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture
and other damage.
F. Do not apply insulation to equipment, mufflers, breechings, or stacks while hot.
G. Apply insulation using staggered joint method and double layer construction. Apply each
layer of insulation separately.
H. Cover insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike manner,
leaving smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and
depressions, and cover over with wire netting and joints with 1/4-inch thick cement to remove
surface irregularities.
I. Cover insulated surfaces with all -service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap
seams at least 2-inch. Apply over vapor barrier where applicable.
J. Do not insulate manholes, handholes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, or manufacturer's nameplate.
Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.
K. Provide removable insulation sections with aluminum jacket and stainless steel bands to cover
parts of equipment which must be opened for maintenance; include metal vessel covers,
fasteners, flanges, frames and accessories.
L. Provide aluminum jacketing on exterior insulated ' equipment as recommended by
manufacturer. On flexible elastomeric insulation, apply two (2) coats of manufacturer's
approved U.V. resistant finish.
3.9 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR
A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both previously damaged or
damaged during this construction period.
END OF SECTION 15250
15250 - 10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is part of
each Division 15 section making reference to Fire Protection specified herein.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section and the Drawings outline the general, but not specific, scope of the projects Fire
Protection System. The successful Contractor will be the Engineer of Record for the design
of the system. The Design and Engineering of the Fire Protection System shall be by the Fire
Protection Contractor. It is the Contractor's responsibility that the system meet all the
requirements of NFPA (FM if applicable) and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
B. This Section specifies Automatic Sprinkler Systems for buildings and structures. Materials
and equipment specified in this Section include:
1. Pipe, Fittings, Valves and Specialties
2. Sprinklers and Accessories
C. Products furnished but not installed include sprinkler head cabinet with spare sprinkler heads.
Furnish to the Owner's maintenance personnel.
D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
Division 2 Section "Fire Service Piping" for fire protection piping from fire service
mains to a point 5-feet outside the building.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through basement walls and fire/smoke barriers.
3. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories" for fire
extinguishers and extinguisher cabinets.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identification of fire
protection piping system and components.
5. Division 15 Section "Fire Pumps" for pumps, motors, controllers and accessories.
6. Division 15 sections inclusive.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).
15300-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSrrY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15M - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
B. Other definitions for Fire Protection Systems are listed in NFPA (1999) Standards 13, 14, 20
and 24.
C. Working Plans as used in this Section means those documents (including drawings and
calculations) prepared pursuant to the requirements contained in NFPA-13 (1999) for
obtaining approval of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete Fire Sprinkler System for the entire building (including, but not limited to,
electrical rooms, mechanical rooms and the remainder of the building), except designated
areas as shown on the drawings, which will not require fire sprinkler coverage, will be
specifically noted with "No A/S". Recertify system.
B. Fire Protection System is a "Wet -Pipe" system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a
piping system containing water and connected to a water supply so that water discharges
immediately from sprinklers opened by fire.
C. Elevator Shafts and Machine Rooms: Sprinklers shall be installed in elevator machinery
rooms, at the top of elevator shafts, and at the bottom of elevator shafts.
1. Sprinkler coverage shall be designed for Ordinary Hazard Group One. Sprinkler
heads shall be high temperature classification (286 degree F).
2. The sprinkler heads in the elevator machinery room shall be supplied from a separate,
independent sprinkler branch line with a readily accessible indicating shutoff valve
located outside of the shaft or machinery room.
3. At least one (1) smoke detector shall be located in the same area of each sprinkler
head. Activation of any one (1) of these detectors shall cause emergency recall (if
equipped) of the elevator(s) and also put the building into alarm.
4. In addition to smoke detectors, at least one (1) thermal detector, with 190 degree F
fixed temperature, shall be installed in the same area of each sprinkler head. The
circuitry for the thermal detector(s) shall be separate from the circuitry for the smoke
detector(s). When any thermal detector is activated, a shunt -trip circuit breaker shall
automatically disconnect all electrical power to the elevator machinery room and the
elevator machinery.
5. Division 16 shall provide Fire Detection System (detectors, wiring, panel, etc.) for
complete operation of the Fire Sprinkler System for the elevator shaft and machine
room.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping and piping specialty, fire protection
specialty, fire department connection and any equipment installed in accordance with the
Contract Documents. Index per specification chapter and item number.
B. Shop drawings prepared in accordance with NFPA-13 identified as "Working Plans",
including detailed riser schematics indicating pipe sizes and lengths; and hydraulic
calculations which have been approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Do not proceed
with the installation of the work until the Architect/Engineer review of shop drawings is
received.
15300 - 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
C. Contractor shall stamp shop drawings indicating compliance with applicable codes and
contract drawings. Contractor shall stamp drawing "Approved for Construction".
D. If more than two (2) submittals (either for shop drawings or for as -built drawings) are made
by the Contractor, the Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractor for subsequent
reviews by their consultants. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner
to the Contractor.
E. Maintenance data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection
specialty, fire department connection and hose valve specified, for inclusion in operating and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Requirements".
F. Welder's Qualification Certificate.
G. Test Reports and Certificates, including "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for
Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Materials and Test Certificate for Underground
Piping" as described in NFPA-13.
H. Hydraulic calculations and drawings created by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer
shall have the signed stamp of a professional engineer registered in the State of Colorado and
familiar with this type of installation and with previous similar experience or the signature
with certification number of a Level 4 Senior Engineering Technician of the National Institute
for Certification of Engineering Technology (practicing in the Fire Protection field) certifying
that the Fire Sprinkler System has been hydraulically calculated in compliance with NFPA
and governing codes.
L Fire sprinkler piping design drawings shall show, and be coordinated with, all ductwork, air
devices, lighting, electrical panels and structural elements of the Building.
1.6 HYDRAULIC DESIGN
A. The Fire Sprinkler System shall be hydraulically calculated by the Contractor.
B. The Fire Sprinkler System for the building shall be hydraulically calculated to comply with
NFPA-13:
C. The final fire protection system demand shall be a minimum of 10 PSI below the water supply
curve.
D. Velocities in pipes shall be shown on hydraulic calculations. Velocities in overhead piping
shall not exceed 32-feet per second. Velocities in underground piping shall not exceed
16-feet per second.
E. Allow 10-feet of loss for electric water flow switches and note on hydraulic calculations.
F. The Fire Protection Contractor shall provide as many sets of hydraulic calculations as
necessary, performed and submitted to prove that the most remote and demanding areas are
calculated.
15300 - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
G. Design information shall be permanently affixed to the main riser as described in NFPA
Pamphlet 13.
H. Water Flow Data shall be determined by the Contractor prior to submitting their bid.
I. Before hydraulically calculating fire sprinkler system, the Fire Protection Contractor shall
verify exact water flow data with Local Water and/or Fire Department. A copy of the water
flow test data from the Local Water and/or Fire Department shall accompany the hydraulic
calculations.
J. The pipe and valve sizes indicated on the drawings and details are minimum sizes to be used
regardless of sizes allowed by hydraulic calculations.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installation and alterations of fire protection piping, equipment,
specialties, and accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by
qualified installer. The term "qualified" means experienced in such work (experienced shall
mean having a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this project),
familiar with all precautions required, and has complied with all the requirements of the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. The Contractor shall be licensed for the design and
installation for the specific type of system in the jurisdiction where the work is to be
performed and the State of Colorado. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to
the Engineer. Refer to Division 1 Section: "Defmitions and Standards" for definitions for
"Installers".
B. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of AW S
D10.9, "Specifications of Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and
Tubing, Level AR-3".
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes:
1. NFPA-13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler System.
2. NFPA-13R - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in residential
occupancies up to four (4) stories.
3. NFPA-14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
4. NFPA-24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their applications.
5. NFPA-1961 - Standard for Fire Hose.
6. NFPA-1963 - Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections.
7. UL Compliance: Fire protection system materials and components shall be
Underwriter's Laboratories listed and labeled for the application anticipated.
8. National Electrical Code (NEC).
15300 - 4
TECHMCAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule rough -in installations with installations of other building components.
B. Minimum time frame for notice of inspections, tests and meetings is five (5) days and list the
persons to be notified.
1.9 EXTRA STOCK
A. Heads: For each style and temperature range (and length for dry heads) required, furnish
additional sprinkler heads per NFPA-13.
Obtain receipt from Owner that extra stock has been received.
B. Wrenches: Furnish two (2) spanner wrenches for each type and size of valve connection and
fire hose coupling.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types,
pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated,
provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of
materials which match pipe materials used in fire protection systems.
B. All equipment used on this project shall be new and UL Listed, unless noted or specified
otherwise.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system
products from one of the following:
Gate Valves:
& Nibco
b. Kennedy Valve, Division of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc.
C. Mueller
d. Stockham
e. Grinnell
f. Milwaukee
2. Swing Check Valves:
a.
Central
b.
Mueller
C.
Kennedy Valve, Division of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc.
d.
Star Sprinkler Corp.
e.
Viking
f
Victaulic
g.
Globe
15300 - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSITY
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSIT CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
3. Butterfly and Ball Valves:
a. Grinnell
b. Mueller
C. Victaulic
d. Milwaukee
4. Grooved Mechanical Couplings:
a. Gruvlok
b. Victaulic Company of America
5. Double Check Valve Assembly (Ductile Iron):
a. Febco Model 830 (Gear Operated Butterfly Valves Only)
b. Febco Model 850 (OS&Y Gate Valves Only)
C. Watts Model 709 (OS&Y Gate Valves Only)
d. Conbraco Model DC (OS&Y Gate Valves Only)
e. Wilkins Model 350 (OS&Y Gate Valves Only)
6. Double Check Valve Assembly (Stainless Steel):
a. Ames Colt Series C200 (OS&Y Gate Valves or Gear Operated Butterfly
Valves.)
b. Ames Series 2000SS (OS&Y Gate Valves Only)
C. Watts Model 774 (OS&Y Gate Valves Only)
7. Fire Protection Specialty Valves:
a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
b. Star Sprinkler Corporation
C. Viking Corporation
d. Central Grinnell/Gem
e. Globe
8. Fire Department Connection:
a.
Croker
b.
Potter -Roemer
C.
Elkhart
d.
Grinnell/Gem
9. Sprinkler
Heads:
a.
Automatic Sprinkler Corp. of America.
b.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
C.
ITT Grinnell
d.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
e.
Star Sprinkler Corp.
f.
Viking Corp.
g.
Globe
10. Fire Protection Specialties:
a. Croker-Standard Division; Fire -End & Croker Corp.
b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
C. Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co., Inc.
d. Grunau Sprinkler Mfgr. Co., Inc.
15300 - 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS & COLORADO STATE UNIVERSM
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TRANSrr CENTER
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION COOVER-CLARK & ASSOCIATES, P.C.
e. Potter Roemer, Inc.
11. Inspector's Test and Drain Module:
a. Victaulic
b. A.G.F.
C. Grinnell/Gem
12. Flexible Stainless Steel Hose Branch Line:
a. Flex Head Industries, Series 2000
b. Or Equal
2.3 BASIC IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Provide identification complying with Division 15 Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods section "Mechanical Identification", in accordance with the following listing:
1. Fire Protection Piping: Pipe markers.
2. Fire Protection Valves: Valve tags.
3. Fire Protection Signs: Provide the following signs:
a. At each sprinkler valve, sign indicating what portion of system valve
controls.
b. At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device
is activated.
C. At door to each sprinkler control valves, sign reading "FIRE CONTROL".
d. At each drain or test, sign indicating its purpose.
B. Attach to the riser a metal sign indicating the name, address and telephone number of the Fire
Protection Contractor. Also indicate the date of installation.
2.4 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. General: Provide piping specialties complying with Division 15 Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods section "Piping Specialties", in accordance with the following listing:
1. Pipe Escutcheons
2. Dielectric Unions
3. Drip Pans
4. Pipe Sleeves
5. Sleeve Seals
6. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals
2.5 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 15 Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods section "Supports and Anchors" in accordance with the following
listing:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, adjustable steel band hangers, or adjustable band
hangers, for horizontal -piping hangers and supports.
2. Two -bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports.
3. Steel tumbuckles and malleable iron sockets for hanger -rod attachments.
15300 - 7